CN117940887A - Method and interface for initiating communication - Google Patents

Method and interface for initiating communication Download PDF

Info

Publication number
CN117940887A
CN117940887A CN202280059109.5A CN202280059109A CN117940887A CN 117940887 A CN117940887 A CN 117940887A CN 202280059109 A CN202280059109 A CN 202280059109A CN 117940887 A CN117940887 A CN 117940887A
Authority
CN
China
Prior art keywords
communication
computer system
communication network
detecting
displaying
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Pending
Application number
CN202280059109.5A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
P·F·卡罗
G·M·阿波达卡
K·M·卡纳万
K·库恩
F·德容
R·R·德林格
W·B·伊斯利三世
C·M·费德里吉
T·E·福格蒂
T·琼斯
C·G·卡鲁纳姆尼
V·克拉玛尔
S·G·莫瓦
C·G·斯塔克
M·万欧斯
A·施略普尼科夫
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Apple Inc
Original Assignee
Apple Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from US17/898,342 external-priority patent/US12425511B2/en
Application filed by Apple Inc filed Critical Apple Inc
Priority to CN202410506853.6A priority Critical patent/CN118509519A/en
Publication of CN117940887A publication Critical patent/CN117940887A/en
Pending legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04M—TELEPHONIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04M1/00—Substation equipment, e.g. for use by subscribers
    • H04M1/72—Mobile telephones; Cordless telephones, i.e. devices for establishing wireless links to base stations without route selection
    • H04M1/724—User interfaces specially adapted for cordless or mobile telephones
    • H04M1/72403—User interfaces specially adapted for cordless or mobile telephones with means for local support of applications that increase the functionality
    • H04M1/72418—User interfaces specially adapted for cordless or mobile telephones with means for local support of applications that increase the functionality for supporting emergency services
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING OR CALCULATING; COUNTING
    • G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F1/00—Details not covered by groups G06F3/00 - G06F13/00 and G06F21/00
    • G06F1/26—Power supply means, e.g. regulation thereof
    • G06F1/32—Means for saving power
    • G06F1/3203—Power management, i.e. event-based initiation of a power-saving mode
    • G06F1/3206—Monitoring of events, devices or parameters that trigger a change in power modality
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING OR CALCULATING; COUNTING
    • G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F1/00—Details not covered by groups G06F3/00 - G06F13/00 and G06F21/00
    • G06F1/26—Power supply means, e.g. regulation thereof
    • G06F1/32—Means for saving power
    • G06F1/3203—Power management, i.e. event-based initiation of a power-saving mode
    • G06F1/3234—Power saving characterised by the action undertaken
    • G06F1/325—Power saving in peripheral device
    • G06F1/3265—Power saving in display device
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING OR CALCULATING; COUNTING
    • G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01—Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/016—Input arrangements with force or tactile feedback as computer generated output to the user
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING OR CALCULATING; COUNTING
    • G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01—Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/03—Arrangements for converting the position or the displacement of a member into a coded form
    • G06F3/033—Pointing devices displaced or positioned by the user, e.g. mice, trackballs, pens or joysticks; Accessories therefor
    • G06F3/0346—Pointing devices displaced or positioned by the user, e.g. mice, trackballs, pens or joysticks; Accessories therefor with detection of the device orientation or free movement in a 3D space, e.g. 3D mice, 6-DOF [six degrees of freedom] pointers using gyroscopes, accelerometers or tilt-sensors
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING OR CALCULATING; COUNTING
    • G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01—Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/048—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING OR CALCULATING; COUNTING
    • G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01—Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/048—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
    • G06F3/0481—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] based on specific properties of the displayed interaction object or a metaphor-based environment, e.g. interaction with desktop elements like windows or icons, or assisted by a cursor's changing behaviour or appearance
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING OR CALCULATING; COUNTING
    • G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01—Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/048—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
    • G06F3/0484—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] for the control of specific functions or operations, e.g. selecting or manipulating an object, an image or a displayed text element, setting a parameter value or selecting a range
    • G06F3/04842—Selection of displayed objects or displayed text elements
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING OR CALCULATING; COUNTING
    • G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01—Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/048—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
    • G06F3/0487—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser
    • G06F3/0488—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser using a touch-screen or digitiser, e.g. input of commands through traced gestures
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING OR CALCULATING; COUNTING
    • G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01—Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/048—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
    • G06F3/0487—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser
    • G06F3/0488—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser using a touch-screen or digitiser, e.g. input of commands through traced gestures
    • G06F3/04886—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser using a touch-screen or digitiser, e.g. input of commands through traced gestures by partitioning the display area of the touch-screen or the surface of the digitising tablet into independently controllable areas, e.g. virtual keyboards or menus
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING OR CALCULATING; COUNTING
    • G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01—Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/048—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
    • G06F3/0487—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser
    • G06F3/0489—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser using dedicated keyboard keys or combinations thereof
    • G06F3/04892—Arrangements for controlling cursor position based on codes indicative of cursor displacements from one discrete location to another, e.g. using cursor control keys associated to different directions or using the tab key
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING OR CALCULATING; COUNTING
    • G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/14—Digital output to display device ; Cooperation and interconnection of the display device with other functional units
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04B—TRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/14—Relay systems
    • H04B7/15—Active relay systems
    • H04B7/185—Space-based or airborne stations; Stations for satellite systems
    • H04B7/1851—Systems using a satellite or space-based relay
    • H04B7/18517—Transmission equipment in earth stations
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04M—TELEPHONIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04M1/00—Substation equipment, e.g. for use by subscribers
    • H04M1/72—Mobile telephones; Cordless telephones, i.e. devices for establishing wireless links to base stations without route selection
    • H04M1/724—User interfaces specially adapted for cordless or mobile telephones
    • H04M1/72403—User interfaces specially adapted for cordless or mobile telephones with means for local support of applications that increase the functionality
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04M—TELEPHONIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04M1/00—Substation equipment, e.g. for use by subscribers
    • H04M1/72—Mobile telephones; Cordless telephones, i.e. devices for establishing wireless links to base stations without route selection
    • H04M1/724—User interfaces specially adapted for cordless or mobile telephones
    • H04M1/72403—User interfaces specially adapted for cordless or mobile telephones with means for local support of applications that increase the functionality
    • H04M1/7243—User interfaces specially adapted for cordless or mobile telephones with means for local support of applications that increase the functionality with interactive means for internal management of messages
    • H04M1/72436—User interfaces specially adapted for cordless or mobile telephones with means for local support of applications that increase the functionality with interactive means for internal management of messages for text messaging, e.g. short messaging services [SMS] or e-mails
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04M—TELEPHONIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04M1/00—Substation equipment, e.g. for use by subscribers
    • H04M1/72—Mobile telephones; Cordless telephones, i.e. devices for establishing wireless links to base stations without route selection
    • H04M1/724—User interfaces specially adapted for cordless or mobile telephones
    • H04M1/72469—User interfaces specially adapted for cordless or mobile telephones for operating the device by selecting functions from two or more displayed items, e.g. menus or icons
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W52/00—Power management, e.g. Transmission Power Control [TPC] or power classes
    • H04W52/02—Power saving arrangements
    • H04W52/0209—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices
    • H04W52/0261—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices managing power supply demand, e.g. depending on battery level
    • H04W52/0267—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices managing power supply demand, e.g. depending on battery level by controlling user interface components
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W84/00—Network topologies
    • H04W84/02—Hierarchically pre-organised networks, e.g. paging networks, cellular networks, WLAN [Wireless Local Area Network] or WLL [Wireless Local Loop]
    • H04W84/04—Large scale networks; Deep hierarchical networks
    • H04W84/06—Airborne or Satellite Networks
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04M—TELEPHONIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04M2250/00—Details of telephonic subscriber devices
    • H04M2250/22—Details of telephonic subscriber devices including a touch pad, a touch sensor or a touch detector

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Human Computer Interaction (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Astronomy & Astrophysics (AREA)
  • Business, Economics & Management (AREA)
  • Aviation & Aerospace Engineering (AREA)
  • General Business, Economics & Management (AREA)
  • Emergency Management (AREA)
  • Communication Control (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

The present disclosure relates generally to methods and user interfaces for establishing communications.

Description

Method and interface for initiating communication
Cross Reference to Related Applications
The present application claims priority from U.S. provisional application 63/239,403 entitled "METHODS AND INTERFACES FOR INITIATING COMMUNICATIONS" filed on day 8 and 31 of 2021, U.S. provisional application 63/243,681 entitled "METHODS AND INTERFACES FOR INITIATING COMMUNICATIONS" filed on day 9 and 13 of 2021, U.S. provisional application 63/334,604 entitled "METHODS AND INTERFACES FOR INITIATING COMMUNICATIONS" filed on day 4 and 25 of 2022, U.S. provisional application 63/400,732 entitled "METHODS AND INTERFACES FOR INITIATING COMMUNICATIONS" filed on day 8 and 24 of 2022, and U.S. application 17/898,342 entitled "METHODS AND INTERFACES FOR INITIATING COMMUNICATIONS" filed on day 8 and 29 of 2022, the entire contents of each of which are incorporated herein by reference.
Technical Field
The present disclosure relates generally to computer user interfaces, and more particularly to techniques for managing communication user interfaces.
Background
The electronic computer system provides means for communicating, such as via short messages and email.
Disclosure of Invention
However, some techniques for managing a communication user interface using an electronic device are often cumbersome and inefficient. For example, some prior art techniques use complex and time consuming user interfaces that may include multiple key presses or keystrokes. The prior art requires more time than is necessary, which results in wasted user time and device energy. This latter consideration is particularly important in battery-powered devices.
Thus, the present technology provides faster, more efficient methods and interfaces for managing communication user interfaces for electronic devices. Such methods and interfaces optionally supplement or replace other methods for managing communication user interfaces. Such methods and interfaces reduce the cognitive burden on the user and result in a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-powered computing devices, such methods and interfaces conserve power and increase the time interval between battery charges.
According to some embodiments, a method performed at a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices is described. The method comprises the following steps: detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to a request to initiate communication via the computer system; and in response to detecting the user input, displaying, via the display generating component, a first user interface comprising: in accordance with a determination that the computer system is not reachable to the terrestrial wireless communication network, displaying a respective selectable communication option that, when selected via the one or more input devices, initiates a process for communicating via the non-terrestrial wireless communication network; and in accordance with a determination that the computer system is reachable to the respective terrestrial wireless communication network, initiating a process for communicating via the respective terrestrial wireless communication network without displaying the respective selectable communication option.
According to some embodiments, a non-transitory computer readable storage medium is described. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with the display generation component and the one or more input devices, the one or more programs comprising instructions for: detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to a request to initiate communication via the computer system; and in response to detecting the user input, displaying, via the display generating component, a first user interface comprising: in accordance with a determination that the computer system is not reachable to the terrestrial wireless communication network, displaying a respective selectable communication option that, when selected via the one or more input devices, initiates a process for communicating via the non-terrestrial wireless communication network; and in accordance with a determination that the computer system is reachable to the respective terrestrial wireless communication network, initiating a process for communicating via the respective terrestrial wireless communication network without displaying the respective selectable communication option.
According to some embodiments, a transitory computer readable storage medium is described. The transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs comprising instructions for: detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to a request to initiate communication via the computer system; and in response to detecting the user input, displaying, via the display generating component, a first user interface comprising: in accordance with a determination that the computer system is not reachable to the terrestrial wireless communication network, displaying a respective selectable communication option that, when selected via the one or more input devices, initiates a process for communicating via the non-terrestrial wireless communication network; and in accordance with a determination that the computer system is reachable to the respective terrestrial wireless communication network, initiating a process for communicating via the respective terrestrial wireless communication network without displaying the respective selectable communication option.
According to some embodiments, a computer system is described. The computer system includes: one or more processors; and a memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to a request to initiate communication via the computer system; and in response to detecting the user input, displaying, via the display generating component, a first user interface comprising: in accordance with a determination that the computer system is not reachable to the terrestrial wireless communication network, displaying a respective selectable communication option that, when selected via the one or more input devices, initiates a process for communicating via the non-terrestrial wireless communication network; and in accordance with a determination that the computer system is reachable to the respective terrestrial wireless communication network, initiating a process for communicating via the respective terrestrial wireless communication network without displaying the respective selectable communication option.
According to some embodiments, a computer system is described. The computer system is configured to communicate with a display generation component and one or more input devices, comprising: apparatus for: detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to a request to initiate communication via the computer system; and means for: in response to detecting the user input, displaying a first user interface via the display generating component, comprising: in accordance with a determination that the computer system is not reachable to the terrestrial wireless communication network, displaying a respective selectable communication option that, when selected via the one or more input devices, initiates a process for communicating via the non-terrestrial wireless communication network; and in accordance with a determination that the computer system is reachable to the respective terrestrial wireless communication network, initiating a process for communicating via the respective terrestrial wireless communication network without displaying the respective selectable communication option.
According to some embodiments, a computer program product is described. The computer program product includes one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to a request to initiate communication via the computer system; and in response to detecting the user input, displaying, via the display generating component, a first user interface comprising: in accordance with a determination that the computer system is not reachable to the terrestrial wireless communication network, displaying a respective selectable communication option that, when selected via the one or more input devices, initiates a process for communicating via the non-terrestrial wireless communication network; and in accordance with a determination that the computer system is reachable to the respective terrestrial wireless communication network, initiating a process for communicating via the respective terrestrial wireless communication network without displaying the respective selectable communication option.
According to some embodiments, a method performed at a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices is described. The method comprises the following steps: when the computer system is in a low bandwidth communication mode: displaying, via the display generating component, a first set of selectable communication content options corresponding to respective content for communication, wherein the first set of selectable communication content options is specific to the low bandwidth communication mode; detecting, via the one or more input devices, a first set of one or more inputs corresponding to a selection of a first communication content option of the first set of selectable communication content options; after detecting the first set of one or more inputs, displaying, via the display generating component, a second set of selectable communication content options corresponding to respective content for the communication, wherein the second set of selectable communication content options is specific to the low bandwidth communication mode; detecting, via the one or more input devices, a second set of one or more inputs corresponding to selection of a second communication content option of the second set of selectable communication content options; detecting an input corresponding to a request to send a communication including content corresponding to a selection of a first communication content option and a second communication content option; and in response to receiving an input corresponding to a request to send the communication, sending the communication including content corresponding to a selection of the first communication content option and the second communication content option selected by the first set of one or more inputs and the second set of one or more inputs.
According to some embodiments, a non-transitory computer readable storage medium is described. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with the display generation component and the one or more input devices, the one or more programs comprising instructions for: when the computer system is in a low bandwidth communication mode: displaying, via the display generating component, a first set of selectable communication content options corresponding to respective content for communication, wherein the first set of selectable communication content options is specific to the low bandwidth communication mode; detecting, via the one or more input devices, a first set of one or more inputs corresponding to a selection of a first communication content option of the first set of selectable communication content options; after detecting the first set of one or more inputs, displaying, via the display generating component, a second set of selectable communication content options corresponding to respective content for the communication, wherein the second set of selectable communication content options is specific to the low bandwidth communication mode; detecting, via the one or more input devices, a second set of one or more inputs corresponding to selection of a second communication content option of the second set of selectable communication content options; detecting an input corresponding to a request to send a communication including content corresponding to a selection of a first communication content option and a second communication content option; and in response to receiving an input corresponding to a request to send the communication, sending the communication including content corresponding to a selection of the first communication content option and the second communication content option selected by the first set of one or more inputs and the second set of one or more inputs.
According to some embodiments, a transitory computer readable storage medium is described. The transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs comprising instructions for: when the computer system is in a low bandwidth communication mode: displaying, via the display generating component, a first set of selectable communication content options corresponding to respective content for communication, wherein the first set of selectable communication content options is specific to the low bandwidth communication mode; detecting, via the one or more input devices, a first set of one or more inputs corresponding to a selection of a first communication content option of the first set of selectable communication content options; after detecting the first set of one or more inputs, displaying, via the display generating component, a second set of selectable communication content options corresponding to respective content for the communication, wherein the second set of selectable communication content options is specific to the low bandwidth communication mode; detecting, via the one or more input devices, a second set of one or more inputs corresponding to selection of a second communication content option of the second set of selectable communication content options; detecting an input corresponding to a request to send a communication including content corresponding to a selection of a first communication content option and a second communication content option; and in response to receiving an input corresponding to a request to send the communication, sending the communication including content corresponding to a selection of the first communication content option and the second communication content option selected by the first set of one or more inputs and the second set of one or more inputs.
According to some embodiments, a computer system is described. The computer system is configured to communicate with a display generation component and one or more input devices, comprising: one or more processors; and a memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: when the computer system is in a low bandwidth communication mode: displaying, via the display generating component, a first set of selectable communication content options corresponding to respective content for communication, wherein the first set of selectable communication content options is specific to the low bandwidth communication mode; detecting, via the one or more input devices, a first set of one or more inputs corresponding to a selection of a first communication content option of the first set of selectable communication content options; after detecting the first set of one or more inputs, displaying, via the display generating component, a second set of selectable communication content options corresponding to respective content for the communication, wherein the second set of selectable communication content options is specific to the low bandwidth communication mode; detecting, via the one or more input devices, a second set of one or more inputs corresponding to selection of a second communication content option of the second set of selectable communication content options; detecting an input corresponding to a request to send a communication including content corresponding to a selection of a first communication content option and a second communication content option; and in response to receiving an input corresponding to a request to send the communication, sending the communication including content corresponding to a selection of the first communication content option and the second communication content option selected by the first set of one or more inputs and the second set of one or more inputs.
According to some embodiments, a computer system is described. The computer system is configured to communicate with a display generation component and one or more input devices, comprising: apparatus for: when the computer system is in a low bandwidth communication mode: displaying, via the display generating component, a first set of selectable communication content options corresponding to respective content for communication, wherein the first set of selectable communication content options is specific to the low bandwidth communication mode; detecting, via the one or more input devices, a first set of one or more inputs corresponding to a selection of a first communication content option of the first set of selectable communication content options; after detecting the first set of one or more inputs, displaying, via the display generating component, a second set of selectable communication content options corresponding to respective content for the communication, wherein the second set of selectable communication content options is specific to the low bandwidth communication mode; detecting, via the one or more input devices, a second set of one or more inputs corresponding to selection of a second communication content option of the second set of selectable communication content options; detecting an input corresponding to a request to send a communication including content corresponding to a selection of a first communication content option and a second communication content option; and means for: in response to receiving an input corresponding to a request to send the communication, a communication is sent that includes content corresponding to a selection of a first communication content option and a second communication content option selected by the first set of one or more inputs and the second set of one or more inputs.
According to some embodiments, a computer program product is described. The computer program product includes one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: when the computer system is in a low bandwidth communication mode: displaying, via the display generating component, a first set of selectable communication content options corresponding to respective content for communication, wherein the first set of selectable communication content options is specific to the low bandwidth communication mode; detecting, via the one or more input devices, a first set of one or more inputs corresponding to a selection of a first communication content option of the first set of selectable communication content options; after detecting the first set of one or more inputs, displaying, via the display generating component, a second set of selectable communication content options corresponding to respective content for the communication, wherein the second set of selectable communication content options is specific to the low bandwidth communication mode; detecting, via the one or more input devices, a second set of one or more inputs corresponding to selection of a second communication content option of the second set of selectable communication content options; detecting an input corresponding to a request to send a communication including content corresponding to a selection of a first communication content option and a second communication content option; and in response to receiving an input corresponding to a request to send the communication, sending the communication including content corresponding to a selection of the first communication content option and the second communication content option selected by the first set of one or more inputs and the second set of one or more inputs.
According to some embodiments, a method performed at a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices is described. The method comprises the following steps: detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to a request to communicate via satellite communications; and in response to detecting the user input: displaying the alignment element via the display generating component, comprising: in accordance with a determination that the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with one or more satellites, the alignment element is displayed in a first alignment appearance that indicates that the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites and that includes a graphical indication; and detecting a change in orientation of a predetermined portion of the computer system while the alignment element is displayed in a first alignment appearance; and changing an appearance of the alignment element in response to detecting a change in orientation of a predetermined portion of the computer system.
According to some embodiments, a non-transitory computer readable storage medium is described. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with the display generation component and the one or more input devices, the one or more programs comprising instructions for: detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to a request to communicate via satellite communications; and in response to detecting the user input: displaying the alignment element via the display generating component, comprising: in accordance with a determination that the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with one or more satellites, the alignment element is displayed in a first alignment appearance that indicates that the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites and that includes a graphical indication; and detecting a change in orientation of a predetermined portion of the computer system while the alignment element is displayed in a first alignment appearance; and changing an appearance of the alignment element in response to detecting a change in orientation of a predetermined portion of the computer system.
According to some embodiments, a transitory computer readable storage medium is described. The transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs comprising instructions for: detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to a request to communicate via satellite communications; and in response to detecting the user input: displaying the alignment element via the display generating component, comprising: in accordance with a determination that the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with one or more satellites, the alignment element is displayed in a first alignment appearance that indicates that the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites and that includes a graphical indication; and detecting a change in orientation of a predetermined portion of the computer system while the alignment element is displayed in a first alignment appearance; and changing an appearance of the alignment element in response to detecting a change in orientation of a predetermined portion of the computer system.
According to some embodiments, a computer system is described. The computer system is configured to communicate with a display generation component and one or more input devices, comprising: one or more processors; and a memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to a request to communicate via satellite communications; and in response to detecting the user input: displaying the alignment element via the display generating component, comprising: in accordance with a determination that the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with one or more satellites, the alignment element is displayed in a first alignment appearance that indicates that the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites and that includes a graphical indication; and detecting a change in orientation of a predetermined portion of the computer system while the alignment element is displayed in a first alignment appearance; and changing an appearance of the alignment element in response to detecting a change in orientation of a predetermined portion of the computer system.
According to some embodiments, a computer system is described. The computer system is configured to communicate with a display generation component and one or more input devices, comprising: apparatus for: detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to a request to communicate via satellite communications; and means for: in response to detecting the user input: displaying the alignment element via the display generating component, comprising: in accordance with a determination that the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with one or more satellites, the alignment element is displayed in a first alignment appearance that indicates that the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites and that includes a graphical indication; and detecting a change in orientation of a predetermined portion of the computer system while the alignment element is displayed in a first alignment appearance; and changing an appearance of the alignment element in response to detecting a change in orientation of a predetermined portion of the computer system.
According to some embodiments, a computer program product is described. The computer program product includes one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to a request to communicate via satellite communications; and in response to detecting the user input: displaying the alignment element via the display generating component, comprising: in accordance with a determination that the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with one or more satellites, the alignment element is displayed in a first alignment appearance that indicates that the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites and that includes a graphical indication; and detecting a change in orientation of a predetermined portion of the computer system while the alignment element is displayed in a first alignment appearance; and changing an appearance of the alignment element in response to detecting a change in orientation of a predetermined portion of the computer system.
According to some embodiments, a method performed at a computer system in communication with one or more input devices is described. The method comprises the following steps: when a communication with a first recipient is ready to be initiated, outputting a query as to whether a second recipient, different from the first recipient, is permitted to receive information corresponding to the communication without adding the second recipient as a participant in a conversation of the communication; after outputting the query as to whether the second recipient is permitted to receive the information corresponding to the communication, detecting a sequence of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to send a message to the first recipient; and in response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs: in accordance with a determination that the computer system detects one or more inputs corresponding to a request to allow a second recipient to receive information corresponding to a communication between the user and the first recipient, sending a message to the first recipient that includes the respective information, and enabling delivery of the message including at least a portion of the respective information to the second recipient; and in accordance with a determination that the computer system does not detect one or more inputs corresponding to a request to allow the second recipient to receive information corresponding to a communication between the user and the first recipient, sending a message including the respective information to the first recipient without enabling delivery of the message including at least a portion of the respective information to the second recipient.
According to some embodiments, a non-transitory computer readable storage medium is described. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with one or more input devices, the one or more programs comprising instructions for: when a communication with a first recipient is ready to be initiated, outputting a query as to whether a second recipient, different from the first recipient, is permitted to receive information corresponding to the communication without adding the second recipient as a participant in a conversation of the communication; after outputting the query as to whether the second recipient is permitted to receive the information corresponding to the communication, detecting a sequence of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to send a message to the first recipient; and in response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs: in accordance with a determination that the computer system detects one or more inputs corresponding to a request to allow a second recipient to receive information corresponding to a communication between the user and the first recipient, sending a message to the first recipient that includes the respective information, and enabling delivery of the message including at least a portion of the respective information to the second recipient; and in accordance with a determination that the computer system does not detect one or more inputs corresponding to a request to allow the second recipient to receive information corresponding to a communication between the user and the first recipient, sending a message including the respective information to the first recipient without enabling delivery of the message including at least a portion of the respective information to the second recipient.
According to some embodiments, a transitory computer readable storage medium is described. The transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with one or more input devices, the one or more programs comprising instructions for: when a communication with a first recipient is ready to be initiated, outputting a query as to whether a second recipient, different from the first recipient, is permitted to receive information corresponding to the communication without adding the second recipient as a participant in a conversation of the communication; after outputting the query as to whether the second recipient is permitted to receive the information corresponding to the communication, detecting a sequence of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to send a message to the first recipient; and in response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs: in accordance with a determination that the computer system detects one or more inputs corresponding to a request to allow a second recipient to receive information corresponding to a communication between the user and the first recipient, sending a message to the first recipient that includes the respective information, and enabling delivery of the message including at least a portion of the respective information to the second recipient; and in accordance with a determination that the computer system does not detect one or more inputs corresponding to a request to allow the second recipient to receive information corresponding to a communication between the user and the first recipient, sending a message including the respective information to the first recipient without enabling delivery of the message including at least a portion of the respective information to the second recipient.
According to some embodiments, a computer system is described. The computer system is configured to communicate with one or more input devices, comprising: one or more processors; and a memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: when a communication with a first recipient is ready to be initiated, outputting a query as to whether a second recipient, different from the first recipient, is permitted to receive information corresponding to the communication without adding the second recipient as a participant in a conversation of the communication; after outputting the query as to whether the second recipient is permitted to receive the information corresponding to the communication, detecting a sequence of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to send a message to the first recipient; and in response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs: in accordance with a determination that the computer system detects one or more inputs corresponding to a request to allow a second recipient to receive information corresponding to a communication between the user and the first recipient, sending a message to the first recipient that includes the respective information, and enabling delivery of the message including at least a portion of the respective information to the second recipient; and in accordance with a determination that the computer system does not detect one or more inputs corresponding to a request to allow the second recipient to receive information corresponding to a communication between the user and the first recipient, sending a message including the respective information to the first recipient without enabling delivery of the message including at least a portion of the respective information to the second recipient.
According to some embodiments, a computer system is described. The computer system is configured to communicate with one or more input devices, comprising: apparatus for: when a communication with a first recipient is ready to be initiated, outputting a query as to whether a second recipient, different from the first recipient, is permitted to receive information corresponding to the communication without adding the second recipient as a participant in a conversation of the communication; apparatus for: after outputting the query as to whether the second recipient is permitted to receive the information corresponding to the communication, detecting a sequence of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to send a message to the first recipient; and means for: in response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs: in accordance with a determination that the computer system detects one or more inputs corresponding to a request to allow a second recipient to receive information corresponding to a communication between the user and the first recipient, sending a message to the first recipient that includes the respective information, and enabling delivery of the message including at least a portion of the respective information to the second recipient; and in accordance with a determination that the computer system does not detect one or more inputs corresponding to a request to allow the second recipient to receive information corresponding to a communication between the user and the first recipient, sending a message including the respective information to the first recipient without enabling delivery of the message including at least a portion of the respective information to the second recipient.
According to some embodiments, a computer program product is described. The computer program product includes one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: when a communication with a first recipient is ready to be initiated, outputting a query as to whether a second recipient, different from the first recipient, is permitted to receive information corresponding to the communication without adding the second recipient as a participant in a conversation of the communication; after outputting the query as to whether the second recipient is permitted to receive the information corresponding to the communication, detecting a sequence of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to send a message to the first recipient; and in response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs: in accordance with a determination that the computer system detects one or more inputs corresponding to a request to allow a second recipient to receive information corresponding to a communication between the user and the first recipient, sending a message to the first recipient that includes the respective information, and enabling delivery of the message including at least a portion of the respective information to the second recipient; and in accordance with a determination that the computer system does not detect one or more inputs corresponding to a request to allow the second recipient to receive information corresponding to a communication between the user and the first recipient, sending a message including the respective information to the first recipient without enabling delivery of the message including at least a portion of the respective information to the second recipient.
According to some embodiments, a method is described. The method comprises the following steps: at a computer system: when the computer system is in communication with the first communication network: determining that the respective criteria have been met; and in response to determining that the respective criteria have been met, automatically transmitting, without user input, updated location information indicative of an updated location of the computer system, wherein the updated location information is accessible to devices other than the computer system; detecting that the first communication network is unavailable after automatically transmitting the updated location information one or more times when the respective criteria are met; and when the first communication network is not available, the computer system is capable of updating the location information via the second communication network and has met the corresponding criteria, discarding the automatic transmission of the updated location information.
According to some embodiments, a non-transitory computer readable storage medium is described that stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system. The one or more programs include instructions for: when the computer system is in communication with the first communication network: determining that the respective criteria have been met; and in response to determining that the respective criteria have been met, automatically transmitting, without user input, updated location information indicative of an updated location of the computer system, wherein the updated location information is accessible to devices other than the computer system; detecting that the first communication network is unavailable after automatically transmitting the updated location information one or more times when the respective criteria are met; and when the first communication network is not available, the computer system is capable of updating the location information via the second communication network and has met the corresponding criteria, discarding the automatic transmission of the updated location information.
According to some embodiments, a transitory computer readable storage medium is described that stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system. The one or more programs include instructions for: when the computer system is in communication with the first communication network: determining that the respective criteria have been met; and in response to determining that the respective criteria have been met, automatically transmitting, without user input, updated location information indicative of an updated location of the computer system, wherein the updated location information is accessible to devices other than the computer system; detecting that the first communication network is unavailable after automatically transmitting the updated location information one or more times when the respective criteria are met; and when the first communication network is not available, the computer system is capable of updating the location information via the second communication network and has met the corresponding criteria, discarding the automatic transmission of the updated location information.
According to some embodiments, a computer system is described. The computer system includes: one or more processors; and a memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: when the computer system is in communication with the first communication network: determining that the respective criteria have been met; and in response to determining that the respective criteria have been met, automatically transmitting, without user input, updated location information indicative of an updated location of the computer system, wherein the updated location information is accessible to devices other than the computer system; detecting that the first communication network is unavailable after automatically transmitting the updated location information one or more times when the respective criteria are met; and when the first communication network is not available, the computer system is capable of updating the location information via the second communication network and has met the corresponding criteria, discarding the automatic transmission of the updated location information.
According to some embodiments, a computer system is described. The computer system includes: apparatus for: determining that the respective criteria have been met when the computer system communicates with the first communication network; and in response to determining that the respective criteria have been met, automatically transmitting, without user input, updated location information indicative of an updated location of the computer system, wherein the updated location information is accessible to devices other than the computer system; apparatus for: detecting that the first communication network is unavailable after automatically transmitting the updated location information one or more times when the respective criteria are met; and means for: when the first communication network is not available, the computer system is able to update the location information via the second communication network and the corresponding criterion has been met, giving up automatically sending the updated location information.
According to some embodiments, a computer program product is described that includes one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system. The one or more programs include instructions for: when the computer system is in communication with the first communication network: determining that the respective criteria have been met; and in response to determining that the respective criteria have been met, automatically transmitting, without user input, updated location information indicative of an updated location of the computer system, wherein the updated location information is accessible to devices other than the computer system; detecting that the first communication network is unavailable after automatically transmitting the updated location information one or more times when the respective criteria are met; and when the first communication network is not available, the computer system is capable of updating the location information via the second communication network and has met the corresponding criteria, discarding the automatic transmission of the updated location information.
According to some embodiments, a method is described. The method comprises the following steps: at a computer system in communication with an output generation component, one or more input devices, and an external computer system: receiving, via the one or more input devices, a request to initiate a communication; and in response to receiving the request to initiate communication: in accordance with a determination that the external computer system is connected to a terrestrial wireless communication network, initiating a process for communicating via the terrestrial wireless communication network; and in accordance with a determination that the external computer system is not connected to the terrestrial wireless communication network, providing, via the output generating component, a prompt to use the external computer system to connect to a non-terrestrial network.
According to some embodiments, a non-transitory computer readable storage medium is described that stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with an output generation component, one or more input devices, and an external computer system. The one or more programs include instructions for: receiving, via the one or more input devices, a request to initiate a communication; and in response to receiving the request to initiate communication: in accordance with a determination that the external computer system is connected to a terrestrial wireless communication network, initiating a process for communicating via the terrestrial wireless communication network; and in accordance with a determination that the external computer system is not connected to the terrestrial wireless communication network, providing, via the output generating component, a prompt to use the external computer system to connect to a non-terrestrial network.
According to some embodiments, a transitory computer readable storage medium is described that stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with an output generation component, one or more input devices, and an external computer system. The one or more programs include instructions for: receiving, via the one or more input devices, a request to initiate a communication; and in response to receiving the request to initiate communication: in accordance with a determination that the external computer system is connected to a terrestrial wireless communication network, initiating a process for communicating via the terrestrial wireless communication network; and in accordance with a determination that the external computer system is not connected to the terrestrial wireless communication network, providing, via the output generating component, a prompt to use the external computer system to connect to a non-terrestrial network.
According to some embodiments, a computer system configured to communicate with an output generation component, one or more input devices, and an external computer system is described. The computer system includes: one or more processors; and a memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: receiving, via the one or more input devices, a request to initiate a communication; and in response to receiving the request to initiate communication: in accordance with a determination that the external computer system is connected to a terrestrial wireless communication network, initiating a process for communicating via the terrestrial wireless communication network; and in accordance with a determination that the external computer system is not connected to the terrestrial wireless communication network, providing, via the output generating component, a prompt to use the external computer system to connect to a non-terrestrial network.
According to some embodiments, a computer system configured to communicate with an output generation component, one or more input devices, and an external computer system is described. The computer system includes: means for receiving a request to initiate a communication via the one or more input devices; and means for: in response to receiving a request to initiate a communication: in accordance with a determination that the external computer system is connected to a terrestrial wireless communication network, initiating a process for communicating via the terrestrial wireless communication network; and in accordance with a determination that the external computer system is not connected to the terrestrial wireless communication network, providing, via the output generating component, a prompt to use the external computer system to connect to a non-terrestrial network.
According to some embodiments, a computer program product is described that stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with an output generation component, one or more input devices, and an external computer system. The one or more programs include instructions for: receiving, via the one or more input devices, a request to initiate a communication; and in response to receiving the request to initiate communication: in accordance with a determination that the external computer system is connected to a terrestrial wireless communication network, initiating a process for communicating via the terrestrial wireless communication network; and in accordance with a determination that the external computer system is not connected to the terrestrial wireless communication network, providing, via the output generating component, a prompt to use the external computer system to connect to a non-terrestrial network.
According to some embodiments, a method is described. The method comprises the following steps: at a computer system in communication with an output generation component and one or more input devices: detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs including a selection of a respective number for text-based communications; and in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs including a selection of a corresponding number for text-based communication: in accordance with a determination that a set of alternative communication criteria is satisfied, wherein the set of alternative communication criteria includes a first criterion that is satisfied when the respective number is a number of the respective type and a second criterion that is satisfied when the respective communication network is unavailable: a prompt is output via the output generating component, the prompt including an indication that communication with the respective number may be performed via an alternative communication network different from the respective communication network.
According to some embodiments, a non-transitory computer readable storage medium is described. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with an output generation component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs comprising instructions for: detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs including a selection of a respective number for text-based communications; and in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs including a selection of a corresponding number for text-based communication: in accordance with a determination that a set of alternative communication criteria is satisfied, wherein the set of alternative communication criteria includes a first criterion that is satisfied when the respective number is a number of the respective type and a second criterion that is satisfied when the respective communication network is unavailable: a prompt is output via the output generating component, the prompt including an indication that communication with the respective number may be performed via an alternative communication network different from the respective communication network.
According to some embodiments, a transitory computer readable storage medium is described. The transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with an output generation component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs comprising instructions for: detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs including a selection of a respective number for text-based communications; and in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs including a selection of a corresponding number for text-based communication: in accordance with a determination that a set of alternative communication criteria is satisfied, wherein the set of alternative communication criteria includes a first criterion that is satisfied when the respective number is a number of the respective type and a second criterion that is satisfied when the respective communication network is unavailable: a prompt is output via the output generating component, the prompt including an indication that communication with the respective number may be performed via an alternative communication network different from the respective communication network.
According to some embodiments, a computer system configured to communicate with an output generation component and one or more input devices is described. The computer system includes: one or more processors; and a memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs including a selection of a respective number for text-based communications; and in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs including a selection of a corresponding number for text-based communication: in accordance with a determination that a set of alternative communication criteria is satisfied, wherein the set of alternative communication criteria includes a first criterion that is satisfied when the respective number is a number of the respective type and a second criterion that is satisfied when the respective communication network is unavailable: a prompt is output via the output generating component, the prompt including an indication that communication with the respective number may be performed via an alternative communication network different from the respective communication network.
According to some embodiments, a computer system configured to communicate with an output generation component and one or more input devices is described. The computer system includes: apparatus for: detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs including a selection of a respective number for text-based communications; and means for: in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs including selection of a corresponding number for text-based communication: in accordance with a determination that a set of alternative communication criteria is satisfied, wherein the set of alternative communication criteria includes a first criterion that is satisfied when the respective number is a number of the respective type and a second criterion that is satisfied when the respective communication network is unavailable: a prompt is output via the output generating component, the prompt including an indication that communication with the respective number may be performed via an alternative communication network different from the respective communication network.
According to some embodiments, a computer program product is described. The computer program product includes one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with an output generation component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs including a selection of a respective number for text-based communications; and in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs including a selection of a corresponding number for text-based communication: in accordance with a determination that a set of alternative communication criteria is satisfied, wherein the set of alternative communication criteria includes a first criterion that is satisfied when the respective number is a number of the respective type and a second criterion that is satisfied when the respective communication network is unavailable: a prompt is output via the output generating component, the prompt including an indication that communication with the respective number may be performed via an alternative communication network different from the respective communication network.
According to some embodiments, a method is described. The method comprises the following steps: at a computer system in communication with the display generation component and the one or more input devices, wherein the computer system is configured to communicate via the alternative communication network when the respective communication network is not available: detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to activate an alternative communication network test mode when the capability of the computer system to communicate via the respective communication network is enabled; in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to activate an alternative communication network test mode, activating the alternative communication network test mode; and displaying a set of user interfaces via the display generating component when the alternative communication network test mode is activated.
According to some embodiments, a non-transitory computer readable storage medium is described. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with the display generation component and the one or more input devices, wherein the computer system is configured to communicate via the alternative communication network when the respective communication network is unavailable, the one or more programs comprising instructions for: detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to activate an alternative communication network test mode when the capability of the computer system to communicate via the respective communication network is enabled; in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to activate an alternative communication network test mode, activating the alternative communication network test mode; and displaying a set of user interfaces via the display generating component when the alternative communication network test mode is activated.
According to some embodiments, a transitory computer readable storage medium is described. The transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, wherein the computer system is configured to communicate via an alternative communication network when the respective communication network is unavailable, the one or more programs comprising instructions for: detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to activate an alternative communication network test mode when the capability of the computer system to communicate via the respective communication network is enabled; in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to activate an alternative communication network test mode, activating the alternative communication network test mode; and displaying a set of user interfaces via the display generating component when the alternative communication network test mode is activated.
According to some embodiments, a computer system configured to communicate with a display generating component and one or more input devices is described, wherein the computer system is configured to communicate via an alternative communication network when the respective communication network is not available. The computer system includes: one or more processors; and a memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to activate an alternative communication network test mode when the capability of the computer system to communicate via the respective communication network is enabled; in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to activate an alternative communication network test mode, activating the alternative communication network test mode; and displaying a set of user interfaces via the display generating component when the alternative communication network test mode is activated.
According to some embodiments, a computer system configured to communicate with a display generating component and one or more input devices is described, wherein the computer system is configured to communicate via an alternative communication network when the respective communication network is not available. The computer system includes: apparatus for: detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to activate an alternative communication network test mode when the capability of the computer system to communicate via the respective communication network is enabled; apparatus for: in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to activate an alternative communication network test mode, activating the alternative communication network test mode; and means for: when the alternative communication network test mode is activated, a set of user interfaces is displayed via the display generating component.
According to some embodiments, a computer program product is described. The computer program product includes one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, wherein the computer system is configured to communicate via an alternative communication network when the respective communication network is unavailable, the one or more programs comprising instructions for: detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to activate an alternative communication network test mode when the capability of the computer system to communicate via the respective communication network is enabled; in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to activate an alternative communication network test mode, activating the alternative communication network test mode; and displaying a set of user interfaces via the display generating component when the alternative communication network test mode is activated.
According to some embodiments, a method is described. The method comprises the following steps: at a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices: detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to initiate a process for sending a communication to a respective recipient; in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to initiate a process for sending communications to a respective recipient, initiate a process for sending communications to the respective recipient; during a process for sending the communication to a respective recipient, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to display a system user interface; and in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs corresponding to the request to display the system user interface, displaying, via the display generation component, the system user interface and the user interface object corresponding to the communication, comprising: in accordance with a determination that a process for transmitting the communication to a respective recipient is in a first state, displaying a user interface object corresponding to the communication in a first appearance; and in accordance with a determination that the process for sending the communication to the respective recipient is in a second state different from the first state, displaying a user interface object corresponding to the communication in a second appearance different from the first appearance.
According to some embodiments, a non-transitory computer readable storage medium is described. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with the display generation component and the one or more input devices, the one or more programs comprising instructions for: detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to initiate a process for sending a communication to a respective recipient; in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to initiate a process for sending communications to a respective recipient, initiate a process for sending communications to the respective recipient; during a process for sending the communication to a respective recipient, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to display a system user interface; and in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs corresponding to the request to display the system user interface, displaying, via the display generation component, the system user interface and the user interface object corresponding to the communication, comprising: in accordance with a determination that a process for transmitting the communication to a respective recipient is in a first state, displaying a user interface object corresponding to the communication in a first appearance; and in accordance with a determination that the process for sending the communication to the respective recipient is in a second state different from the first state, displaying a user interface object corresponding to the communication in a second appearance different from the first appearance.
According to some embodiments, a transitory computer readable storage medium is described. The transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs comprising instructions for: detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to initiate a process for sending a communication to a respective recipient; in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to initiate a process for sending communications to a respective recipient, initiate a process for sending communications to the respective recipient; during a process for sending the communication to a respective recipient, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to display a system user interface; and in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs corresponding to the request to display the system user interface, displaying, via the display generation component, the system user interface and the user interface object corresponding to the communication, comprising: in accordance with a determination that a process for transmitting the communication to a respective recipient is in a first state, displaying a user interface object corresponding to the communication in a first appearance; and in accordance with a determination that the process for sending the communication to the respective recipient is in a second state different from the first state, displaying a user interface object corresponding to the communication in a second appearance different from the first appearance.
According to some embodiments, a computer system configured to communicate with a display generation component and one or more input devices is described. The computer system includes: one or more processors; and a memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to initiate a process for sending a communication to a respective recipient; in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to initiate a process for sending communications to a respective recipient, initiate a process for sending communications to the respective recipient; during a process for sending the communication to a respective recipient, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to display a system user interface; and in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs corresponding to the request to display the system user interface, displaying, via the display generation component, the system user interface and the user interface object corresponding to the communication, comprising: in accordance with a determination that a process for transmitting the communication to a respective recipient is in a first state, displaying a user interface object corresponding to the communication in a first appearance; and in accordance with a determination that the process for sending the communication to the respective recipient is in a second state different from the first state, displaying a user interface object corresponding to the communication in a second appearance different from the first appearance.
According to some embodiments, a computer system configured to communicate with a display generation component and one or more input devices is described. The computer system includes: apparatus for: detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to initiate a process for sending a communication to a respective recipient; apparatus for: in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to initiate a process for sending communications to a respective recipient, initiate a process for sending communications to the respective recipient; apparatus for: during a process for sending the communication to a respective recipient, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to display a system user interface; and means for: in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs corresponding to the request to display the system user interface, displaying, via the display generation component, the system user interface and the user interface object corresponding to the communication, comprising: in accordance with a determination that a process for transmitting the communication to a respective recipient is in a first state, displaying a user interface object corresponding to the communication in a first appearance; and in accordance with a determination that the process for sending the communication to the respective recipient is in a second state different from the first state, displaying a user interface object corresponding to the communication in a second appearance different from the first appearance.
According to some embodiments, a computer program product is described. The computer program product includes one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to initiate a process for sending a communication to a respective recipient; in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to initiate a process for sending communications to a respective recipient, initiate a process for sending communications to the respective recipient; during a process for sending the communication to a respective recipient, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to display a system user interface; and in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs corresponding to the request to display the system user interface, displaying, via the display generation component, the system user interface and the user interface object corresponding to the communication, comprising: in accordance with a determination that a process for transmitting the communication to a respective recipient is in a first state, displaying a user interface object corresponding to the communication in a first appearance; and in accordance with a determination that the process for sending the communication to the respective recipient is in a second state different from the first state, displaying a user interface object corresponding to the communication in a second appearance different from the first appearance.
Executable instructions for performing these functions are optionally included in a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium or other computer program product configured for execution by one or more processors. Executable instructions for performing these functions are optionally included in a transitory computer-readable storage medium or other computer program product configured for execution by one or more processors.
Thus, faster, more efficient methods and interfaces for managing communication user interfaces are provided for devices, thereby improving the effectiveness, efficiency, and user satisfaction of such devices. Such methods and interfaces may supplement or replace other methods for managing communication user interfaces.
Drawings
For a better understanding of the various described embodiments, reference should be made to the following detailed description taken in conjunction with the following drawings, in which like reference numerals designate corresponding parts throughout the several views.
Fig. 1A is a block diagram illustrating a portable multifunction device with a touch-sensitive display in accordance with some embodiments.
FIG. 1B is a block diagram illustrating exemplary components for event processing according to some embodiments.
Fig. 2 illustrates a portable multifunction device with a touch screen in accordance with some embodiments.
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of an exemplary multifunction device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface in accordance with some embodiments.
Fig. 4A illustrates an exemplary user interface for a menu of applications on a portable multifunction device in accordance with some embodiments.
Fig. 4B illustrates an exemplary user interface for a multifunction device with a touch-sensitive surface separate from a display in accordance with some embodiments.
Fig. 5A illustrates a personal electronic device according to some embodiments.
Fig. 5B is a block diagram illustrating a personal electronic device, according to some embodiments.
Fig. 6A-6Y illustrate exemplary user interfaces for initiating communications when a terrestrial wireless communication network is not reachable and for communicating in a low bandwidth mode, according to some embodiments.
Fig. 7 is a flow chart illustrating a method for initiating communications when a terrestrial wireless communication network is not reachable, according to some embodiments.
Fig. 8 is a flow chart illustrating a method for initiating communications when a terrestrial wireless communication network is not reachable, according to some embodiments.
Fig. 9A-9U illustrate an exemplary user interface for aligning a computer system with one or more satellites, according to some embodiments.
Fig. 10 is a flow chart illustrating a method for aligning a computer system with one or more satellites, according to some embodiments.
Fig. 11A-11P illustrate exemplary user interfaces for managing message recipients according to some embodiments.
Fig. 12 is a flow chart illustrating a method for managing message recipients, according to some embodiments.
Fig. 13A-13 AA illustrate exemplary user interfaces for transmitting updated location information according to some embodiments.
Fig. 14 is a flow chart illustrating a method for transmitting updated location information, according to some embodiments.
Fig. 15A-15 AF illustrate an exemplary user interface for initiating communications according to some embodiments.
Fig. 16 is a flow chart illustrating a method for initiating communications according to some embodiments.
Fig. 17A-17R illustrate an exemplary user interface for initiating communications via an alternative communication network, according to some embodiments.
Fig. 18 is a flow chart illustrating a method for initiating communication via an alternative communication network, according to some embodiments.
Fig. 19A-19O illustrate an exemplary user interface for testing alternative communication networks, according to some embodiments.
Fig. 20 is a flow chart illustrating a method for testing an alternative communication network, according to some embodiments.
Fig. 21A-21L illustrate an exemplary user interface for providing user interface objects corresponding to a process, according to some embodiments.
FIG. 22 is a flow chart illustrating a method for providing a user interface object corresponding to a process, according to some embodiments.
Description of the embodiments
The following description sets forth exemplary methods, parameters, and the like. However, it should be recognized that such description is not intended as a limitation on the scope of the present disclosure, but is instead provided as a description of exemplary embodiments.
There is a need for an electronic device that provides an efficient method and interface for managing communications. For example, methods and user interfaces are needed for initiating communications, determining whether to use a terrestrial or non-terrestrial (e.g., satellite) communications network, and providing feedback to a user for alignment to a satellite for communications. For example, methods and user interfaces for transmitting updated location information are needed (e.g., when a terrestrial communication network is not available). Such techniques may reduce the cognitive burden on users that need to communicate or share updated location information under certain conditions (e.g., emergency conditions), thereby enhancing effectiveness by ensuring proper use of the device. Further, such techniques may reduce processor power and battery power that would otherwise be wasted on redundant user inputs.
Description of exemplary devices for performing techniques for managing communications is provided below in fig. 1A-1B, 2,3, 4A-4B, and 5A-5B. Fig. 6A-6Y illustrate exemplary user interfaces for initiating communications when a terrestrial wireless communication network is not reachable and communicating in a low bandwidth communication mode, according to some embodiments. Fig. 7 is a flow chart illustrating a method for initiating communication when a terrestrial wireless communication network is not reachable. Fig. 8 is a flow chart illustrating a method for communicating in a low bandwidth mode. The user interfaces in fig. 6A-6Y are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in fig. 7 and 8.
Fig. 9A-9U illustrate an exemplary user interface for aligning a computer system with one or more satellites, according to some embodiments. FIG. 10 is a flow chart illustrating a method for aligning a computer system with one or more satellites. The user interfaces in fig. 9A-9U are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the process in fig. 10.
Fig. 11A-11P illustrate exemplary user interfaces for managing message recipients according to some embodiments. Fig. 12 is a flow chart illustrating a method for managing message recipients. The user interfaces in fig. 11A to 11P are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the process in fig. 12.
Fig. 13A-13 AA illustrate exemplary user interfaces for transmitting updated location information according to some embodiments. Fig. 14 is a flowchart illustrating a method for transmitting updated location information. The user interfaces in fig. 13A-13 AA are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the process in fig. 14.
Fig. 15A-15 AF illustrate an exemplary user interface for initiating communications according to some embodiments. Fig. 16 is a flow chart illustrating a method for initiating a communication. The user interfaces in fig. 15A to 15AF are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the process in fig. 16.
Fig. 17A-17R illustrate an exemplary user interface for initiating communications via an alternative communication network, according to some embodiments. Fig. 18 is a flow chart illustrating a method for initiating communication via an alternative communication network. The user interfaces in fig. 17A to 17R are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the process in fig. 18.
Fig. 19A-19O illustrate an exemplary user interface for testing alternative communication networks, according to some embodiments. Fig. 20 is a flow chart illustrating a method for testing an alternative communication network. The user interfaces in fig. 19A to 19O are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the process in fig. 20.
Fig. 21A-21L illustrate an exemplary user interface for providing user interface objects corresponding to a process, according to some embodiments. FIG. 22 is a flow chart illustrating a method for providing a user interface object corresponding to a process. The user interfaces in fig. 21A to 21L are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the process in fig. 22.
The processes described below enhance operability of the device and make the user-device interface more efficient through various techniques (e.g., by helping a user provide appropriate input and reducing user error in operating/interacting with the device), including by providing improved visual feedback to the user, reducing the number of inputs required to perform the operation, providing additional control options without cluttering the user interface with additional display controls, performing the operation when a set of conditions has been met without further user input and/or additional techniques. These techniques also reduce power usage and extend battery life of the device by enabling a user to use the device faster and more efficiently. Reducing the number of inputs required to perform the operation and providing clear feedback to the user enables the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently, which is particularly important in emergency situations for several reasons. Using the device effectively conserves battery life, which is important in emergency situations because some emergency communication features use satellite communications, weChat communications may use a lot of energy (e.g., more energy than cellular communications), and because the opportunity to recharge the device in emergency situations may be limited (e.g., because the user is in a remote location where power is not available). Clearly indicating how to use the user interface of the device quickly and efficiently is particularly important in emergency situations, as the user may be stressed and more prone to make mistakes. In emergency situations, reducing errors by providing clear instructions and feedback saves time in communicating with emergency services, which may increase the likelihood that emergency assistance will be provided more quickly.
Furthermore, in a method described herein in which one or more steps are dependent on one or more conditions having been met, it should be understood that the method may be repeated in multiple iterations such that during the iteration, all conditions that determine steps in the method have been met in different iterations of the method. For example, if a method requires performing a first step (if a condition is met) and performing a second step (if a condition is not met), one of ordinary skill will know that the stated steps are repeated until both the condition and the condition are not met (not sequentially). Thus, a method described as having one or more steps depending on one or more conditions having been met may be rewritten as a method that repeats until each of the conditions described in the method have been met. However, this does not require the system or computer-readable medium to claim that the system or computer-readable medium contains instructions for performing the contingent operation based on the satisfaction of the corresponding condition or conditions, and thus is able to determine whether the contingent situation has been met without explicitly repeating the steps of the method until all conditions to decide on steps in the method have been met. It will also be appreciated by those of ordinary skill in the art that, similar to a method with optional steps, a system or computer readable storage medium may repeat the steps of the method as many times as necessary to ensure that all optional steps have been performed.
Although the following description uses the terms "first," "second," etc. to describe various elements, these elements should not be limited by the terms. In some embodiments, these terms are used to distinguish one element from another element. For example, a first touch may be named a second touch and similarly a second touch may be named a first touch without departing from the scope of the various described embodiments. In some embodiments, the first touch and the second touch are two separate references to the same touch. In some implementations, both the first touch and the second touch are touches, but they are not the same touch.
The terminology used in the description of the various illustrated embodiments herein is for the purpose of describing particular embodiments only and is not intended to be limiting. As used in the description of the various described embodiments and in the appended claims, the singular forms "a," "an," and "the" are intended to include the plural forms as well, unless the context clearly indicates otherwise. It will also be understood that the term "and/or" as used herein refers to and encompasses any and all possible combinations of one or more of the associated listed items. It will be further understood that the terms "comprises" and/or "comprising," when used in this specification, specify the presence of stated features, integers, steps, operations, elements, and/or components, but do not preclude the presence or addition of one or more other features, integers, steps, operations, elements, components, and/or groups thereof.
Depending on the context, the term "if" is optionally interpreted to mean "when..once..once.," in response to determining "or" in response to detecting ". Similarly, the phrase "if determined … …" or "if a [ stated condition or event ] is detected" is optionally interpreted to mean "upon determination … …" or "in response to determination … …" or "upon detection of a [ stated condition or event ]" or "in response to detection of a [ stated condition or event ], depending on the context.
Embodiments of electronic devices, user interfaces for such devices, and associated processes for using such devices are described herein. In some embodiments, the device is a portable communication device, such as a mobile phone, that also includes other functions, such as PDA and/or music player functions. Exemplary embodiments of the portable multifunction device include, but are not limited to, those from Apple inc (Cupertino, california)Equipment, iPodDevice, andAn apparatus. Other portable electronic devices, such as a laptop or tablet computer having a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touch screen display and/or a touchpad), are optionally used. It should also be appreciated that in some embodiments, the device is not a portable communication device, but rather a desktop computer having a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touch screen display and/or a touch pad). In some embodiments, the electronic device is a computer system in communication (e.g., via wireless communication, via wired communication) with the display generation component. The display generation component is configured to provide visual output, such as display via a CRT display, display via an LED display, or display via image projection. In some embodiments, the display generating component is integrated with the computer system. In some embodiments, the display generating component is separate from the computer system. As used herein, "displaying" content includes displaying content (e.g., video data rendered or decoded by display controller 156) by transmitting data (e.g., image data or video data) to an integrated or external display generation component via a wired or wireless connection to visually produce the content.
In the following discussion, an electronic device including a display and a touch-sensitive surface is described. However, it should be understood that the electronic device optionally includes one or more other physical user interface devices, such as a physical keyboard, mouse, and/or joystick.
The device typically supports various applications such as one or more of the following: drawing applications, presentation applications, word processing applications, website creation applications, disk editing applications, spreadsheet applications, gaming applications, telephony applications, video conferencing applications, email applications, instant messaging applications, fitness support applications, photo management applications, digital camera applications, digital video camera applications, web browsing applications, digital music player applications, and/or digital video player applications.
The various applications executing on the device optionally use at least one generic physical user interface device, such as a touch-sensitive surface. One or more functions of the touch-sensitive surface and corresponding information displayed on the device are optionally adjusted and/or changed for different applications and/or within the respective applications. In this way, the common physical architecture of the devices (such as the touch-sensitive surface) optionally supports various applications with a user interface that is intuitive and transparent to the user.
Attention is now directed to embodiments of a portable device having a touch sensitive display. Fig. 1A is a block diagram illustrating a portable multifunction device 100 with a touch-sensitive display system 112 in accordance with some embodiments. Touch-sensitive display 112 is sometimes referred to as a "touch screen" for convenience and is sometimes referred to or referred to as a "touch-sensitive display system". Device 100 includes memory 102 (which optionally includes one or more computer-readable storage media), memory controller 122, one or more processing units (CPUs) 120, peripheral interface 118, RF circuitry 108, audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, microphone 113, input/output (I/O) subsystem 106, other input control devices 116, and external ports 124. The apparatus 100 optionally includes one or more optical sensors 164. The device 100 optionally includes one or more contact intensity sensors 165 for detecting the intensity of a contact on the device 100 (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface, such as the touch-sensitive display system 112 of the device 100). Device 100 optionally includes one or more tactile output generators 167 (e.g., generating tactile output on a touch-sensitive surface, such as touch-sensitive display system 112 of device 100 or touch pad 355 of device 300) for generating tactile output on device 100. These components optionally communicate via one or more communication buses or signal lines 103.
As used in this specification and the claims, the term "intensity" of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface refers to the force or pressure (force per unit area) of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., finger contact), or to an alternative to the force or pressure of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface (surrogate). The intensity of the contact has a range of values that includes at least four different values and more typically includes hundreds of different values (e.g., at least 256). The intensity of the contact is optionally determined (or measured) using various methods and various sensors or combinations of sensors. For example, one or more force sensors below or adjacent to the touch-sensitive surface are optionally used to measure forces at different points on the touch-sensitive surface. In some implementations, force measurements from multiple force sensors are combined (e.g., weighted average) to determine an estimated contact force. Similarly, the pressure sensitive tip of the stylus is optionally used to determine the pressure of the stylus on the touch sensitive surface. Alternatively, the size of the contact area and/or its variation detected on the touch-sensitive surface, the capacitance of the touch-sensitive surface and/or its variation in the vicinity of the contact and/or the resistance of the touch-sensitive surface and/or its variation in the vicinity of the contact are optionally used as a substitute for the force or pressure of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface. In some implementations, surrogate measurements of contact force or pressure are directly used to determine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded (e.g., the intensity threshold is described in units corresponding to surrogate measurements). In some implementations, surrogate measurements of contact force or pressure are converted to an estimated force or pressure, and the estimated force or pressure is used to determine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded (e.g., the intensity threshold is a pressure threshold measured in units of pressure). The intensity of the contact is used as an attribute of the user input, allowing the user to access additional device functions that are not otherwise accessible to the user on a smaller sized device of limited real estate for displaying affordances and/or receiving user input (e.g., via a touch-sensitive display, touch-sensitive surface, or physical/mechanical control, such as a knob or button).
As used in this specification and in the claims, the term "haptic output" refers to a physical displacement of a device relative to a previous position of the device, a physical displacement of a component of the device (e.g., a touch sensitive surface) relative to another component of the device (e.g., a housing), or a displacement of a component relative to a centroid of the device, to be detected by a user with a user's feel. For example, in the case where the device or component of the device is in contact with a touch-sensitive surface of the user (e.g., a finger, palm, or other portion of the user's hand), the haptic output generated by the physical displacement will be interpreted by the user as a haptic sensation corresponding to a perceived change in a physical characteristic of the device or component of the device. For example, movement of a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touch-sensitive display or touch pad) is optionally interpreted by a user as a "press click" or "click-down" of a physically actuated button. In some cases, the user will feel a tactile sensation, such as "press click" or "click down", even when the physical actuation button associated with the touch-sensitive surface that is physically pressed (e.g., displaced) by the user's movement is not moved. As another example, movement of the touch-sensitive surface may optionally be interpreted or sensed by a user as "roughness" of the touch-sensitive surface, even when the smoothness of the touch-sensitive surface is unchanged. While such interpretation of touches by a user will be limited by the user's individualized sensory perception, many sensory perceptions of touches are common to most users. Thus, when a haptic output is described as corresponding to a particular sensory perception of a user (e.g., "click down," "click up," "roughness"), unless stated otherwise, the haptic output generated corresponds to a physical displacement of the device or component thereof that would generate that sensory perception of a typical (or ordinary) user.
It should be understood that the device 100 is merely one example of a portable multifunction device, and that the device 100 optionally has more or fewer components than shown, optionally combines two or more components, or optionally has a different configuration or arrangement of the components. The various components shown in fig. 1A are implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of both hardware and software, including one or more signal processing and/or application specific integrated circuits.
Memory 102 optionally includes high-speed random access memory, and also optionally includes non-volatile memory, such as one or more disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid-state memory devices. Memory controller 122 optionally controls access to memory 102 by other components of device 100.
Peripheral interface 118 may be used to couple input and output peripherals of the device to CPU 120 and memory 102. The one or more processors 120 run or execute various software programs, such as computer programs (e.g., including instructions), and/or sets of instructions stored in the memory 102 to perform various functions of the device 100 and process data. In some embodiments, peripheral interface 118, CPU 120, and memory controller 122 are optionally implemented on a single chip, such as chip 104. In some other embodiments, they are optionally implemented on separate chips.
The RF (radio frequency) circuit 108 receives and transmits RF signals, also referred to as electromagnetic signals. RF circuitry 108 converts/converts electrical signals to/from electromagnetic signals and communicates with communication networks and other communication devices via electromagnetic signals. RF circuitry 108 optionally includes well known circuitry for performing these functions including, but not limited to, an antenna system, an RF transceiver, one or more amplifiers, a tuner, one or more oscillators, a digital signal processor, a codec chipset, a Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) card, memory, and the like. RF circuitry 108 optionally communicates via wireless communication with networks such as the internet (also known as the World Wide Web (WWW)), intranets, and/or wireless networks such as cellular telephone networks, wireless Local Area Networks (LANs), and/or Metropolitan Area Networks (MANs), and other devices. The RF circuitry 108 optionally includes well-known circuitry for detecting a Near Field Communication (NFC) field, such as by a short-range communication radio. Wireless communications optionally use any of a variety of communication standards, protocols, and technologies including, but not limited to, global system for mobile communications (GSM), enhanced Data GSM Environment (EDGE), high Speed Downlink Packet Access (HSDPA), high Speed Uplink Packet Access (HSUPA), evolution, pure data (EV-DO), HSPA, hspa+, dual cell HSPA (DC-HSPDA), long Term Evolution (LTE), near Field Communications (NFC), wideband code division multiple access (W-CDMA), code Division Multiple Access (CDMA), time Division Multiple Access (TDMA), bluetooth low energy (BTLE), wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi) (e.g., IEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n, and/or IEEE 802.11 ac), voice over internet protocol (VoIP), wi-MAX, email protocols (e.g., internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP) and/or Post Office Protocol (POP)), messages (e.g., extensible message handling and presence protocol (XMPP), protocols for instant messaging and presence using extended session initiation protocol (sime), messages and presence (IMPS), instant messaging and/or SMS (SMS) protocols, or any other suitable communications protocol not yet developed herein.
Audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, and microphone 113 provide an audio interface between the user and device 100. Audio circuitry 110 receives audio data from peripheral interface 118, converts the audio data to electrical signals, and transmits the electrical signals to speaker 111. The speaker 111 converts electrical signals into sound waves that are audible to humans. The audio circuit 110 also receives electrical signals converted from sound waves by the microphone 113. The audio circuitry 110 converts the electrical signals into audio data and transmits the audio data to the peripheral interface 118 for processing. The audio data is optionally retrieved from and/or transmitted to the memory 102 and/or the RF circuitry 108 by the peripheral interface 118. In some embodiments, the audio circuit 110 also includes a headset jack (e.g., 212 in fig. 2). The headset jack provides an interface between the audio circuit 110 and removable audio input/output peripherals such as output-only headphones or a headset having both an output (e.g., a monaural or binaural) and an input (e.g., a microphone).
I/O subsystem 106 couples input/output peripheral devices on device 100, such as touch screen 112 and other input control devices 116, to peripheral interface 118. The I/O subsystem 106 optionally includes a display controller 156, an optical sensor controller 158, a depth camera controller 169, an intensity sensor controller 159, a haptic feedback controller 161, and one or more input controllers 160 for other input or control devices. The one or more input controllers 160 receive electrical signals from/transmit electrical signals to other input control devices 116. The other input control devices 116 optionally include physical buttons (e.g., push buttons, rocker buttons, etc.), dials, slider switches, joysticks, click-type dials, and the like. In some implementations, the input controller 160 is optionally coupled to (or not coupled to) any of the following: a keyboard, an infrared port, a USB port, and a pointing device such as a mouse. One or more buttons (e.g., 208 in fig. 2) optionally include an up/down button for volume control of speaker 111 and/or microphone 113. The one or more buttons optionally include a push button (e.g., 206 in fig. 2). In some embodiments, the electronic device is a computer system that communicates (e.g., via wireless communication, via wired communication) with one or more input devices. In some implementations, the one or more input devices include a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touch pad as part of a touch-sensitive display). In some implementations, the one or more input devices include one or more camera sensors (e.g., one or more optical sensors 164 and/or one or more depth camera sensors 175) such as for tracking gestures (e.g., hand gestures and/or air gestures) of the user as input. In some embodiments, one or more input devices are integrated with the computer system. In some embodiments, one or more input devices are separate from the computer system. In some embodiments, the air gesture is a gesture that is detected without the user touching an input element that is part of the device (or independent of an input element that is part of the device) and based on a detected movement of a portion of the user's body through the air, including a movement of the user's body relative to an absolute reference (e.g., an angle of the user's arm relative to the ground or a distance of the user's hand relative to the ground), a movement relative to another portion of the user's body (e.g., a movement of the user's hand relative to the user's shoulder, a movement of the user's hand relative to the other hand of the user, and/or a movement of the user's finger relative to the other finger or part of the hand of the user), and/or an absolute movement of a portion of the user's body (e.g., a flick gesture that includes a predetermined amount and/or speed of movement of the hand in a predetermined gesture that includes a predetermined gesture of the hand, or a shake gesture that includes a predetermined speed or amount of rotation of a portion of the user's body).
The quick press of the push button optionally disengages the lock of touch screen 112 or optionally begins the process of unlocking the device using gestures on the touch screen, as described in U.S. patent application 11/322,549 (i.e., U.S. patent No. 7,657,849) entitled "Unlocking a Device by Performing Gestures on an Unlock Image," filed on even date 12/23, 2005, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. Long presses of a button (e.g., 206) optionally cause the device 100 to power on or off. The function of the one or more buttons is optionally customizable by the user. Touch screen 112 is used to implement virtual buttons or soft buttons and one or more soft keyboards.
The touch sensitive display 112 provides an input interface and an output interface between the device and the user. Display controller 156 receives electrical signals from touch screen 112 and/or transmits electrical signals to touch screen 112. Touch screen 112 displays visual output to a user. Visual output optionally includes graphics, text, icons, video, and any combination thereof (collectively, "graphics"). In some embodiments, some or all of the visual output optionally corresponds to a user interface object.
Touch screen 112 has a touch-sensitive surface, sensor, or set of sensors that receives input from a user based on haptic and/or tactile contact. Touch screen 112 and display controller 156 (along with any associated modules and/or sets of instructions in memory 102) detect contact (and any movement or interruption of the contact) on touch screen 112 and translate the detected contact into interactions with user interface objects (e.g., one or more soft keys, icons, web pages, or images) displayed on touch screen 112. In an exemplary embodiment, the point of contact between touch screen 112 and the user corresponds to a user's finger.
Touch screen 112 optionally uses LCD (liquid crystal display) technology, LPD (light emitting polymer display) technology, or LED (light emitting diode) technology, but in other embodiments other display technologies are used. Touch screen 112 and display controller 156 optionally detect contact and any movement or interruption thereof using any of a variety of touch sensing technologies now known or later developed, including but not limited to capacitive, resistive, infrared, and surface acoustic wave technologies, as well as other proximity sensor arrays or other elements for determining one or more points of contact with touch screen 112. In an exemplary embodiment, a projected mutual capacitance sensing technique is used, such as that described in the text from Apple inc (Cupertino, california)And iPodTechniques used in the above.
The touch sensitive display in some implementations of touch screen 112 is optionally similar to the multi-touch sensitive touch pad described in the following U.S. patents: 6,323,846 (Westerman et al), 6,570,557 (Westerman et al) and/or 6,677,932 (Westerman et al) and/or U.S. patent publication 2002/0015024A1, each of which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. However, touch screen 112 displays visual output from device 100, while touch sensitive touchpads do not provide visual output.
Touch sensitive displays in some implementations of touch screen 112 are described in the following applications: (1) U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/381,313, "Multipoint Touch Surface Controller", filed on 5/2/2006; (2) U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/840,862, "Multipoint Touchscreen", filed 5/6/2004; (3) U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/903,964, "Gestures For Touch Sensitive Input Devices," filed 7/30/2004; (4) U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/048,264, "Gestures For Touch Sensitive Input Devices," filed 1/31/2005; (5) U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/038,590, "Mode-Based Graphical User Interfaces For Touch Sensitive Input Devices", filed 1/18/2005; (6) U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/228,758, "Virtual Input DEVICE PLACEMENT On A Touch Screen User Interface," filed 9/16/2005; (7) U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/228,700, "Operation Of A Computer With A Touch SCREEN INTERFACE", filed 9/16/2005; (8) U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/228,737, "ACTIVATING VIRTUAL KEYS OF A TOUCH-Screen Virtual Keyboard", filed on 9/16/2005; and (9) U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/367,749, "Multi-Functional Hand-HELD DEVICE", filed 3/2006. All of these applications are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety.
Touch screen 112 optionally has a video resolution in excess of 100 dpi. In some implementations, the touch screen has a video resolution of about 160 dpi. The user optionally uses any suitable object or appendage, such as a stylus, finger, or the like, to make contact with touch screen 112. In some embodiments, the user interface is designed to work primarily through finger-based contact and gestures, which may not be as accurate as stylus-based input due to the large contact area of the finger on the touch screen. In some embodiments, the device translates the finger-based coarse input into a precise pointer/cursor position or command for performing the action desired by the user.
In some embodiments, the device 100 optionally includes a touch pad for activating or deactivating a particular function in addition to the touch screen. In some embodiments, the touch pad is a touch sensitive area of the device that, unlike the touch screen, does not display visual output. The touch pad is optionally a touch sensitive surface separate from the touch screen 112 or an extension of the touch sensitive surface formed by the touch screen.
The apparatus 100 also includes a power system 162 for powering the various components. The power system 162 optionally includes a power management system, one or more power sources (e.g., battery, alternating Current (AC)), a recharging system, a power failure detection circuit, a power converter or inverter, a power status indicator (e.g., light Emitting Diode (LED)), and any other components associated with the generation, management, and distribution of power in the portable device.
The apparatus 100 optionally further comprises one or more optical sensors 164. FIG. 1A shows an optical sensor coupled to an optical sensor controller 158 in the I/O subsystem 106. The optical sensor 164 optionally includes a Charge Coupled Device (CCD) or a Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistor. The optical sensor 164 receives light projected through one or more lenses from the environment and converts the light into data representing an image. In conjunction with imaging module 143 (also called a camera module), optical sensor 164 optionally captures still images or video. In some embodiments, the optical sensor is located on the rear of the device 100, opposite the touch screen display 112 on the front of the device, so that the touch screen display can be used as a viewfinder for still image and/or video image acquisition. In some embodiments, the optical sensor is located on the front of the device such that the user's image is optionally acquired for video conferencing while viewing other video conference participants on the touch screen display. In some implementations, the position of the optical sensor 164 may be changed by the user (e.g., by rotating a lens and sensor in the device housing) such that a single optical sensor 164 is used with the touch screen display for both video conferencing and still image and/or video image acquisition.
The device 100 optionally further includes one or more depth camera sensors 175. FIG. 1A shows a depth camera sensor coupled to a depth camera controller 169 in the I/O subsystem 106. The depth camera sensor 175 receives data from the environment to create a three-dimensional model of objects (e.g., faces) within the scene from a point of view (e.g., depth camera sensor). In some implementations, in conjunction with the imaging module 143 (also referred to as a camera module), the depth camera sensor 175 is optionally used to determine a depth map of different portions of the image captured by the imaging module 143. In some embodiments, a depth camera sensor is located at the front of the device 100 such that a user image with depth information is optionally acquired for a video conference while the user views other video conference participants on a touch screen display, and a self-photograph with depth map data is captured. In some embodiments, the depth camera sensor 175 is located at the back of the device, or at the back and front of the device 100. In some implementations, the position of the depth camera sensor 175 can be changed by the user (e.g., by rotating a lens and sensor in the device housing) such that the depth camera sensor 175 is used with a touch screen display for both video conferencing and still image and/or video image acquisition.
The apparatus 100 optionally further comprises one or more contact intensity sensors 165. FIG. 1A shows a contact intensity sensor coupled to an intensity sensor controller 159 in the I/O subsystem 106. The contact strength sensor 165 optionally includes one or more piezoresistive strain gauges, capacitive force sensors, electrical force sensors, piezoelectric force sensors, optical force sensors, capacitive touch-sensitive surfaces, or other strength sensors (e.g., sensors for measuring force (or pressure) of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface). The contact strength sensor 165 receives contact strength information (e.g., pressure information or a surrogate for pressure information) from the environment. In some implementations, at least one contact intensity sensor is juxtaposed or adjacent to a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112). In some embodiments, at least one contact intensity sensor is located on the rear of the device 100, opposite the touch screen display 112 located on the front of the device 100.
The device 100 optionally further includes one or more proximity sensors 166. Fig. 1A shows a proximity sensor 166 coupled to the peripheral interface 118. Alternatively, the proximity sensor 166 is optionally coupled to the input controller 160 in the I/O subsystem 106. The proximity sensor 166 optionally performs as described in the following U.S. patent application nos.: 11/241,839, entitled "Proximity Detector IN HANDHELD DEVICE";11/240,788, entitled "Proximity Detector IN HANDHELD DEVICE";11/620,702, entitled "Using Ambient Light Sensor To Augment Proximity Sensor Output";11/586,862, entitled "Automated Response To AND SENSING Of User ACTIVITY IN Portable Devices"; and 11/638,251, entitled Methods AND SYSTEMS For Automatic Configuration Of Peripherals, which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety. In some embodiments, the proximity sensor is turned off and the touch screen 112 is disabled when the multifunction device is placed near the user's ear (e.g., when the user is making a telephone call).
The device 100 optionally further comprises one or more tactile output generators 167. FIG. 1A shows a haptic output generator coupled to a haptic feedback controller 161 in the I/O subsystem 106. The tactile output generator 167 optionally includes one or more electroacoustic devices such as speakers or other audio components; and/or electromechanical devices for converting energy into linear motion such as motors, solenoids, electroactive polymers, piezoelectric actuators, electrostatic actuators, or other tactile output generating means (e.g., means for converting an electrical signal into a tactile output on a device). The contact intensity sensor 165 receives haptic feedback generation instructions from the haptic feedback module 133 and generates a haptic output on the device 100 that can be perceived by a user of the device 100. In some embodiments, at least one tactile output generator is juxtaposed or adjacent to a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112), and optionally generates tactile output by moving the touch-sensitive surface vertically (e.g., inward/outward of the surface of device 100) or laterally (e.g., backward and forward in the same plane as the surface of device 100). In some embodiments, at least one tactile output generator sensor is located on the rear of the device 100, opposite the touch screen display 112 located on the front of the device 100.
The device 100 optionally further includes one or more accelerometers 168. Fig. 1A shows accelerometer 168 coupled to peripheral interface 118. Alternatively, accelerometer 168 is optionally coupled to input controller 160 in I/O subsystem 106. Accelerometer 168 optionally performs as described in the following U.S. patent publication nos.: 20050190059, entitled "acceletion-based Theft Detection System for Portable Electronic Devices" and 20060017692, entitled "Methods And Apparatuses For Operating A Portable Device Based On An Accelerometer", both of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety. In some implementations, information is displayed in a portrait view or a landscape view on a touch screen display based on analysis of data received from one or more accelerometers. The device 100 optionally includes a magnetometer and a GPS (or GLONASS or other global navigation system) receiver in addition to the accelerometer 168 for obtaining information about the position and orientation (e.g., longitudinal or lateral) of the device 100.
In some embodiments, the software components stored in memory 102 include an operating system 126, a communication module (or instruction set) 128, a contact/motion module (or instruction set) 130, a graphics module (or instruction set) 132, a text input module (or instruction set) 134, a Global Positioning System (GPS) module (or instruction set) 135, and an application program (or instruction set) 136. Furthermore, in some embodiments, memory 102 (fig. 1A) or 370 (fig. 3) stores device/global internal state 157, as shown in fig. 1A and 3. The device/global internal state 157 includes one or more of the following: an active application state indicating which applications (if any) are currently active; display status, indicating what applications, views, or other information occupy various areas of the touch screen display 112; sensor status, including information obtained from the various sensors of the device and the input control device 116; and location information relating to the device location and/or pose.
Operating system 126 (e.g., darwin, RTXC, LINUX, UNIX, OS X, iOS, WINDOWS, or embedded operating systems such as VxWorks) includes various software components and/or drivers for controlling and managing general system tasks (e.g., memory management, storage device control, power management, etc.), and facilitates communication between the various hardware components and software components.
The communication module 128 facilitates communication with other devices through one or more external ports 124 and also includes various software components for processing data received by the RF circuitry 108 and/or the external ports 124. External port 124 (e.g., universal Serial Bus (USB), firewire, etc.) is adapted to be coupled directly to other devices or indirectly via a network (e.g., the internet, wireless LAN, etc.). In some embodiments, the external port is in communication withThe 30-pin connector used on the (Apple inc. Trademark) device is the same or similar and/or compatible with a multi-pin (e.g., 30-pin) connector.
The contact/motion module 130 optionally detects contact with the touch screen 112 (in conjunction with the display controller 156) and other touch sensitive devices (e.g., a touchpad or physical click wheel). The contact/motion module 130 includes various software components for performing various operations related to contact detection, such as determining whether a contact has occurred (e.g., detecting a finger press event), determining the strength of the contact (e.g., the force or pressure of the contact, or a substitute for the force or pressure of the contact), determining whether there is movement of the contact and tracking movement across the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., detecting one or more finger drag events), and determining whether the contact has ceased (e.g., detecting a finger lift event or a contact break). The contact/motion module 130 receives contact data from the touch-sensitive surface. Determining movement of the point of contact optionally includes determining a velocity (magnitude), a speed (magnitude and direction), and/or an acceleration (change in magnitude and/or direction) of the point of contact, the movement of the point of contact being represented by a series of contact data. These operations are optionally applied to single point contacts (e.g., single finger contacts) or simultaneous multi-point contacts (e.g., "multi-touch"/multiple finger contacts). In some embodiments, the contact/motion module 130 and the display controller 156 detect contact on the touch pad.
In some implementations, the contact/motion module 130 uses a set of one or more intensity thresholds to determine whether an operation has been performed by a user (e.g., to determine whether the user has "clicked" on an icon). In some implementations, at least a subset of the intensity thresholds are determined according to software parameters (e.g., the intensity thresholds are not determined by activation thresholds of particular physical actuators and may be adjusted without changing the physical hardware of the device 100). For example, without changing the touchpad or touch screen display hardware, the mouse "click" threshold of the touchpad or touch screen may be set to any of a wide range of predefined thresholds. Additionally, in some implementations, a user of the device is provided with software settings for adjusting one or more intensity thresholds in a set of intensity thresholds (e.g., by adjusting individual intensity thresholds and/or by adjusting multiple intensity thresholds at once with a system-level click on an "intensity" parameter).
The contact/motion module 130 optionally detects gesture input by the user. Different gestures on the touch-sensitive surface have different contact patterns (e.g., different movements, timings, and/or intensities of the detected contacts). Thus, gestures are optionally detected by detecting a particular contact pattern. For example, detecting a finger tap gesture includes detecting a finger press event, and then detecting a finger lift (lift off) event at the same location (or substantially the same location) as the finger press event (e.g., at the location of an icon). As another example, detecting a finger swipe gesture on the touch-sensitive surface includes detecting a finger-down event, then detecting one or more finger-dragging events, and then detecting a finger-up (lift-off) event.
Graphics module 132 includes various known software components for rendering and displaying graphics on touch screen 112 or other displays, including components for changing the visual impact (e.g., brightness, transparency, saturation, contrast, or other visual attribute) of the displayed graphics. As used herein, the term "graphic" includes any object that may be displayed to a user, including but not limited to text, web pages, icons (such as user interface objects including soft keys), digital images, video, animation, and the like.
In some embodiments, graphics module 132 stores data representing graphics to be used. Each graphic is optionally assigned a corresponding code. The graphic module 132 receives one or more codes for designating graphics to be displayed from an application program or the like, and also receives coordinate data and other graphic attribute data together if necessary, and then generates screen image data to output to the display controller 156.
Haptic feedback module 133 includes various software components for generating instructions used by haptic output generator 167 to generate haptic output at one or more locations on device 100 in response to user interaction with device 100.
Text input module 134, which is optionally a component of graphics module 132, provides a soft keyboard for entering text in various applications (e.g., contacts 137, email 140, IM 141, browser 147, and any other application requiring text input).
The GPS module 135 determines the location of the device and provides this information for use in various applications (e.g., to the phone 138 for use in location-based dialing, to the camera 143 as picture/video metadata, and to applications that provide location-based services, such as weather gadgets, local page gadgets, and map/navigation gadgets).
The application 136 optionally includes the following modules (or sets of instructions) or a subset or superset thereof:
contact module 137 (sometimes referred to as an address book or contact list);
a telephone module 138;
Video conferencing module 139;
Email client module 140;
an Instant Messaging (IM) module 141;
A fitness support module 142;
a camera module 143 for still and/or video images;
an image management module 144;
A video player module;
a music player module;
Browser module 147;
calendar module 148;
A gadget module 149, optionally comprising one or more of: weather gadgets 149-1, stock gadgets 149-2, calculator gadget 149-3, alarm gadget 149-4, dictionary gadget 149-5, and other gadgets obtained by the user, and user-created gadgets 149-6;
A gadget creator module 150 for forming a user-created gadget 149-6;
Search module 151;
A video and music player module 152 that incorporates the video player module and the music player module;
a note module 153;
map module 154; and/or
An online video module 155.
Examples of other applications 136 optionally stored in memory 102 include other word processing applications, other image editing applications, drawing applications, presentation applications, JAVA-enabled applications, encryption, digital rights management, voice recognition, and voice replication.
In conjunction with touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, contacts module 137 is optionally used to manage an address book or contact list (e.g., in application internal state 192 of contacts module 137 stored in memory 102 or memory 370), including: adding one or more names to the address book; deleting the name from the address book; associating a telephone number, email address, physical address, or other information with the name; associating the image with the name; classifying and classifying names; providing a telephone number or email address to initiate and/or facilitate communications through telephone 138, video conferencing module 139, email 140, or IM 141; etc.
In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, microphone 113, touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, telephone module 138 is optionally used to input a sequence of characters corresponding to a telephone number, access one or more telephone numbers in contact module 137, modify the entered telephone number, dial the corresponding telephone number, conduct a conversation, and disconnect or hang up when the conversation is completed. As described above, wireless communication optionally uses any of a variety of communication standards, protocols, and technologies.
In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, microphone 113, touch screen 112, display controller 156, optical sensor 164, optical sensor controller 158, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, contacts module 137, and telephony module 138, videoconferencing module 139 includes executable instructions to initiate, conduct, and terminate a videoconference between a user and one or more other participants according to user instructions.
In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, email client module 140 includes executable instructions for creating, sending, receiving, and managing emails in response to user instructions. In conjunction with the image management module 144, the email client module 140 makes it very easy to create and send emails with still or video images captured by the camera module 143.
In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, instant message module 141 includes executable instructions for: inputting a character sequence corresponding to an instant message, modifying previously inputted characters, transmitting a corresponding instant message (e.g., using a Short Message Service (SMS) or Multimedia Message Service (MMS) protocol for phone-based instant messages or using XMPP, SIMPLE, or IMPS for internet-based instant messages), receiving an instant message, and viewing the received instant message. In some embodiments, the transmitted and/or received instant message optionally includes graphics, photographs, audio files, video files, and/or other attachments supported in an MMS and/or Enhanced Messaging Service (EMS). As used herein, "instant message" refers to both telephony-based messages (e.g., messages sent using SMS or MMS) and internet-based messages (e.g., messages sent using XMPP, SIMPLE, or IMPS).
In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, GPS module 135, map module 154, and music player module, workout support module 142 includes executable instructions for creating a workout (e.g., with time, distance, and/or calorie burn targets); communicate with a fitness sensor (exercise device); receiving fitness sensor data; calibrating a sensor for monitoring fitness; selecting and playing music for exercise; and displaying, storing and transmitting the fitness data.
In conjunction with touch screen 112, display controller 156, optical sensor 164, optical sensor controller 158, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, and image management module 144, camera module 143 includes executable instructions for: capturing still images or videos (including video streams) and storing them in the memory 102, modifying features of still images or videos, or deleting still images or videos from the memory 102.
In conjunction with touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, and camera module 143, image management module 144 includes executable instructions for arranging, modifying (e.g., editing), or otherwise manipulating, tagging, deleting, presenting (e.g., in a digital slide or album), and storing still and/or video images.
In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, browser module 147 includes executable instructions for browsing the internet according to user instructions, including searching, linking to, receiving, and displaying web pages or portions thereof, as well as attachments and other files linked to web pages.
In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, email client module 140, and browser module 147, calendar module 148 includes executable instructions for creating, displaying, modifying, and storing calendars and data associated with calendars (e.g., calendar entries, to-do items, etc.) according to user instructions.
In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, and browser module 147, gadget module 149 is a mini-application (e.g., weather gadget 149-1, stock gadget 149-2, calculator gadget 149-3, alarm gadget 149-4, and dictionary gadget 149-5) or a mini-application created by a user (e.g., user created gadget 149-6) that is optionally downloaded and used by a user. In some embodiments, gadgets include HTML (hypertext markup language) files, CSS (cascading style sheet) files, and JavaScript files. In some embodiments, gadgets include XML (extensible markup language) files and JavaScript files (e.g., yahoo | gadgets).
In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, and browser module 147, gadget creator module 150 is optionally used by a user to create gadgets (e.g., to transform user-specified portions of a web page into gadgets).
In conjunction with touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, search module 151 includes executable instructions for searching memory 102 for text, music, sound, images, video, and/or other files that match one or more search criteria (e.g., one or more user-specified search terms) according to user instructions.
In conjunction with touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, audio circuit 110, speaker 111, RF circuit 108, and browser module 147, video and music player module 152 includes executable instructions that allow a user to download and playback recorded music and other sound files stored in one or more file formats, such as MP3 or AAC files, as well as executable instructions for displaying, rendering, or otherwise playing back video (e.g., on touch screen 112 or on an external display connected via external port 124). In some embodiments, the device 100 optionally includes the functionality of an MP3 player such as an iPod (trademark of Apple inc.).
In conjunction with the touch screen 112, the display controller 156, the contact/movement module 130, the graphics module 132, and the text input module 134, the notes module 153 includes executable instructions for creating and managing notes, backlog, and the like according to user instructions.
In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, GPS module 135, and browser module 147, map module 154 is optionally configured to receive, display, modify, and store maps and data associated with maps (e.g., driving directions, data related to shops and other points of interest at or near a particular location, and other location-based data) according to user instructions.
In conjunction with touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, audio circuit 110, speaker 111, RF circuit 108, text input module 134, email client module 140, and browser module 147, online video module 155 includes instructions for: allowing a user to access, browse, receive (e.g., by streaming and/or downloading), play back (e.g., on a touch screen or on an external display connected via external port 124), send an email with a link to a particular online video, and otherwise manage online video in one or more file formats such as h.264. In some embodiments, the instant messaging module 141 is used to send links to particular online videos instead of the email client module 140. Additional descriptions of online video applications can be found in U.S. provisional patent application Ser. No. 60/936,562, entitled "Portable Multifunction Device, method, AND GRAPHICAL User Interface for Playing Online Videos," filed on even 20, 6, 2007, and U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/968,067, entitled "Portable Multifunction Device, method, AND GRAPHICAL User Interface for Playing Online Videos," filed on even 31, 12, 2007, the contents of both of which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety.
Each of the modules and applications described above corresponds to a set of executable instructions for performing one or more of the functions described above, as well as the methods described in this patent application (e.g., the computer-implemented methods and other information processing methods described herein). These modules (e.g., sets of instructions) need not be implemented in a separate software program, such as a computer program (e.g., including instructions), process, or module, and thus the various subsets of these modules are optionally combined or otherwise rearranged in various embodiments. For example, the video player module is optionally combined with the music player module into a single module (e.g., video and music player module 152 in fig. 1A). In some embodiments, memory 102 optionally stores a subset of the modules and data structures described above. Further, memory 102 optionally stores additional modules and data structures not described above.
In some embodiments, device 100 is a device in which the operation of a predefined set of functions on the device is performed exclusively through a touch screen and/or touch pad. By using a touch screen and/or a touch pad as the primary input control device for operating the device 100, the number of physical input control devices (e.g., push buttons, dials, etc.) on the device 100 is optionally reduced.
A predefined set of functions performed solely by the touch screen and/or touch pad optionally includes navigation between user interfaces. In some embodiments, the touchpad, when touched by a user, navigates the device 100 from any user interface displayed on the device 100 to a main menu, a main desktop menu, or a root menu. In such implementations, a touch pad is used to implement a "menu button". In some other embodiments, the menu buttons are physical push buttons or other physical input control devices, rather than touch pads.
FIG. 1B is a block diagram illustrating exemplary components for event processing according to some embodiments. In some embodiments, memory 102 (FIG. 1A) or memory 370 (FIG. 3) includes event sorter 170 (e.g., in operating system 126) and corresponding applications 136-1 (e.g., any of the aforementioned applications 137-151, 155, 380-390).
The event classifier 170 receives the event information and determines the application view 191 of the application 136-1 and the application 136-1 to which the event information is to be delivered. The event sorter 170 includes an event monitor 171 and an event dispatcher module 174. In some embodiments, the application 136-1 includes an application internal state 192 that indicates one or more current application views that are displayed on the touch-sensitive display 112 when the application is active or executing. In some embodiments, the device/global internal state 157 is used by the event classifier 170 to determine which application(s) are currently active, and the application internal state 192 is used by the event classifier 170 to determine the application view 191 to which to deliver event information.
In some implementations, the application internal state 192 includes additional information, such as one or more of the following: restoration information to be used when the application 136-1 resumes execution, user interface state information indicating that the information is being displayed or ready for display by the application 136-1, a state queue for enabling the user to return to a previous state or view of the application 136-1, and a repeat/undo queue of previous actions taken by the user.
Event monitor 171 receives event information from peripheral interface 118. The event information includes information about sub-events (e.g., user touches on the touch sensitive display 112 as part of a multi-touch gesture). The peripheral interface 118 transmits information it receives from the I/O subsystem 106 or sensors, such as a proximity sensor 166, one or more accelerometers 168, and/or microphone 113 (via audio circuitry 110). The information received by the peripheral interface 118 from the I/O subsystem 106 includes information from the touch-sensitive display 112 or touch-sensitive surface.
In some embodiments, event monitor 171 sends requests to peripheral interface 118 at predetermined intervals. In response, the peripheral interface 118 transmits event information. In other embodiments, the peripheral interface 118 transmits event information only if there is a significant event (e.g., receiving an input above a predetermined noise threshold and/or receiving an input exceeding a predetermined duration).
In some implementations, the event classifier 170 also includes a hit view determination module 172 and/or an active event identifier determination module 173.
When the touch sensitive display 112 displays more than one view, the hit view determination module 172 provides a software process for determining where within one or more views a sub-event has occurred. The view is made up of controls and other elements that the user can see on the display.
Another aspect of the user interface associated with an application is a set of views, sometimes referred to herein as application views or user interface windows, in which information is displayed and touch-based gestures occur. The application view (of the respective application) in which the touch is detected optionally corresponds to a level of programming within the application's programming or view hierarchy. For example, the lowest horizontal view in which a touch is detected is optionally referred to as a hit view, and the set of events that are recognized as correct inputs is optionally determined based at least in part on the hit view of the initial touch that begins a touch-based gesture.
Hit view determination module 172 receives information related to sub-events of the touch-based gesture. When an application has multiple views organized in a hierarchy, hit view determination module 172 identifies the hit view as the lowest view in the hierarchy that should process sub-events. In most cases, the hit view is the lowest level view in which the initiating sub-event (e.g., the first sub-event in a sequence of sub-events that form an event or potential event) occurs. Once the hit view is identified by the hit view determination module 172, the hit view typically receives all sub-events related to the same touch or input source for which it was identified as a hit view.
The activity event recognizer determination module 173 determines which view or views within the view hierarchy should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In some implementations, the active event identifier determination module 173 determines that only the hit view should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In other embodiments, the activity event recognizer determination module 173 determines that all views that include the physical location of a sub-event are actively engaged views, and thus determines that all actively engaged views should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In other embodiments, even if the touch sub-event is completely localized to an area associated with one particular view, the higher view in the hierarchy will remain the actively engaged view.
The event dispatcher module 174 dispatches event information to an event recognizer (e.g., event recognizer 180). In embodiments that include an active event recognizer determination module 173, the event dispatcher module 174 delivers event information to the event recognizers determined by the active event recognizer determination module 173. In some embodiments, the event dispatcher module 174 stores event information in an event queue that is retrieved by the corresponding event receiver 182.
In some embodiments, the operating system 126 includes an event classifier 170. Alternatively, the application 136-1 includes an event classifier 170. In yet another embodiment, the event classifier 170 is a stand-alone module or part of another module stored in the memory 102, such as the contact/motion module 130.
In some embodiments, application 136-1 includes a plurality of event handlers 190 and one or more application views 191, each of which includes instructions for processing touch events that occur within a respective view of the user interface of the application. Each application view 191 of the application 136-1 includes one or more event recognizers 180. Typically, the respective application view 191 includes a plurality of event recognizers 180. In other embodiments, one or more of the event recognizers 180 are part of a separate module that is a higher level object from which methods and other properties are inherited, such as the user interface toolkit or application 136-1. In some implementations, the respective event handlers 190 include one or more of the following: data updater 176, object updater 177, GUI updater 178, and/or event data 179 received from event sorter 170. Event handler 190 optionally utilizes or invokes data updater 176, object updater 177, or GUI updater 178 to update the application internal state 192. Alternatively, one or more of application views 191 include one or more corresponding event handlers 190. Additionally, in some implementations, one or more of the data updater 176, the object updater 177, and the GUI updater 178 are included in a respective application view 191.
The corresponding event identifier 180 receives event information (e.g., event data 179) from the event classifier 170 and identifies events based on the event information. Event recognizer 180 includes event receiver 182 and event comparator 184. In some embodiments, event recognizer 180 further includes at least a subset of metadata 183 and event transfer instructions 188 (which optionally include sub-event delivery instructions).
Event receiver 182 receives event information from event sorter 170. The event information includes information about sub-events such as touches or touch movements. The event information also includes additional information, such as the location of the sub-event, according to the sub-event. When a sub-event relates to movement of a touch, the event information optionally also includes the rate and direction of the sub-event. In some embodiments, the event includes rotation of the device from one orientation to another orientation (e.g., from a portrait orientation to a landscape orientation, or vice versa), and the event information includes corresponding information about a current orientation of the device (also referred to as a device pose).
The event comparator 184 compares the event information with predefined event or sub-event definitions and determines an event or sub-event or determines or updates the state of the event or sub-event based on the comparison. In some embodiments, event comparator 184 includes event definition 186. Event definition 186 includes definitions of events (e.g., a predefined sequence of sub-events), such as event 1 (187-1), event 2 (187-2), and others. In some implementations, sub-events in an event (e.g., 187-1 and/or 187-2) include, for example, touch start, touch end, touch move, touch cancel, and multi-touch. In one example, the definition of event 1 (187-1) is a double click on the displayed object. For example, a double click includes a first touch on the displayed object for a predetermined length of time (touch start), a first lift-off on the displayed object for a predetermined length of time (touch end), a second touch on the displayed object for a predetermined length of time (touch start), and a second lift-off on the displayed object for a predetermined length of time (touch end). In another example, the definition of event 2 (187-2) is a drag on the displayed object. For example, dragging includes touching (or contacting) on the displayed object for a predetermined period of time, movement of the touch on the touch-sensitive display 112, and lift-off of the touch (touch end). In some embodiments, the event also includes information for one or more associated event handlers 190.
In some implementations, the event definitions 186 include definitions of events for respective user interface objects. In some implementations, the event comparator 184 performs a hit test to determine which user interface object is associated with a sub-event. For example, in an application view that displays three user interface objects on touch-sensitive display 112, when a touch is detected on touch-sensitive display 112, event comparator 184 performs a hit test to determine which of the three user interface objects is associated with the touch (sub-event). If each displayed object is associated with a respective event handler 190, the event comparator uses the results of the hit test to determine which event handler 190 should be activated. For example, event comparator 184 selects an event handler associated with the sub-event and the object that triggered the hit test.
In some embodiments, the definition of the respective event (187) further includes a delay action that delays delivery of the event information until it has been determined that the sequence of sub-events does or does not correspond to an event type of the event recognizer.
When the respective event recognizer 180 determines that the sequence of sub-events does not match any of the events in the event definition 186, the respective event recognizer 180 enters an event impossible, event failed, or event end state after which subsequent sub-events of the touch-based gesture are ignored. In this case, the other event recognizers (if any) that remain active for the hit view continue to track and process sub-events of the ongoing touch-based gesture.
In some embodiments, the respective event recognizer 180 includes metadata 183 with configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate how the event delivery system should perform sub-event delivery to the actively engaged event recognizer. In some embodiments, metadata 183 includes configurable attributes, flags, and/or lists that indicate how event recognizers interact or are able to interact with each other. In some embodiments, metadata 183 includes configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate whether sub-events are delivered to different levels in a view or programmatic hierarchy.
In some embodiments, when one or more particular sub-events of an event are identified, the corresponding event recognizer 180 activates an event handler 190 associated with the event. In some implementations, the respective event identifier 180 delivers event information associated with the event to the event handler 190. The activate event handler 190 is different from sending (and deferring) sub-events to the corresponding hit view. In some embodiments, event recognizer 180 throws a marker associated with the recognized event, and event handler 190 associated with the marker retrieves the marker and performs a predefined process.
In some implementations, the event delivery instructions 188 include sub-event delivery instructions that deliver event information about the sub-event without activating the event handler. Instead, the sub-event delivery instructions deliver the event information to an event handler associated with the sub-event sequence or to an actively engaged view. Event handlers associated with the sequence of sub-events or with the actively engaged views receive the event information and perform a predetermined process.
In some embodiments, the data updater 176 creates and updates data used in the application 136-1. For example, the data updater 176 updates a telephone number used in the contact module 137 or stores a video file used in the video player module. In some embodiments, object updater 177 creates and updates objects used in application 136-1. For example, the object updater 177 creates a new user interface object or updates the location of the user interface object. GUI updater 178 updates the GUI. For example, the GUI updater 178 prepares the display information and sends the display information to the graphics module 132 for display on a touch-sensitive display.
In some embodiments, event handler 190 includes or has access to data updater 176, object updater 177, and GUI updater 178. In some embodiments, the data updater 176, the object updater 177, and the GUI updater 178 are included in a single module of the respective application 136-1 or application view 191. In other embodiments, they are included in two or more software modules.
It should be appreciated that the above discussion regarding event handling of user touches on a touch sensitive display also applies to other forms of user inputs that utilize an input device to operate the multifunction device 100, not all of which are initiated on a touch screen. For example, mouse movements and mouse button presses optionally in conjunction with single or multiple keyboard presses or holds; contact movement on the touchpad, such as tap, drag, scroll, etc.; inputting by a touch pen; movement of the device; verbal instructions; detected eye movement; inputting biological characteristics; and/or any combination thereof is optionally used as input corresponding to sub-events defining the event to be distinguished.
Fig. 2 illustrates a portable multifunction device 100 with a touch screen 112 in accordance with some embodiments. The touch screen optionally displays one or more graphics within a User Interface (UI) 200. In this and other embodiments described below, a user can select one or more of these graphics by making a gesture on the graphics, for example, with one or more fingers 202 (not drawn to scale in the figures) or one or more styluses 203 (not drawn to scale in the figures). In some embodiments, selection of one or more graphics will occur when a user breaks contact with the one or more graphics. In some embodiments, the gesture optionally includes one or more taps, one or more swipes (left to right, right to left, up and/or down), and/or scrolling of a finger that has been in contact with the device 100 (right to left, left to right, up and/or down). In some implementations or in some cases, inadvertent contact with the graphic does not select the graphic. For example, when the gesture corresponding to the selection is a tap, a swipe gesture that swipes over an application icon optionally does not select the corresponding application.
The device 100 optionally also includes one or more physical buttons, such as a "home desktop" or menu button 204. As previously described, menu button 204 is optionally used to navigate to any application 136 in a set of applications that are optionally executed on device 100. Alternatively, in some embodiments, the menu buttons are implemented as soft keys in a GUI displayed on touch screen 112.
In some embodiments, the device 100 includes a touch screen 112, menu buttons 204, a press button 206 for powering the device on/off and for locking the device, one or more volume adjustment buttons 208, a Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) card slot 210, a headset jack 212, and a docking/charging external port 124. Pressing button 206 is optionally used to turn on/off the device by pressing the button and holding the button in the pressed state for a predefined time interval; locking the device by depressing the button and releasing the button before the predefined time interval has elapsed; and/or unlock the device or initiate an unlocking process. In an alternative embodiment, the device 100 also accepts voice input through the microphone 113 for activating or deactivating certain functions. The device 100 also optionally includes one or more contact intensity sensors 165 for detecting the intensity of contacts on the touch screen 112, and/or one or more haptic output generators 167 for generating haptic outputs for a user of the device 100.
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of an exemplary multifunction device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface in accordance with some embodiments. The device 300 need not be portable. In some embodiments, the device 300 is a laptop computer, a desktop computer, a tablet computer, a multimedia player device, a navigation device, an educational device (such as a child learning toy), a gaming system, or a control device (e.g., a home controller or an industrial controller). The device 300 generally includes one or more processing units (CPUs) 310, one or more network or other communication interfaces 360, memory 370, and one or more communication buses 320 for interconnecting these components. Communication bus 320 optionally includes circuitry (sometimes referred to as a chipset) that interconnects and controls communications between system components. The device 300 includes an input/output (I/O) interface 330 with a display 340, typically a touch screen display. The I/O interface 330 also optionally includes a keyboard and/or mouse (or other pointing device) 350 and a touchpad 355, a tactile output generator 357 (e.g., similar to the tactile output generator 167 described above with reference to fig. 1A), a sensor 359 (e.g., an optical sensor, an acceleration sensor, a proximity sensor, a touch sensitive sensor, and/or a contact intensity sensor (similar to the contact intensity sensor 165 described above with reference to fig. 1A)) for generating tactile output on the device 300. Memory 370 includes high-speed random access memory, such as DRAM, SRAM, DDR RAM, or other random access solid state memory devices; and optionally includes non-volatile memory such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, optical disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid state storage devices. Memory 370 optionally includes one or more storage devices located remotely from CPU 310. In some embodiments, memory 370 stores programs, modules, and data structures, or a subset thereof, similar to those stored in memory 102 of portable multifunction device 100 (fig. 1A). Furthermore, memory 370 optionally stores additional programs, modules, and data structures not present in memory 102 of portable multifunction device 100. For example, memory 370 of device 300 optionally stores drawing module 380, presentation module 382, word processing module 384, website creation module 386, disk editing module 388, and/or spreadsheet module 390, while memory 102 of portable multifunction device 100 (fig. 1A) optionally does not store these modules.
Each of the above elements in fig. 3 is optionally stored in one or more of the previously mentioned memory devices. Each of the above-described modules corresponds to a set of instructions for performing the above-described functions. The above-described modules or computer programs (e.g., sets of instructions or instructions) need not be implemented in a separate software program (such as a computer program (e.g., instructions), process or module, and thus the various subsets of these modules are optionally combined or otherwise rearranged in various embodiments. In some embodiments, memory 370 optionally stores a subset of the modules and data structures described above. Further, memory 370 optionally stores additional modules and data structures not described above.
Attention is now directed to embodiments of user interfaces optionally implemented on, for example, portable multifunction device 100.
Fig. 4A illustrates an exemplary user interface of an application menu on the portable multifunction device 100 in accordance with some embodiments. A similar user interface is optionally implemented on device 300. In some embodiments, the user interface 400 includes the following elements, or a subset or superset thereof:
Signal strength indicators 402 for wireless communications such as cellular signals and Wi-Fi signals;
Time 404;
Bluetooth indicator 405;
Battery status indicator 406;
tray 408 with icons for commonly used applications, such as:
An icon 416 labeled "phone" of the o phone module 138, the icon 416 optionally including an indicator 414 of the number of missed calls or voice mails;
An icon 418 labeled "mail" of the o email client module 140, the icon 418 optionally including an indicator 410 of the number of unread emails;
Icon 420 labeled "browser" of the omicron browser module 147; and
An icon 422 labeled "iPod" of the omicron video and music player module 152 (also known as iPod (trademark of Apple inc.) module 152); and
Icons of other applications, such as:
Icon 424 labeled "message" of omicron IM module 141;
Icon 426 labeled "calendar" of calendar module 148;
Icon 428 labeled "photo" of image management module 144;
an icon 430 labeled "camera" of the omicron camera module 143;
Icon 432 labeled "online video" of online video module 155;
icon 434 labeled "stock market" for the o stock market gadget 149-2;
Icon 436 labeled "map" of the omicron map module 154;
icon 438 labeled "weather" for the o weather gadget 149-1;
icon 440 labeled "clock" for the o alarm clock gadget 149-4;
Icon 442 labeled "fitness support" of omicron fitness support module 142;
Icon 444 labeled "note" of the omicron note module 153; and
An icon 446 labeled "set" for a set application or module that provides access to the settings of device 100 and its various applications 136.
It should be noted that the iconic labels shown in fig. 4A are merely exemplary. For example, the icon 422 of the video and music player module 152 is labeled "music" or "music player". Other labels are optionally used for various application icons. In some embodiments, the label of the respective application icon includes a name of the application corresponding to the respective application icon. In some embodiments, the label of a particular application icon is different from the name of the application corresponding to the particular application icon.
Fig. 4B illustrates an exemplary user interface on a device (e.g., device 300 of fig. 3) having a touch-sensitive surface 451 (e.g., tablet or touchpad 355 of fig. 3) separate from a display 450 (e.g., touch screen display 112). The device 300 also optionally includes one or more contact intensity sensors (e.g., one or more of the sensors 359) for detecting the intensity of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface 451 and/or one or more tactile output generators 357 for generating tactile outputs for a user of the device 300.
While some of the examples below will be given with reference to inputs on touch screen display 112 (where the touch sensitive surface and the display are combined), in some embodiments the device detects inputs on a touch sensitive surface separate from the display, as shown in fig. 4B. In some implementations, the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., 451 in fig. 4B) has a primary axis (e.g., 452 in fig. 4B) that corresponds to the primary axis (e.g., 453 in fig. 4B) on the display (e.g., 450). According to these embodiments, the device detects contact (e.g., 460 and 462 in fig. 4B) with the touch-sensitive surface 451 at a location corresponding to a respective location on the display (e.g., 460 corresponds to 468 and 462 corresponds to 470 in fig. 4B). In this way, when the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., 451 in FIG. 4B) is separated from the display (e.g., 450 in FIG. 4B) of the multifunction device, user inputs (e.g., contacts 460 and 462 and movement thereof) detected by the device on the touch-sensitive surface are used by the device to manipulate the user interface on the display. It should be appreciated that similar approaches are optionally used for other user interfaces described herein.
Additionally, while the following examples are primarily given with reference to finger inputs (e.g., finger contacts, single-finger flick gestures, finger swipe gestures), it should be understood that in some embodiments one or more of these finger inputs are replaced by input from another input device (e.g., mouse-based input or stylus input). For example, a swipe gesture is optionally replaced with a mouse click (e.g., rather than a contact), followed by movement of the cursor along the path of the swipe (e.g., rather than movement of the contact). As another example, a flick gesture is optionally replaced by a mouse click (e.g., instead of detection of contact, followed by ceasing to detect contact) when the cursor is over the position of the flick gesture. Similarly, when multiple user inputs are detected simultaneously, it should be appreciated that multiple computer mice are optionally used simultaneously, or that the mice and finger contacts are optionally used simultaneously.
Fig. 5A illustrates an exemplary personal electronic device 500. The device 500 includes a body 502. In some embodiments, device 500 may include some or all of the features described with respect to devices 100 and 300 (e.g., fig. 1A-4B). In some implementations, the device 500 has a touch sensitive display 504, hereinafter referred to as a touch screen 504. In addition to or in lieu of touch screen 504, device 500 has a display and a touch-sensitive surface. As with devices 100 and 300, in some implementations, touch screen 504 (or touch-sensitive surface) optionally includes one or more intensity sensors for detecting the intensity of an applied contact (e.g., touch). One or more intensity sensors of the touch screen 504 (or touch sensitive surface) may provide output data representative of the intensity of the touch. The user interface of the device 500 may respond to touches based on the intensity of the touches, meaning that touches of different intensities may invoke different user interface operations on the device 500.
Exemplary techniques for detecting and processing touch intensity are found, for example, in the following related patent applications: international patent application serial number PCT/US2013/040061 filed 5/8 a 2013, published as WIPO patent publication number WO/2013/169849; and international patent application serial number PCT/US2013/069483, filed 11/2013, entitled "Device,Method,and Graphical User Interface for Transitioning Between Touch Input to Display Output Relationships", published as WIPO patent publication No. WO/2014/105276, each of which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.
In some embodiments, the device 500 has one or more input mechanisms 506 and 508. The input mechanisms 506 and 508 (if included) may be in physical form. Examples of physical input mechanisms include push buttons and rotatable mechanisms. In some embodiments, the device 500 has one or more attachment mechanisms. Such attachment mechanisms, if included, may allow for attachment of the device 500 with, for example, a hat, glasses, earrings, necklace, shirt, jacket, bracelet, watchband, bracelet, pants, leash, shoe, purse, backpack, or the like. These attachment mechanisms allow the user to wear the device 500.
Fig. 5B depicts an exemplary personal electronic device 500. In some embodiments, the apparatus 500 may include some or all of the components described with reference to fig. 1A, 1B, and 3. The device 500 has a bus 512 that operatively couples an I/O section 514 with one or more computer processors 516 and memory 518. The I/O portion 514 may be connected to a display 504, which may have a touch sensitive component 522 and optionally an intensity sensor 524 (e.g., a contact intensity sensor). In addition, the I/O portion 514 may be connected to a communication unit 530 for receiving application and operating system data using Wi-Fi, bluetooth, near Field Communication (NFC), cellular, and/or other wireless communication technologies. The device 500 may include input mechanisms 506 and/or 508. For example, the input mechanism 506 is optionally a rotatable input device or a depressible input device and a rotatable input device. In some examples, the input mechanism 508 is optionally a button.
In some examples, the input mechanism 508 is optionally a microphone. Personal electronic device 500 optionally includes various sensors, such as a GPS sensor 532, an accelerometer 534, an orientation sensor 540 (e.g., compass), a gyroscope 536, a motion sensor 538, and/or combinations thereof, all of which are operatively connected to I/O section 514.
The memory 518 of the personal electronic device 500 may include one or more non-transitory computer-readable storage media for storing computer-executable instructions that, when executed by the one or more computer processors 516, may, for example, cause the computer processors to perform techniques described below, including processes 700, 800, 1000, 1200, 1400, 1600, 1800, 2000, and 2200 (corresponding to fig. 7,8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, respectively). A computer-readable storage medium may be any medium that can tangibly contain or store computer-executable instructions for use by or in connection with an instruction execution system, apparatus, and device. In some examples, the storage medium is a transitory computer-readable storage medium. In some examples, the storage medium is a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium may include, but is not limited to, magnetic storage devices, optical storage devices, and/or semiconductor storage devices. Examples of such storage devices include magnetic disks, optical disks based on CD, DVD, or blu-ray technology, and persistent solid state memories such as flash memory, solid state drives, etc. The personal electronic device 500 is not limited to the components and configuration of fig. 5B, but may include other components or additional components in a variety of configurations.
As used herein, the term "affordance" refers to a user-interactive graphical user interface object that is optionally displayed on a display screen of device 100, 300, and/or 500 (fig. 1A, 3, and 5A-5B). For example, an image (e.g., an icon), a button, and text (e.g., a hyperlink) optionally each constitute an affordance.
As used herein, the term "focus selector" refers to an input element for indicating the current portion of a user interface with which a user is interacting. In some implementations that include a cursor or other position marker, the cursor acts as a "focus selector" such that when the cursor detects an input (e.g., presses an input) on a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch pad 355 in fig. 3 or touch-sensitive surface 451 in fig. 4B) above a particular user interface element (e.g., a button, window, slider, or other user interface element), the particular user interface element is adjusted according to the detected input. In some implementations including a touch screen display (e.g., touch sensitive display system 112 in fig. 1A or touch screen 112 in fig. 4A) that enables direct interaction with user interface elements on the touch screen display, the contact detected on the touch screen acts as a "focus selector" such that when an input (e.g., a press input by a contact) is detected on the touch screen display at the location of a particular user interface element (e.g., a button, window, slider, or other user interface element), the particular user interface element is adjusted in accordance with the detected input. In some implementations, the focus is moved from one area of the user interface to another area of the user interface without a corresponding movement of the cursor or movement of contact on the touch screen display (e.g., by moving the focus from one button to another using a tab key or arrow key); in these implementations, the focus selector moves according to movement of the focus between different areas of the user interface. Regardless of the particular form that the focus selector takes, the focus selector is typically controlled by the user in order to deliver a user interface element (or contact on the touch screen display) that is interactive with the user of the user interface (e.g., by indicating to the device the element with which the user of the user interface desires to interact). For example, upon detection of a press input on a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touchpad or touch screen), the position of a focus selector (e.g., a cursor, contact, or selection box) over a respective button will indicate that the user desires to activate the respective button (rather than other user interface elements shown on the device display).
As used in the specification and claims, the term "characteristic intensity" of a contact refers to the characteristic of a contact based on one or more intensities of the contact. In some embodiments, the characteristic intensity is based on a plurality of intensity samples. The characteristic intensity is optionally based on a predefined number of intensity samples or a set of intensity samples acquired during a predetermined period of time (e.g., 0.05 seconds, 0.1 seconds, 0.2 seconds, 0.5 seconds, 1 second, 2 seconds, 5 seconds, 10 seconds) relative to a predefined event (e.g., after detection of contact, before or after detection of lift-off of contact, before or after detection of start of movement of contact, before or after detection of end of contact, and/or before or after detection of decrease in intensity of contact). The characteristic intensity of the contact is optionally based on one or more of: maximum value of intensity of contact, average value of intensity of contact, value at first 10% of intensity of contact, half maximum value of intensity of contact, 90% maximum value of intensity of contact, etc. In some embodiments, the duration of the contact is used in determining the characteristic intensity (e.g., when the characteristic intensity is an average of the intensity of the contact over time). In some embodiments, the characteristic intensity is compared to a set of one or more intensity thresholds to determine whether the user has performed an operation. For example, the set of one or more intensity thresholds optionally includes a first intensity threshold and a second intensity threshold. In this example, contact of the feature strength that does not exceed the first threshold results in a first operation, contact of the feature strength that exceeds the first strength threshold but does not exceed the second strength threshold results in a second operation, and contact of the feature strength that exceeds the second threshold results in a third operation. In some implementations, a comparison between the feature strength and one or more thresholds is used to determine whether to perform one or more operations (e.g., whether to perform or forgo performing the respective operations) rather than for determining whether to perform the first or second operations.
Attention is now directed to embodiments of a user interface ("UI") and associated processes implemented on an electronic device, such as portable multifunction device 100, device 300, or device 500.
Fig. 6A-6L illustrate exemplary user interfaces for initiating communications when a computer system is unable to reach a terrestrial wireless communication network, according to some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in fig. 7 and 8.
In some implementations, any of the inputs described herein (e.g., inputs 610A、610B、610C、610D、606G、610I、612M、610M、613M、616M、618M、622M、624M、608N、616M、608O、610O、608P、608Q、604R、604S and/or 610S) are or include touch inputs (e.g., tap gestures and/or swipe gestures). In some implementations, any of the inputs described herein (e.g., inputs 610A、610B、610C、610D、606G、610I、612M、610M、613M、616M、618M、622M、624M、608N、616M、608O、610O、608P、608Q、604R、604S and/or 610S) are or include voice inputs (e.g., voice commands to select a user interface element or to activate a feature or perform a function, such as a feature or function associated with a user interface element). In some implementations, any of the inputs described herein (e.g., inputs 610A、610B、610C、610D、606G、610I、612M、610M、613M、616M、618M、622M、624M、608N、616M、608O、610O、608P、608Q、604R、604S and/or 610S) are or include air gestures (e.g., air gestures to select a user interface element or to activate a feature or perform a function, such as a feature or function associated with a user interface element). In some embodiments, any of the inputs described herein (e.g., inputs 610A、610B、610C、610D、606G、610I、612M、610M、613M、616M、618M、622M、624M、608N、616M、608O、610O、608P、608Q、604R、604S and/or 610S) are or include activation (e.g., pressing, rotating, and/or moving) of a hardware device (e.g., a button, a rotatable input mechanism, a rotatable depressible input mechanism, a mouse button, a remote control button, and/or a joystick). In some embodiments, any of the user interface elements described herein as being selected (e.g., icons, affordances, buttons, and/or selectable options) are selected by activating a hardware device when the user interface element is in focus (e.g., highlighted, bolded, outlined, visually distinguished from other user interface elements, and/or located at or near a cursor).
Fig. 6A-6D illustrate exemplary interfaces for initiating a communication (e.g., an audio call and/or a text message). Fig. 6A and 6C include interfaces for initiating a call to an emergency service (e.g., 911). Fig. 6B and 6D include interfaces for initiating calls to non-emergency services.
Fig. 6A and 6B illustrate a process for attempting to initiate a call to an emergency service and a non-emergency entity. Fig. 6A and 6B show a computer system 600 with a touch sensitive display 601. In fig. 6A and 6B, computer system 600 displays call interfaces 602A and 602B, respectively, for initiating a call. The call interfaces 602A and 602B include (respective) keypads 604A and 604B, text areas 608, (respective) call buttons 606A and 606B, and network indicators 607. In some embodiments, computer system 600 displays call interface 602A and call interface 602B in response to receiving a selection of a (e.g., on-home screen) telephony application affordance.
The network indicator 607 displays the availability of the computer system 600 to communicate with terrestrial wireless communications to send communications (e.g., initiate a call). In some embodiments, the terrestrial wireless communication network is a cellular network and/or an internet network (e.g., wi-Fi). Computer system 600 determines the availability of the cellular network based on the strength and consistency of the cellular network's communication with computer system 600. In fig. 6A-6B, the network indicator 607 shows that the cellular network is available to initiate a call. However, in some embodiments, computer system 600 receives a request to initiate a call when the cellular network is not available.
In fig. 6A, computer system 600 detects one or more inputs on keypad 604 and an input 610A (e.g., a tap gesture or other selection input) on call button 606A to dial a number for emergency services. Computer system 600 displays the emergency service as 911 in text region 608. Other emergency services may be contacted as follows; for example: 999 in the uk, 110 and/or 119 in japan and 000 in australia.
In response to detecting input 610A on call button 606A, computer system 600 attempts to initiate a call for emergency services and displays call interface 602E shown in fig. 6E, discussed below.
In fig. 6B, computer system 600 detects one or more inputs on keypad 604B and an input 610B (e.g., a tap gesture or other selection input) on call button 606B to dial a non-urgent entity. Computer system 600 displays the non-emergency entity as 123-456-7890. In some embodiments, the non-emergency entity is a reachable entity or telephone number that is not associated with the emergency service, such as: friends or shops.
In response to detecting input 610B on call button 606B, computer system 600 attempts to initiate a call and connect to the non-emergency entity and displays call interface 602F shown in fig. 6F, described below.
Fig. 6C and 6D illustrate an alternative procedure from fig. 6A and 6B for attempting to initiate a call to an emergency service and a non-emergency entity. Fig. 6C and 6D show an exemplary user interface for initiating a call using an external computer system 620 with a touch sensitive display 621. In fig. 6C and 6D, external computer system 620 displays watch interfaces 602C and 602D for initiating a call.
In FIG. 6C, the watch interface 602C includes a shutdown slider 604C, a medical ID slider 606C, and an emergency SOS slider 608C. In response to detecting an input on the shutdown slider 604C, the external computer system 620 shuts down. In response to detecting the input on the medical ID slider 606C, the external computer system 620 displays medical identification information about the user of the external computer system 620. In some implementations, the external computer system 620 displays the watch interface 602C in response to the external computer system 620 detecting an input (e.g., an input on a button 622 (e.g., pressing and holding) or a voice command (e.g., "display power option")).
In response to detecting the input 610C on the emergency SOS slider 608C, the external computer system 620 attempts to initiate a call and connect to the emergency service. In some embodiments, external computer system 620 may initiate a call by sending a request to paired computer system 600 to dial an emergency service and display call interface 602F on computer device 600 of fig. 6F, described below.
In fig. 6D, watch interface 602D includes keypad 604D, end call button 606D, and text region 612D. External computer system 620 detects one or more inputs (e.g., a tap gesture or other selection input) on keypad 604D to dial non-emergency number "123-456-7890". External computer system 620 displays watch interface 602D in response to one or more inputs selecting a telephone affordance for initiating a communication.
In response to receiving input 610D on call button 606D, external computer system 620 attempts to initiate a call and connect to a non-emergency number and displays call interface 602F of fig. 6F described below. In some embodiments, one or more inputs on keypad 604D dials an emergency number (e.g., "911") and, in response to receiving input 610D on call button 606D, external computer system 620 attempts to initiate a call and connect to emergency services, displaying call interface 602E of fig. 6E, described below.
In fig. 6E-6J, computer system 600 displays an interface for managing communications when no cellular services are available. Fig. 6E, 6G, and 6I include interfaces for managing calls to emergency services, and fig. 6F, 6H, and 6J include interfaces for managing calls to non-emergency services. In fig. 6E-6J, computer system 600 updates (e.g., replaces) network indicator 607 to indicate that no terrestrial wireless communication network is available to initiate the call. In some embodiments, determining that no terrestrial wireless communication network is available includes attempting other carrier cellular networks (e.g., telephone SIMs or esims) in addition to the network associated with computer system 600. The connection indicator 605 may initially display, for example, "in progress" when attempting to initiate a call, and then display, for example, "no connection" to indicate that no terrestrial wireless communication network is available to connect to the call.
The end call button 609 is a selectable button for ending a call or stopping attempting to initiate a call. In response to receiving a selection of the end call button 609, the computer system 600 displays the call interface 602A depicted in fig. 6A.
In fig. 6E-6J, computer system 600 displays call management button 603 (e.g., as shown and further described in fig. 6K-6L). The call management button 603 is a variety of selectable buttons that provide functions for managing calls. In some embodiments, in response to determining that no cellular service is available, computer system 600 displays call management button 603 as non-selectable (e.g., grayed out). In some embodiments, computer system 600 discards the display of call management button 603 in fig. 6E-6J in response to determining that no cellular service is available.
Fig. 6E and 6F illustrate the continuation of the process of attempting to initiate calls to emergency services and non-emergency entities of fig. 6A and 6C and fig. 6B and 6D, respectively. In fig. 6E and 6F, computer system 600 displays call management interfaces 602E and 602F, respectively, for managing calls.
In fig. 6E, call management interface 602E displays a call to 911 in text region 608 to indicate that a call to emergency services has been initiated. In some embodiments, computer system 600 displays call management interface 602E in response to detecting input 610A on call button 606 of fig. 6A that attempts to initiate a call for emergency services. In some embodiments, computer system 600 displays management interface 602E in response to detecting input 610C on emergency SOS slider 608C of fig. 6C. After displaying call management interface 602E without successfully initiating the call for a threshold amount of time, computer system 600 displays call management interface 602G described below in fig. 6G.
In some embodiments, computer system 600 displays an animated transition from call management interface 602E to call management interface 602G that includes ending call button 609 moving (e.g., sliding) to the left over time (e.g., as shown in fig. 6F 1) and then displaying an animation of sending sms button 604G via satellite communications (e.g., as shown in fig. 6F 2). In some embodiments, as shown in fig. 6F1, 6F2, and 6G, the computer system 600 outputs the haptic output 619 and/or the audio output 650 when the display of the send via satellite communication short message button 604G (e.g., in fig. 6F 1) is initiated and/or when the send via satellite communication short message button 604G (e.g., in fig. 6F2 and/or 6G) is displayed. Outputting non-visual output (e.g., haptic output 619 and/or audio output 650) informs the user: if the user does not look at the display 601 (e.g., if the computer system 600 is against the user's ear), a send SMS option via satellite may be available.
In FIG. 6F, computer system 600 displays call management interface 602F while attempting to initiate a call to non-emergency number 123-456-7890. In response to detecting input 610B on call button 606 of fig. 6B or in response to receiving input 610D on call button 606D of fig. 6D described above, computer system 600 displays call management interface 602F.
Fig. 6G and 6H illustrate the continuation of the process of attempting to initiate calls to emergency services and non-emergency entities of fig. 6E (or fig. 6F 2) and 6F, respectively.
In fig. 6G, because computer system 600 is attempting to initiate a call for emergency services when no terrestrial wireless communication network is available, computer system 600 displays no connection in connection indicator 605 and a send sms button 604G via satellite communication in call management interface 602G.
In some embodiments, in response to determining that no terrestrial wireless communication network is reachable, computer system 600 displays call back option 611 (e.g., as shown and described with respect to fig. 6H). In response to receiving input on the call back option 611, the computer system 600 attempts to initiate the call again via the terrestrial wireless communication network. In some embodiments, when no terrestrial wireless communication network is available, computer system 600 replaces the call back option (e.g., after a predetermined amount of time) with send short message button 604G via satellite communication. In some embodiments, when an attempt to call an emergency service or number fails (e.g., because no terrestrial wireless communication network is available), computer system 600 continues to attempt to initiate a call to the emergency service or number via the terrestrial wireless communication network (e.g., as a background process).
In response to detecting the input 606G on the send message via satellite button 604G, the computer system 600 initiates a process for sending a message via one or more satellites and displays the report interface 602M shown in fig. 6M discussed below. In some embodiments, computer system 600 continues to attempt to initiate the call via the terrestrial wireless communication network while displaying send message button 604G via satellite communication. After displaying the call management interface 602G without receiving user input for a threshold amount of time (e.g., 3 seconds, 5 seconds, or 10 seconds), the computer system 600 displays a countdown in the send via satellite communication short message button 604G in the call management interface 602I, as described below in fig. 6I.
In fig. 6H, a call management interface 602H for calling a non-emergency entity is displayed at some point in time during call initiation similar to the call management interface 602F for calling emergency services of fig. 6G. For example, computer system 600 displays call management interface 602H in response to displaying call management interface 602F (e.g., as described in fig. 6F) for a threshold amount of time without receiving input. In fig. 6H, the connection indicator shows (e.g., updated to show) that the call has failed. In contrast to the call management interface 602G for calling emergency services, because the call in fig. 6H is for a non-emergency entity, the computer system 600 displays the back-call button 611 instead of displaying the option to send a short message (e.g., the send short message button 604G via satellite communication). For example, for communicating to non-emergency contacts, computer system 600 foregoes the display of a send SMS button via satellite communications. In some embodiments, computer system 600 may display a send via satellite SMS option for non-emergency communications and, in response to receiving input on a send via satellite SMS button, display a report interface 602M shown in FIG. 6M discussed below.
Fig. 6I and 6J illustrate the continuation of the process of attempting to initiate calls to emergency services and non-emergency entities of fig. 6G and 6H, respectively. In fig. 6I, call management interface 602I replaces call management interface 602G with a send sms button via satellite communication 604I indicating a time remaining countdown. In some embodiments, the countdown indicates a time remaining until a message (e.g., an emergency SOS message) is automatically sent via satellite communication. In some embodiments, the countdown indicates the time remaining for computer system 600 to enter a mode (e.g., fig. 6L1 or fig. 6M) for generating and transmitting emergency communications via satellite communications. In some embodiments, as shown in fig. 6I, computer system 600 outputs haptic output 619 and/or audio output 650 when the countdown is initiated. Outputting non-visual output (e.g., haptic output 619 and/or audio output 650) informs the user: if the user does not look at display 601 (e.g., if computer system 600 or a display generating component of computer system 600 is against the user's ear), the countdown has started.
In FIG. 6I, before the countdown expires, the computer system 600 detects an input 606I on the send SMS button 604I via satellite communication. In response to detecting the input 606I on the send sms button 604I via satellite communication, the computer system 600 initiates a process for sending a sms via one or more satellites and displays an information interface 602L1 (e.g., as shown in fig. 6L 1) or a management interface 602M (e.g., as shown in fig. 6M).
In fig. 6J, the management interface 602J is similar to the management interfaces 602F and 602H of fig. 6F and 6H, respectively. The management interface 602J does not include a send sms button 604I via satellite communication nor does it include a countdown to the time remaining for the message to be automatically sent. In some embodiments, the non-emergency communication may display a send SMS option via satellite and/or an amount of time remaining, and in response to receiving an input on a send SMS button via satellite communication, computer system 600 displays management interface 602M shown in FIG. 6M discussed below.
Fig. 6K and 6L illustrate a continuation of the process of fig. 6I and 6J for attempting to initiate calls to emergency services and non-emergency entities. Fig. 6K and 6L show that computer system 600 has an interface for managing communications when cellular services are available. Call interfaces 602K (in fig. 6K) and 602L (in fig. 6L) are similar to call interfaces 602E (in fig. 6E) and 602F (in fig. 6F), respectively, except that cellular services are available. In fig. 6K-6L, network indicator 607 indicates that cellular service is available to initiate the call.
Fig. 6K and 6L show that the computer system 600 has a call management button 603. The call management button 603 is a selectable button that provides a function for managing a call. Call management buttons include a mute button, a keypad button, a speaker button, an add call button, a video call button, and a contact button. In fig. 6K and 6L, when the computer system 600 initiates a call, the computer system 600 displays the add call button and the video call button as non-selectable (e.g., grayed out). In some embodiments, the call button and the video call button are indicated as selectable (e.g., not grayed out) in response to the computer system 600 connecting the call with the recipient.
In fig. 6K, computer system 600 displays call management interface 602K in response to detecting input 610A on call button 606 of fig. 6A that is attempting to initiate a call for emergency services. In some embodiments, computer system 600 displays call management interface 602E in response to detecting input 610C on emergency SOS slider 608C of fig. 6C. In contrast to call management interface 602E, connection indicator 605 in call management interface 602K displays that a call for emergency services is being called (e.g., as opposed to no connection in call management interface 602E).
In fig. 6L, computer system 600 displays management interface 602L in response to detecting input 610B on call button 606 of fig. 6B attempting to initiate a call to a non-emergency entity. In some embodiments, computer system 600 displays call management interface 602L in response to detecting input 610D on call button 606D of fig. 6D. In contrast to call management interface 602F, connection indicator 605 in call management interface 602L displays that a call for non-emergency services is being called (e.g., as opposed to "call failure" in call management interface 602J).
Fig. 6L 1-6X 4 illustrate exemplary user interfaces for communicating in a low bandwidth communication mode, according to some embodiments. In fig. 6L 1-6W, computer system 600 determines that no terrestrial wireless communication network is available to transmit the communication. For some communications, such as emergency messages, it is desirable to send the message despite the fact that no terrestrial wireless communication network is available. In such cases, the message may be sent via a bandwidth-limited alternative communication network (such as via a satellite or peer-to-peer network). In some implementations, the limited bandwidth message (e.g., a "low bandwidth message") is a compressed message with limited data for transmission.
In fig. 6L1, computer system 600 displays an information interface 602L1 that provides information to a user regarding the process of sending messages via an alternative communication network. In some embodiments, as shown in fig. 6L1, computer system 600 outputs haptic output 619 and/or audio output 650 when information interface 602L1 is displayed. Outputting non-visual output (e.g., haptic output 619 and/or audio output 650) informs the user: if the user is not looking at display 601 (e.g., if computer system 600 or a display generating component of computer system 600 is against the user's ear), then computer system 600 is already in the process of sending a message via the alternative communication network.
Information interface 602L1 includes graphical instructions 604L1, text instructions 606L1, notifications 608L1, text instructions 610L1, information sharing notifications 612L1, and selectable continuation options 614L1. The graphical instructions 604L1 include a graphical representation of a satellite and a graphical representation of a user's hand holding a computer system (e.g., a smart phone and/or computer system 600) to graphically illustrate that the computer system 600 may be used to communicate via satellite communications. In some embodiments, as shown in fig. 6L1, the graphical instructions 604L1 include an animation that shows the satellite moving along a path (e.g., a curved path represented by a small dot) and/or the user's hand and/or computer system moving (e.g., left-right) to follow the satellite in order to demonstrate that the user may (or must) move the computer system 600 to align with the satellite. The text instructions 606L1 instruct the user to go outside to obtain a connection between the computer system 600 and the satellite. Notification 608L1 notifies the user: messages sent via an alternative communication network (e.g., via satellite communications) will require a longer time to send than messages sent via a terrestrial network (e.g., cellular network). The text instruction 610L1 instructs the user to answer the question to get a faster response. The information sharing notification 612L1 notifies the user of: the user's location and medical information may be shared in transmitting communications via satellite. The selectable continue option 614L1 may be selected (e.g., via an input such as a tap or other selection input) to continue the process of sending communications to emergency services via satellite. In response to detecting selection 616L1 in FIG. 6L1, computer system 600 displays report interface 602M discussed with reference to FIG. 6M.
In fig. 6M-6Q, computer system 600 displays reporting interfaces 602M, 602N, 602O, 602P, and 602Q, which include a first set of options 604M, a second set of options 604N, a third set of options 604O, a fourth set of options 604P, and a fifth set of options 604Q, respectively ("emergency options"). The selection of the emergency option is included in a low bandwidth message that includes an emergency report. In some embodiments, the series of options may only be available for transmitting emergency reports when no terrestrial wireless communication network is available.
In some embodiments, computer system 600 connects to one or more satellites when no terrestrial wireless communication network is available for making a call. In the event that the connection with the satellite is broken and computer system 600 is unable to communicate with the satellite, computer system 600 may maintain display of reporting interfaces 602M, 602N, 602O, 602P, and/or 602Q and may continue to receive selection of the emergency option.
The emergency options display options corresponding to information about the emergency report. In response to input on the emergency options, computer system 600 generates an emergency report without the need to display a software keyboard. In some embodiments, the options provided by computer system 600 enable generation of messages that can be sent by low bandwidth communications. In some embodiments, computer system 600 displays emergency options without displaying a messaging user interface that includes a messaging conversation and/or a message history.
In fig. 6M, computer system 600 displays report interface 602M. Report interface 602M includes an interface for receiving a selection of a type of emergency option via a selection of an option in first set of options 604M. The first set of options 604M includes selectable options for various types of emergency situations (e.g., medical, police, fire, car or vehicle, and search and rescue). In response to receiving a selection of an emergency type (e.g., an option in the first set of options 604M), the emergency type is included in an emergency report to be submitted to the emergency service. For example, the first set of options 604M includes a medical option 606M and an automobile or vehicle option 608M. In response to receiving input 616M on medical option 606M, computer system 600 displays report interface 602O of fig. 6O, as described below. In response to receiving input 612M on car or vehicle option 608M, computer system 600 displays reporting interface 602N of fig. 6N.
In fig. 6M, skip button 616 indicates that selection of one of the options in the first set of options 604M may be skipped. In response to receiving input 613M on skip option 616, computer system 600 displays user interface 602P depicted in fig. 6P. Although computer system 600 displays skip button 616 as selectable in report interface 602M, in some embodiments, first set of options 604M are not skipped. The skippable emergency options display a skip button 616 to advance to a subsequent set (e.g., the next set) of emergency options. If a set of options is not skippable, computer system 600 foregoes displaying skip button 616 (e.g., displays a user interface without displaying skip button 616). In some implementations, the skip button 616 is grayed out to indicate that the skip button 616 is not selectable.
In fig. 6N-6O, computer system 600 displays reporting interfaces 602N and 602O that respectively include subsequent questions responsive to selection of car or vehicle emergency option 608M and medical option 606M.
In fig. 6N, report interface 602N includes a second set of options 604N and a skip option 616. The second set of options 604N includes selectable follow-up options related to the car or vehicle emergency option 608M of fig. 6M. In response to receiving a selection of a car or vehicle emergency type (e.g., an option in the second set of options 604N), the car or vehicle emergency type is included in an emergency report to be submitted to emergency services. In some embodiments, computer system 600 displays a second set of options 602N based on the type of emergency selected from first set of options 604M. In some implementations, the second set of options 602N is based on a subsequent question of the type of emergency selected from the first set of options 604M.
The second set of options 604N includes a vehicle collision option 606N and other options 618N. In response to receiving input 608N on vehicle collision option 606N, computer system 600 displays reporting interface 602P of fig. 6P, as described below. In some embodiments, in response to receiving input 608N on vehicle collision option 606N, computer system 600 displays summary interface 602R. In response to receiving input on other options 618N, computer system 600 displays report interface 602V of fig. 6V.
In fig. 6O, report interface 602O includes a third set of options 604O including a plurality of selectable follow-up options related to who needs to assist the medical emergency selected by input 616M in fig. 6M. In response to receiving a selection of who needs assistance (e.g., the options of the third set of options 604O), the selection is included in an emergency report to be submitted to the emergency service. In response to receiving input 608O on who needs help option 606O (e.g., "me"), computer system 600 displays report interface 602Q of fig. 6Q, as described below. In some embodiments, computer system 600 displays summary interface 602S in response to receiving input 608O on who needs help option 606O.
In fig. 6P-6Q, computer system 600 displays reporting interfaces 602P and 602Q that respectively include subsequent questions for selecting vehicle collision option 606N and who needs help option 606O. In fig. 6P, report interface 602P displays an interface for receiving a selection indicating whether the user is in a vehicle crash incident via a fourth set of options 604P. The fourth set of options 604P includes a plurality of selectable follow-up options related to whether the user is in an incident. In response to receiving a selection (e.g., the option of the fourth set of options 604P) indicating whether the user is in an incident, the selection is included in an emergency report to be submitted to an emergency service. In fig. 6P, computer system 600 detects an input 608P on yes option 606P (e.g., indicating that the user is in an accident location). In response to receiving input 608P on yes option 606P, computer system 600 displays summary interface 602R of FIG. 6R.
In some embodiments, computer system 600 displays additional reporting interfaces and selectable follow-up options specific to the selected car or vehicle option 604M, the vehicle collision option 606N, and/or generally included for emergency situations. For example, the additional reporting interface includes a number of selectable follow-up questions regarding the status of the individual and who needs help.
In some embodiments, computer system 600 displays a send option in response to receiving input on the emergency option. In response to receiving input 608P on yes option 606P, computer system 600 displays alignment interface 902C described below in fig. 9C or messaging interface 602T described below in fig. 6T.
In fig. 6Q, report interface 602Q displays an interface for selecting the option that best describes the emergency. Report interface 602Q includes a fifth set of options 604Q. The fifth set of options 604Q does not include the skip option 616 because the reporting interface 602Q cannot skip based on the medical option 606M and/or who needs the help option 606O. In response to receiving a selection of an option in the fifth set of options 604Q, the selection is included in an emergency report to be submitted to the emergency service. The fifth set of options 604Q is specific to who needs help options 606O of fig. 6O. The fifth set of options 604Q includes chest pain option 606Q. In response to receiving input 608Q on chest pain option 606Q, computer system 600 displays summary interface 602S of fig. 6S.
In some embodiments, computer system 600 displays additional reporting interfaces and selectable follow-up options specific to medical option 606M, who needs help option 606O, and/or commonly included for most emergency situations. For example, the additional reporting interface includes a number of selectable follow-up questions regarding the status of the individual and whether they are conscious.
In some embodiments, in response to receiving input 608Q on chest pain option 606Q, computer system 600 displays alignment interface 902C described below in fig. 9C or report interface 602U described in fig. 6U.
In fig. 6R and 6S, computer system 600 displays summary interfaces 602R and 602S, respectively. Computer system 600 displays summary interfaces 602R and 602S in response to receiving a selection of the emergency options described above. In some embodiments, the computer system displays summary interfaces 602R and 602S in response to receiving input on the additional report interfaces, as described above. In some embodiments, computer system 600 displays summary interfaces 602R and 602S in response to receiving input at the reporting interface related to the type of emergency and/or the subsequent problem.
The summary interfaces 602R and 602S include send options 606R and 606S, no send options 608R and 608S, and timers 610R and 610S, respectively. In response to receiving input 604R on send option 606R and input 610S on send option 606S, computer system 600 sends an emergency report to the emergency service. In response to receiving input on the not send options 608R and 608S, the computer system 600 displays the respective previous report interfaces 602N and 602O. In some embodiments, in response to receiving input on the do not send options 608R and 608S, the computer system 600 displays the previously displayed report interfaces 602P and 602Q, respectively, and/or a home screen of the computer system 600. Timer 610R indicates the amount of time (e.g., in seconds) remaining before the computer system automatically sends an emergency report including the displayed information. In some embodiments, computer system 600 automatically sends the emergency report in response to not receiving input 604R and 604S on send options 608R and 608S, respectively, or input on no send options 606R and 606S, respectively, within a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 seconds, 10 seconds, 30 seconds, or 1 minute). In response to receiving inputs 604R and 604S on send options 606R and 606S before the timer expires, computer system 600 sends an emergency report.
In fig. 6R, summary interface 602R displays a description of information in the emergency report to be submitted. The information in the emergency report includes selections received in each of the reporting interface 602M (e.g., car or vehicle options 608M), the reporting interface 602N (e.g., vehicle collision options 606N), and the reporting interface 606P (e.g., accident location options 606P). The information in the emergency report also includes information not present in the previously displayed report interface, such as the location of computer system 600.
In response to receiving input 604R on send option 606R, computer system 600 displays messaging interface 602T. In response to not receiving input on send option 606R within a predetermined period of time, computer system 600 displays messaging interface 602T.
In fig. 6S, summary interface 602S displays a description of information in the emergency report to be submitted. The information in the emergency report includes selections received in each of report interface 602M (e.g., medical option 606M), report interface 606P (e.g., who needs help option 606O), and report interface 602Q (e.g., chest pain option 606Q). The information in the emergency report also includes information not previously displayed in the report interface, such as the location of computer system 600 and medical ID information (shown as blood type and prior medical history) about the user stored on computer system 600. The medical ID is included in summary interface 602S because computer system 600 determines information related to the type of emergency.
In response to receiving input 604R on send option 606R and input 604S on send option 606S, computer system 600 displays an alignment interface. The alignment interface is used to align the computer system 600 with a satellite, similar to the alignment interface 902C described in FIG. 9C. In some embodiments, computer system 600 may need to be properly aligned with a satellite in order to communicate via satellite communications.
In some embodiments, after the report interface 602M, 602N, 602O, 602P, or 602Q described above is displayed, the touch sensitive display 601 is turned off. In some implementations, in response to receiving an indication that the touch sensitive display 601 is off for a threshold period of time (e.g., 10 seconds, 30 seconds, or one minute), the computer system 600 turns on the touch sensitive display without receiving input on the computer system 600.
The report and/or summary interfaces 602M, 602N, 602O, 602P, 602Q, 602R, and 602S described above include an end button 614, which is a selectable button for ending the display of the respective interfaces. In fig. 6M, in response to detecting input 618M on end button 614, computer system 600 displays a confirmation prompt 620M (e.g., computer system 600 does not immediately dismiss reporting interface 602M (e.g., ends an emergency communication session) in response to detecting selection of end button 614). In fig. 6M1, a confirmation prompt 620M is displayed at the top of the user interface 602M (e.g., as a pop-up menu), and the user interface 602M is obscured (e.g., grayed out or obscured). Confirmation prompt 620M includes text 620M1 describing that the user is about to end the emergency communication session, a confirmation option 620M2, and a cancel option 620M3. In response to detecting input 622M on acknowledgement option 620M2, computer system 600 ends the emergency communication session. In response to detecting the input 624M on the cancel option 620M3, the computer system 600 returns to the user interface 602M as shown in fig. 6M (e.g., stops displaying the confirmation prompt 620M and displays the user interface 602M that is not obscured). Similarly, in response to detecting input 610O on end button 614 in fig. 6O, computer system 600 displays a confirmation prompt (e.g., confirmation prompt 620M of fig. 6M1 (e.g., computer system 600 does not immediately dismiss reporting interface 602O (e.g., ends an emergency communication session) in response to detecting selection of end button 614)).
In some embodiments, in response to receiving a selection of end button 614, computer system 600 displays call interface 602G of fig. 6G or call interface 602A of fig. 6A. In some embodiments, in response to receiving a selection of end button 614, computer system 600 displays a home screen. The report and/or summary interfaces 602M, 602N, 602O, 602P, 602Q, 602R, and 602S described above include a back button 615, which is a selectable button for returning the computer system 600 to displaying the previously displayed interfaces. For example, in response to receiving input 610M on return button 615, computer system 600 displays call interface 602G of fig. 6G or call interface 602A of fig. 6A.
Turning to fig. 6T and 6U, computer system 600 displays messaging interfaces 602T and 602U. Messaging interfaces 602T and 602U display low bandwidth messages sent via satellite communications that include emergency reports from summary interfaces 602R and 602S. Message interfaces 602T and 602U include a back button 615, connection assistants 610T and 610U, sharing summaries 614T and 614U, stop sharing buttons 612T and 612U, message method indicators 622T and 622U, messages 620T and 620U, status indicators 624T and 624U, text boxes 616T and 616U, and send buttons 618T and 618U, respectively. Messaging interfaces 602T and 602U are message threads for emergency services.
The connection assistants 610T and 610U are selectable indicators for satellite communications. In response to sending messages 620T and 620U via satellite communications, computer system 600 displays connection assistants 610T and 610U. The connection assistants 610T and 610U provide visual indications to the computer system 600 of the current connection status with the satellite for communication. In response to receiving a selection of the connection assistants 610T and 610U, the computer system 600 displays the alignment interface 902F of FIG. 9F, as described below. In some embodiments, the connection assistants 610T and 610U remain between other user interfaces (such as a notes interface and/or a browser interface) as visual indications of the computer system 600 being connected via satellite communications.
In some embodiments, computer system 600 displays the banner simultaneously with messaging interfaces 602T and 602U. The banner includes a real-time indication of the connection status of the computer system 600. The real-time indication on the banner includes a connection assistant, similar to banner 926 of messaging interface 902M of FIG. 9M, as described below. The banner may include an indication that messages 620T and 620U are being sent via satellite, similar to messaging interface 902K of fig. 9K below. In response to receiving the selection of the banner, computer system 600 displays a connection assistant user interface that is larger than the banner, similar to alignment interface 902G of FIG. 9G. In response to receiving input displaying a different user interface (such as a notes interface and/or a browser interface), the banner may be replaced with the connection assistants 610T and 610U as described above, or banner 926 similar to messaging interface 902M of FIG. 9M as described below.
Messages 620T and 620U display messages that have been transmitted to emergency services. Status indicators 624T and 624U indicate the status of messages 620T and 620U, respectively, as sent. Message method indicators 622T and 622U describe the method by which a message has been sent as "sent via satellite".
The shared summaries 614T and 614U indicate additional recipients of messages 620T and 620U, respectively. The sharing summaries 614T and 614U display the additional recipients as "emergency contacts," however, as described below, in some embodiments, the additional recipients may be selected as described in the query user interface 1102 of fig. 11A. The additional recipients receive messages 620T and 620U in real-time, but the additional recipients cannot interact with the sender in the same thread that emergency services or reported the emergency message, as described in the messaging user interface 1114 of fig. 11H.
In fig. 6T, message 620T includes a summary of the emergency report sent to the emergency service based on the information included in summary interface 602R depicted in fig. 6R. In some embodiments, when message 620T is sent via satellite, the graphical element shows in a banner that is similar to banner 926 described in messaging interface 902K of fig. 9K that the message is being sent and the progress of the message.
In fig. 6U, message 620U includes a summary of the emergency report sent to the emergency service based on the information in summary interface 602S described in fig. 6S. In some embodiments, when message 620U is sent via satellite, the graphical element shows that the message is being sent and the progress of the message, similar to banner 926 described in messaging interface 902K of FIG. 9K.
In FIG. 6V, computer system 600 displays report interface 602V. Report interface 602V includes text box 609V for describing an emergency, continue option 604V, suggestion text 606V, and keypad 608V. In response to input on the keypad 608V and/or the suggestion text 606V, the computer system 600 displays a message to be included in the emergency report. In some embodiments, a maximum amount of text and/or characters (e.g., 50, 100, or 200 characters) may be added in text box 609V of reporting interface 602V. In fig. 6V1, as more text is entered into text box 609V, computer system 600 displays a text limit indicator 610V that includes a numerical indication of the number of characters (e.g., 17) that have been entered into text box 609V and/or the maximum number of characters (e.g., 50) that can be added to text box 609V. In some embodiments, the computer system displays a text restriction indicator 610V (e.g., text restriction 7/50) in the report interface 602V in fig. 6V. In fig. 6V1, the text restriction indicator 610V indicates that the amount of text in the text box 609V is approaching the maximum amount. In some implementations, the computer system 600 displays the text restriction indicator 610V when the amount of text in the text box 609V reaches a threshold amount (e.g., 10 or 15 characters). In some embodiments, as text is added to text box 609V, computer system 600 updates the numeric portion of text restriction indicator 610V (e.g., as one or more characters are added, such as from 17/50 to 18/50 to 19/50, etc.). When the amount of text in text box 609V reaches a maximum amount, computer system 600 updates text limit indicator 610V to indicate that the maximum amount has been reached (e.g., display an exclamation mark and text "message too long"), as shown in FIG. 6V 2.
In response to receiving the input on 604V, computer system 600 displays report interface 602P of fig. 6P, summary interface 602R of fig. 6R, or additional follow-up questions and selectable follow-up options specific to car or vehicle option 604M and/or vehicle collision option 606N.
In FIG. 6W, the computer system displays a summary interface 602W. Summary interface 602W displays a summary of the received selections of emergency options until computer system 600 determines that the user is unresponsive. The summary interface 602W includes an emergency report summary 604W, a timer 610W, a notification 606W, and a no send button 608W. In response to not receiving input at reporting interface 602Q within a standby period (e.g., 10 seconds, 30 seconds, or 1 minute), computer system 600 determines that the user is unresponsive and prepares what information has been answered for submission to emergency services. Notification 606W indicates that the computer system has determined that the user is unresponsive.
In response to receiving the input on the not send button 608W, the computer system 600 displays the summary interface 602W. However, in response to not receiving an input on the no send button 608W or the end button 614 within the time limit (e.g., in seconds) of the timer 610W, the computer system 600 sends an emergency report to the emergency service even if the emergency report is not complete. In some embodiments, as shown in fig. 6W, computer system 600 outputs haptic output 619 and/or audio output 650 when timer 610W is started, when timer 610W expires, and/or when an emergency report is sent. Outputting a non-visual output (e.g., haptic output 619 and/or audio output 650) informs the user of the timer 610W, and/or: if the user does not look at display 601 (e.g., if computer system 600 or a display generating component of computer system 600 is against the user's ear), the report has been sent.
In some embodiments, in response to not receiving input on reporting and/or summary interfaces 602M, 602O, 602Q, 602N, 602P, 602Q, 602R, and/or 602S within a predetermined standby time limit (e.g., 10 seconds, 30 seconds, or 1 minute), computer system 600 displays summary interface 602W, wherein emergency report summary 604W shows corresponding information previously received.
Fig. 6X-6X 4 illustrate embodiments of the network indicator 607 and/or the status portion 562a (e.g., status bar and/or packed status region) of the user interface within the area 654 of fig. 6X. In fig. 6X 1-6X 4, the network indicator 607 includes a cellular status indicator 607a and a Wi-Fi status indicator 607b. When computer system 600 has cellular service, cellular status indicator 607a includes a series of bars that indicate the strength of cellular signals, as shown in FIG. 6X 1. When the computer system turns on Wi-Fi capability, wi-Fi status indicator 607b includes a series of scallops that indicate the strength of the Wi-Fi signal, as shown in fig. 6X 1.
In fig. 6X2, computer system 600 has Wi-Fi capability turned on and does not have cellular services from a corresponding (e.g., primary) cellular network, but is able to communicate with emergency services (e.g., 911) via an alternative cellular network. When the computer system 600 does not have cellular service from the corresponding cellular network, the cellular status indicator 607a includes an emergency indicator 607a1 and a corresponding cellular network indicator 607a2. In fig. 6X2, because computer system 600 is capable of communicating with emergency services via an alternative cellular network, emergency indicator 607a1 is visually distinguished (e.g., emphasized) relative to corresponding cellular network indicator 607a2 (e.g., emergency indicator 607a1 is bold and/or corresponding cellular network indicator 607a2 is grayed out or darkened relative to emergency indicator 607a 1).
In fig. 6X3, computer system 600 turns on Wi-Fi capability, does not have cellular services from a corresponding (e.g., primary) cellular network, and is not able to communicate with emergency services via an alternative cellular network. Because computer system 600 is not capable of communicating with emergency services via the alternative cellular network, emergency indicator 607a1 is not visually distinguished relative to corresponding cellular network indicator 607a2 (e.g., both emergency indicator 607a1 and corresponding cellular network indicator 607a2 are grayed out, darkened, or displayed with the same appearance).
In fig. 6X4, computer system 600 turns off Wi-Fi capability, does not have cellular services from the corresponding (e.g., primary) cellular network, and is not able to communicate with emergency services via the alternative cellular network. Because computer system 600 is not capable of communicating with emergency services via an alternative cellular network, emergency indicator 607a1 is not visually distinguished relative to corresponding cellular network indicator 607a2 (e.g., as cellular status indicator 607a in fig. 6X 3). Because Wi-Fi capabilities are turned off and computer system 600 is able to communicate via the satellite communications network, computer system 600 displays satellite state indicator 607c (e.g., a pictorial indicator, icon, thumbnail, and/or image of a satellite). In some implementations, the satellite state indicator 607c is displayed in place of the Wi-Fi state indicator 607b and/or at the same location where the Wi-Fi state indicator 607b is displayed. In some embodiments, when the computer system has turned off Wi-Fi capability, is unable to communicate via the satellite communications network, and does not have cellular service for any purpose, the computer system 600 displays the network indicator 607 without displaying the Wi-Fi status indicator 607b and without displaying the satellite status indicator 607c. In some embodiments, if the computer system 600 turns on Wi-Fi capability, the network indicator 607 includes a Wi-Fi status indicator 607b (e.g., the satellite status indicator 607c is not displayed or replaced) regardless of whether the computer system 600 is capable of communicating via a satellite communications network.
In fig. 6Y, computer system 600 displays a user interface 602Y that includes a status portion 652b (e.g., an extended status area). Status portion 652b is larger than status portion 652 a. Because status portion 652b is larger than status portion 652a, network indicator 607 is displayed differently than, for example, in fig. 6X-6X 4. In fig. 6Y, computer system 600 has Wi-Fi capability enabled, has no cellular service from the corresponding cellular network, is capable of communicating with emergency services via an alternative cellular network, and is capable of communicating via a satellite communications network. Thus, the emergency indicator 607a1 and the corresponding cellular network indicator 607a2 are displayed side-by-side (e.g., the emergency indicator 607a1 is to the right of the corresponding cellular network indicator 607a 2), and the emergency indicator 607a1 includes additional information (e.g., is expanded and/or includes additional text, such as "SOS only" rather than "SOS only"). Further, computer system 600 displays both satellite state indicator 607c and Wi-Fi state indicator 607b (e.g., an extended version of Wi-Fi state indicator 607b including the text "WiFi").
In some implementations, computer system 600 displays user interface 602Y (and/or extended status area 652 b) in response to detecting input 602X in fig. 6X (e.g., regardless of the cellular, wi-Fi, and/or satellite capability status of computer system 600 and/or status portion 652 a). In some implementations, the computer system 600 can display a status indicator in the status portion 652b for any of the cellular, wi-Fi, and/or satellite capability states represented in fig. 6X-6X 4 (e.g., an extended status portion 652b equivalent to the contracted status portion 652a in fig. 6X, 6X1, 6X2, 6X3, or 6X 4).
In some embodiments, user interface 602Y is a control user interface (e.g., a control center) that includes selectable controls and/or options (e.g., 604Y) for controlling various functions of computer system 600 and/or setting parameters of features of computer system 600. For example, in fig. 6Y, control 604Y includes options for flight mode, turning Wi-Fi on and off, bluetooth on and off, cellular on and off, controlling media playback (e.g., play, pause and/or skip), locking and unlocking display orientation, turning on and off a flashing light function, turning on an alarm clock and/or timer application, turning on a calculator application, turning on a camera application, setting display brightness, setting audio volume level, and/or turning on an application for controlling a remote accessory.
Fig. 7 is a flow chart illustrating a method for initiating communications when a terrestrial wireless communication network is not reachable, described in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments, the method comprises: when a call is attempted, an emergency message button is displayed if the cell service is not reachable. In some embodiments, the method may be implemented using the devices and user interfaces shown in fig. 6A-6Y. The method is performed at a computer system (e.g., 100, 300, 500, or 600; e.g., a smart phone, tablet computer, desktop computer, laptop computer, smartwatch, or head-mounted device (e.g., head-mounted augmented reality and/or augmented reality device)), which is in communication with a display generating component (e.g., 601; e.g., a display controller, touch-sensitive display system, and/or head-mounted display system) and one or more input devices (e.g., 601; touch-sensitive surface, touch screen, buttons, and/or microphone). Some operations are optionally combined, the order of some operations is optionally changed, and some operations are optionally omitted.
As described below, method 700 provides an intuitive way for initiating communications using a computer system when a terrestrial wireless communication network is not reachable. The method reduces the cognitive burden of a user for initiating communication by using the computer system when the ground wireless communication network is not reachable, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-powered computing devices, enabling users to initiate communications faster and more efficiently when a terrestrial wireless communication network is not reachable saves power and increases the time interval between battery charges.
The computer system detects (702), via the one or more input devices, user input (e.g., as seen at input 610A in fig. 6A) corresponding to a request to initiate a communication (e.g., a telephone call, a video conference, and/or a short message) (in some embodiments, detects a voice command to initiate a call (e.g., an audio call) and/or input corresponding to a selection of an affordance that, when selected, causes the computer system to initiate the call).
In response to detecting the user input, the computer system displays (704) a first user interface via the display generation component (e.g., at call management interface 602G, as seen in fig. 6G; e.g., a telephone call user interface; a text messaging interface; and/or a video conferencing interface). Displaying the first user interface includes: in accordance with a determination that the computer system is unable to reach a terrestrial wireless communication network (e.g., the computer system is unable to connect to a cellular network; and/or the computer system does not receive cellular signals of sufficient strength and/or consistency to perform a call (e.g., to emergency services) (in some embodiments, the terrestrial wireless communication network is a cellular network associated with the computer system (e.g., provided by a cellular service provider of a user) or another cellular network (e.g., provided by another cellular service provider) (in some embodiments, the computer system may use a network provided by a network provider other than the provider associated with the computer system for emergency calls)), in accordance with a determination that the computer system is unable to make the call using a predetermined type of communication protocol (e.g., cellular communication), and/or in accordance with a determination that the computer system is unable to communicate via a predetermined type of signal (e.g., does not receive a predetermined type of signal at a threshold (e.g., sufficient) level), the system displays (706) a corresponding selectable communication option (e.g., 604 g., a graphical button, a graphical element, or a non-network via a graphical element is available for the communication via the terrestrial wireless interface, or a non-network is available, a process of communicating (e.g., via telephone calls, short messages, and/or video conferences) via a communication protocol and/or a low bandwidth communication mode that does not require cellular services (in some embodiments, the communication is real-time (e.g., full duplex real-time) communication). Displaying the first user interface includes, in accordance with a determination that the computer system is capable of reaching a corresponding terrestrial wireless communication network (e.g., the computer system is capable of connecting to a cellular network; and/or the computer system receives a cellular signal having sufficient strength and/or consistency to perform a call (e.g., to emergency services)), initiating (708) a process for communicating (e.g., initiating a call, a short message, and/or a video conference) via the corresponding terrestrial wireless communication network without displaying a corresponding selectable communication option. Depending on whether the computer system is able to reach the respective terrestrial wireless communication network to display the respective selectable communication option that when selected initiates a process for communicating via the non-terrestrial wireless communication network or initiates a process for communicating via the respective terrestrial wireless communication network without displaying the respective selectable communication option, visual feedback is provided to the user as to whether the computer system is able to reach the respective terrestrial wireless communication network and an alternative communication method is provided when the computer system is unable to reach the respective terrestrial wireless communication network, this provides improved visual feedback and performs the operation when a set of conditions has been met without further user input.
In some embodiments, the computer system attempts (e.g., as described with reference to fig. 6C and 6D) to (e.g., continues to attempt) initiate a process for communicating via the respective terrestrial wireless communication network while displaying the respective selectable communication option (e.g., 604G); and detecting a selection (e.g., 606G) of a respective selectable communication option via the one or more input devices. In response to detecting the selection of the respective selectable communication option, the computer system ceases attempting to initiate a process for communicating via the terrestrial wireless communication network. Stopping the process of attempting to initiate communication via the terrestrial wireless communication network in response to detecting selection of a respective selectable communication option automatically stops attempting to communicate via the original method without further user input when the user selects an option for communicating via a different method, which reduces the amount of input required to perform the operation.
In some embodiments, the first user interface (e.g., 602G) includes displaying (e.g., initially displaying) in the first user interface a cancel communication option (e.g., 609; "end call" affordance, button, or icon) that initiates a process of stopping attempting to initiate communication when selected via the one or more input devices. In some implementations, the first user interface includes a cancel communication option regardless of whether the terrestrial wireless communication network is determined to be reachable or unreachable. In some embodiments, the computer system displays a cancel communication option in the user interface before displaying the respective selectable communication option (e.g., initially displaying the cancel communication option in response to detecting the user input, and then displaying the respective selectable communication option later after determining that the terrestrial wireless communication network is not reachable). In some embodiments, displaying the respective selectable communication options includes moving the cancel communication option. The cancel communication option, which displays a process of initiating a stop to initiate communication when selected, provides an efficient way of stopping attempting to initiate communication regardless of whether the computer system is able to reach the corresponding terrestrial wireless communication network, which reduces the amount of input required to perform the operation.
In some implementations, upon displaying the respective selectable communication options (e.g., 604G), the computer system attempts (e.g., as described with reference to fig. 6C and 6D) (e.g., continues to attempt) to initiate a process for communicating via the respective terrestrial wireless communication network. Attempting to initiate a process for communicating via a respective terrestrial wireless communication network while displaying a respective selectable communication option allows the computer system to continue to attempt one communication method (e.g., a potentially more optimal communication method) without further user input while providing the user with the option to communicate via another method, which reduces the amount of input required to perform the operation.
In some embodiments, displaying the respective selectable communication options (e.g., 604G) occurs in accordance with a determination that the terrestrial wireless communication network is not reachable and that the communication is an emergency communication (e.g., as described with reference to fig. 6G; e.g., a communication with an emergency service). In accordance with a determination that the terrestrial wireless communication network is not reachable and that the communication is an emergency communication, displaying the respective selectable communication options provides the user with an alternative communication method and indicates to the user that the terrestrial wireless communication network is not reachable, which performs the operation without further user input and provides improved visual feedback when a set of conditions has been met.
In some embodiments, determining that the computer system is unable to reach the terrestrial wireless communication network includes determining that the computer system is unable to reach a first terrestrial wireless communication network (e.g., a network band unassociated with an operator of the computer system) unassociated with the computer system (e.g., previously unassociated) (e.g., as described with reference to fig. 6E-6J, the computer system attempts other operator cellular networks). In some embodiments, determining that the computer system is able to reach the respective terrestrial wireless communication network includes determining that the computer system is able to reach a first terrestrial wireless communication network unassociated with the computer system. In some embodiments, the computer system attempts to initiate communication via two or more terrestrial wireless communication networks (e.g., multiple or all networks with which the computer system is able to communicate when reachable), and determines that the computer system is not able to reach any of the two or more terrestrial wireless communication networks. In some embodiments, the computer system is associated with a terrestrial wireless communication network if the network is the home network of the computer system or the computer system is registered with or associated with a subscriber account of the network. The inclusion of determining that the computer system is unable to reach the first terrestrial wireless communication network that is unassociated with the computer system when determining that the computer system is unable to reach the terrestrial wireless communication network allows for the reachability of the terrestrial wireless communication network that is unassociated with the computer system to be considered in determining whether to display the respective selectable communication option, which performs the operation when a set of conditions has been met without further user input.
In some embodiments, the first user interface (e.g., 602G) includes a plurality of selectable telephone call options (e.g., 603; e.g., options to control a telephone call (e.g., speaker, mute, keypad, contacts). In some embodiments, displaying the first user interface includes simultaneously displaying the plurality of selectable telephone call options and corresponding selectable communication options (e.g., 604G). In some embodiments, the first user interface is a user interface of a telephone call application.
In some embodiments, the user input corresponding to the request to initiate communication includes one or more inputs (e.g., 902A; e.g., input of a telephone number (e.g., 911) and optionally selection of a "call" button in a keypad on the telephone number input user interface and/or selection of a reachable entity (e.g., a person or service) in a contact user interface) directed to the second user interface. The request to initiate a communication is a request to initiate a communication with an emergency service (e.g., an attempt to call 911). In response to detecting a request to initiate communication with an emergency service, displaying a first user interface including respective selectable communication options in accordance with a determination that a terrestrial wireless communication network is not reachable indicates to a user that an alternative communication method is available in an emergency situation, and provides an efficient way to initiate communication via the alternative communication method without additional user input, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the number of inputs required to perform an operation.
In some embodiments, the computer system detects an input (e.g., 606G) corresponding to a selection (e.g., 604G; e.g., a tap gesture or other selection input on the respective selectable communication option) of the respective selectable communication option via the one or more input devices. In response to detecting an input corresponding to a selection of a respective selectable communication option, the computer system initiates a process for communicating via a non-terrestrial wireless communication network (e.g., via a short message) (e.g., initiates a process for communicating using a low bandwidth communication mode (e.g., a mode for communicating using a compressed message format)). Initiating a process for communicating via a non-terrestrial wireless communication network in response to detecting an input corresponding to a selection of a respective selectable communication option provides an efficient and intuitive technique for initiating communication via a non-terrestrial wireless communication network without additional user input, which reduces the amount of input required to perform the operation.
In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the terrestrial wireless communication network is not reachable and a predetermined period of time has elapsed since an input corresponding to a request to initiate communication was detected (or alternatively, since the respective selectable communication option has been displayed) (e.g., as described with reference to fig. 6I; e.g., a non-zero amount of time, 3 seconds, 5 seconds, and/or 10 seconds), the computer system initiates a process for communicating via the non-terrestrial wireless communication network (e.g., automatically selects the respective selectable communication option after a predetermined amount of time (without user input)). In some embodiments, the computer system initiates a process for communicating via the non-terrestrial wireless communication network after detecting an input corresponding to a request to initiate communication (e.g., after a predetermined amount of time) without detecting further input via the one or more input devices. In accordance with a determination that the terrestrial wireless communication network is not reachable and that a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the detection of an input corresponding to the request to initiate communication, initiating a process for communicating via the non-terrestrial wireless communication network will automatically initiate a process for communicating via the non-terrestrial wireless communication network without additional user input, which performs an operation without further user input and reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation when a set of conditions has been met.
In some embodiments, the computer system displays a visual indication (e.g., text, graphics, color, and/or animation) of the countdown of the time remaining before the expiration of the predetermined time period (e.g., satellite communication button 604I indicates the countdown of the time remaining as described with reference to fig. 6I). In some embodiments, the computer system replaces the respective selectable communication option with the visual indication of the countdown (e.g., 604G), or modifies the respective selectable communication option to include the visual indication of the countdown. In some embodiments, the computer system switches from a first user interface (e.g., 602G) (e.g., a call user interface) to a countdown user interface (e.g., 602I) that includes a visual indication of the countdown (e.g., replaces the first user interface with the countdown user interface). A visual indication of the countdown of the remaining time before expiration of the predetermined time period provides a notification to the user when a process for communicating via the non-terrestrial wireless communication network will be initiated, which provides improved visual feedback.
In some implementations, a process for communicating via a non-terrestrial wireless communication network includes displaying a second user interface (e.g., 604M) (e.g., a low-bandwidth communication mode user interface and/or an emergency reporting user interface) (e.g., ceasing to display the first user interface, and optionally replacing the first user interface with the second user interface) (e.g., in response to detecting selection of a respective selectable communication option (e.g., 604G) and/or determining that a predetermined time criterion has been met). In some implementations, the second user interface includes a series of questions and/or selectable options and/or text input fields (e.g., 604M) for generating the message instead of, for example, an open audio channel. Displaying a second user interface, different from the first user interface, as part of the process for communicating via the non-terrestrial wireless communication network allows the computer system to provide additional options and guide the user through the process for communicating via the non-terrestrial wireless communication network, which provides additional control options without cluttering the user interface, and improved visual feedback.
In some embodiments, communicating via a non-terrestrial wireless communication network includes communicating via a short message or an audio call (e.g., as described with reference to fig. 6A). Including communication via a short message or audio call provides the user with a low bandwidth option for communicating via a non-terrestrial wireless communication network, which provides additional control options without cluttering the user interface.
In some implementations, communicating via the non-terrestrial wireless communication network includes initiating a communication session via (or at least partially via) the non-terrestrial wireless communication network (e.g., by selecting satellite communication button 604G, 604I, 904A, 1520B5, or 1534C 6). In some embodiments, after initiating communication session activity via the non-terrestrial wireless communication network (or optionally, when communication session activity via the non-terrestrial wireless communication network), the computer system: detecting a user input (e.g., 618M) corresponding to a request to end a communication session (e.g., selecting end button 614) (e.g., detecting a voice command and/or touch gesture corresponding to selection of a selectable user interface element); and in response to detecting a user input corresponding to a request to end a communication session, providing (e.g., displaying) a prompt (e.g., 620M2 in fig. 6M 1) for acknowledging the request to end the communication session (e.g., a button, a notification, an affordance, a selectable acknowledgement option, and/or a selectable graphical element). In some embodiments, the computer system causes the communication session to end in response to detecting a user input selecting a prompt to confirm a request to end the communication session. In some embodiments, in response to detecting a user input corresponding to a request to end a communication session, the computer system does not cause (e.g., forgo causing) the communication session to end, for example, until a user input is received that selects a prompt to confirm the request to end the communication session. Providing a prompt to confirm a request to end a communication session provides feedback that the user has requested to end the communication session and may prevent the user from unintentionally ending the communication session through unintended input, which provides improved visual feedback. Preventing the user from inadvertently ending the communication session avoids additional time and user input to re-establish the communication session, which enables the user to operate the computer system with fewer errors and reduces the amount of input required to perform the operation.
In some embodiments, in accordance with (or in some embodiments in response to) determining that the computer system is unable to reach a first respective terrestrial wireless communication network (e.g., a primary cellular network, a cellular network associated with the computer system, and/or a cellular network of a service provider associated with the computer system), the computer system displays an indication of the computer system's communication capabilities (e.g., 607a1, 607c, a graphical indication, an icon, a color, a font, text, an animation, a symbol, a thumbnail, an image, and/or a pictorial representation) via a display generating component (e.g., an indication of the computer system's ability to communicate with a respective number or entity (such as an emergency number or an emergency service); and in accordance with a determination that the computer system is capable of reaching the first respective terrestrial wireless communication network, the computer system relinquishes displaying an indication of a communication capability status of the computer system. In some embodiments, an indication of the communication capabilities of the computer system is displayed in a portion of a user interface that includes one or more indicators of the status of the computer system (e.g., cellular status, wi-Fi status, time, short-range communication status, and/or battery power). In some embodiments, an indication of the communication capabilities of the computer system is displayed at a location of the display and/or user interface where a cellular status indicator is displayed when cellular service is available. Displaying an indication of the communication capabilities of the computer system based on whether the computer system is able to reach the corresponding terrestrial wireless communication network automatically provides clear feedback to the user regarding the communication capabilities of the computer system when the communication capabilities of the computer system are limited without requiring the user to navigate a user interface to determine the communication capabilities, provides improved visual feedback to the user, reduces the number of inputs required to perform an operation, and performs an operation without requiring further user input when a set of conditions has been met.
In some embodiments, displaying an indication of the communication capabilities of the computer system includes displaying a first communication status indicator (e.g., 607a1, a graphical indication, an icon, a color, a font, text, an animation, a symbol, a thumbnail, an image, and/or a pictorial indicator) that indicates the computer system's ability to communicate via a terrestrial wireless communication network (e.g., a cellular network other than a cellular network associated with the computer system) that is different from a first respective terrestrial wireless communication network (e.g., with a respective number or entity, such as an emergency number or emergency service). Displaying a first communication status indicator indicating the ability of the computer system to communicate via a terrestrial wireless communication network different from the first respective terrestrial wireless communication network automatically informs the user of the ability to communicate via a terrestrial wireless communication network (which may be faster and consume less energy than a non-terrestrial communication network) when the first respective terrestrial wireless communication network is not reachable, without requiring the user to navigate a user interface to determine the communication capabilities of the computer system, which provides improved visual feedback to the user and reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation.
In some embodiments, displaying the first communication status indicator includes: in accordance with a determination that the computer system is capable of reaching a second corresponding terrestrial wireless communication network that is different from the first corresponding terrestrial wireless communication network, a first communication status indicator is displayed having a first appearance (e.g., having a solid line, having a black line, a first color, a first brightness, highlighting, and/or not graying; e.g., 607a1 in fig. 6X 2). In accordance with a determination that the computer system is able to reach the second corresponding terrestrial wireless communication network, displaying the first communication status indicator having the first appearance automatically informs the user that another terrestrial wireless communication network (which may be faster and consume less energy than the non-terrestrial communication network) is reachable, even if the first corresponding terrestrial wireless communication network is not reachable, without requiring the user to navigate the user interface to determine the communication capabilities of the computer system, this provides the user with improved visual feedback, reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation, and performs the operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input.
In some embodiments, displaying the first communication status indicator includes: in accordance with a determination that the computer system is unable to reach any of the terrestrial wireless communication networks, a first communication status indicator (e.g., having a dashed line, having a gray line, having a second color different from the first color, having a second brightness that is darker than the first brightness, being unobtrusive with respect to the first appearance, and/or being grayed out; e.g., 607a1 in fig. 6X3, 6X4, or 6X 5) is displayed having a second appearance that is different from the first appearance of the first communication status indicator. In accordance with a determination that the computer system is not reachable to any of the terrestrial wireless communication networks, displaying the first communication status indicator having the second appearance automatically informs the user that no other terrestrial wireless communication networks are reachable when the first respective terrestrial wireless communication network is not reachable without requiring the user to navigate the user interface to determine the communication capabilities of the computer system, and indicates to the user that alternative communication means may be required (e.g., via the user interface for satellite communications), which provides improved visual feedback to the user, reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation, and performs the operation without requiring further user input when a set of conditions has been met.
In some embodiments, displaying an indication of the communication capabilities of the computer system comprises: in accordance with a determination (or in some embodiments, in response to a determination) that the computer system is capable of reaching a non-terrestrial wireless communication network (and optionally communication via the Wi-Fi network is not available to the computer system and/or Wi-Fi capabilities of the computer system are turned off), a second communication status indicator (e.g., 607c, a graphical indication, an icon, a color, a font, text, an animation, a symbol, a thumbnail, an image, and/or an glyph; an image and/or an icon of a satellite) that is different from the first communication status indicator is displayed. In some embodiments, the second communication status indicator is displayed in accordance with a determination that the computer system is capable of reaching the non-terrestrial wireless communication network and Wi-Fi capabilities of the computer system are disabled (e.g., turned off). In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the computer system is capable of reaching the non-terrestrial wireless communication network and the Wi-Fi capability of the computer system is enabled (e.g., turned on), the computer system foregoes displaying the second communication status indicator (e.g., if Wi-Fi is turned on, the second communication status indicator is not displayed). In some embodiments, the computer system displays the second communication status indicator in an extended status bar (e.g., in a control user interface (such as a control center) that includes selectable options for controlling features of the computer system) but not in a non-extended status bar (e.g., in a user interface other than the control user interface, such as a home screen, wake screen, lock screen, or application user interface). In accordance with a determination that the computer system is capable of reaching a non-terrestrial wireless communication network and displaying the second communication status indicator automatically informs the user that the other terrestrial wireless communication network is reachable when the first corresponding terrestrial wireless communication network is not reachable without requiring the user to navigate a user interface to determine the communication capabilities of the computer system, this provides improved visual feedback to the user, reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation, and performs the operation without further user input when a set of conditions has been met.
In some implementations, the computer system displays an indication of the communication capabilities of the computer system (e.g., 607b, a graphical indication, an icon, a color, a font, text, an animation, a symbol, a thumbnail, an image, and/or a pictorial indicator) (e.g., an indication of whether the computer system is connected to a Wi-Fi network) concurrently with an indication of Wi-Fi connectivity. In some embodiments, displaying an indication of Wi-Fi connectivity is performed in accordance with (or in some embodiments in response to) a determination that communications via the Wi-Fi network are available to the computer system. In some implementations, the computer system displays an indication of Wi-Fi connectivity in response to detecting a request to enable Wi-Fi connectivity (e.g., user input selecting a button to enable Wi-Fi connectivity). Displaying the indication of Wi-Fi connectivity concurrently with the indication of the communication capabilities of the computer system informs the user of the ability of the computer system to communicate via Wi-Fi connectivity when the first respective terrestrial wireless communication network is not reachable without requiring the user to navigate a user interface to determine Wi-Fi connectivity of the computer system, which provides improved visual feedback to the user and reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation.
In some embodiments, displaying an indication of Wi-Fi connectivity (e.g., 607 b) includes displaying an indication of Wi-Fi connectivity without displaying an indication (e.g., 607c, a second communication status indicator, a graphical indication, an icon, a color, a font, text, an animation, a symbol, a thumbnail, an image, and/or a pictorial indicator) that the computer system is capable of reaching (or in some embodiments, the computer system is capable of communicating via) the non-terrestrial wireless communication network. In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that communications via the Wi-Fi network are available to the computer system and the computer system is capable of reaching the non-terrestrial wireless communication network, the computer system displays an indication of Wi-Fi connectivity in place of (e.g., without displaying) the second communication status indicator, and/or replaces the second communication status indicator with an indication of Wi-Fi connectivity. Displaying an indication of Wi-Fi connectivity without displaying an indication that the computer system is able to reach the non-terrestrial wireless communication network informs the user of the ability of the computer system to communicate via Wi-Fi connectivity, which may be faster, easier to connect, and/or more reliable than the non-terrestrial wireless communication network without requiring the user to navigate a user interface to determine Wi-Fi connectivity of the computer system, which provides improved visual feedback to the user and reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation.
In some embodiments, displaying the first user interface includes: before displaying the respective selectable communication options, displaying a first user interface (e.g., 602E) without the respective selectable communication options (e.g., displaying 602E without 604G), and wherein displaying the respective communication options in accordance with a determination that the computer system is unable to reach the terrestrial wireless communication network is performed after an attempt to initiate a communication (e.g., a telephone call) via the respective terrestrial wireless communication network (e.g., after the call in fig. 6E has failed) (and, in some embodiments, in accordance with a determination or in response to a determination of the failure) has failed. Discarding displaying the respective selectable communication options until after the attempt to initiate communication via the respective terrestrial wireless communication network has failed enables the computer system to attempt to communicate via a faster and/or more reliable network before providing the option to communicate via the non-terrestrial wireless communication network, and indicates to the user that the attempt to initiate communication via the respective terrestrial wireless communication network has failed, which provides improved visual feedback to the user, reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation, provides additional control options without cluttering the user interface with additional display controls, and performs the operation without further user input when a set of conditions has been met.
In some embodiments, displaying the first user interface includes displaying an end call button (e.g., 609 in fig. 6F) at a first location (e.g., 609) in the first user interface, wherein when selected, the end call button causes the computer system to cease attempting to initiate communication via the corresponding terrestrial wireless communication network. In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the computer system is unable to reach the terrestrial wireless communication network (and, in some embodiments, after the attempt to initiate communication via the respective terrestrial wireless communication network has failed (or in accordance with a determination or in response to a determination that the failure), the computer system displays an end call button in the first user interface with a second location (e.g., 609 in fig. 6F1 or 6F 2) that is different from the first location in the first user interface.
In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination (or in some embodiments, in response to a determination) that the computer system is unable to reach the terrestrial wireless communication network, the computer system provides (e.g., outputs and/or produces) non-visual output (e.g., 619, 650, haptic and/or audio output) (e.g., simultaneously with displaying the respective selectable communication options) (e.g., 619 and/or 650 in fig. 6F 2). In accordance with a determination that the computer system is not reachable to the terrestrial wireless communication network, providing a non-visual output informs the user that: even if the user does not look at the display of the computer system (e.g., if the computer system is against the user's ear when attempting to call emergency services) or the display of the computer system is darkened or inactive, the terrestrial wireless communication network is not reachable, which provides improved feedback and performs operations when a set of conditions has been met without further user input. Feedback regarding the communication status of the computer system enables the computer system to be controlled more quickly and efficiently, which is particularly important in situations where the user is responding to emergency or stress situations.
It is noted that the details of the process described above with respect to method 700 may also apply in a similar manner to the methods described below. For example, methods 800, 1000, 1200, 1400, 1600, 1800, 2000, and/or 2200 optionally include one or more features of the various methods described above with reference to method 700. For example, method 700 may be performed as part of a process for initiating communications according to method 800. For example, method 700 optionally includes providing an alignment element according to method 1000. For example, method 700 may include selecting a second recipient of the communication according to method 1200. For the sake of brevity, these details are not repeated hereinafter.
Fig. 8 is a flow chart illustrating a method for initiating communications when a terrestrial wireless communication network is not reachable, described in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments, the method includes, when in an emergency reporting mode, displaying an option for an emergency report, receiving the option, and transmitting the emergency report with the received option. In some embodiments, the method may be implemented using the devices and user interfaces shown in fig. 6A-6Y. The method is performed at a computer system (e.g., 100, 300, 500, or 600; e.g., a smart phone, tablet computer, laptop computer, desktop computer, smart watch, or head-mounted device (e.g., head-mounted augmented reality and/or augmented reality device)), which is in communication with a display generating component (e.g., 601; e.g., a display controller, touch-sensitive display system, and/or head-mounted display system) and one or more input devices (e.g., 601; touch-sensitive surface, touch screen, buttons, and/or microphone). Some operations are optionally combined, the order of some operations is optionally changed, and some operations are optionally omitted.
As described below, the method 800 provides an intuitive way for communicating in a low bandwidth mode. The method reduces the cognitive burden on the user to communicate in a low bandwidth mode, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-powered computing devices, enabling users to communicate in a low bandwidth mode faster and more efficiently saves power and increases the time interval between battery charges.
In some embodiments, the computer system enters the low bandwidth communication mode in response to receiving a request to enter the low bandwidth communication mode (e.g., in response to receiving a request to communicate via non-terrestrial wireless communication), the computer system displays (804), via a display generating component, a first set of selectable communication content options (e.g., 604M; e.g., affordances, buttons, graphical elements, graphical objects, and/or icons) corresponding to respective content for communication (e.g., information selectable by a user to be included in a report), wherein the first set of selectable communication content options are specific to the low bandwidth communication mode (e.g., the options are only available and/or presented for the low bandwidth communication mode) (in some embodiments, the options are not presented in a messaging user interface that displays a message conversation and/or fields for composing a message of the messaging application);
When the computer system is in a low bandwidth communication mode, the computer system detects (806), via the one or more input devices, a first set of one or more inputs (e.g., 610M or 612M; e.g., touch inputs) corresponding to a selection of a first communication content option (e.g., 606M or 608M) of the first set of selectable communication content options.
When the computer system is in the low bandwidth communication mode and after (e.g., in response to) detecting the first set of one or more inputs, the computer system displays (808), via the display generation component, a second set of selectable communication content options (e.g., 604N or 604O; e.g., affordances, buttons, graphical elements, graphical objects, and/or icons (in some embodiments, the second set of selectable communication content options being different from the first set of selectable communication content options)) corresponding to respective content for communication (e.g., information selectable by a user for inclusion in a report) (e.g., and ceases to display the first set of two or more selectable communication content options, optionally including ceasing to display a representation of selected communication content options of the first set of two or more selectable communication content options), wherein the second set of selectable communication content options is specific to the low bandwidth communication mode. Displaying multiple sets (e.g., first and second sets) of selectable communication content options specific to the low bandwidth communication mode and corresponding to the respective content for the communication allows the computer system to provide feedback that helps the user provide concise information in the communication when bandwidth is constrained, which provides improved visual feedback and additional control options without cluttering the user interface.
When the computer system is in the low bandwidth communication mode, the computer system detects (810), via the one or more input devices, a second set of one or more inputs (e.g., 608N or 608O; e.g., touch inputs) corresponding to a selection of a second communication content option (e.g., 606N or 608O) of the second set of selectable communication content options.
When the computer system is in a low bandwidth communication mode, the computer system detects (812) an input (e.g., 604R or 604S) corresponding to a request to send a communication including content corresponding to a selection of a first communication content option and a second communication content option (e.g., a touch input (e.g., a tap gesture or other selection input) on a send affordance (e.g., 606R or 606S) and/or a voice command and/or a selection of a final communication content option in a sequence of communication content options.
In response to receiving an input corresponding to a request to send the communication, the computer system sends (814) (e.g., via non-terrestrial wireless communication) a communication including content corresponding to a selection of a first communication content option and a second communication content option selected by the first set of one or more inputs and the second set of one or more inputs.
In some embodiments, the first set of selectable communication content options includes three or more selectable communication content options that are specific to the low bandwidth communication mode (e.g., as described with reference to FIG. 6M; e.g., the first communication content option selected by the first set of one or more inputs is one of the three or more selectable communication content options in the first set of selectable communication content options). In some embodiments, the second set of selectable communication content options includes three or more selectable communication content options that are specific to the low bandwidth communication mode (e.g., as described with reference to FIG. 6M; e.g., the second communication content option selected by the second set of one or more inputs is one of the three or more selectable communication content options in the second set of selectable communication content options). The inclusion of three or more selectable communication content options in the first and second sets of selectable communication content options that are specific to the low bandwidth communication mode provides the user with various options to select in an organized manner, which provides improved visual feedback and additional control options without cluttering the user interface.
In some embodiments, the second set of communication content options is based on (e.g., displayed based on, associated with, selected in accordance with, and/or specific to) the selection of the first communication content option (e.g., as described with reference to fig. 6M-6O, the second set of options 604N and/or the third set of options 604O are specific to the selected car or vehicle option 604M, the vehicle collision option 606N). In some implementations, the second set of communication content options (e.g., by the computer system) is selected from a set of available communication content options based on the first communication content option selected by the user. In some embodiments, the first set of selectable communication content options provides options corresponding to different types of emergency situations (e.g., fire, medical, or police), and the second set of selectable communication content options provides options related to the type of emergency situation corresponding to the first communication content option selected by the user. For example, if the first communication content option selected by the user corresponds to a first type of emergency (e.g., medical emergency), the second set of selectable communication content options includes a first set of options related to the first type of emergency (e.g., medical emergency); and if the first communication content option selected by the user corresponds to a second type of emergency (e.g., fire emergency) different from the first type of emergency, the second set of selectable communication content options includes a second set of options related (e.g., different) to the second type of emergency (e.g., fire emergency). Basing the second set of communication content options on the selection of the first communication content option allows the computer system to select and display options related to the user for the second set of communication content options, which provides improved visual feedback.
In some implementations, the first and second sets of communication content options are displayed without displaying a software keyboard (e.g., EMOJI keyboard and/or QWERTY keyboard) (e.g., as described with reference to fig. 6M-6O and 6V, the first, second, and/or third sets of options 604M, 604N, and/or 604O are displayed without the keyboard 608V; not displayed simultaneously with the software keyboard). Displaying the first and second sets of communication content options without displaying a software keyboard allows the computer system to provide the user with related options that can be quickly and easily selected without cluttering the user interface with input methods that are more time consuming and bandwidth consuming, which improves visual feedback, reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation, and provides additional control options without cluttering the user interface.
In some implementations, the first set of communication content options occupies more than half of the display area (e.g., as described with reference to FIG. 6M, the first set of options 604M occupies more than half of the reporting interface 602M; display, user interface, or application window); and the second set of communication content options occupies more than half of the display area (e.g., the second set of options 604N and/or the third set of options 604O occupy more than half of the reporting interface 602N and the reporting interface 602O, respectively, as described with reference to fig. 6N-6O). In some embodiments, one or more objects other than the first or second set of communication content options occupy less than half of the display area (e.g., messaging UI). Having the first set of communication content options occupy more than half of the display area and the second set of communication content options occupy more than half of the display area directs the user's attention to the communication content options and makes these options easier to view and select, which provides improved visual feedback.
In some embodiments, displaying the first set of selectable communication content options includes displaying the first set of selectable communication content options without displaying (e.g., without displaying concurrently with) a messaging user interface (e.g., as described with reference to fig. 6M-6O and 6T-6U, displaying the first set of options 604M, the second set of options 604N, and/or the third set of options 604O without displaying the reporting interface 602; e.g., a user interface including a messaging conversation and/or history) (in some embodiments, displaying the first set of selectable communication content options includes ceasing to display the messaging user interface). In some embodiments, displaying the second set of selectable communication content options includes displaying the first set of selectable communication content options without displaying the messaging user interface (in some embodiments, displaying the second set of selectable communication content options includes ceasing to display the messaging user interface). Displaying the first and second sets of selectable communication content options without displaying the messaging user interface provides the user with the ability to generate content for communication without requiring navigation to operate additional inputs of the messaging user interface, which reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation.
In some embodiments, the computer system enters the low bandwidth communication mode in response to determining that the computer system is not reachable to the terrestrial wireless communication network. In some embodiments, the low bandwidth communication mode is only available (e.g., entered) when the computer system is unable to reach the terrestrial wireless communication network (e.g., as described with reference to fig. 6M-6S). In some embodiments, the first set of selectable communication content options and/or the second set of selectable communication content options are not provided if the computer system is capable of reaching the terrestrial wireless communication network (e.g., if the computer system is not in a low bandwidth communication mode). In some embodiments, the first set of selectable communication content options and/or the second set of selectable communication content options are provided only when the computer system is not reachable to the terrestrial wireless communication network (e.g., only when the computer system is in a low bandwidth communication mode). Entering the low bandwidth communication mode in response to determining that the computer system is unable to reach the terrestrial wireless communication network provides the user with the low bandwidth communication mode without additional input, which performs the operation without further user input when a set of conditions has been met.
In some embodiments, the first set of communication options and/or the second set of communication options includes one or more options that identify the type of emergency (e.g., as described with reference to fig. 6M; e.g., fire, medical, and/or police). In some embodiments, the first and/or second sets of communication options allow the user to select one type of emergency from an enumerated set of emergency situations (e.g., the computer system displays different options corresponding to different types of emergency situations). The inclusion of one or more options in the first and/or second sets of communication content options that identify the type of emergency provides the user with a quick and efficient technique for specifying the type of emergency in the communication without additional input, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform the operation.
In some embodiments, the first set of communication options and/or the second set of communication options includes one or more options that identify the person (e.g., as described with reference to FIG. 6O; e.g., who needs help and/or the name of the person who needs help for an emergency). The inclusion of one or more options in the first and/or second sets of communication content options to identify a person provides the user with a quick and efficient technique to specify a person in a communication without additional input, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the number of inputs required to perform an operation.
In some embodiments, the first set of communication options and/or the second set of communication options includes one or more options that indicate a status of the person (e.g., as described with reference to fig. 6Q; e.g., injured, lost, dangerous, physical status, and/or medical status). The inclusion of one or more options in the first and/or second sets of communication content options that indicate the status of the person provides the user with a quick and efficient technique of specifying the status of the person in the communication without additional input, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform the operation.
In some embodiments, the first set of communication content options and/or the second set of communication content options includes options for alerting the emergency contact (e.g., notification affordance 1102E; e.g., options for communicating with a predefined set of contactable entities). In some embodiments, the computer system provides the ability (e.g., user interface, menu, and/or selectable options) for a user to select a list of people to be the recipient of the communication. The inclusion of the alert emergency contact option in the first and/or second set of communication content options provides the user with a quick and efficient technique of selecting the recipient of the communication without additional input (e.g., navigating to a contact application), which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform the operation.
In some embodiments, displaying the first and/or second sets of selectable communication content options includes displaying selectable options for including text in the communication (e.g., 618N; e.g., an "other" option for inserting a narrative response), which, when selected, displays a keyboard (e.g., 608V; e.g., a soft keyboard and/or a keyboard that was not displayed prior to selecting the option for including text in the communication) (e.g., initiating display of a keyboard). In some embodiments, the options for including text in the communication limit the amount of text and/or characters that can be selected for inclusion in the communication (e.g., limit to 50, 100, or 200 characters). Displaying selectable options for including text in the communication (which, when selected, displays a keyboard) provides the user with a quick and efficient technique of typing text to include in the communication without requiring additional input (e.g., of a display keyboard), which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation.
In some embodiments, when the computer system is in the low bandwidth communication mode and prior to transmitting a communication comprising content corresponding to a selection of a first communication content option and a second communication content option selected by the first set of one or more inputs and the second set of one or more inputs: the computer system displays a third set of selectable communication content options (e.g., 604P or 604Q) via the display generating component, wherein one or more of the third set of selectable communication content options need to be selected in order to send the communication; and the computer system displays the fourth set of selectable communication content options via the display generating component, wherein sending the communication occurs without selecting any of the fourth set of selectable communication content options. Displaying a third set of selectable communication content options, wherein one or more of the third set of selectable communication content options are required to be selected in order to send the communication, and displaying a fourth set of selectable communication content options, wherein sending the communication occurs without selecting any of the fourth set of selectable communication content options, which allows the computer system to indicate to the user that selection of certain options is deemed critical to the communication, and provides the user with the ability to select options that are not potentially less critical, which provides improved visual feedback.
In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the first set of selectable communication content options may be skipped (e.g., not required to proceed to the next communication content option (e.g., the content selected from the set of selectable communication content options is not required)), the first set of selectable communication content options includes a skip option (e.g., as seen at 616 in fig. 6M; no selectable affordance for content sent via the communication is provided (in some embodiments, selection of the skip option will display the next communication content option)). In some implementations, in accordance with a determination that the first set of selectable communication content options cannot be skipped (e.g., as needed to advance to the next communication content option), the first set of selectable communication content options is displayed without displaying the skip option. In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the second set of selectable communication content options may be skipped, the second set of selectable communication content options includes a skip option (e.g., as seen at 616 in fig. 6N-6O). In some implementations, in accordance with a determination that the second set of selectable communication content options cannot be skipped, the second set of selectable communication content options is displayed without displaying the skip option. Displaying a set of selectable communication content options based on whether the set of selectable communication content options may be skipped to display the skip option or not, which allows the computer system to indicate to the user that selection of certain options is deemed critical to the communication and provides the user with the ability to select options that are not potentially less critical, provides improved visual feedback, and performs operations when a set of conditions has been met without further user input.
In some embodiments, in response to detecting a first set of one or more inputs corresponding to selection of a first communication content option and in accordance with a determination that the first communication content option is a first type of communication content option (e.g., a type of medical affordance for a medical type emergency and/or a subsequent question that is required to be associated with the selection), the computer system displays a fifth set of selectable communication content options corresponding to respective content for the communication (e.g., as described with reference to fig. 6M-6S; e.g., affordances, buttons, graphical elements, graphical objects, and/or icons). In some embodiments, the fifth set of selectable communication content options is different from the first and second sets of selectable communication content options (e.g., the fifth set of selectable communication content options Xiang Te is specific to the first type (e.g., options related to a medical type emergency, such as who is injured and/or what their status is)). In some embodiments, in response to detecting a first set of one or more inputs corresponding to a selection of a first communication content option and in accordance with a determination that the first communication content option is a second type of communication content option different from the first type (e.g., a type that does not require a subsequent question related to the selection), the computer system foregoes displaying a fifth set of selectable communication content options. Displaying or discarding displaying a fifth set of selectable communication content options corresponding to the respective content for the communication based on the communication content option type of the selected first communication content option automatically provides the user with relevant follow-up options based on previous inputs (or does not provide such follow-up options), which provides improved visual feedback, and performs the operation when a set of conditions has been met without further user input.
In some embodiments, after detecting the second set of one or more inputs and before sending a communication comprising content corresponding to the selection of the first communication content option and the second communication content option selected by the first set of one or more inputs and the second set of one or more inputs, the computer system displays a representation (e.g., a summary or preview) of at least a portion of the content corresponding to the selection of the first communication content option and the second communication content option selected by the first set of one or more inputs and the second set of one or more inputs via the display generating component (e.g., as described with reference to fig. 6R-6S). Displaying a representation of at least a portion of content corresponding to the selection of the first and second communication content options selected by the first and second sets of one or more inputs after the second set of one or more inputs is detected and before the communication is sent provides a summary of content to be included in the communication to the user, which provides improved visual feedback.
In some embodiments, after (e.g., in response to) detecting the second set of one or more inputs (e.g., including detecting that selectable communication content options have been selected (e.g., a plurality or all of the selectable communication content options have been selected)): the computer system displays the send option (e.g., 606R or 606S) via the display generation component; and the computer system detects a selection of a send option (e.g., a send affordance input (touch input (e.g., tap gesture or other selection input) or a selection of a final communication content option in a sequence of communication content options)). In response to detecting the selection of the send option, the computer system initiates a process that includes sending a communication that includes content corresponding to the selection of the first communication content option and the second communication content option. In some embodiments, the computer system transmits a communication including content corresponding to the selection of the first communication content option and the second communication content option in response to detecting the selection of the transmission option (e.g., automatically or without detecting further input). Displaying the send option after detecting the second set of one or more inputs indicates to the user that the communication may be sent and/or that no additional options need to be selected to send the communication, and provides an efficient technique for sending the communication, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation.
In some embodiments, the computer system displays (e.g., in response to selection of a final communication content option, in response to detection of selection of a transmission option, and/or simultaneously with transmission option) a visual indication (e.g., text, graphics, color, and/or animation) (e.g., 610R or 610S; e.g., a timer including a digital or picture remaining time) of a countdown for a predetermined period of time (e.g., five seconds, ten seconds, or thirty seconds) via the display generating component (e.g., 601); and in response to determining that the predetermined period of time has elapsed without detecting a selection of the send option, the computer system sends a communication including content corresponding to the selection of the first communication content option and the second communication content option selected by the first set of one or more inputs and the second set of one or more inputs (e.g., automatically sends the communication once the countdown has expired). Displaying a visual indication of a countdown of the predetermined time period in response to determining that the predetermined time period has elapsed without detecting selection of the send option and sending the communication provides the user with a visual indication that the communication is to be sent and allows the computer system to send the communication without further user input, which provides improved visual feedback and performs the operation without further user input when a set of conditions has been met.
In some embodiments, in response to determining that a threshold period of time has elapsed after the respective selectable communication content option (e.g., the first set of communication content options, the second set of communication content options, or a different set of communication content options) is displayed without detecting selection of the respective selectable communication content option via the one or more input devices (e.g., if selection of the second communication content option is received but no selection of the third communication content option is received), the computer system (e.g., 100, 300, 500, or 600) transmits a communication including content corresponding to the detected selection of the communication content option (e.g., as described with reference to fig. 6W; the first communication content option and the second communication content option). In response to determining that a threshold period of time has elapsed after displaying the respective selectable communication content option without detecting a selection of the respective selectable communication content option, sending a communication including content corresponding to the detected selection of the communication content option, doing so allows the computer system to automatically send the communication based on the previously selected option if the user ceases making the selection for a threshold amount of time, which reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation and performs the operation without further user input when a set of conditions has been met.
In some embodiments, prior to sending the communication including the content corresponding to the detected selection of the communication content option, the computer system (e.g., 100, 300, 500, or 600) displays a countdown visual indication (e.g., 610W) indicating a remaining time until the communication including the content corresponding to the detected selection of the communication content option is to be sent (e.g., without further user input). Displaying a visual indication of the countdown indicating the time remaining until the communication will be sent provides the user with a notification that the communication will be sent automatically without further input, which provides improved visual feedback.
In some embodiments, prior to sending a communication including content corresponding to the detected selection of a communication content option (e.g., while displaying a visual indication (e.g., text, graphics, color, and/or animation) indicating a countdown of a remaining time until the communication including content corresponding to the detected selection of a communication content option is to be sent), the computer system displays a selectable cancel send option (e.g., 608W) that, when selected, causes the computer system to forgo sending the communication including content corresponding to the detected selection of a communication content option. In some embodiments, the cancel send option, when selected, causes the computer system to stop the countdown (e.g., stop displaying a visual indication of the countdown). Displaying a selectable cancel send option prior to sending the communication provides the user with an indication that sending the communication can be canceled, and provides an efficient technique for canceling the sending of the communication, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation.
In some implementations, after the selectable communication content options are displayed, the display generation component is deactivated (e.g., as described with reference to fig. 6M, 6N, 6O, 6P, or 6Q, and as shown and described in fig. 11B; e.g., turned off, dimmed, in a sleep state, and/or in a low power state). In some embodiments, in response to determining that the threshold period of time has elapsed without detecting selection of a corresponding selectable communication content option, the computer system activates the display generating component. Activating the display generating means to bring the user's attention to the display generating means and to prompt the user to provide input in response to determining that the threshold period of time has elapsed without detecting selection of a respective selectable communication content option, provides improved visual feedback, and performs the operation without further user input when a set of conditions has been met.
In some embodiments, the communication includes emergency information (e.g., a medical ID) and a location of the computer system (e.g., as described with reference to FIGS. 6T-6U; except for content corresponding to the selection of the first and second communication content options selected by the first and second sets of one or more inputs, and content corresponding to any other communication content options selected or questions answered). Including emergency information and the location of the computer system in the communication automatically provides relevant information in the communication without requiring additional user input, which reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation.
In some embodiments, in response to receiving an input corresponding to a request to send the communication, the computer system displays a user interface (e.g., 602T or 602U) of the messaging application. In some embodiments, the user interface of the messaging application includes a message conversation, wherein the message conversation includes a message (e.g., 620T or 620U) in the conversation (e.g., conversation record) including emergency information, a location of the computer system, and content corresponding to a selection of a first communication content option and a second communication content option selected by the first set of one or more inputs and the second set of one or more inputs, and content corresponding to any other communication content option selected or a question answered. A user interface displaying a messaging application in response to receiving input corresponding to a request to send the communication automatically provides the messaging application to a user when the communication is sent, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the number of inputs required to perform an operation.
In some embodiments, the user interface of the messaging application includes a message composition field (e.g., 616T or 616U; e.g., for composing additional messages for a message conversation). The inclusion of a message compose field in the user interface of a messaging application provides the user with an efficient technique for sending subsequent communications after the communication is sent, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation.
In some embodiments, after (e.g., in response to) transmitting the communication, the computer system displays an alignment element (e.g., 930; e.g., a "fan-shaped" graphic and/or an indicator of a direction in which the computer system is oriented) in a first size (in some embodiments, the alignment element includes an arrow pointing in a direction in which the computer system is rotated, and/or a picture of a satellite shown in space relative to the computer system); and after displaying the alignment element in the first size, the computer system stops displaying the alignment element in the first size and displays the alignment element in a second size that is smaller than the first size (e.g., within a top third or less of the display and/or as a banner). Displaying the alignment element in a first size after the communication is sent and displaying the alignment element in a second size smaller than the first size after the alignment element is displayed in the first size provides the user with alignment information after the communication and reduces the significance of the information over time, which provides improved visual feedback.
In some embodiments, the computer system displays the alignment element (e.g., in a banner) simultaneously with a visual indication (e.g., text, graphics, color, and/or animation) of the status of transmission of the communication (e.g., the transmission status bar of FIG. 9K; e.g., graphics and/or text, the content and/or appearance of which depends on the status of transmission of the communication (e.g., "transmitting" or "transmitted")). In some embodiments, the visual indication of the alignment element and/or the transmission status of the communication includes or is included in a selectable user interface element (e.g., 926) that, when selected, displays the alignment interface (e.g., 902C). Displaying the visual indication of the transmission status of the communication simultaneously with the alignment element provides the user with relevant information about the transmission status of the communication, which provides improved visual feedback.
In some embodiments, the computer system displays an alignment element (e.g., in a banner) concurrently with the computer system and a visual indication (e.g., text, graphics, colors, and/or animation) of a connection status (e.g., text, graphics, colors, and/or animation) of a communication system (e.g., 929; e.g., a non-terrestrial wireless communication system and/or a satellite communication system) for transmitting the communication via a low bandwidth communication mode (e.g., as described with reference to fig. 9K-9M; e.g., graphics and/or text, the content and/or appearance of which depends on the connection status (e.g., "connected" or "unconnected") of the computer). In some embodiments, the visual indication of the alignment element and/or the connection status of the communication includes or is included in a selectable user interface element that, when selected, displays an alignment interface (e.g., 902C). Displaying a visual indication of the connection status of the computer system with the communication system for transmitting the communication via the low bandwidth communication mode simultaneously with the alignment element provides the user with relevant information about the connection status of the computer system, which provides improved visual feedback.
In some embodiments, prior to sending the communication and in accordance with a determination that the computer system is not properly aligned for sending the communication via a low bandwidth communication mode (e.g., via non-terrestrial and/or satellite communication) (e.g., the computer system is not aligned with one or more satellites), the computer system displays an alignment element (e.g., a "fan-shaped" graphic and/or an indicator of a direction in which the computer system is oriented) (in some embodiments, the alignment element includes an arrow pointing in a direction in which the computer system is rotated, and/or a picture of a satellite shown in space relative to the computer system). In accordance with a determination that the computer system is not properly aligned for transmitting the communication via the low bandwidth communication mode, displaying the alignment element (e.g., 930) automatically provides a visual indication to the user that the computer system is not properly aligned for transmitting the communication and may assist the user in aligning the computer system, which provides improved visual feedback and performs the operation without further user input when a set of conditions has been met.
In some embodiments, a computer system (e.g., in a banner) displays a visual indication (e.g., text, graphics, colors, and/or animation) of the connection status of the computer system with a communication system (e.g., 929; e.g., with a non-terrestrial and/or satellite communication system) for transmitting the communication via a low bandwidth communication mode; and in accordance with a determination that the computer system is not connected to a communication system for transmitting the communication via the low bandwidth communication mode, the computer system displays a visual indication (e.g., text, graphics, color, and/or animation) of an error condition (e.g., in the banner and/or contemporaneously with a visual indication of a connection status of the computer system) (e.g., as described with reference to fig. 9C-9J; e.g., an indication of a reason why the computer system is not currently capable of communicating with the one or more satellites). Displaying a visual indication of the connection status of a computer system with a communication system for transmitting the communication via a low bandwidth communication mode provides information to a user regarding the connection status, which provides improved visual feedback. In accordance with a determination that the computer system is not connected to the communication system for transmitting the communication via the low bandwidth communication mode, a visual indication of an error condition is displayed that the computer system is not connected to the communication system for transmitting the communication via the low bandwidth communication mode is automatically provided to the user, which provides improved visual feedback and performs the operation without further user input when a set of conditions has been met.
In some embodiments, the visual indication of the connection status of the computer system to the communication system for transmitting the communication via the low bandwidth communication mode includes (or is included in) a selectable connection assistant option (e.g., 926; e.g., banner, icon, button, affordance, and/or graphical element). In some implementations, the computer system detects a selection of a connection assistant option (e.g., a flick gesture or other selection input on the connection assistant option); and in response to detecting the selection of the connection assistant element, the computer system displays instructions (e.g., 908F; e.g., text and/or graphical indicators, such as arrows) for connecting the computer system to a communication system for transmitting the communication via the low bandwidth communication mode (e.g., alignment elements (e.g., indicators of a "fan-shaped" graphic and/or a direction that orients the computer system)) (in some embodiments, the alignment elements include arrows pointing in a direction in which the computer system rotates, and/or pictures of satellites shown in space relative to the computer system). Displaying instructions for connecting the computer system with a communication system for transmitting the communication via the low bandwidth communication mode in response to detecting the selection of the connection assistant element provides the user with an efficient technique for obtaining instructions for connecting the computer system with a communication system for transmitting the communication via the low bandwidth communication mode without additional input, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation.
In some embodiments, displaying a visual indication of an error condition includes displaying (e.g., in a banner and/or contemporaneously with a visual indication of a connection status of a computer system) instructions (e.g., text and/or graphical indicators, such as arrows) for connecting the computer system to a communication system for transmitting the communication via a low bandwidth communication mode (e.g., as described with reference to fig. 9M). Displaying instructions for connecting a computer system with a communication system for transmitting the communication via a low bandwidth communication mode as part of displaying a visual indication of an error condition provides a user with convenient access to the instructions without requiring additional input, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation.
In some embodiments, in response to detecting a change in the position (e.g., location and/or orientation) of the computer system (or a predetermined portion of the computer system (e.g., an antenna)) relative to the communication system used to transmit the communication via the low bandwidth communication mode, the computer system changes an appearance (e.g., animates) of an element indicative of the position of the computer system (e.g., 931) (or a predetermined portion of the computer system) relative to the communication system used to transmit the communication via the low bandwidth communication mode (e.g., a graphic of a satellite rotationally moves around a graphical representation of the computer system). Changing the appearance of an element indicating the position of the computer system relative to the communication system for transmitting the communication via the low bandwidth communication mode in response to detecting a change in the position of the computer system relative to the communication system for transmitting the communication via the low bandwidth communication mode provides feedback to the user regarding the position of the computer system relative to the communication system when the relative position of the computer system changes, which provides improved visual feedback.
In some embodiments, the computer system detects a request to open an application (e.g., an application not used to send the communication via the low bandwidth communication mode) when a visual indication of a connection status of the computer system to the communication system used to send the communication via the low bandwidth communication mode is displayed. In response to detecting a request to open the application: the computer system ceasing to display at least a portion of the visual indication of the connection status of the computer system with the communication system for transmitting the communication via the low bandwidth communication mode (e.g., minimizing, hiding, and/or ceasing to display a banner that includes the visual indication); and displaying a selectable graphical element (e.g., 610T, 610U; e.g., a pill) that, when selected, causes the computer system to display (e.g., redisplay, unhide, and/or maximize display) a visual indication of the connection status of the computer system with a communication system for transmitting the communication via the low bandwidth communication mode. In some embodiments, the selectable graphical element replaces the cellular status indicator (e.g., 607). Stopping displaying at least a portion of a visual indication of a connection state of a computer system with a communication system for transmitting the communication via a low bandwidth communication mode and displaying a selectable graphical element that, when selected, causes the computer system to display the visual indication of the connection state of the computer system with the communication system for transmitting the communication via the low bandwidth communication mode allows the computer system to provide an efficient way for obtaining information about the connection state to a user while displaying the application, which provides improved visual feedback, reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation, and provides additional control options without cluttering the user interface.
In some embodiments, in response to receiving an input corresponding to a request to send the communication, the computer system displays a send status element (e.g., a send status bar in FIG. 9K; e.g., a graphical element that shows the status of sending the communication (e.g., "send" or "sent") via graphics or text, and/or a status bar, wherein the amount of padding of the bar is proportional to the completion status of sending the communication), wherein the appearance of the send status element is based on the progress of sending the communication. In some embodiments, as the messaging proceeds, the computer system updates the appearance of the send status element. In response to receiving an input corresponding to a request to send a communication, a send status element is displayed, wherein an appearance of the send status element is based on a send progress of the communication, which provides information to a user regarding the send progress of the communication without further input, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces an amount of input required to perform an operation.
In some embodiments, after sending a communication including content corresponding to a selection of a first communication content option and a second communication content option selected by a first set of one or more inputs and a second set of one or more inputs, the computer system displays a user interface (e.g., 902K; e.g., a user interface of a messaging application, a message composition field, and/or a third set of selectable communication content options) for sending a second communication (e.g., 928M; e.g., a subsequent message) to one or more recipients of the communication, the communication including content corresponding to a selection of the first communication content option and the second communication content option selected by the first set of one or more inputs and the second set of one or more inputs. While displaying the user interface for sending the second communication, the computer system detects a third set of one or more inputs corresponding to selection of content for the second communication and a request to send the second communication. In response to detecting the third set of one or more inputs, the computer system transmits a second communication comprising content selected by the third set of one or more inputs. In some embodiments, the second communication is included (e.g., displayed in a messaging application) in a message conversation having content corresponding to a selection of the first communication content option and the second communication content option selected by the first set of one or more inputs and the second set of one or more inputs. Displaying a user interface for sending a second communication to one or more recipients of the communication and ending the second communication including content selected by the third set of one or more inputs in response to detecting the third set of one or more inputs allows the user to send subsequent messages after sending the communication, which provides improved visual feedback.
In some embodiments, the user interface of the messaging application includes a message composition field (e.g., 912K; e.g., for drafting additional messages for a message conversation) and optionally a send affordance (e.g., 916K). The inclusion of a message compose field in the user interface of the messaging application provides the user with an efficient technique for composing and/or sending the second communication, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform the operation.
In some embodiments, the computer system displays the first and/or second sets of communication content options concurrently with an end option (e.g., 914) that, when selected (e.g., via user input 934L), causes the computer system to exit the low bandwidth communication mode (e.g., and/or cease displaying the first and/or second sets of selectable communication content options), or optionally displays a confirmation prompt (e.g., 620M). Displaying the first set of communication content options and/or the second set of communication content options concurrently with an end option that, when selected, causes the computer system to exit the low bandwidth communication mode provides the user with an indication that the low bandwidth communication mode may be exited and a convenient and easy technique for exiting the low bandwidth communication mode, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation.
In some embodiments, the first set of communication content options and/or the second set of communication content options are displayed when the computer system is not connected to a system for transmitting the communication via the low bandwidth communication mode. In some embodiments, in response to determining that the computer system is not connected to the system for transmitting the communication via the low bandwidth communication mode (e.g., has lost connection with the system), the computer system maintains a display of the first set of communication content options and/or the second set of communication content options (e.g., as described with reference to fig. 6M, 6N, 6O, 6P, and 6Q). Displaying the first set of communication content options and/or the second set of communication content options when the computer system is not connected to the system for transmitting the communication via the low bandwidth communication mode provides the user with the ability to continue generating content for the communication even if the connection (e.g., temporarily) is interrupted, which provides improved visual feedback.
In some embodiments, transmitting the communication including content corresponding to the selection of the first communication content option and the second communication content option selected by the first set of one or more inputs and the second set of one or more inputs further comprises: transmitting one or more additional communications (e.g., as described with reference to fig. 6T-6U and 9M-9O; e.g., transmitting additional, subsequent (e.g., from emergency services) received and/or transmitted messages and/or the content of the messages; in some embodiments, transmitting additional messages is transmitted periodically (e.g., live; in real time); and wherein transmitting the communication is to a first recipient and a second recipient; the communication received from the second recipient of the communication is relinquished to be transmitted to the sender and the first recipient (e.g., the message is not transmitted if both the sender and the first recipient are in the same thread). Discarding communication received from the second recipient of the communication to the sender and the first recipient allows limiting the sender of the message to be sent (or displayed) to the computer system, which provides improved visual feedback.
In some embodiments, when the computer system is in the low bandwidth communication mode: the computer system displays an indication (e.g., 608L1, a graphical indication, an icon, a color, a font, text, an animation, a symbol, a thumbnail, an image, and/or a glyph) of a slower (e.g., using a lower bandwidth) communication (e.g., a communication performed via a satellite communication and/or a communication performed when the computer system is in a low bandwidth communication mode) (or in some embodiments, may) than a communication not performed via the low bandwidth communication mode (e.g., a communication performed when the computer system is not in a low bandwidth communication mode; a communication performed via a terrestrial wireless communication network, a Wi-Fi network, and/or a cellular network). In some embodiments, the computer system displays an indication that the communication performed via the low bandwidth communication mode is slower than the communication not performed via the low bandwidth communication mode prior to displaying the first set of selectable communication content options. Displaying an indication that the communication performed via the low bandwidth communication mode is slower than the communication not performed via the low bandwidth communication mode prepares the user for potentially slower communication such that the user does not consider there to be an error when the communication is slower than the communication to which the user is accustomed, which provides improved visual feedback to the user.
In some embodiments, the first and/or second sets of selectable communication content options include an option (e.g., the "multi-person" option in 1716a1 and/or in option 604O) indicating that two or more persons need assistance (e.g., two or more persons need assistance and/or participate in an event). Including the option to indicate two or more persons enables the user to quickly and efficiently indicate multiple persons and events with a single selection without having to indicate each person individually (e.g., repeating the indication process for each person), which reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation, reduces power usage, prolongs battery life, and/or provides additional control options without cluttering the user interface with additional display controls.
In some embodiments, when the computer system is in the low bandwidth communication mode: prior to sending the communication, the computer system displays a field (e.g., 609V, a message composition field, and/or a text input field) for entering text (or in some embodiments other content) to be included in the communication, including limiting the amount of text (e.g., the number of characters, or in some embodiments the amount of content) that can be included in the field (e.g., the computer system prevents the amount of characters in the field from exceeding a threshold number of characters; e.g., 610V instructs the computer system 600 to limit the amount of text). In some embodiments, in response to detecting an input corresponding to text (e.g., a selection of a key on a keyboard and/or a voice command), the computer system displays the text in the field. In some embodiments, the communication includes text displayed in the field. Displaying a field for entering text to be included in the communication and limiting the amount of text that can be included in the field enables a user to customize the content of the message while maintaining the communication at a size that can be quickly sent when the computer system is in a low bandwidth communication mode provides improved visual feedback to the user and additional control options without cluttering the user interface with additional display controls.
In some embodiments, when the computer system is in the low bandwidth communication mode: when a first set of selectable communication content options (e.g., 604M) is displayed, the computer system displays an end option (e.g., 614, selectable options, icons, buttons, affordances, and/or user-interactive graphical user interface objects) that, when selected, initiates a process of exiting the low-bandwidth communication mode: and when the second set of selectable communication content options (e.g., 604N) is displayed, the computer system displays an end option (e.g., when the computer system is in the low bandwidth communication mode, the computer system displays and/or maintains the display of the end option accordingly). Displaying the end option when the first set of selectable communication content options is displayed and displaying the end option when the second set of selectable communication content options is displayed enables the user to quickly exit the low bandwidth communication mode in multiple stages, which provides improved visual feedback to the user and reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation.
In some embodiments, when the computer system is in the low bandwidth communication mode: responsive to detecting a second set of one or more inputs corresponding to selection of a second communication content option of the second set of selectable communication content options: in accordance with a determination that the selected second communication content option is a first option of the second set of selectable communication content options (e.g., "stroke" or "drowning" in 604Q), the computer system displays an option (e.g., 606S, selectable options, icons, buttons, affordances, and/or user-interactive graphical user interface objects) for sending the communication via the display generation component; and in accordance with a determination that the selected second communication content option is a second option of the second set of selectable communication content options that is different from the first option of the second set of selectable communication content options (e.g., "ill" in 604Q), the computer system displays a third set of selectable communication content options (e.g., 604O) corresponding to the respective content for the communication via the display generation component without displaying an option for transmitting the communication (e.g., without displaying a transmission option such as 606R or 606S in 602O), wherein the third set of selectable communication content options is specific to the low bandwidth communication mode. Displaying an option to send the communication or a set of selectable communication content options corresponding to the respective content for the communication without displaying the option to send the communication in accordance with what communication content options are selected enables the user to send the communication faster (e.g., with less user input) if the environment is deemed to be particularly urgent, while allowing the user to provide additional information when the environment is deemed not particularly urgent, which provides the user with improved visual feedback, reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation, and performs the operation without further user input when a set of conditions has been met.
It is noted that the details of the process described above with respect to method 800 may also be applied in a similar manner to the methods described above and below. For example, methods 700, 1000, 1200, 1400, 1600, 1800, 2000, and/or 2200 optionally include one or more features of the various methods described above with reference to method 800. For example, method 800 optionally may be performed as part of a process for initiating communications according to method 700. For example, method 800 optionally includes providing an alignment element according to method 1000. For example, method 800 may include selecting a second recipient of the communication according to method 1200. For example, method 1800 may initiate method 800 from a messaging application. For example, multiple sets of options as described in method 800 may be displayed in the alternative communication network test mode in method 2000. For example, method 800 may be a process corresponding to a user interface object in method 2200. For the sake of brevity, these details are not repeated hereinafter.
Fig. 9A-9U illustrate an exemplary user interface for aligning a computer system with one or more satellites, according to some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the process in fig. 10.
Fig. 9A-9P include a computer system 900 with a touch sensitive display 901. In fig. 9A and 9B, computer system 900 displays an interface for receiving a communication request. In fig. 9A, computer system 900 displays a call interface 902A in text region 908 that includes a call to 911. The call interface 902A includes an end call button 917, a connection indicator 905, a plurality of call management buttons 903, and a satellite communication button 904A. The network indicator 907 indicates that the terrestrial wireless communications network is unavailable to complete the call to 911. The computer system 900 also displays a "no connection" at the connection indicator 905 to indicate that the terrestrial wireless communication network is not available to complete the call to 911. In some embodiments, computer system 900 includes one or more elements of devices 100, 300, and/or 500. In some embodiments, computer system 900 is substantially similar to computer system 600 and includes some or all of the elements of computer system 900 and may perform some or all of the functions of computer system 900.
In some implementations, any of the inputs described herein (e.g., inputs 906A, 906B, 904K, 927K, 922L, 927M1, and/or 927N) are or include touch inputs (e.g., tap gestures and/or swipe gestures). In some implementations, any of the inputs described herein (e.g., inputs 906A, 906B, 904K, 927K, 922L, 927M1, and/or 927N) are or include voice inputs (e.g., voice commands to select user interface elements or to activate features or perform functions such as those associated with user interface elements). In some implementations, any of the inputs described herein (e.g., inputs 906A, 906B, 904K, 927K, 922L, 927M1, and/or 927N) are or include air gestures (e.g., air gestures to select a user interface element or to activate a feature or perform a function, such as a feature or function associated with a user interface element). In some embodiments, any of the inputs described herein (e.g., inputs 906A, 906B, 904K, 927K, 922L, 927M1, and/or 927N) are or include activation (e.g., pressing, rotating, and/or moving) of a hardware device (e.g., a button, a rotatable input mechanism, a rotatable depressible input mechanism, a mouse button, a remote control button, and/or a joystick). In some embodiments, any of the user interface elements described herein as being selected (e.g., icons, affordances, buttons, and/or selectable options) are selected by activating a hardware device when the user interface element is in focus (e.g., highlighted, bolded, outlined, visually distinguished from other user interface elements, and/or located at or near a cursor).
In response to determining that no terrestrial wireless communication network is available to complete the call to 911, the call management button 903 is gray, indicating that the call management button 903 is not interactable (e.g., not selectable or disabled) because the call cannot be connected. In response to receiving input 906A on satellite communications button 904A, computer system 900 displays a plurality of options for selecting content to submit in the emergency report. In some embodiments, the emergency report is a low bandwidth communication in which the maximum amount of data for the communication is limited. Exemplary interfaces for options to be submitted in the emergency report are shown and discussed in fig. 6M-6Q. In some embodiments, the call interface 602A of fig. 9A is similar to the features described in the call interface 602G of fig. 6G, as described above.
In fig. 9B, computer system 900 displays a summary interface 902B that includes an emergency report of a summary of the selections made for the plurality of options. Summary interface 902B includes a back button 915, a timer 910B, a send option 904B, and a no send option 908B. In response to receiving input 906B, computer system 900 displays alignment interface 902C of fig. 9C. In some embodiments, timer 910B indicates the amount of time (e.g., in seconds) remaining before computer system 900 automatically sends an emergency report including the displayed summary, and computer system 900 displays alignment interface 902C of fig. 9C. In some implementations, the summary interface 902B is similar to the features described in the summary interface 602S in fig. 6S, as described above.
In some implementations, a non-terrestrial wireless communication network (e.g., a satellite network) is unavailable to send the emergency report. In response to receiving a communication request, such as input 906B of fig. 9B, computer system 900 displays an alignment interface (e.g., alignment interface 902C of fig. 9C) for transmitting an emergency report via satellite. As described herein, computer system 900 has a communication window 930 for communicating with satellites. In response to receiving an indication that computer system 900 is oriented to align communication window 930 with a satellite, computer system 900 sends an emergency report. The orientation of computer system 900 aligned with a satellite is referred to as an alignment position. In some embodiments, the alignment position is the center of the communication window 930, as described in the alignment interface 902J in fig. 9J.
In some embodiments, computer system 900 includes a database (e.g., memory) of satellite orbits for communication. In some embodiments, the orbit comprises a known position of the satellite over time. Computer system 900 determines that the satellite is within communication range of the satellite based on the location of the satellite at the time the message was initiated (e.g., the GPS location) of computer system 900. Embodiments of the present invention describe one satellite for communication, however additional satellites may be aligned with computer system 900 to send emergency reports (e.g., two satellites may be located in a communication window).
In fig. 9C-9J, computer system 900 displays an alignment interface (e.g., 902C, 902D, 902E, 902F, 902G, 902H, 902I, 902J, 902O, and 902P) with an end button 914 and an alignment element 909. User 950 indicates the elevation angle of computer system 900. The minimap 940 indicates the spatial location of the computer system 900 in 2D space. The minimap 940 includes an exemplary user 942C in which an arrow indicates an azimuth (e.g., rotational direction) of the computer system 900 facing the communication window 930, as described below.
The end button 914 is a selectable button for ending the display of the respective alignment interface (902C, 902D, 902E, 902F, 902G, 902H, 902I, 902J, 902O, or 902P). In response to receiving a selection of end button 914, computer system 900 displays a previously displayed interface, namely call interface 902A of FIG. 9A or summary interface 902B of FIG. 9B. In some embodiments, in response to receiving a selection of end button 914, computer system 900 displays a home screen.
In FIG. 9C, computer system 900 displays an alignment interface 902C that displays both an end button 914 and an alignment element 909. In some implementations, in response to determining that the position of computer system 900 (e.g., relative to a satellite) is indeterminate, computer system 900 displays alignment element 902C. In some embodiments, if the location of computer system 900 can be determined, computer system 900 foregoes displaying alignment interface 902C and displays alignment interface 902D.
Alignment element 909 displays instructions for aligning computer system 900 with a satellite. The alignment elements 909 include a graphic element 931 and a text element 908C. The graphical element 931 includes a communication window 930. Communication window 930 is an exemplary range of orientations in which computer system 900 is capable of communicating with satellites. In some embodiments, computer system 900 displays a graphical indication of the satellite (e.g., satellite representation 929 described below) within communication window 930 to indicate that computer system 900 is aligned to communicate with the satellite. When computer system 900 is oriented in alignment with a satellite, graphical element 931 is updated.
Graphical element 931 includes an origin that represents computer system 932 as communication window 930 with computer system 900. As described herein, the orientation of computer system 900 includes azimuth and elevation angles for aligning computer system 900 with satellites. Azimuth is the direction or rotation of computer system 900. Elevation is the slope or angle that computer system 900 is facing (e.g., pointing upward or downward).
The minimap 940 describes the azimuth of the computer system 900, which is indicated by the arrow of the user 942C. The arrow indicates the direction in which computer system 900 is facing (e.g., the azimuthal orientation of computer system 900). In some implementations, the direction in which computer system 900 faces (e.g., the azimuth of computer system 900) is the direction in which communication window 930 is oriented. In fig. 9C, computer system 900 faces south.
In fig. 9C, user 950 orients the elevation angle of computer system 900 slightly downward. Alignment element 909 indicates that computer system 900 cannot be connected to a satellite. In response to determining that computer system 900 is not capable of connecting with a satellite, graphical element 931 foregoes displaying satellite representation 929 and displays communication window 930. In some embodiments, computer system 900 displays satellite representation 929 with a dull (e.g., translucent) appearance, indicating that computer system 900 cannot connect to a satellite.
Text element 908C indicates that computer system 900 is not capable of connecting to a satellite. Text element 908C includes text prompts that may appear once, in groups, or individually. Text prompt 908C may be replaced after a threshold period of time that the text prompt is displayed (e.g., after 3 seconds, 5 seconds, or 10 seconds of displaying "bad connection," text is replaced with "no connection"). Communication window 930 includes an empty appearance indicating that computer system 900 is not connected to or oriented to a satellite. In some embodiments, as shown in fig. 9C, computer system 900 outputs a haptic output 619 and/or an audio output 650 to indicate that computer system 900 has a poor connection.
In response to computer system 900 determining the location of computer system 900 and computer system 900 being blocked from communicating with a satellite, computer system 900 displays alignment interface 902D shown in fig. 9D. In fig. 9D, computer system 900 displays an alignment interface 902D that displays both an end button 914 and an alignment element 909. The alignment elements 909 include a graphic element 931 and a text element 908D. In some embodiments, as shown in fig. 9D, computer system 900 outputs a tactile output 619 and/or an audio output 650 to indicate that the connection state of computer system 900 has changed (e.g., from bad/no connection to finding a satellite).
In fig. 9D, computer system 900 shows the same elevation angle as described in fig. 9C. The minimap 940 also shows that the user 942D is facing the same direction as described in fig. 9C. In response to computer system 900 determining that computer system 900 is in a position and computer system 900 is blocked from communicating with a satellite, computer system 900 updates the display of alignment element 909 to indicate that an obstacle exists.
In fig. 9D, text element 908D replaces text element 908C. Text element 908D includes a notification that ensures that computer system 900 is outside. An obstacle (such as indoors) may block communication with a satellite. Text element 908D indicates that computer system 900 is not connected and that a satellite has not been found. In some implementations, the computer system 900 displays (e.g., continues to display) a satellite representation 929 in the alignment interface 902D that has a dull (e.g., translucent) appearance, indicating that the computer system cannot connect to a satellite. The communication window 930 shows (e.g., continues to have) an empty appearance, indicating that the computer system 900 is not connected to or oriented to a satellite.
In response to determining that computer system 900 is not blocked (e.g., is no longer blocked), computer system 900 displays alignment interface 902E of fig. 9E. In some embodiments, as shown in fig. 9E, computer system 900 outputs a tactile output 619 and/or an audio output 650 to indicate that the connection state of computer system 900 has changed (e.g., from seeking satellite to unconnected/satellite available after 4 minutes). If computer system 900 determines that satellites are available for communication, computer system 900 displays alignment interface 902F, as further described below with reference to FIG. 9F.
In fig. 9E, computer system 900 is shown with computer system 900 at the same elevation angle as described in fig. 9D. The minimap 940 shows that the user 942D has changed location and is located outside the building 1. The minimap 940 shows that the azimuth of the computer system 900 has changed and that the computer system 900 is facing north. In some implementations, the computer system 900 displays (e.g., continues to display) a satellite representation 929 in the alignment interface 902E that has a dull (e.g., translucent) appearance, indicating that the satellite is not yet available.
In fig. 9E, an alignment element 909 indicates that an interrupt is in progress. Computer system 900 determines that an outage exists when satellites are not available for communication based on the location of computer system 900 and a satellite orbit database. The computer system 900 may determine the period of time until the satellite is available based on the location of the computer system 900 and the satellite orbit database. In some embodiments, satellite availability refers to the situation when the satellite is within range of the communication window 930. Text element 908E includes a notification of a period of time (four minutes) up to the satellite being available. In some embodiments, the text element 908E is updated by the computer system 900 as the period of time passes.
In response to the computer system 900 determining that the time period has elapsed and/or that the satellite is available for communication, the computer system 900 displays the alignment element 902F of fig. 9F. In some embodiments, as shown in fig. 9F, computer system 900 outputs haptic output 619 and/or audio output 650 to indicate that the connection state of computer system 900 has changed (e.g., from satellite unavailable to satellite available). In fig. 9F, computer system 900 is shown with computer system 900 at the same elevation angle as described in fig. 9E. The minimap 940 shows that the user 942D has not changed position compared to fig. 9E. The minimap 940 also shows that the azimuth of the computer system 900 has not changed.
In response to the computer system 900 determining that satellites are available, the computer system 900 updates the display of the alignment element 909 in FIG. 9F. Alignment element 909 indicates that the satellite is available, but computer system 900 is not connected. Computer system 900 determines, based on the orientation of computer system 900 and the satellite orbit database, that computer system 900 must change its orientation to achieve the alignment position.
In response to determining that computer system 900 must change its orientation to achieve the alignment position, computer system 900 updates alignment element 909 to indicate instructions for aligning computer system 900. The computer system 900 displays the satellite representation 929 at a location relative to the computer system 932 and the graphical element 931 includes an indicator of the direction in which the computer system 932 should be rotated to align the azimuth with the satellite. The computer system 900 displays the indication as an arrow starting from an aligned position over the computer system 932. The computer system 900 displays the magnitude of the arrow based on the amount of correction required to place the satellite representation 929 in the aligned position.
Text element 908F includes a notification of the connection status (e.g., unconnected) of computer system 900, as well as a notification of how computer system 900 is to be placed in an aligned position. The computer system 900 updates the text element 908F based on the magnitude of the change required to place the computer system 900 in the aligned position. In fig. 9F, computer system 900 displays text element 908F as "turn far left to find satellite" for placing satellite representation 929 into the large change magnitude of the aligned position.
In response to a change in azimuth of computer system 900, computer system 900 displays alignment interface 902G of fig. 9G. In fig. 9G, computer system 900 is at the same elevation angle as described in fig. 9F. The minimap 940 shows that the user 942D has changed the azimuth of the computer system 900 so that the computer system 900 is facing west, but the location is the same as described in fig. 9F.
In response to a change in azimuth of computer system 900, computer system 900 displays alignment interface 902G. In alignment interface 902G, alignment element 909 has been updated to reflect the updated azimuth of computer system 900. In some embodiments, as shown in fig. 9G, computer system 900 outputs haptic output 619 and/or audio output 650 to indicate an updated azimuth (e.g., alignment of computer system 900 has improved). Alignment element 909 continues to indicate that satellites are available but computer system 900 is not connected. Based on the change in azimuth of computer system 900, computer system 900 updates alignment element 909 with the updated instructions for aligning computer system 932 and displays satellite representation 929 in an updated position relative to computer system 900, closer to communication window 930. Based on the amount of correction required to place the satellite representation 929 in the aligned position, the magnitude of the arrow in the graphical element 931 in fig. 9G is less than the magnitude of the arrow in fig. 9F, as described above. In some embodiments, graphical element 931 is dynamically (or gradually) updated based on the direction of the change in orientation of computer system 900. In some implementations, the communication window is dynamically updated with an alignment indication (e.g., a shadow or color) when the azimuth of the computer system 900 changes closer to the satellite.
The computer system 900 updates the text element 908G based on a smaller magnitude of change required to place the computer system 900 in the aligned position than is required in the alignment interface 902F of fig. 9F. In fig. 9G, computer system 900 updates text element 908F to "turn left to find satellite" for placing satellite representation 929 to the smaller amount of change in the aligned position. In some implementations, updating the text element 908F occurs automatically when the computer system 900 reaches a threshold magnitude that aligns the computer system 900 with a satellite.
In some implementations, the satellites are mobile relative to the computer system 900 (e.g., the satellites are not in geosynchronous orbit). In response to determining that the satellite has moved relative to computer system 900, computer system 900 automatically updates the display of satellite representation 929 in alignment interface 902G. In response to determining that the satellite is moving outside the range of computer system 900, computer system 900 displays alignment interface 902O of FIG. 9O, as described below. As described herein, the movement of a satellite out of range is an indication that computer system 900 and the satellite are unable to communicate with each other. For example, a satellite moving out of range is an indication that the satellite is moving from the horizon of computer system 900 and is blocked from communicating with computer system 900 by land objects (e.g., land, trees, buildings, mountains, and/or the atmosphere).
In response to further changes in the azimuth of computer system 900, computer system 900 displays alignment interface 902H of fig. 9H. In fig. 9H, computer system 900 is shown with computer system 900 at the same elevation angle as described in fig. 9F. The minimap 940 shows that the user 942D has changed the azimuth of the computer system 900 (the computer system 900 is facing southwest), but the computer system 900 is in the same location as described in fig. 9F.
In response to further changes in the azimuth of computer system 900, computer system 900 updates alignment interface 902H to reflect the updated azimuth of computer system 900. Computer system 900 determines that computer system 900 has aligned with the azimuth angle but must continue to change its orientation to achieve the alignment position (e.g., change elevation angle) based on the updated azimuth angle and satellite orbit database of computer system 900. In some embodiments, as shown in fig. 9H, computer system 900 outputs a haptic output 619 and/or an audio output 650 to indicate that computer system 900 is aligned in the azimuth direction. The computer system 900 updates the alignment element 909 to indicate instructions for aligning the elevation angle of the computer system 900 and displays the satellite representation 929 in an updated position relative to the computer system 932, with the satellite representation 929 in the communication window 930. The computer system 900 also updates the size of the alignment element 909 to indicate that the satellite representation 929 is larger (e.g., as compared to the satellite representation 929 in fig. 9E-9G) and that the computer system 932 is larger (e.g., as compared to the computer system 932 in fig. 9C-9G).
In some embodiments, after displaying alignment interface 902H, computer system 900 determines that computer system 900 is not aligned with satellites 932 based on the updated orientation of computer system 900 and the satellite orbit database. In response, computer system 900 updates alignment element 909 to display computer system 932 with satellite representation 929 outside of communication window 930. The computer system 900 also updates the size of the alignment element 909 to indicate that the satellite representation 929 is smaller (e.g., as compared to fig. 9H) and that the computer system 932 is smaller (e.g., as compared to fig. 9H).
The graphical element 931 includes an indicator of the direction in which the computer system 932 should be elevated to align the azimuth with the satellite. Computer system 900 displays an indicator of the magnitude of the elevation angle used to place satellite representation 929 in an aligned position. In some implementations, the graphical element 931 is dynamically (or gradually) updated based on the direction of change in the elevation angle of the device. Computer system 900 displays communication window 930 with an updated appearance (e.g., dark shading or color) indicating that computer system 900 is aligned in the azimuth direction and not in the elevation direction.
In some embodiments, the computer system dynamically updates the appearance of the communication window as the azimuth of the computer system 900 changes to align with the satellite. In some embodiments, when the azimuth of computer system 900 changes to align with a satellite, computer system 900 provides a haptic 619 to indicate azimuth alignment. In fig. 9H, computer system 900 updates graphical element 931 to display computer system 932 (e.g., zoom in graphical element 931) in a larger size than computer system 932 of fig. 9F. The increase in size of the computer system 932 provides a visual notification that the azimuth of the computer system is aligned with the satellite.
In fig. 9H, computer system 900 updates text element 908H based on azimuth and satellite alignment. Computer system 900 updates text element 908H to display instructions for correcting the elevation angle of computer system 932 (e.g., "point phone up"). In some implementations, updating the text element 908H occurs automatically.
In response to detecting a change in elevation angle of computer system 900, computer system 900 displays alignment interface 902I of FIG. 9I. In fig. 9I, computer system 900 shows computer system 900 at an updated elevation angle, now slightly up and being held by user 950. The minimap 940 shows that the user 942I has the same azimuth and position as described in 9H.
As shown in FIG. 9I, in response to detecting a change in the elevation angle of computer system 900, computer system 900 updates alignment element 909 to reflect the updated elevation angle of computer system 900. In some embodiments, as shown in fig. 9I, computer system 900 outputs haptic output 619 and/or audio output 650 to indicate that the elevation alignment of computer system 900 has changed (e.g., improved). Computer system 900 determines, based on the updated position of computer system 900 and the satellite orbit database, that the elevation angle of computer system 900 must be further adjusted to achieve the alignment position, and updates alignment element 909 to indicate instructions for further aligning computer system 900. Computer system 900 displays satellite representation 929 in an updated position relative to computer system 932, closer to computer system 900 (e.g., vertically moving on touch-sensitive display 901 toward the center of communication window 930).
The graphical element 931 includes an indicator of the direction in which the computer system 900 should be elevated to align the elevation angle with the satellite. In some implementations, the graphical element 931 is dynamically (or gradually) updated based on the direction of change in the elevation angle of the device.
Computer system 900 displays communication window 930 with the same appearance as described in fig. 9H, indicating that the azimuth is aligned with the satellite. In some implementations, the communication window is dynamically updated with an alignment indication when the elevation angle of the computer system 900 changes closer to the satellite (e.g., the shadow or color becomes darker than shown in fig. 9H).
The computer system 900 updates the text element 908I based on a smaller magnitude of change required to place the computer system 900 in the aligned position than is required in the aligned interface 902I of fig. 9I. For example, text element 908I may be updated from "up phone" to "up phone" in response to a threshold change magnitude for placing satellite representation 929 in an aligned position.
In response to detecting an updated change in the elevation angle of computer system 900, computer system 900 displays alignment interface 902J of fig. 9J. In fig. 9J, computer system 900 shows computer system 900 at an updated elevation angle, now slightly upward from fig. 9I and being held by user 950. The minimap 940 shows that the user 942D has the same azimuth and position as described in fig. 9I. In response to detecting a change in elevation angle of computer system 900, computer system 900 displays alignment interface 902J. Alignment interface 902J displays that alignment element 909 has been updated to reflect the updated elevation angle of computer system 900.
In fig. 9J, computer system 900 has reached an aligned position. In some implementations, the elevation angle of the computer system 900 changes to align with the satellite, and the computer system 900 provides haptic 619 and/or audio output 650 to indicate elevation alignment and/or a change in connection status (e.g., change from unconnected to connected). The display of satellite representation 929 is in an updated position relative to computer system 932, closer to computer system 900, and in an aligned position (e.g., vertically moving toward the center of communication window 930). Computer system 900 displays a communication window 930 with an updated appearance indicating that azimuth and elevation are aligned with satellites (e.g., very dark shadows or colors). Text element 908J includes a notification of the connection status (e.g., connected) of computer system 900 and indicates that a satellite has been found.
In response to determining that computer system 900 is properly aligned, computer system 900 automatically begins sending emergency reports. Text element 908J indicates that the message is being sent. Messaging option 910J indicates that the messaging user interface is being opened to show that the message is being sent.
In some implementations, in response to aligning satellite representation 929 in the aligned position, computer system 900 displays messaging interface 902K of fig. 9K. In some embodiments, in response to a threshold period of time passing after display of alignment interface 902J, computer system 900 displays messaging interface 902K. In some embodiments, in response to detecting selection 912J of message transfer option 910J, computer system 900 displays message transfer interface 902K.
While the above embodiments describe computer system 900 providing notification to correct any obstructions and aligning the azimuth and then the elevation of computer system 900, the order of each of these features may be reversed, rearranged, or otherwise modified. In some embodiments, computer system 900 provides an interface for both fixed elevation and alignment simultaneously.
In fig. 9K, computer system 900 displays a messaging interface 902K in which a message is being sent via satellite communications. As described above, in response to aligning computer system 900 with a satellite, computer system 900 automatically transmits an emergency communication and displays messaging interface 902K. Messaging interface 902K shows the perspective of the sender of the emergency report. In some embodiments, as shown in fig. 9K, computer system 900 outputs a haptic output 619 and/or an audio output 650 to indicate that computer system 900 is sending the message.
Banner 926 includes graphical element 931 that displays the connection status of computer system 900 to the satellite. In some embodiments, graphical element 931 is a smaller view of alignment element 909 of fig. 9C-9J. In response to the computer system 900 receiving an input to change the orientation of the computer system 900, the computer system 900 automatically (e.g., dynamically) updates the graphical element 931 on the banner to indicate the connection status and, in some embodiments, how to align the computer system 900 with the satellite. Banner 926 includes instructions to keep pointing at the satellite to send and receive messages. Banner 926 includes a send status bar that indicates the status of the message as being sent. The send status bar is dynamically updated to show the progress of the message being sent.
In response to computer system 900 receiving input 927K on banner 926, computer system 900 displays a queue of messages to be sent via satellite communications. In some embodiments, several messages are queued for transmission, and in response to receiving input 927K on banner 926, computer system 900 updates messaging interface 902K to display the queued several messages and additional message 906K, as described below.
In fig. 9K, messaging interface 902K includes a messaging header 908K, a message 906K, a text box 912K, and a send affordance 916K. The messaging header 908K indicates the method used by the computer system 900 to send the message 906K. Message 906K includes a summary of the emergency information included in the content of summary interface 902B. In some embodiments, as shown in fig. 9K, message 906K includes a graphical representation (e.g., 656) of the emergency situation specified by message 906K or other content of message 906K.
In response to receiving the input 904K in the text box 912K in the messaging interface 902K, the computer system 900 displays the messaging interface 902L shown in fig. 9L. In fig. 9L, messaging interface 902L includes a banner 926 and a graphical element 931 indicating that computer system 900 is still connected to a satellite. Messaging interface 902L displays message 906L as sent via satellite, as indicated by messaging header 908L. In some embodiments, as shown in fig. 9L, computer system 900 outputs a haptic output 619 and/or an audio output 650 to indicate that the message has been successfully sent. Since the message has been sent but the return message has not been received, banner 926 displays the message status "waiting to be received" (e.g., instead of the send status bar and "in send" status shown in FIG. 9K). The banner 926 also maintains instructions to keep pointing to the satellite to send and receive messages.
In fig. 9L, computer system 900 detects a request 936L to eliminate banner 926. In some embodiments, computer system 900 stops display of banner 926 in response to detecting request 936L. In some embodiments, computer system 900 displays minimized banner 926a in response to detecting request 936L, as shown in fig. 9L 1. Minimizing banner 926a includes minimizing graphical element 931a and status indicator 926b. In contrast to banner 926, minimized banner 926a does not include detailed text user interface elements (e.g., "connected," "keep pointing to satellite for transmission and reception," and/or "wait for reception").
Fig. 9L 1A-9L 1D illustrate embodiments of a minimized banner 926a in various states.
Fig. 9L1A illustrates a state of minimizing the banner 926a when the computer system 900 is connected to a satellite and is sending a message (e.g., the same state represented by the banner 926 in fig. 9K). The window portion of minimized graphical element 931a is shaded to indicate that computer system 900 is connected to a satellite, and status indicator 926a shows a partially filled ring to indicate that a message is being sent.
Fig. 9L1B shows a state (e.g., the same state represented by banner 926 in fig. 9L) of minimizing banner 926a when computer system 900 is connected to a satellite, a message has been sent, and computer system 900 is waiting to receive a response. The window portion of minimized graphical element 931a is shaded to indicate that computer system 900 is connected to a satellite, and status indicator 926a shows a fully filled ring to indicate that a message has been sent.
Fig. 9L1C illustrates a state of minimizing the banner 926a when the computer system 900 has a poor connection to a satellite (e.g., the same state represented by the banner 926 in fig. 9M described below). The minimized graphical element 931a shows a dot on the left side of the circle to indicate that the computer system 900 has become misaligned with the satellite and that the status indicator 926a is not present.
Fig. 9L1D illustrates a state of minimizing the banner 926a when the computer system 900 is not connected to a satellite (e.g., the same state represented by the banner 926 in fig. 9M 1) and/or no satellite is available (e.g., the state represented by 2106 in fig. 21J). Similar to the minimized graphic element 931a in fig. 9L1C, the minimized graphic element 931a in fig. 9L1D shows a dot on the left side of the circle to indicate that the computer system 900 is not connected to a satellite (but has a different fill color or effect to distinguish from a poor connection state), and the status indicator 926a includes a symbol (e.g., an exclamation mark in an octagon) to indicate that the computer system 900 is not connected to a satellite (e.g., as opposed to having a poor connection).
In response to receiving one or more inputs (e.g., taps) on keyboard 920L in fig. 9L1, computer system 900 displays a written message in text box 912L. In response to receiving a selection to send affordance 916L (e.g., input 922L), computer system 900 sends a written message in text box 912L (e.g., via satellite communication) and displays messaging interface 902M. In some embodiments, computer system 900 attempts to send the written message via a terrestrial wireless communication network and if the terrestrial wireless communication network is available, sends the written message via the terrestrial wireless communication network (e.g., instead of via satellite communication).
In fig. 9M, computer system 900 displays a messaging interface 902M that includes a banner 926 and a graphical element 931 indicating that computer system 900 has a poor connection to a satellite. Banner 926 includes instructions for aligning computer system 900 to remain connected to the satellite ("turn left") and displays (e.g., maintains) a message state of "waiting to receive" because no response has been received. The messaging interface 902M displays the message 928M as sent via a short message, as well as the text box 912M, the send affordance 916M, and the keyboard 920M. In some embodiments, as shown in fig. 9M, computer system 900 outputs a haptic output 619 and/or an audio output 650 to indicate that the state of connection of computer system 900 to the satellite has changed (e.g., from connected to poorly connected).
In fig. 9M1, computer system 900 displays a messaging interface 902M that includes a banner 926 and a graphical element 931 indicating that computer system 900 is not connected to a satellite. In some embodiments, as shown in fig. 9M1, computer system 900 outputs a tactile output 619 and/or an audio output 650 to indicate that the state of connection of computer system 900 to the satellite has changed (e.g., from a poor connection to an unconnected state). Messaging interface 902M displays message 906M as sent via satellite, as indicated by messaging header 908M. The messaging interface 902M also displays the message 928M as sent via a short message. As described above, in response to determining that a terrestrial wireless communication network is available, computer system 900 can send a message via the terrestrial wireless communication network.
Between fig. 9L1 and 9M, the computer system 900 changes orientation relative to the satellite. In response to a determination that the alignment between the satellites of computer system 900 has been degraded, computer system 900 updates (e.g., expands) banner 926 to display that computer system 900 has a poor connection to the satellites and to display instructions for aligning computer system 900 to remain connected to the satellites ("turn left"). In some implementations, in response to determining that computer system 900 is moving into azimuth and/or elevation misalignment, computer system 900 outputs haptic 619 and/or audio output 650. In fig. 9M, in response to receiving input 927M on banner 926, computer system 900 displays an alignment interface 902G, such as that of fig. 9G, in which a larger view of graphical element 931 is displayed.
Between fig. 9M and 9M1, the computer system 900 changes the orientation relative to the satellite, or the poor connection, for a predetermined amount of time. In response to determining that computer system 900 is not aligned with a satellite or that a poor connection has persisted for a predetermined amount of time, computer system 900 updates banner 926 to indicate that computer system 900 is not connected to a satellite and updates instructions to find a satellite. In some implementations, in response to determining that computer system 900 is moved into azimuth and/or elevation misalignment, computer system 900 outputs haptic 619 and/or audio output 650. In fig. 9M1, in response to receiving input 927M1 on banner 926, computer system 900 displays an alignment interface 902G, such as that of fig. 9G, in which a larger view of graphical element 931 is displayed.
In response to determining that the terrestrial wireless communication network is available, computer system 900 displays messaging user interface 906N shown in fig. 9N, and optionally outputs haptic output 619 and/or audio output 650 to indicate that the terrestrial wireless communication network is available. Messaging interface 902N displays that message 906N is sent and messaging header 908N indicates that message 906N is sent via satellite communication. In some embodiments, messaging interface 902N displays text input field 912N and sends affordance 916N.
Messaging interface 902N includes banner 926 and network indicator 907. In response to determining that a terrestrial wireless communication network is available, computer system 900 displays network indicator 907 with an appearance indicating that the terrestrial wireless communication network is available. Banner 926 includes an indication that a terrestrial wireless communication network is available. In some embodiments, computer system 900 determines that the call is available for communication with the emergency service being contacted. In response to determining that the call is available, banner 926 displays that the call is available for emergency services.
In response to computer system 900 receiving the selection of banner 926 in fig. 9N (e.g., via input 927N), computer system 900 calls emergency services (e.g., 911) as the recipient of message 906N. In some embodiments, in response to determining that a terrestrial wireless communication network is available, computer system 900 updates banner 926 to forgo displaying graphical element 931 and displays an indication that the terrestrial wireless communication network is available.
Although fig. 9N is described with reference to sending message 906N, in some embodiments, message 906N is sent via terrestrial wireless communication in response to computer system 900 determining that terrestrial wireless communication is available. In some embodiments, when the message is sent, the banner 926 of fig. 9N replaces the banner 926 of fig. 9K.
In response to determining that a Wi-Fi network is available, computer system 900 displays messaging interface 902N1 shown in fig. 9N1, and optionally outputs haptic output 619 and/or audio output 650 to indicate that a Wi-Fi network is available. Messaging interface 902N1 includes banner 926. Banner 926 includes an indication that Wi-Fi networks are available. In some implementations, the computer system 900 determines that the call can communicate with the emergency service being contacted via a Wi-Fi network. In response to determining that the call is available, banner 926 displays that the call is available for emergency services. In some embodiments, in response to determining that a Wi-Fi network is available, computer system 900 updates banner 926 to forgo displaying graphical element 931 and displays an indication that the Wi-Fi network is available.
In response to determining that a Wi-Fi network is available, computer system 900 displays a notification 918N1 and a call option 920N1, which notifies the user that the call may help the user get help faster. In response to computer system 900 receiving selection 928N of call option 920N1 in fig. 9N1, computer system 900 calls emergency services (e.g., 911) as the recipient of message 906N.
Turning to fig. 9O, the satellite is moving outside of the communication range with computer system 900. In some embodiments, computer system 900 determines that a satellite is moving (or has moved) out of range based on the satellite orbit and the position of computer system 900. In fig. 9O, computer system 900 displays alignment interface 902O.
In response to determining that the satellite is moving out of range, the computer system 900 updates the alignment elements 909, including the graphical element 931 and the text element 908O, and optionally outputs the haptic output 619 and/or the audio output 650 to indicate that the satellite is moving out of range. Graphic element 931 shows that the satellite is moving away from computer system 900 and indicates the direction in which the satellite is moving relative to computer system 900. Computer system 900 displays graphical element 931 with an indication of the change in orientation required to improve the alignment of computer system 900 with the satellite, as indicated by the arrow. Text element 908O includes an indication that the satellite is moving out of range. In some embodiments, computer system 900 determines an amount of time until the satellite will be out of range based on the location of computer system 900 and a satellite orbit database. In some implementations, the computer system 900 updates the text element 908O to display the amount of time until the satellite will be out of range.
Turning to FIG. 9O1, the satellite has moved outside of the communication range with computer system 900. In some embodiments, computer system 900 determines that a satellite has moved out of range based on the satellite orbit and the position of computer system 900. In FIG. 9O1, computer system 900 displays alignment interface 902O1.
In response to determining that the satellite is out of range, computer system 900 updates alignment elements 909, including graphical element 931 and text element 908O1, and optionally outputs haptic output 619 and/or audio output 650 to indicate that the satellite is out of range. Graphic element 931 shows that the satellite is out of range of computer system 900. Text element 908O1 includes an indication that the satellite is out of range. In some embodiments, computer system 900 determines the amount of time until a satellite will be available based on the location of computer system 900 and a satellite orbit database. In some implementations, the computer system 900 updates the text element 908P to display the amount of time until the next satellite will be available.
In some embodiments, computer system 900 stops the display of satellite representation 929 in response to determining that the satellite has reached a threshold distance from computer system 900 (e.g., computer system 900 cannot be oriented to communicate with the satellite due to the distance between them), and displays alignment interface 902E of fig. 9E as described above. In response to the new satellite being available for communication and/or time elapsing until the new satellite is available to computer system 900, computer system 900 displays alignment element 902P of fig. 9P.
In some implementations, when the computer system 900 determines that the satellite is moving out of range based on the satellite orbit and position, the computer system 900 displays an amount of time (e.g., a non-zero indication of time; 10 seconds; one minute) until the satellite will be out of range.
In fig. 9P, computer system 900 displays an alignment interface 902P that indicates that computer system 900 is not connected to a satellite. Alignment interface 902P displays an indication that computer system 900 has found a new satellite. Satellite representation 929 represents a new satellite. In response to the computer system 900 determining that the satellite is available for communication, the computer system 900 updates the alignment elements 909, including the graphical element 931 and the text element 908P, and optionally outputs the haptic output 619 and/or the audio output 650 to indicate that the satellite is available for communication. The graphical element 931 shows that a satellite has been found and is shown in a position relative to the computer system 900. Computer system 900 displays graphical element 931 with an indication of the change in orientation required to align computer system 900 with the satellite, as indicated by the arrow. Text element 908P includes an indication that a new satellite is available. In response to determining that a new satellite is available, computer system 900 updates text element 908P to display that a new satellite has been found.
In response to receiving a change in the orientation of computer system 900 while interface 902P is displayed, alignment interface 902P is updated with respect to the change in the orientation of computer system 900. In some embodiments, computer system 900 displays alignment interface 902J of fig. 9J in response to computer system 900 receiving an orientation change to align computer system 900 with a satellite.
Turning to FIG. 9Q, an exemplary external computer system 950 is shown. External computer system 950 is an exemplary device that receives message 906L described in fig. 9L. External computer system 950 displays a messaging interface 902Q that includes message 906Q, location 914Q, message header 912Q, message information 908Q, sender information 913Q, back button 915, information icon 907Q, and connection indicator 907. Connection indicator 907 indicates that external computer system 950 is connected to the terrestrial wireless communications network. In response to external computer system 950 receiving message 906Q via the terrestrial wireless communication network, computer system 950 displays messaging interface 902Q.
Message 906Q includes information from message 906L depicted in fig. 9L. Location 914Q indicates the location of computer system 900 (e.g., as described in fig. 9L) associated with message 906Q (e.g., the location where message 906Q was sent). In some embodiments, location 914Q is displayed in the same message as message 906L. In some embodiments, location 914Q is sent as a separate message, as coordinates or as an address. Message header 912Q includes an indication of the device (e.g., computer system 900 described in 9L) that sent message 906Q and a location 914Q of the sending device. Message information 908Q provides notification: sender Jane has shared message 906Q with external computer system 950 and indicated Jane sent the message via satellite and therefore could not receive the call. In response to receiving input on the back button 915, the external computer system 950 displays a series of message threads and/or a home screen.
In some embodiments, fig. 9Q is similar to messaging user interface 1114 of fig. 11F.
Fig. 9R to 9U illustrate animation of the graphic element 931. In some embodiments, graphical element 931 includes the animations shown and described with reference to fig. 9R-9U. In some embodiments, graphical element 931 includes the animations in fig. 9R-9U when computer system 900 is connected to a satellite as indicated by the communication window 930 being filled in. As described in detail below, satellite representation 929 rotates back and forth between two orientations (e.g., such that satellite representation 929 always points downward toward computer system 932), and signal 933 moves back and forth between computer system 932 and satellite representation 929.
Fig. 9R shows a first state of the animation. In fig. 9R, satellite representation 929 has a first orientation, and signal 933 has a first appearance (e.g., solid line, first brightness, first curvature, and/or first color) and a first position (e.g., in communication window 930). The first appearance of signal 933 indicates that signal 933 is moving from computer system 932 to satellite representation 929. For example, signal 933 curves upward to indicate that signal 933 is moving upward from computer system 932 to satellite representation 929. The arrow beside the satellite representation 929 indicates that the satellite representation 929 rotates (e.g., changes orientation and/or rotates clockwise) over time while remaining in the same position (e.g., at the top of the communication window 930).
Fig. 9S shows a second state of the animation. In fig. 9S, satellite representation 929 has a second orientation (e.g., rotated clockwise relative to the first orientation) and signal 933 has a first appearance and a second position (e.g., in communication window 930). The second position of signal 933 is closer to satellite representation 929, which provides the effect (e.g., consistent with the first appearance) that signal 933 is moving from computer system 932 to satellite representation 929. The arrow next to satellite representation 929 in fig. 9S indicates that satellite representation 929 rotates (e.g., changes orientation and/or rotates counterclockwise) over time while remaining in the same position (e.g., at the top of communication window 930). In some embodiments, graphical element 931 gradually transitions from a first state of the animation in fig. 9R through an intermediate state to a second state of the animation in fig. 9S.
Fig. 9T shows a third state of the animation. In fig. 9T, satellite representation 929 has a first orientation (e.g., the same orientation as in fig. 9R and/or rotated counterclockwise relative to a second orientation), and signal 933 has a second appearance (e.g., a dashed line, a second brightness, a second curvature, and/or a second color) and a third position (e.g., in communication window 930). The second appearance of signal 933 indicates that signal 933 is moving from satellite representation 929 to computer system 932. For example, signal 933 curves downward to indicate that signal 933 is moving downward from satellite representation 929 to computer system 932. The arrow beside the satellite representation 929 indicates that the satellite representation 929 rotates (e.g., changes orientation and/or rotates clockwise) over time while remaining in the same position (e.g., at the top of the communication window 930). In some embodiments, graphical element 931 gradually transitions from the second state of the animation in fig. 9S through an intermediate state to the third state of the animation in fig. 9T.
Fig. 9U shows a fourth state of the animation. In fig. 9U, satellite representation 929 has a second orientation (e.g., the same orientation as in fig. 9S and/or rotated clockwise relative to the first orientation), and signal 933 has a second appearance and a fourth position (e.g., in communication window 930). The fourth location of signal 933 is closer to computer system 932, which provides the effect that signal 933 is moving from satellite representation 929 to computer system 932 (e.g., consistent with the second appearance). In some embodiments, graphical element 931 gradually transitions from the third state of the animation in fig. 9T through an intermediate state to the fourth state of the animation in fig. 9U.
In some embodiments, the graphical element 931 transitions from the fourth state to the first state and the animation described in fig. 9R-9U is repeated one or more times (e.g., the animation is repeated and/or cycled continuously). In some embodiments, features of the animation described with reference to fig. 9R-9U (e.g., rotation of satellite representation 929 and/or movement of signal 933) are not synchronized with and/or based on a state of an actual signal (e.g., electromagnetic signal) between computer system 900 and a satellite and/or an action position (e.g., orientation) of the satellite. In some embodiments, features of the animation described with reference to fig. 9R-9U (e.g., rotation of satellite representation 929 and/or movement of signal 933) are synchronized with and/or based on a state of an actual signal between computer system 900 and a satellite and/or an action position of the satellite.
Fig. 10 is a flow chart illustrating a method for aligning a computer system with one or more satellites, according to some embodiments. The method is performed at a computer system (e.g., 100, 300, 500, 600, or 900; e.g., a smart phone, a smart watch, a tablet computer, a laptop computer, a desktop computer, or a head-mounted device (e.g., a head-mounted augmented reality and/or augmented reality device)), which is in communication with a display generating component (e.g., 901; e.g., a display controller, a touch-sensitive display system, and/or a head-mounted display system) and one or more input devices (e.g., 901; a touch-sensitive surface, a touch screen, buttons, a microphone, a gyroscope, and/or an accelerometer). Some operations in the method are optionally combined, the order of some operations is optionally changed, and some operations are optionally omitted.
As described below, method 1000 provides an intuitive way for aligning a computer system with one or more satellites. The method reduces the cognitive burden on a user to align a computer system with one or more satellites, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-powered computing devices, enabling a user to more quickly and efficiently align a computer system with one or more satellites saves power and increases the time interval between battery charges.
The computer system detects (1002), via one or more input devices, user input (e.g., 906A or 906B) corresponding to a request to communicate (e.g., send an emergency report via a short message, a telephone call, and/or while in an emergency report mode) via satellite communication (e.g., receive a selection to send an affordance).
In response to detecting the user input (1004), the computer system displays (1006) the alignment element (e.g., as described at 909 with reference to fig. 9C-9J; e.g., graphical element, text, and/or image) via the display generation component, including: in accordance with a determination that the computer system (in some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that a predetermined portion of the computer system (e.g., a display of the computer system and/or one or more satellite communications antennas of the computer system relative to the satellite system)) is not properly aligned for communication with one or more satellites (e.g., in the satellite system) (e.g., for initiating a communication, such as a telephone call or sending a message), the computer system displays (1008) an alignment element (e.g., a "fan-shaped" graphic and/or an indicator of a direction that orients the computer system (in some embodiments, the alignment element includes an arrow pointing in the direction of computer system rotation, and/or a picture of a satellite shown in space relative to the computer system)) in a first alignment appearance (e.g., a "fan-shaped" is grey, indicating that there is no alignment), the first alignment appearance indicating that the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with one or more satellites (e.g., for initiating a communication with the satellite, and includes a graphical indication (e.g., 931; e.g., a text, graphic, color, and/or animation) (e.g., a graphical indication of the orientation of the predetermined portion of the computer system); and while displaying the alignment element in the first alignment appearance, the computer system detects (1010) a change in orientation (e.g., azimuth, elevation, and/or rotation) of a predetermined portion of the computer system (e.g., a display of the computer system and/or one or more satellite communication antennas of the computer system relative to the one or more satellites); in response to detecting a change in the orientation of a predetermined portion of the computer system, the computer system changes (1014) the appearance of the alignment element (e.g., changes the appearance of the graphical indication, changes the color of the "fan" to green to indicate proper alignment, changes the text to "aligned," and/or moves the graphic of the satellite directly over the graphical representation of the computer system). The alignment element is displayed with a first alignment appearance indicating that the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites and including a graphical indication in accordance with a determination that the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites, which provides information to the user regarding the alignment of the computer system, which provides improved visual feedback. Changing the appearance of the alignment element in response to detecting a change in the orientation of the predetermined portion of the computer system provides updated information to the user regarding the alignment of the computer system as the orientation of the predetermined portion of the computer system changes, which provides improved visual feedback.
In some implementations, in response to detecting the user input, the computer system displays satellite availability elements (e.g., 908E, 908O; e.g., graphical elements, text, and/or images), including: in accordance with determining that the computer system is in a first availability state relative to the one or more satellites (e.g., the satellites are available for communication based on the position of the one or more satellites and the position and/or orientation of the computer system), the computer system displays satellite availability elements in a first appearance (e.g., as described with reference to fig. 9F) indicative of the first availability state (e.g., text and/or graphics indicative of satellite availability, such as "available", "connected", etc.); and in accordance with a determination that the computer system is in a second availability state relative to the one or more satellites (e.g., based on the position of the one or more satellites and the position and/or orientation of the computer system, the satellites are unavailable for sending messages), the computer system displays satellite availability elements in a second appearance (e.g., text and/or graphics indicating satellite availability, such as "unavailable", "unconnected", "searched", "attempted connected", etc.) that indicates the second availability state, wherein the second availability appearance is different from the first availability appearance. Displaying satellite availability elements in an appearance based on the state of the computer system relative to one or more satellites provides information to a user regarding the availability of the one or more satellites to communicate with the computer system, which provides improved visual feedback.
According to some embodiments, the alignment element and the satellite availability element are displayed simultaneously (e.g., as described with reference to fig. 9F-9J). The simultaneous display of the alignment element and the satellite availability element provides the user with concurrent information regarding the availability of one or more satellites for communication with the computer system and the alignment of the computer system with the one or more satellites, which provides improved visual feedback.
According to some embodiments, changing the appearance of the alignment element comprises: the computer system displays the alignment element in a second appearance (e.g., as described with reference to fig. 9H; e.g., changing the appearance of the graphical indication, the color of the "fan" is changed to a light green to indicate that the change in orientation improves alignment and/or the indicator of the direction of orientation has changed; the graphics of the satellite moves in response to the change in orientation), the second appearance being based on the change in orientation of a predetermined portion of the computer system, wherein the second alignment appearance is different from the first alignment appearance. Displaying the alignment element in a second appearance based on the change in orientation of the predetermined portion of the computer system provides information to the user as to how the change in orientation affects alignment with the one or more satellites and enables the user to align the computer system with fewer errors, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation.
According to some embodiments, changing the appearance of the alignment element includes changing (e.g., gradually over time and/or through a plurality of intermediate states) the appearance of the alignment element based on the magnitude of the detected change in orientation of the predetermined portion of the computer system (e.g., as described with reference to FIG. 9F; e.g., an arrow from a satellite is large for a large change magnitude required for the alignment device, the fan-shaped color is dark gray when the change magnitude is a large change magnitude required for the alignment device, and text changes from "turn left" to "turn far left" when the change magnitude is large to the alignment device). In some embodiments, the appearance of the alignment element changes (e.g., gradually over time and/or through a plurality of intermediate states) as the magnitude and/or direction corresponding value of the detected orientation change of the predetermined portion of the computer system changes. Changing the appearance of the alignment element based on the magnitude of the detected orientation change of a predetermined portion of the computer system provides the user with information about how the magnitude of the orientation change affects alignment with one or more satellites, which provides improved visual feedback.
According to some embodiments, changing the appearance of the alignment element includes changing (e.g., gradually over time and/or through a plurality of intermediate states) the appearance of the alignment element based on the direction of the orientation change of the predetermined portion of the computer system (e.g., as described with reference to FIG. 9F; e.g., an arrow from a satellite affordance is automatically shifted to an opposite side to indicate a direction for aligning the orientation of the device, text automatically changing from "turn left" to "turn right" when the direction of the orientation change is changed). Changing the appearance of the alignment element based on the direction of the orientation change of a predetermined portion of the computer system provides the user with information about how the direction of the orientation change affects alignment with one or more satellites and enables the user to align the computer system with fewer errors, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation.
According to some embodiments, changing the appearance of the alignment element includes changing the appearance of the alignment element (e.g., gradually over time and/or through a plurality of intermediate states) based on movement of one or more satellites (e.g., as described with reference to fig. 9O). In some embodiments, the computer system detects (e.g., directly or via data received from an external source) an indication of movement of one or more satellites, and changes the appearance of the alignment element in response to detecting the indication of movement and in accordance with the movement. In some embodiments, the appearance of the alignment element changes as one or more satellites move (e.g., gradually over time and/or through multiple intermediate states). Changing the appearance of the alignment element based on the movement of the one or more satellites provides the user with information about how the movement affects alignment with the one or more satellites and enables the user to align the computer system with fewer errors, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation.
According to some embodiments, determining that the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with one or more satellites is based on a database of locations (e.g., orbital or temporal) of the one or more satellites (e.g., as described with reference to fig. 9C-9J; e.g., a local storage database stored on the computer system) and a computer system location (e.g., GPS location). Determining that the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites based on the database of the locations of the one or more satellites and the location of the computer system provides the user with more accurate information regarding alignment with the one or more satellites and enables the user to align the computer system with fewer errors, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation.
According to some embodiments, determining that the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites includes determining that the computer system is not properly aligned in an azimuth direction (e.g., fig. 9F) for communication with the one or more satellites; and the first alignment appearance of the alignment element includes instructions for adjusting (e.g., aligning) an orientation of the computer system in an azimuthal direction (e.g., a hint via text or graphic elements to fix the azimuthal orientation). Including instructions for adjusting the orientation of the computer system in the azimuth direction in the first alignment appearance of the alignment element provides the user with more information about how to move the computer system into alignment with the one or more satellites and enables the user to align the computer system with fewer errors, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation.
According to some embodiments, displaying the alignment element includes simultaneously displaying: a graphical representation of the location of the one or more satellites (e.g., 929; e.g., satellite icon relative to computer system; relative to phone icon); and a graphical representation (e.g., 930; e.g., a range of azimuth and/or elevation orientations (e.g., sectors) of a computer system capable of communicating with the one or more satellites) (in some embodiments, based on determining that the computer system is aligned with the one or more satellites, the graphical location of the one or more satellites is within the graphical communication window). Displaying the graphical representation of the locations of the one or more satellites and the graphical representation of the communication window simultaneously provides the user with more information about how to move the computer system into alignment with the one or more satellites and enables the user to align the computer system with fewer errors, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform the operation.
According to some embodiments, changing the appearance of the alignment element comprises: in accordance with a determination that the computer system is in a communication window (e.g., as described with reference to fig. 9G-9H; e.g., centered in the communication window): the computer system magnifies the graphical representation of the location of the one or more satellites (e.g., the satellite icon is moved into the communication window); and the computer system magnifies the graphical representation of the communication window (in some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the computer system is aligned with the one or more satellites). In some embodiments, the computer system becomes located within the communication window due to movement of the computer system, movement of the one or more satellites, and/or movement of the occlusion relative to the communication window. Magnifying a graphical representation of the position of the one or more satellites in accordance with determining that the computer system is in the communication window and magnifying the graphical representation of the communication window provides a visual indication to a user that the computer system is aligned with the one or more satellites and helps prevent the user from unnecessarily moving the computer system, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation.
According to some embodiments, changing the appearance of the alignment element comprises: in accordance with a determination that the computer system is properly aligned for communication with (e.g., connects to and/or communicates with) the one or more satellites, the color of the graphical representation of the communication window is changed (e.g., as described with reference to fig. 9J; changed to green). Changing the color of the graphical representation of the communication window in accordance with a determination that the computer system is properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites provides a visual indication to the user that the computer system is aligned with the one or more satellites and helps prevent the user from unnecessarily moving the computer system, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation.
According to some embodiments, the instructions for adjusting the orientation of the computer system in the azimuth direction include text cues (e.g., 908F, 908G, 908P). The inclusion of text cues in the instructions for adjusting the orientation of the computer system in the azimuth direction provides the user with clearer instructions on how to align the computer system with the one or more satellites and enables the user to align the computer system with fewer errors, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation.
According to some embodiments, the alignment element comprises: a graphical representation (e.g., icon, thumbnail, or pictorial) of the one or more satellites (e.g., 929; displayed relative to the graphical representation of the computer system (e.g., satellite icon relative to telephone icon)); and changing the appearance of the alignment element includes moving the graphical representation of the one or more satellites. Including a graphical representation of the one or more satellites in the alignment element and moving the graphical representation of the one or more satellites as part of changing the appearance of the alignment element provides a visual indication to a user of how a change in orientation affects the alignment of the computer system with the one or more satellites and enables the user to align the computer system with fewer errors, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the number of inputs required to perform an operation.
According to some embodiments, the alignment element comprises: a graphical indication (e.g., text, graphics, colors, and/or animation) of the direction of motion of the one or more satellites (e.g., as described with reference to fig. 9G, arrows; e.g., displayed relative to the computer system (e.g., satellite icon relative to phone icon)). The graphical indication comprising the direction of motion of the one or more satellites provides a visual indication to the user of the direction of motion of the one or more satellites and enables the user to aim at the computer system with fewer errors, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation.
According to some embodiments, determining that the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites includes determining that the computer system is not properly aligned in an elevation direction for communication with the one or more satellites (e.g., as described with reference to FIGS. 9H-9I; and the first alignment appearance of the alignment element includes instructions for adjusting (e.g., aligning) an orientation of the computer system in the elevation direction (e.g., hints via text or graphic elements).
According to some implementations, the instructions for adjusting the orientation of the computer system in the elevation direction include cues (e.g., 908H, 908I; e.g., text and/or graphical indications (e.g., arrows)) for moving (e.g., pointing) the computer system in the elevation direction (e.g., pointing the phone upward). The inclusion of cues for moving the computer system in the elevation direction in the instructions for adjusting the orientation of the computer system in the elevation direction provides the user with more information about how to move the computer system into alignment with the one or more satellites and enables the user to align the computer system with fewer errors, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation.
According to some embodiments, the change in orientation of the predetermined portion of the computer system comprises a change in elevation angle of the predetermined portion of the computer system (e.g., closer to alignment with the one or more satellites); and changing (e.g., automatically or dynamically) the appearance of the alignment element includes moving the graphical representation (e.g., 929) of the one or more satellites (e.g., on a display) to the graphical representation of the computer system (e.g., as described at 932 with reference to fig. 9H-9I) (in some embodiments, the appearance change of the alignment element is consistent with (e.g., proportional to and/or in the same direction as) the elevation change of the computer system.) in some embodiments, the satellite is shown to be closer to the phone when the user adjusts the elevation of the phone to be closer to the alignment. Moving the graphical representation of the one or more satellites to the graphical representation of the computer system in response to detecting the elevation change of the predetermined portion of the computer system provides the user with more information about the element change of the predetermined portion of the computer system and enables the user to align the computer system with fewer errors, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation.
According to some embodiments, instructions for adjusting the orientation of the computer system in the elevation direction are displayed in accordance with determining that the computer system is properly aligned in the azimuth direction for communication with the one or more satellites (e.g., as described with reference to fig. 9G-9H; e.g., after providing a prompt to correct the azimuth and detecting a change in azimuth of a predetermined portion of the computer system that aligns the computer system in the azimuth direction with the one or more satellites.) instructions for adjusting the orientation of the computer system in the elevation direction in accordance with determining that the computer system is properly aligned in the azimuth direction for communication with the one or more satellites simplify alignment of the computer system by instructing a user to align the computer system in one direction at a time and enable the user to align the computer system with fewer errors, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the number of inputs required to perform operations.
According to some embodiments, in response to detecting user input and in accordance with a determination that there is an obstacle preventing the computer system from communicating with the one or more satellites (e.g., a wall or building, or the computer system is indoors, and/or the computer system is difficult to find the one or more satellites), the computer system displays a prompt (e.g., 908C, 908D; e.g., instructions, text, and/or graphical indicators) to avoid and/or remove the obstacle, the prompt to avoid and/or remove the obstacle preventing the computer system from communicating with the one or more satellites provides the user with more information about how to move the computer system into alignment with the one or more satellites, and enables the user to align the computer system with fewer errors, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation.
According to some embodiments, the prompt to avoid and/or remove the obstacle includes a text instruction to move the computer system outside. Including text instructions for moving the computer system out provides the user with clearer instructions on how to align the computer system with the one or more satellites and enables the user to align the computer system with fewer errors, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation.
According to some embodiments, the prompt to avoid and/or remove the obstacle includes a graphical representation of one or more satellites (e.g., 929) that is displayed at a brightness that is less than the brightness of other graphical elements displayed concurrently with the graphical representation of the one or more satellites. In some implementations, when it is determined that an obstacle is present, the computer system dims the graphical representation of the one or more satellites (e.g., reduces its brightness over time). In some embodiments, when an obstacle is determined to be present, a graphical representation of the one or more satellites is displayed at a lower brightness than when no obstacle is determined to be present (e.g., according to determining that no obstacle is present, a graphical representation of the one or more satellites is displayed at a higher brightness than when an obstacle is determined to be present). The graphical representation of the one or more satellites including being displayed at a lower brightness than other graphical elements displayed simultaneously with the graphical representation of the one or more satellites provides a visual indication to the user that the obstacle is preventing the computer system from communicating with the one or more satellites and enables the user to align the computer system with fewer errors, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation.
According to some embodiments, in response to detecting the user input: in accordance with a determination that the computer system is not currently properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites (e.g., no satellites are within communication range of the computer system), the computer system displays a graphical indication that the computer system is not currently properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites (in accordance with a determination that the computer system is capable of being properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites (e.g., the one or more satellites are moved within range, the computer system foregoes displaying a graphical indication that the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites) (e.g., as seen at 931 in fig. 9C-9D)). Displaying a graphical indication that a computer system is not currently properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites provides the user with more information regarding the ability of the computer system to communicate with the one or more satellites and helps prevent the user from unnecessarily attempting to align the computer system with the one or more satellites, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the number of inputs required to perform an operation.
According to some embodiments, in response to detecting the user input and in accordance with a determination that the computer system is not currently properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites, the computer system foregoes displaying a graphical representation of the one or more satellites (e.g., as described with reference to fig. 9C-9D; e.g., displaying a graphical indication (e.g., text, graphics, colors, and/or animation) that the computer system is not currently properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites without displaying the graphical representation of the one or more satellites). In some embodiments, the computer system cannot be properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites because the one or more satellites are outside the communication range of the computer system and/or the computer system is indoors or otherwise spaced apart from the sky. The foregoing provides a user with a visual indication that the computer system is not currently properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites in accordance with a determination that the computer system is not currently properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites and helps prevent the user from unnecessarily attempting to align the computer system with the one or more satellites, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation.
According to some embodiments, in response to detecting a user input and in accordance with a determination that a computer system is not currently properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites, the computer system (e.g., concurrently with a graphical indication that the computer system is not currently properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites) displays an indication (e.g., text, graphics, colors, and/or animation) of when the computer system will be properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites (e.g., as described with reference to fig. 9E; e.g., when or how long the one or more satellites will be within communication range of the computer system). Displaying an indication of when the computer system will be properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites provides the user with more information regarding when the computer system will be properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites and helps prevent the user from unnecessarily attempting to align the computer system with the one or more satellites, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation.
According to some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that a computer system will not be properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites within a threshold period of time (e.g., the one or more satellites will be outside the range of the computer system), the computer system displays a graphical indication (e.g., text) that the computer system will not be properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites (e.g., as described with reference to fig. 9O; e.g., changing the appearance of an alignment element to indicate a threshold period of time until the one or more satellites will be outside the range of communication of the computer system). Displaying a graphical indication that the computer system will not be properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites within a threshold period of time provides the user with more information about when the computer system will be properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites and helps prevent the user from unnecessarily attempting to align the computer system with the one or more satellites, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation.
According to some embodiments, displaying a graphical indication that the computer system will not be properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites includes displaying that the graphical representation of the one or more satellites is moving away from the graphical representation of the computer system (e.g., as described with reference to fig. 9O). Displaying graphical representations of the one or more satellites moving away from the graphical representation of the computer system provides a visual indication to a user of the movement of the one or more satellites relative to the computer system and enables the user to aim at the computer system with fewer errors, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the number of inputs required to perform an operation.
According to some embodiments, displaying a graphical indication that the computer system will not be properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites includes displaying an indication of an amount of time (e.g., text, graphics, colors, and/or animation) until the computer system will be properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites (e.g., as described at 908P with reference to FIG. 9O; e.g., when the one or more satellites will come within range or when a next communication window will occur). Displaying an indication of the amount of time until the computer system will be properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites provides the user with more information about when the computer system will be properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites and helps prevent the user from unnecessarily attempting to align the computer system with the one or more satellites, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation.
According to some embodiments, after displaying a graphical indication that the computer system will not be properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites (e.g., after the one or more satellites leave the communication range of the computer system): the computer system detects an indication (e.g., data) that the computer system is properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites (e.g., finds a new satellite, or the one or more satellites come back within communication range), and displays a graphical indication (e.g., text, graphics, colors, and/or animation) that the computer system is properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites (e.g., as described with reference to fig. 9P). Displaying a graphical indication that the computer system is properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites provides a visual indication to the user that the computer system is properly aligned and enables the user to align the computer system with fewer errors, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation.
In some embodiments, the computer system, in response to detecting a selection of a visual indication of the connection state of the computer system to the one or more satellites (e.g., redisplaying) in response to detecting a selection of a visual indication of the connection state of the computer system to the one or more satellites (e.g., using instructions for reconnecting to the one or more satellites (e.g., in a banner) is able to provide a visual indication of whether the computer system is in a low bandwidth communication mode with the one or more satellites than the computer system is able to provide a visual indication of the connection state of the computer system to the one or more satellites) in a simultaneous communication mode with the one or more satellites, this provides improved visual feedback.
According to some embodiments, displaying a visual indication of a connection status of a computer system to the one or more satellites comprises: in accordance with a determination that the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites (and/or is not currently properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites (e.g., the one or more satellites are obscured and/or out of communication range of the computer system)), (e.g., in the banner and/or contemporaneously with a visual indication of a connection status of the computer system to the one or more satellites) a visual indication (e.g., text, graphics, color, and/or animation) of an error condition is displayed (e.g., as described with reference to fig. 9F; e.g., an indication of a reason why the computer system is not currently capable of communicating with the one or more satellites). In some embodiments, displaying a visual indication of an error condition includes ceasing to display a visual indication that the computer system is properly aligned for communication with or connection to the one or more satellites (e.g., a visual indication of a connection state changes from a connected state to an error condition state). In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the computer system is properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites, the computer system ceases to display the visual indication of the error condition and displays (e.g., redisplays) the visual indication that the computer system is properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites or in connection with the one or more satellites (e.g., the visual indication of the connection status changes from the error condition status to the connected status). In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the computer system has changed from not properly aligned to properly aligned or from properly aligned to improperly aligned, the computer system outputs an audible and/or tactile output (e.g., before, after, and/or while the display of the visual indication of the change in connection status). In accordance with a determination that the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites to display a visual indication of an error condition, the user is provided with more information regarding the alignment of the computer system with the one or more satellites and is enabled to align the computer system with fewer errors, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation.
According to some embodiments, after detecting the user input and in accordance with a determination that the computer system is properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites, the computer system transmits (e.g., as described with reference to FIG. 9J; e.g., automatically and/or without further user input) a message via the one or more satellites that includes content corresponding to the request to communicate via satellite communication. In some embodiments, the message includes content (e.g., text and/or location information) provided (e.g., entered) by the user. After detecting the user input and in accordance with a determination that the computer system is properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites, sending a message via the one or more satellites that includes content corresponding to a request for communication via satellite communication allows the computer system to automatically send the communication without additional input when the computer system becomes properly aligned with the one or more satellites, which reduces the amount of input required to perform the operation and performs the operation without further user input when a set of conditions has been met.
According to some embodiments, after detecting the user input and in accordance with a determination that the computer system is properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites, the computer system displays (e.g., automatically and/or without further user input) a user interface (e.g., 902K or 902L) of the messaging application. In some embodiments, the user interface of the messaging application includes (e.g., displays) a message conversation including messages sent via the one or more satellites, the messages including content corresponding to requests for communication via satellite communications. In some implementations, displaying the user interface of the messaging application includes stopping the display of the alignment element (e.g., the user interface of the messaging application replaces the alignment element), or displaying a smaller version of the alignment element (e.g., reducing the display size). Displaying a user interface of a messaging application after detecting user input and in accordance with a determination that a computer system is properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites displays the user interface of the messaging application without additional input and provides an efficient technique for sending additional communications (e.g., subsequent communications), which provides improved visual feedback, reduces the number of inputs required to perform an operation, and performs an operation without further user input when a set of conditions is met.
According to some embodiments, the computer system displays (e.g., before detecting user input corresponding to a request to communicate via satellite communication, after detecting user input corresponding to a request to communicate via satellite communication, while in a low bandwidth communication mode, and/or while simultaneously displaying the alignment elements) a selectable end satellite communication option (e.g., as seen at 914 in fig. 9C-9J; e.g., a button, icon, affordance, and/or selectable graphical element) that, when selected, causes the computer system to cease operating in a satellite (or low bandwidth) communication mode (e.g., cease displaying the alignment elements). Displaying a selectable end satellite communication option that causes the computer system to cease operating in the satellite communication mode provides the user with an efficient technique for exiting the satellite communication mode without requiring additional input, which reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation.
According to some embodiments, in response to detecting a change in an orientation of a predetermined portion of the computer system and in accordance with determining that the change in the orientation of the predetermined portion of the computer system is properly aligned with the computer system for communication with the one or more satellites, the computer system provides a first tactile output at the computer system (e.g., as seen at 619 in fig. 9J and 9M; e.g., via a tactile feedback component); and detecting, by the computer system, a second change in orientation of a predetermined portion of the computer system when the computer system is properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites; and in response to detecting a second change in orientation of the predetermined portion of the computer system, in accordance with a determination that the detected second change in orientation (azimuth and/or attitude) of the predetermined portion of the computer system causes the computer system to move out of alignment from communicating with the one or more satellites, the computer system providing a second tactile output at the computer system (e.g., via a tactile feedback component). Providing tactile output when the computer system becomes properly aligned with the one or more satellites and when the computer system moves out of alignment with the one or more satellites provides an indication to the user when these conditions occur without additional input, which provides improved feedback, and performs operations without further user input when a set of conditions has been met.
According to some embodiments, after detecting user input corresponding to a request to communicate via satellite communications (e.g., while the alignment element is displayed and/or while the computer system is in a low bandwidth communication mode), in response to detecting that terrestrial communications (e.g., cellular services) are available, the computer system displays (e.g., as a banner) selectable terrestrial communication options (e.g., as seen at 926 of fig. 9N); the computer system detects a selection of a ground communication option; and in response to detecting the selection of the terrestrial communication option, the computer system initiates a communication (e.g., a call and/or text) via the terrestrial communication (e.g., to communicate with an emergency service). Displaying the ground communication options in response to detecting that the ground communication is available provides the user with a visual indication of the ground communication availability and an efficient technique for initiating communication via the ground communication, which provides improved visual feedback, reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation, and performs the operation without requiring further user input when a set of conditions has been met.
According to some embodiments, displaying the terrestrial communication option includes ceasing display of the alignment element (e.g., as described with reference to FIG. 9N; e.g., replacing the alignment element with the terrestrial communication option). Stopping the display of the alignment element provides a visual indication that satellite connection is no longer needed for communication, which provides improved visual feedback.
According to some embodiments, when a ground communication is available, the computer system displays (e.g., remains displayed and/or continues to display) a set of selectable communication content options (e.g., 604M; e.g., affordances, buttons, graphical elements, graphical objects, and/or icons) corresponding to the respective content for the communication (e.g., information selectable by a user for inclusion in the report), wherein the set of selectable communication content options is specific to the low-bandwidth communication mode (e.g., the options are only available and/or presented for the low-bandwidth communication mode even if the ground communication is available). In some embodiments, these options are not presented in a messaging user interface of a messaging application that displays a message conversation and/or fields of a message used to compose the message conversation. Displaying a set of selectable communication content options corresponding to respective content for communication when terrestrial communication is available, wherein the set of selectable communication content options is specific to a low bandwidth communication mode, which provides a visual indication that a technique for selecting content for low bandwidth communication is available when terrestrial communication is available, which provides improved visual feedback.
According to some embodiments: in accordance with a determination (or optionally, in response to a determination) that an error condition is met (e.g., the computer system is within a threshold position that is not properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites, the signal strength between the computer system and the one or more satellites is below a threshold level, and/or the computer system has a poor connection with the one or more satellites) (e.g., there is a poor connection between the computer system and the satellites, as shown in fig. 9M): the computer system provides a prompt (e.g., 926 in fig. 9M) including instructions (e.g., text, graphics (such as arrows), colors, and/or animation) for correcting the error condition (e.g., displaying graphical elements, outputting audio, and/or producing a tactile output) (and optionally, displaying (e.g., concurrently with providing the prompt) an indication of the error condition, such as "bad connection" or "weak signal"). In some embodiments, the instructions include an indication of proper alignment of the computer system with the one or more satellites. According to some embodiments, after providing the hint including instructions for correcting the error condition: in accordance with a determination that the error condition has been met for at least a threshold amount of time (e.g., the error condition has not been corrected, the error condition has remained, and/or the error condition has remained) (e.g., a non-zero threshold amount of time, such as 5 seconds, 30 seconds, 90 seconds or 1 minute, 5 minutes, 10 minutes or 15 minutes), the computer system provides a status indication (e.g., 926 in fig. 9M 1) (e.g., a visual indication such as text, graphics, color, and/or animation, or a non-visual indication such as a sound and/or tactile output) that indicates that the computer system is not connected to (e.g., disconnected from and/or unable to communicate with) the one or more satellites. In some embodiments, the threshold amount of time is a predetermined amount of time since the determination that the error condition has been met or since a prompt including instructions for correcting the error condition was displayed. In accordance with a determination that an error condition has been met and providing a prompt including instructions for correcting the error condition prior to indicating that the computer system is not connected to the one or more satellites, the user is notified of the error condition and assisted in correcting the error condition prior to the computer system becoming disconnected from the one or more satellites, which performs an operation without further user input when a set of conditions has been met, provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform the operation (e.g., maintaining and/or reestablishing a connection with the one or more satellites).
According to some embodiments, the computer system sends (e.g., after the computer system has been properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites and/or while the computer system is properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites) the message via satellite communication (e.g., via the one or more satellites); and after sending the message via satellite communication and before receiving a reply to the message, the computer system displays a reply status element (e.g., "wait to receive" in banner 926 in fig. 9L and 9M) (e.g., a prompt, notification, graphical indicator, and/or text indication, such as "wait to receive") indicating that the computer system has sent the message and has not received a reply to the message. In some embodiments, the reply status element is displayed simultaneously with (or included in) the alignment element. In some embodiments, after displaying the reply state element, in accordance with a determination that a reply to the message has been received (or optionally, in response to receiving a reply to the message), the computer system stops displaying (e.g., removes) the reply state element (e.g., the computer system displays the alignment element and does not display the reply state element). In some embodiments, after displaying the reply status element, in accordance with a determination that a reply to the message has been received (or optionally, in response to receiving a reply to the message), the computer system updates the reply status element to indicate that a reply to the message has been received. After sending the message via satellite communication and before receiving a reply to the message, displaying an element indicating that the computer system has sent the message and has not received a reply to the message, doing so provides the user with information as to whether a reply to the message has been received and helps the user avoid attempting to send additional messages, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation.
According to some embodiments, after (or optionally simultaneously with) displaying the alignment element (e.g., 931): in accordance with determining that terrestrial communications (e.g., terrestrial wireless communications, wi-Fi, and/or cellular communications) are available (or, optionally, have become available) (e.g., as shown in fig. 9N or fig. 9N 1): the computer system stops displaying the alignment element and displays a terrestrial communication element (e.g., a cellular graphic in 926 in fig. 9N or a Wi-Fi graphic in 926 in fig. 9N 1) (e.g., a notification and/or hint) indicating that terrestrial communication is available. In some embodiments, the ground communication element includes a selectable ground communication option that, when selected, causes the computer system to initiate a process of communicating via ground communication (e.g., via a short message, a telephone call, and/or sending an emergency report when in emergency report mode). In some embodiments, the alignment element is displayed at a first location, and the ground communication element replaces the alignment element at the first location. Stopping the display of the alignment element and displaying an indication that terrestrial communications are available in accordance with a determination that terrestrial communications are available provides a visual indication that potentially preferred communication methods are available, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation.
According to some embodiments, when the computer system is properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites: in accordance with a determination that the computer system will not be properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites within a threshold period of time (e.g., the one or more satellites will be out of range and/or out of view of the computer system) (e.g., as shown in fig. 9O), the computer system displays a graphical indication (e.g., 908O) (e.g., text, graphics, color, and/or animation) of an amount of time (e.g., an estimated amount of time) until the computer system will not be properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites. In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that no satellites will be available to the computer system for connection for communication within a threshold period of time (e.g., no satellites will be available to the computer system for communication; the computer system will not be able to connect to any satellites for communication; no satellites will be within range or view of the computer system), the computer system displays a graphical indication of an amount of time until no satellites will be available to the computer system for connection for communication. In some embodiments, the graphical indication of the amount of time until the computer system will not be properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites is displayed concurrently with the alignment element (e.g., after detecting user input corresponding to a request for communication via satellite communication). Displaying a graphical indication of the amount of time until the computer system will not be properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites informs the user that the computer system will lose connection with the one or more satellites, encourages the user to align with the one or more satellites, and/or allows the user to send a message while the computer system is properly aligned for communication, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the number of inputs required to perform an operation.
According to some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that a computer system cannot be properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites (e.g., the one or more satellites are outside the range of the computer system) (e.g., as shown in fig. 9O 1), the computer system displays a graphical indication (e.g., 908O 1) (e.g., text, a textual indication of time, graphics, colors, and/or animation) of an amount of time (e.g., an estimated amount of time) until the computer system will be properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites (e.g., until one (e.g., the next) of the one or more satellites will be within range). In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that there are no satellites available (e.g., there are no satellites to which the computer system can connect; no satellites are within range or view of the computer system; all satellites of the one or more satellites are outside of range of the computer system), the computer system displays a graphical indication of an amount of time until the computer system will be properly aligned for communication with at least one of the one or more satellites (e.g., an amount of time until the computer system will be able to connect with at least one of the one or more satellites; an amount of time until at least one of the one or more satellites will be available to the computer system, within range of the computer system, and/or within view of the computer system). In some implementations, the graphical indication of the amount of time until the computer system will be able to be properly aligned for communication with one or more satellites is displayed concurrently with the alignment element (e.g., after detecting user input corresponding to a request for communication via satellite communication). Displaying a graphical indication of the amount of time until the computer system will be able to be aligned for communication with the one or more satellites informs the user of the amount of time until the computer system will have a connection opportunity, helps the user avoid attempting to send a message when communication is not feasible, and enables the user to align the computer system with fewer errors (e.g., by not attempting to align the computer system when proper alignment is not feasible), which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform an operation.
In some implementations, after detecting a user input corresponding to a request to communicate via satellite communications (e.g., while displaying an alignment element): in response to determining that the predefined action has been successfully performed (e.g., the computer system has been successfully connected to one or more satellites, or the message has been successfully transmitted by satellite communications), the computer system displays a message indicating that the predefined action has been successfully performed (e.g., 614T, 614U, 624T, 624U, 908J, 926 in fig. 9L indicates that the message has been transmitted as "waiting to be received", 908L, and/or 908M). In some embodiments, the computer system displays the alignment element and a message indicating that the predefined action has been successfully performed simultaneously (e.g., the computer system displays the message indicating that the predefined action has been successfully performed while displaying the alignment element). Displaying a message indicating that the predefined action has been successfully performed in response to determining that the predefined action has been successfully performed enables the computer system to notify the user that a particularly relevant action has occurred without distraction to the user due to notification regarding non-predefined actions, which provides improved visual feedback to the user, and performs the operation without further user input when a set of conditions has been met. Feedback regarding the success of important actions enables the computer system to be controlled more quickly and efficiently, which is particularly important in situations where the user is responding to emergency or strenuous situations.
In some embodiments, when the alignment element is displayed, the computer system outputs a non-visual (e.g., audio and/or tactile) output (e.g., 619 and/or 650), including: in accordance with a determination that the computer system is in a first satellite connection state (e.g., connected, disconnected, poorly connected, aligned, misaligned, satellite out of range, and/or satellite blocked), outputting a non-visual output having a first characteristic (e.g., frequency, magnitude, and/or pattern); and in accordance with a determination that the computer system is in a second satellite connection state different from the first satellite connection state, outputting a non-visual output having a second characteristic different from the first characteristic (e.g., the non-visual output having a frequency, magnitude, and/or pattern based on the satellite connection state of the computer system). For example, 619 and/or 650 in fig. 9G have different characteristics than 619 and/or 650 in fig. 9J. In some embodiments, the computer system changes the non-visual output in response to detecting a change in satellite connection status of the computer system. Outputting non-visual outputs having different characteristics based on the satellite connection state informs the user of the state (or state change) of the computer system even though the user is not looking at the display of the computer system, enabling the user to quickly and easily determine the satellite connection state without having to navigate the user interface, and enabling the user to aim at the computer system with fewer errors in response to the state of the computer system, which provides improved feedback to the user, reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation, and performs the operation when a set of conditions has been met without further user input. Feedback regarding important changes in the connection status of the computer system enables the computer system to be controlled more quickly and efficiently, which is particularly important in situations where the user is responding to emergency or stress situations.
In some embodiments, outputting the non-visual output occurs when the computer system is properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites (e.g., when the computer system is tracking the one or more satellites; e.g., computer system 600 outputs 619 and/or 650 of fig. 9J, 9K, and/or 9L). In some embodiments, the computer system repeats (e.g., at regular or predetermined intervals) the output of the non-visual output (e.g., the non-visual output continues as the satellite is tracked) while the computer system is properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites. Outputting non-visual output when the computer system is properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites informs the user of the status of the computer system even though the user is not looking at the display of the computer system and gives the user confidence that the computer system is maintaining alignment with the one or more satellites without having to navigate the user interface, which provides improved feedback to the user and reduces the amount of input required to perform an operation.
In some embodiments, outputting the non-visual output occurs when the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites (e.g., when the computer system is not tracking the one or more satellites and/or when the computer system is stopped properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites; e.g., 619 and/or 650 of fig. 9M and/or 9M 1). In some embodiments, the computer system repeatedly (e.g., at regular or predetermined intervals) outputs a non-visual output when the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites. Outputting a non-visual output when the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites informs the user that alignment has changed and/or is no longer aligned without having to navigate the user interface even though the user is not looking at the display of the computer system, enabling the user to respond to the change in alignment status and enabling the user to align the computer system with fewer errors, which provides the user with improved visual feedback and reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation. Feedback regarding important changes in the alignment state of the computer system enables the computer system to be controlled more quickly and efficiently, which is particularly important in situations where the user is responding to emergency or stress situations.
In some implementations, after detecting a user input corresponding to a request to communicate via satellite communications (e.g., while displaying an alignment element): in accordance with a determination (or in some embodiments, in response to a determination) that the computer system is properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites, the computer system displays an indication (e.g., a graphical indication, an icon, a color, a font, text, an animation, a symbol, a thumbnail, an image, and/or a pictorial representation) that the computer system is being connected to the one or more satellites (e.g., is attempting to connect to the one or more satellites and/or is in the process of establishing a connection therewith; e.g., "keep pointing to the satellite for transmission and reception" in 926 and/or "connect" in 2106 in fig. 21H) (e.g., "connect", "keep pointing to the satellite" and/or "this may take several minutes"); and after displaying an indication that the computer system is being connected to the one or more satellites: in accordance with a determination (or in some embodiments, in response to a determination that the computer system is connected to the one or more satellites), the computer system displays an indication (e.g., a graphical indication, an icon, a color, a font, text, an animation, a symbol, a thumbnail, an image, and/or a pictorial representation) that the computer system is connected to the one or more satellites (e.g., "connected" and/or "remains directed to the satellite"; e.g., "connected" in 2106 of fig. 21I), wherein the indication that the computer system is connected to the one or more satellites is different than the indication that the computer system is being connected to the one or more satellites. Displaying an indication while the computer system is being connected to the one or more satellites and while actually connected to the one or more satellites subsequently provides the user with progressive feedback throughout the process of establishing a connection with the one or more satellites to emphasize that the connection process is ongoing and enables the user to align the computer system with fewer errors, which provides the user with improved visual feedback and performs the operation when a set of conditions has been met without further user input.
In some embodiments, after detecting user input corresponding to a request to communicate via satellite communications and while the computer system is connected for communication with the one or more satellites, the computer system sends a message (e.g., 906K) via the one or more satellites, wherein the message includes a graphical (e.g., non-text) representation (e.g., 656) of at least a portion of the message (e.g., the message includes images, symbols, thumbnails, and/or icons associated with the content of the message, such as a medical ID icon, an emergency alert icon, an automobile image indicating a vehicle problem, a doctor pack icon indicating illness or injury, a shield icon indicating crime, a cross symbol indicating someone wandering or getting trapped, and/or a flame image indicating a fire). The graphical representation comprising messages sent via the one or more satellites provides a visual indication of the message content that may allow a user to more quickly and easily determine the message content and/or that appropriate information has been sent, which provides improved visual feedback to the user.
In some embodiments, upon detecting user input corresponding to a request to communicate via satellite communications, the computer system initiates transmission of a message via the one or more satellites (e.g., in response to a request to send a message; e.g., as shown in FIG. 9J); after initiating the transmission of the message (or in some embodiments, upon initiating the transmission of the message): in accordance with a determination (or in some embodiments, in response to a determination) that the computer system is connected for communication with the one or more satellites (e.g., aligned with the one or more satellites and/or connection completed), the computer system displays an indication (e.g., 910J, graphical indication, icon, color, font, text, animation, symbol, thumbnail, image, and/or glyph) that the messaging application is being opened; and after displaying the indication that the messaging application is being opened (e.g., in response to detecting selection of the indication that the messaging application is being opened, or in accordance with a determination that a predetermined amount of time has elapsed), the computer system displays a user interface of the messaging application (e.g., 902K). In some embodiments, the indication that the messaging application is being opened is selectable. In some embodiments, the indication that the messaging application is being opened is displayed simultaneously with the indication of the transmission status of the message and/or the alignment element. In some embodiments, the user interface of the message application includes a representation of the message, for example, in a message conversation region that includes one or more messages between a user associated with the computer system and a recipient of the message. Displaying an indication that the messaging application is being opened after initiating transmission of the message and then opening the messaging application, which enables the computer system to automatically display the message to the user and provide an interface to the user to send additional messages and/or view responses without requiring additional user input, provides improved visual feedback to the user, reduces the number of inputs required to perform an operation, and performs an operation without requiring further user input when a set of conditions has been met.
In some embodiments, displaying the alignment element includes displaying an animation (e.g., the animation shown and described with reference to fig. 9R-9U), the animation including: graphic representations (e.g., 929, icons, colors, fonts, text, animations, symbols, thumbnails, images, and/or glyphs) of satellites; a graphical representation (e.g., 932, icon, color, font, text, animation, symbol, thumbnail, image, and/or pictorial symbol) of a computer system; and a graphical representation (e.g., 933, icon, color, font, text, animation, symbol, thumbnail, image, and/or pictorial symbol) of a signal (e.g., a wave and/or one or more curves) that travels between (e.g., back and forth between) the graphical representation of the satellite and the graphical representation of the computer system (e.g., from the graphical representation of the satellite to the graphical representation of the computer system and/or from the graphical representation of the computer system to the graphical representation of the satellite) over time. In some embodiments, the animation includes a graphical representation of the satellite alternating (e.g., rotating back and forth) between a first state (e.g., a first orientation) and a second state (e.g., a second orientation) over time. The animation of the signal displayed traveling between the satellite and the computer system informs the user that there is a back-and-forth communication between the computer system and the one or more satellites, alerts the user that alignment with the one or more satellites is required to send and receive communications, and alerts the user that satellite communications may take longer to send and receive than terrestrial communications, which provides improved visual feedback to the user.
In some embodiments, displaying the alignment element includes: in accordance with a determination that the alignment element is in a first display state (e.g., an expanded user interface, such as, for example, a full-size and/or full-screen user interface in fig. 9J, or a full-size banner in fig. 9L, such as 926, for example), the animation is displayed while simultaneously displaying a textual indication (e.g., 908J in fig. 9L, or "connected") of the satellite connection state (e.g., connected, unconnected, poorly connected, aligned, misaligned, satellite out of range, and/or satellite blocked) of the computer system; and in accordance with a determination that the alignment element is in a second display state (e.g., a reduced-size, smaller, and/or non-expanded user interface, such as a banner or a minimized banner, such as 926a in fig. 9L 1) that is different from the first display state, displaying the animation without simultaneously displaying a textual indication of the satellite connection state of the computer system (e.g., minimized banner 926a in fig. 9L 1-9L 1D does not include a textual indication of the satellite connection state of the computer system). Displaying or not displaying a textual indication of the satellite connection state while displaying the animation based on the display state of the alignment element enables the computer system to adjust the amount of information provided to the user based on context without user input and saves space on the user interface when possible, which provides improved visual feedback to the user, reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation, and performs the operation without further user input when a set of conditions has been met.
In some embodiments, when the alignment element is displayed (e.g., in a reduced-size user interface, such as a banner, or in an expanded user interface, such as a full screen user interface): in accordance with a determination (or in some embodiments, in response to a determination) that the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites (e.g., that the computer system has transitioned from being properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites to being improperly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites), the computer system output indicates that the computer system is not properly aligned for non-visual output (e.g., 619, 650, tactile output, and/or audio output) for communication with the one or more satellites (e.g., computer system output 619 and/or 650 in fig. 9F-9I, 9M1, 19I, 21F, 21G). In accordance with a determination that a computer system is not properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites, outputting a non-visual output indicating that the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites informs a user of a state (or state change) of the computer system even though the user is not looking at a display of the computer system, enables the user to quickly and easily determine an alignment state of the computer system without having to navigate a user interface, and enables the user to respond to the change in alignment state, which provides improved feedback to the user, reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation, and performs the operation without further user input when a set of conditions has been met. Feedback regarding important changes in the alignment state of the computer system enables the computer system to be controlled more quickly and efficiently, which is particularly important in situations where the user is responding to emergency or stress situations.
In some embodiments, when the alignment element is displayed (e.g., in a reduced-size user interface, such as a banner, or in an expanded user interface, such as a full screen user interface): in accordance with a determination (or in some embodiments, in response to a determination) that the computer system is not connected for communication with one or more satellites (e.g., the computer system has transitioned from being connected for communication with one or more satellites to not being connected for communication with one or more satellites; the computer system has lost connection without communication with one or more satellites), the computer system outputs a non-visual output (e.g., 619, 650, a haptic output, and/or an audio output) indicating that the computer system is not connected for communication with one or more satellites (e.g., computer system output 619 and/or 650 in fig. 9D-9I, 9M1, 9O1, 9P, 21F, 21G, and/or 21J). In accordance with a determination that a computer system is not connected for communication with one or more satellites and outputting a non-visual output indicating that the computer system is not connected for communication with one or more satellites, feedback to a user of an important change in a connection state of the computer system is provided to the user without the user looking at a display of the computer system and enables the user to respond to the change in the connection state, which provides improved feedback to the user, reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation, and performs the operation without further user input when a set of conditions has been met. Feedback regarding important changes in the connection status of the computer system enables the computer system to be controlled more quickly and efficiently, which is particularly important in situations where the user is responding to emergency or stress situations.
In some embodiments, after user input is detected (in some embodiments, while the alignment element is displayed): in accordance with a determination that a satellite cannot be detected (e.g., an obstacle is present, such as a wall, tree, or building, or the computer system is located indoors), the computer system provides (e.g., outputs and/or displays) a warning (e.g., 619, 650, 908C, 908D, a graphical warning, a tactile output, and/or an audio output) that an obstacle has been detected (e.g., "detect obstacle", "seek satellite", "cannot connect", "bad connection", and/or "ensure you are outside, can see sky unobstructed"). Providing a warning that an obstacle has been detected in accordance with a determination that a satellite cannot be detected provides the user with more information about what prevented connection to the satellite and enables the user to connect the computer system to the satellite with fewer errors, which provides improved feedback, reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation, and performs the operation when a set of conditions has been met without further user input.
In some embodiments, providing an alert that an obstacle has been detected includes outputting a non-visual output (e.g., 619, 650, a tactile output, and/or an audio output) indicating that an obstacle has been detected (e.g., computer system output 619 and/or 650 in fig. 9D). The non-visual output indicating that an obstacle has been detected informs the user of the obstacle even though the user is not looking at the display of the computer system, which provides the user with additional information about what to prevent connection with the satellite and enables the user to connect the computer system with the satellite in response to the obstacle and with fewer errors, which provides the user with improved feedback and reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation. Feedback regarding important changes in the ability of a computer system to connect to a satellite enables the computer system to be controlled more quickly and efficiently, which is particularly important in situations where a user responds to an emergency or stress situation.
In some embodiments, after detecting the user input and after determining that the satellite is not available to the computer system for communication: in accordance with a determination (or in some embodiments, in response to a determination) that the satellite is available to the computer system for communication (e.g., becomes available after being unavailable), the computer system outputs non-visual outputs (e.g., 619, 650, haptic outputs, and/or audio outputs) indicating that the satellite is available (e.g., computer system outputs 619 and/or 650 in fig. 9F, 9P, and/or 21K). In accordance with a determination that a satellite is available for communication by a computer system and outputting a non-visual output indicating that the satellite is available for communication, the user is notified that a connection to the satellite is available even though the user is not looking at the display of the computer system and is enabled to connect and/or align the computer system to the satellite in response to the availability of the satellite and with fewer errors, which provides the user with improved visual feedback, reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation, and performs the operation without requiring further user input when a set of conditions has been met. Feedback regarding important changes in satellite availability enables the computer system to be controlled more quickly and efficiently, which is particularly important in situations where the user is responding to emergency or tension situations.
In some embodiments, after detecting the user input, the computer system displays a user interface element (e.g., 926a, a banner, and/or a pop-up window), wherein displaying the alignment element (e.g., 926 or 926 a) includes displaying the alignment element in the user interface element (e.g., 931 in 926 or 931a in 926 a); when an alignment element is displayed in the user interface element, the computer system detects a request (e.g., 936L) to cancel (e.g., stop displaying) the user interface element; and in response to detecting a request to dismiss the user interface element: in accordance with a determination that the computer system is connected for communication with one or more satellites (e.g., as in fig. 9K and/or 9L), the computer system eliminates (e.g., stops displaying or reduces the size of) the user interface element that includes the alignment element; and in accordance with a determination that the computer system is not connected for communication with the satellite (e.g., as in fig. 9M 1), the computer system maintains a display of the user interface element (e.g., at the same size, or in some embodiments, reducing the display size of the user interface element, such as from 926 to 926 a). In some embodiments, the request to dismiss the user interface element includes a swipe (e.g., swipe up) directed to the user interface element. Eliminating or maintaining the display of the user interface element in response to a request to eliminate the element based on whether the computer system is connected for communication with one or more satellites enables the computer system to adjust the amount of information provided to the user based on context and save space on the user interface when possible, which provides improved visual feedback to the user and performs the operation when a set of conditions has been met without further user input.
In some embodiments, after displaying the alignment element, the computer system stops the display of the alignment element (or in some embodiments, reduces the size of the alignment element) (e.g., in response to detecting a request to eliminate the alignment element) (e.g., stops the display of 931, and in some embodiments, displays 931 a); and after ceasing the display of the alignment element, in response to determining that the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites (e.g., that the computer system has changed from being properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites to not being properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites; e.g., as shown in FIG. 9M), the computer system displays the alignment element (e.g., display 931 or 931a, or displays a user interface element such as a banner (e.g., 926 or 926 a) or pop-up window that includes the alignment element). Displaying the alignment element after ceasing display of the alignment element and in response to determining that the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites enables the computer system to save space on the user interface when alignment is proper and automatically notify the user of the misalignment without requiring user input, provides improved visual feedback to the user, reduces the amount of input required to perform the operation, and performs the operation without requiring further user input when a set of conditions has been met. Feedback regarding important changes in the alignment state of the computer system enables the computer system to be controlled more quickly and efficiently, which is particularly important in situations where the user is responding to emergency or stress situations.
It is noted that the details of the process described above with respect to method 1000 may also apply in a similar manner to the methods described above and below. For example, methods 700, 800, 1200, 1400, 1600, 1800, 2000, and/or 2200 optionally include one or more features of the various methods described above with reference to method 1000. For example, method 1000 may be performed as part of a process for initiating communications according to methods 700 and/or 800. For example, method 1000 may include selecting a second recipient of the communication according to method 1200. For example, method 1800 may initiate method 1000 from a messaging application. For example, the alignment elements described in method 1000 may be displayed in the alternative communication network test mode in method 2000. For example, method 1000 may be a process corresponding to a user interface object in method 2200. For the sake of brevity, these details are not repeated hereinafter.
Fig. 11A-11P illustrate exemplary user interfaces for managing message recipients according to some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the process in fig. 12.
Fig. 11A-11J illustrate exemplary scenarios in which a user John Appleseed of computer system 600 is sending an emergency communication to a first recipient (search and rescue service). In this exemplary scenario, computer system 600 also sends the message to the second recipient Jane Appleseed in response to a request provided by John Appleseed during the process of initiating the emergency communication. In some embodiments, initiating and/or completing the emergency communication includes performing one or more of the methods described with reference to fig. 7, 8, and/or 10.
In some implementations, any of the inputs described herein (e.g., inputs 1104A, 1104B, 1104C, 1104D, 1104E, 1104F, 1104G, and/or 1104H) are or include touch inputs (e.g., tap gestures and/or swipe gestures). In some implementations, any of the inputs described herein (e.g., inputs 1104A, 1104B, 1104C, 1104D, 1104E, 1104F, 1104G, and/or 1104H) are or include voice inputs (e.g., voice commands to select user interface elements or to activate features or perform functions such as those associated with the user interface elements). In some implementations, any of the inputs described herein (e.g., inputs 1104A, 1104B, 1104C, 1104D, 1104E, 1104F, 1104G, and/or 1104H) are or include air gestures (e.g., air gestures to select a user interface element or to activate a feature or perform a function, such as a feature or function associated with a user interface element). In some embodiments, any of the inputs described herein (e.g., inputs 1104A, 1104B, 1104C, 1104D, 1104E, 1104F, 1104G, and/or 1104H) are or include activation (e.g., pressing, rotating, and/or moving) of hardware devices (e.g., buttons, rotatable input mechanisms, rotatable depressible input mechanisms, mouse buttons, remote control buttons, and/or levers). In some embodiments, any of the user interface elements described herein as being selected (e.g., icons, affordances, buttons, and/or selectable options) are selected by activating a hardware device when the user interface element is in focus (e.g., highlighted, bolded, outlined, visually distinguished from other user interface elements, and/or located at or near a cursor).
In FIG. 11A, computer system 600 displays a query user interface 1102. Query user interface 1102 includes text 1102A that illustrates a messaging conversation (e.g., chat) that may be shared with one or more emergency contacts (e.g., recipients other than emergency services) and emergency information provided during the process of initiating an emergency communication. In fig. 11A, the pre-selected emergency contacts include a first contact 1102B1 ("Jane apple seed") that is currently designated to receive the chat, as indicated by a check mark indication 1102C, and a second contact 1102B2 ("MARIA FENDER") that is not currently designated to receive the chat (e.g., as indicated by the lack of a check mark indication). In some embodiments, more than one contact is pre-selected by default to receive the chat. In some embodiments, emergency contacts are not pre-selected by default.
In FIG. 11A, the query user interface 1102 also includes an add contact affordance 1102D that, when selected, initiates a process for adding one or more additional contacts to potentially receive the chat. In some embodiments, when selected, add contact affordance 1102D opens a contact application for selecting a contact from a group of contacts stored on or accessible from computer system 600. In some embodiments, the selected contact need not have been previously designated as an emergency contact.
In FIG. 11A, query user interface 1102 also includes a notification affordance 1102E, a non-notification affordance 1102F, and an end affordance 1102G. When selected, notification affordance 1102E causes one or more currently designated contacts to be selected as recipients of the chat and emergency information (e.g., location information, information regarding the nature of the emergency) provided during the process of initiating the emergency communication or as the emergency communication is updated with additional messages and/or information. When selected, the affordance 1102F is not notified such that the process for initiating emergency communications proceeds without designating any contacts (e.g., whether designated with a check mark indication or not) as recipients of chat and emergency information. When selected, the end affordance 1102G cancels the process for initiating emergency communications without sending the communications to any recipient (including search and rescue services). In FIG. 11A, computer system 600 detects an input 1104A (e.g., a flick gesture or other selection input) corresponding to notification affordance 1102E.
FIG. 11B depicts a computer system 1100 that belongs to a user Jane apple seed (e.g., a user corresponding to the first contact 1102B1 of FIG. 11A). In some embodiments, computer system 1100 includes one or more features of computer system 600 and/or devices 100, 300, and 500. In FIG. 11B, computer system 1100 is shown at about the same time (10:09) as computer system 600 is shown in FIG. 11A. In FIG. 11B, the computer system 1100 is currently in a display inactive state and the display 1106 is closed.
In FIG. 11C, in response to input 1104A of FIG. 11A, computer system 600 belonging to user John Appleseed displays emergency messaging user interface 1108. In some embodiments, after receiving input 1104A and before displaying emergency messaging user interface 1108, one or more additional interfaces (e.g., one or more of the interfaces of fig. 6M-6S) associated with the process for initiating the emergency communication are displayed. The emergency messaging user interface 1108 includes a message bubble 1108A that includes some information that has also been sent to the first recipient, i.e., the search and rescue service. The emergency messaging user interface 1108 also includes a share indication 1108B that the user Jane Appleseed has also been enabled to receive chat with search and rescue services, and a stop sharing affordance 1108D that, when selected, prevents future messages from being published to emergency communications with Jane Appleseed sharing (e.g., from the user of the computer system 600 and/or from emergency services). In some embodiments, if Jane applefeed is not designated to receive chat (e.g., no notification affordance 1102F is selected instead of notification affordance 1102E, and/or Jane applefeed is not selected) via query user interface 1102 as shown in fig. 11A, emergency messaging user interface 1108 will not include sharing indication 1108B and the chat will not be shared with Jane applefeed. The emergency messaging user interface 1108 also includes a set of composition affordances 1108C for composing additional messages to be added to the emergency messaging session with the search and rescue service.
In FIG. 11D, computer system 1100 belonging to Jane Appleseed displays a wakeup screen user interface 1110 at 10:10 in response to receiving a notification triggered by the receipt of a chat message sent from computer system 600. The wake screen user interface 1110 includes a notification 1110A that indicates that the user John Appleseed has contacted the search and rescue service and shared the chat with the user Jane Appleseed. In fig. 11D, computer system 1100 detects an input 1104B (e.g., a flick gesture or other selection input) on notification 1110A.
In FIG. 11E, computer system 600 belonging to John Appleseed displays an urgent messaging user interface 1108 that is now populated with a composition field 1108C1 of text 1112 ("we are near the big tree"), which is the second message composed by John Appleseed (e.g., using composition affordance 1108). In FIG. 11E, computer system 600 detects an input 1104C (e.g., a flick gesture or other selection input) on send affordance 1108C 2.
In FIG. 11F, computer system 1100 belonging to Jane Appleseed displays messaging user interface 1114 in response to input 1104B on notification 1110A of FIG. 11D. The messaging user interface 1114 includes text 1114A that provides information regarding communications with emergency services initiated by the user John Appleseed and an explanation of why the user of the computer system 1100 is receiving a record of the chat; text 1114D provides similar information. In some embodiments, text 1114A and/or text 1114D also indicate that the emergency communication is being sent via satellite. The messaging user interface 1114 also includes a message bubble 1114B and a location bubble 1114C, wherein the message bubble includes information that has been sent to the search and rescue service, and when the location bubble is selected, additional location information for the computer system 600 is provided when the information in the message bubble 1114B is sent. In some embodiments, additional location bubbles that provide location information for computer system 600 are displayed when new text is added to the chat. In some embodiments, additional position bubbles that provide position information for computer system 600 are provided periodically (e.g., at regular intervals (e.g., every 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes)). The messaging user interface 1114 also includes knowledge of further affordances that, when selected, provide further information regarding the shared emergency communication. In some embodiments, if one or more messages are sent by an emergency service (e.g., a search and rescue service), the messaging user interface 1114 will present the messages in separate message bubbles. As shown in FIG. 11F, messaging user interface 1114 does not include a composition affordance for composing a response that can be added to the chat (e.g., sent to John Appleseed and/or search and rescue services). Thus, messaging user interface 1114 is only used to review (e.g., passively review) chat content published by John Appleseed and/or search and rescue services, both of which are active participants in the chat. The messaging user interface 1114 includes a messaging affordance 1114E that, when selected, initiates a process for sending messages to John Appleseed (e.g., via a separate messaging conversation (e.g., a conversation that also does not include search and rescue services) and/or a separate messaging user interface). In FIG. 11F, the computer system 1100 detects an input 1104D (e.g., a flick gesture or other selection input) on the more affordance 1114E.
In FIG. 11G, in response to input 1104D in FIG. 11E, computer system 600 belonging to John Appleseed updates the display of messaging user interface 1108 to now include message bubble 1116 (e.g., "we are near the big tree") and sends the message to both the search and rescue service and user Jane Appleseed.
In fig. 11H, in response to receiving additional chat content sent by computer system 600 in response to input 1104D, computer system 1100 belonging to Jane Appleseed updates the display of messaging user interface 1114 to include message bubble 1118 (e.g., "we are near the big tree") and location bubble 1120, which when selected, provides additional location information for computer system 600 when information in message bubble 1118 is sent. In FIG. 11H, computer system 1100 detects an input 1104E on position bubble 1120.
In FIG. 11I, in response to input 1104E in FIG. 11H, computer system 1100 displays a location user interface 1122 that includes location markers 1122A that mark the receiving location of computer system 600 at the time the information in message bubble 1118 was sent; the location marker 1122A also includes text of the message itself (e.g., "we are near the big tree"). The location user interface 1122 also includes a location marker 1122B that marks the location of receipt of the computer system 600 when the information in the message bubble 1108A was sent. The location markers 1122A and 1122B are overlaid on a map (e.g., a scrollable map) of an area including two locations. The location user interface 1122 also includes an end affordance 1122C that, when selected, causes the computer system 1100 to redisplay the messaging user interface 1114 as seen in FIG. 11H.
In fig. 11J, in response to input 1104D in fig. 11F, computer system 1100 displays additional information user interface 1124 including text 1124A that provides additional information regarding emergency communications. In some embodiments, the additional information includes a record of why the user of computer system 1100 was receiving the chat and/or an explanation of why the response could not be published to the chat.
Fig. 11K-11P provide different embodiments of user interfaces that illustrate how an urgent message may be grouped with or without one or more previously sent messages from the same sender (e.g., john Appleseed) in a messaging conversation management user interface of a messaging application.
In fig. 11K, computer system 1100 displays the urgent communication received from John Appleseed in message conversation 1126A separate from message conversation 1126B in message conversation management user interface 1126, message conversation 1126B including one or more previous messages sent by user John Appleseed that are not urgent communications and are also not sent to the search and rescue service (or another urgent service). Message conversation 1126A is also separate from message conversation 1126C and also separate from message conversation 1126D, which does not include John Appleseed, message conversation 1126C including one or more previous messages included in John Appleseed's and other users (e.g., users "Mom" and "Dad"). In some implementations, the message conversation 1126A also includes other emergency communications (SOS communications) received from the user John Appleseed or one or more other users, such that emergency communications from multiple users can be reviewed together by selecting the message conversation 1126A. In FIG. 11K, computer system 1100 detects an input 1104F on message conversation 1126A.
In fig. 11J, computer system 1100 displays the urgent communication received from John Appleseed in messaging conversation management user interface 1128 in message conversation 1128A separate from message conversation 1128B, message conversation 1128B including one or more previous messages sent by user John Appleseed that are not urgent communications and are also not sent to the search and rescue service (or another urgent service). Message conversation 1128A is also separate from message conversation 1128C and also separate from message conversation 1128D, which does not include John Appleseed, message conversation 1128C including one or more previous messages included in John Appleseed's and other users (e.g., users "Mom" and "Dad"). In fig. 11J, message conversation 1128A is specific to an emergency communication for John Appleseed ("John & SOS"), and therefore will not include other emergency communications (SOS communications) received from one or more users other than John Appleseed. In FIG. 11L, computer system 1100 detects an input 1104G on message conversation 1128A.
In fig. 11M, computer system 1100 displays in messaging conversation management user interface 1130 the emergency communication received from John Appleseed in message conversation 1130A, which also includes one or more previous messages received from user John Appleseed. At FIG. 11M, message conversation 1130B includes one or more previous messages in a conversation with John applied and Mom and Dad, and message conversation 1130C includes one or more previous messages in a conversation with Sister. Thus, in the embodiment of FIG. 11M, emergency communications from John Appleseed are grouped together with other messages in a conversation with the user John Appleseed (e.g., user John Appleseed only and/or John Appleseed and emergency services only). In FIG. 11M, computer system 1100 detects an input 1104H on message conversation 1130A.
In fig. 11N, in response to input 1104F in fig. 11K, computer system 1100 displays messaging user interface 1132. In some embodiments, messaging user interface 1132 includes one or more features of messaging user interface 1114, as described above. The messaging user interface 1132 includes a message bubble 1132A that includes some information that has also been sent to the first recipient, i.e., the search and rescue service. In some embodiments, as discussed above with reference to fig. 11K, messaging user interface 1132 will also include one or more other emergency communications (SOS communications) received from user John Appleseed or one or more other users, such that emergency communications from multiple users received by Jane Appleseed will be presented together.
In FIG. 11O, in response to input 1104G of FIG. 11L, computer system 1100 displays messaging user interface 1134. In some embodiments, messaging user interface 1134 includes one or more features of messaging user interface 1114, as described above. The messaging user interface 1134 includes a message bubble 1134A that indicates details that a yes reply must be received at the computer system 1100 to receive an urgent communication from John Appleseed. In fig. 11N, the computer system 1100 receives a yes reply, as seen in message bubble 1134B, and in response causes display of message bubble 1134C, which includes the content/details of the urgent communication from John Appleseed. In some embodiments, emergency communications received on a computer system using a first operating system and/or messaging application require authorization before providing details, while a computer system using a second, different operating system and/or messaging application does not require authorization before providing details.
In FIG. 11P, in response to input 1104H in FIG. 11M, computer system 1100 displays messaging user interface 1136. In some embodiments, messaging user interface 1136 includes one or more features of messaging user interface 1114, as described above. The messaging user interface 1136 includes a message bubble 1136A ("hiking"), which is a message received previously from John Appleseed that is not an emergency communication (e.g., it was not sent to an emergency service). The messaging user interface 1136 also includes a message bubble 1136B that includes some information that has also been sent to the first recipient, i.e., the search and rescue service. The messaging user interface 1136 also includes a set of composition affordances 1136C for composing messages to be sent to John Appleseed. Messaging user interface 1136 presents the urgent message from user John Appleseed and the non-urgent message together in a single messaging conversation.
Fig. 12 is a flow chart illustrating a method for managing message recipients, according to some embodiments. The method is performed at a computer system (e.g., 100, 300, 500, 600, or 1100) (e.g., a smart phone, a smart watch, a tablet computer, a laptop computer, a desktop computer, or a head-mounted device (e.g., a head-mounted augmented reality and/or augmented reality device)) in communication with one or more input devices (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface, a touch screen, buttons, and/or a microphone). In some embodiments, the computer system communicates with an output generation component (e.g., a display generation component, a display controller, a touch-sensitive display system, and/or a head-mounted display system). Some operations in the method are optionally combined, the order of some operations is optionally changed, and some operations are optionally omitted.
As described below, method 1200 provides an intuitive way for managing message recipients. The method reduces the cognitive burden on the user to manage the message recipient, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-powered computing devices, enabling a user to manage the use of a message recipient faster and more efficiently saves power and increases the time interval between battery charges.
Upon preparation for initiating a communication (e.g., a communication session (e.g., a SMS, and/or sending an emergency report in an emergency report mode)) with a first recipient (e.g., a search and rescue service as shown in 1108) (e.g., a prompt user interface with one or more selectable options (e.g., a "notify" and "do not notify" button) (audio query) regarding whether a second recipient (e.g., 1102B1 or 1102B 2) (e.g., an emergency contact that can contact a user, a user of a computer system) is allowed to receive information corresponding to the communication (e.g., information in 1108A) (e.g., information in the communication) (e.g., an indication that the communication is taking place, such as before or during a selection of text to be sent is received from a text messaging UI)), the computer system outputs (1202) a query (e.g., in 1102) (e.g., a visual query (e.g., a prompt user interface with one or more selectable options (e.g., a "notify" and "do not notify" button)), an audio query) regarding whether a second recipient (e.g., 1102B1 or 1102B 2) (e.g., an emergency contact that can contact a user of a computer system) is allowed to be in contact with the communication, the user is taking place, the user is or the user's user is or the communication is added to the communication (e.g., the audio content of the communication system is taking place) in the communication system, or the communication is a meta-information (e.g., the communication session is taking place), the second recipient may receive the information but not respond) (in some embodiments, the query includes the identity of the second recipient).
After outputting a query as to whether to allow the second recipient to receive information corresponding to the communication, the computer system detects (1204) a sequence of one or more inputs (e.g., 1104A) corresponding to a request to send a message to the first recipient. In some embodiments, a selection of a visual query that is "notify" or "not notify" is detected, as is a selection of a "send" affordance that is displayed with the visual query.
In response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs (1206): in accordance with a computer system determining (e.g., via the set of one or more input devices) that one or more inputs corresponding to a request (e.g., 1104A) to allow a second recipient to receive information corresponding to a communication between a user and a first recipient are detected, the computer system sends (1208) a message (e.g., a message having content according to 1108A) (e.g., content; text) (e.g., sending the message to an external urgent message service (server) to send to the first recipient) to the first recipient including the corresponding information (e.g., instructing the external urgent message service (server) to send to the second recipient after or concurrently with the sending to the first recipient) to the first recipient, and enables delivery of the message (e.g., instructing the external urgent message service (server) to send to the second recipient) including at least a portion of the corresponding information; and in accordance with a determination that the computer system does not detect (e.g., via the set of one or more input devices) one or more inputs corresponding to a request to allow the second recipient to receive information corresponding to a communication between the user and the first recipient, the computer system sends (1210) a message (e.g., a message having content according to 1108A) to the first recipient including the corresponding information (e.g., information collected when the communication is ready to be initiated) (e.g., sends the message to an external emergency message service (server) to send to the first recipient) without enabling delivery of the message including at least a portion of the corresponding information to the second recipient. The message delivery to the second recipient is enabled or disabled when the message is sent to the first recipient based on whether the previous request allowed the second recipient to receive the message, which does so without further user input when a set of conditions has been met (the request was received).
In some embodiments, prior to preparing to initiate a communication via the set of one or more input devices at the computer system (e.g., at the time the device is set up), the computer system receives a selection of an emergency recipient (e.g., 1102B 1) as an emergency contact (e.g., adds the emergency recipient to an emergency contact list), wherein the second recipient is the emergency recipient. In some embodiments, the second recipient is a recipient (e.g., specified at the computer system or at a different computer system associated with the user (e.g., logged into the same user account as the computer system)) that was previously specified (e.g., prior to preparation to initiate the communication; via a set of one or more inputs at the computer system) as an emergency contact for the user of the computer system. Selecting a second recipient for the query based on the previous selection of the recipient as an emergency contact performs an operation (selects the second recipient) without further user input when a set of conditions has been met (the recipient was previously selected as an emergency contact).
In some embodiments, determining whether to allow the second recipient to receive the query for information corresponding to the communication without adding the second recipient as a participant in the conversation includes: a third recipient (e.g., 1102B 2) that is different from the first and second recipients (e.g., additional previously identified emergency contacts) is permitted to receive the query for information corresponding to the communication without adding the third recipient as a participant in the conversation of the communication. In some embodiments, the method further comprises: in response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs: in accordance with a determination that the device detects one or more inputs corresponding to a request to allow at least one third recipient to receive information corresponding to a communication between the user and the first recipient, a message including the respective information is sent to the first recipient, and delivery of the message including at least a portion of the respective information to the third recipient is enabled. Outputting a query about a third recipient (in addition to the second recipient) provides feedback to the user as to which recipients can be enabled to receive the message, which provides improved feedback (e.g., visual feedback).
In some embodiments, outputting a query as to whether to allow the second recipient to receive information corresponding to the communication without adding the second recipient as a participant in the conversation includes: the computer system displays a set of one or more user interaction graphical elements including a first user interaction graphical element (e.g., 1102D) (e.g., for removing affordances of suggested recipients and/or for adding affordances of new recipients), which, when selected, initiates a process of modifying a set of recipients of the message when sent (e.g., adding or removing recipients (e.g., removing second recipients and/or adding additional recipients)).
In some embodiments, the set of one or more user interaction graphical elements comprises: a second user interaction graphical element (e.g., 1102C) that, when selected, modifies a selection state of a second recipient for receiving the message (e.g., selects the second recipient when the second recipient is not currently selected, or deselects the second recipient when the second recipient is not selected), without modifying a selection state of a third recipient for receiving the message; and a third user interaction graphical element that, when selected, modifies the selection state of the third recipient for receiving the message without modifying the selection state of the second recipient for receiving the message. Displaying separate user interactive graphical elements for the second and third recipients provides additional control options and provides improved visual feedback to the user regarding which recipients will be able to receive the message when the message is sent to the first recipient.
In some embodiments, outputting a query as to whether to allow the second recipient to receive information corresponding to the communication without adding the second recipient as a participant in the conversation includes: the computer system displays: the second recipient is currently selected to receive information corresponding to the communication without adding the second recipient as an indication of a participant in the conversation (e.g., 1102C) (e.g., the query includes one or more recommendation/default recipients included therein) (in some embodiments, the second recipient is pre-selected (e.g., designated by default) to receive information corresponding to the communication between the user and the first recipient, and will receive the information when the message is sent unless one or more inputs are received that deselect the second recipient); and a third user interaction graphical element that, when selected, deselects the second recipient to receive information corresponding to the communication without adding the second recipient as a participant in the conversation (e.g., a second recipient-specific graphical element (e.g., a recipient-specific toggle switch), or deselecting graphical objects of some or all currently selected recipients (e.g., a "no notification" button that deselects some or all potential recipients other than the first recipient)). In some embodiments, the query does not include an indication of the identity of the second recipient (e.g., the query does not by default identify and/or select any particular recipient, and includes one or more options for identifying the selected recipient). Displaying an indication that the second recipient is currently (e.g., has been) selected as part of outputting the query provides the user with improved visual feedback regarding the current selection status of the second recipient and allows the user to enable delivery of the message to the second recipient without further input, which reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation.
In some embodiments, in response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs and in accordance with a determination that the computer system detected one or more inputs corresponding to a request to allow the second recipient and the third recipient to receive information corresponding to communications between the user and the first recipient, the computer system sends a message to the first recipient that includes the respective information; and the computer system enables delivery of the message including at least a portion of the respective information to the second recipient (e.g., 1102B 1) and the third recipient (e.g., 1102B 2).
In some embodiments, after enabling delivery of the message including at least a portion of the corresponding information to the second recipient (e.g., after the message has been sent to the second recipient) and in accordance with a determination that the conversation of the communication has been updated with additional information (e.g., 1116) (e.g., a user of the computer system and/or the first recipient has sent additional messages and/or status (e.g., location) updates), the computer system enables delivery of the second message to the second recipient (e.g., 1118) (in some embodiments, while the second recipient remains as a non-participant in the conversation of the communication), wherein the second message includes at least a portion of the additional information. Enabling delivery of the subsequent second message after enabling delivery of the message when it has been determined that the conversation of the communication has been updated with additional information performs the operation when a set of conditions has been met without further user input.
In some embodiments, after enabling delivery of the message including at least a portion of the respective information to the second recipient (e.g., after the message has been sent to the second recipient) (in some embodiments, and in accordance with a determination that the physical location of the computer system has changed), the computer system enables delivery of a third message (e.g., 1120) (e.g., a message separate from the message) to the second recipient that includes information corresponding to the location of the computer system (e.g., the location at which delivery of the third message was enabled). In some embodiments, a plurality of periodic messages (e.g., 1114C and 1120) are sent with information corresponding to the location of the computer system. In some embodiments, these messages are sent at regular intervals (e.g., every 30 minutes or other cycle period).
In some embodiments, enabling delivery of the message including at least a portion of the corresponding information to the second recipient occurs if the second recipient is enabled (e.g., by a computer system and/or an external computer system (e.g., a message server)) to participate in a conversation of the communication (e.g., a conversation that contributed the information to the communication; the second recipient is able to receive at least a portion of the information in the conversation but not send any information posted to the conversation) (e.g., lack of an affordance for composing a reply, as seen in FIG. 11F).
In some embodiments, enabling delivery of the message including at least a portion of the respective information to the second recipient comprises: the external computer system associated with the second recipient is enabled (e.g., such that) (in some embodiments) the message is sent (e.g., directly or via a server) in a format compatible with a messaging application of the external computer system to display the message including at least a portion of the corresponding information to the second recipient in the messaging application (e.g., a messaging application that generates 1114) (e.g., a text messaging application).
In some embodiments, a messaging application of an external computer system associated with the second recipient (e.g., the messaging application that generated 1114) displays one or more previous messages (e.g., also not including the previous message of the first recipient; the previous message of the first type (e.g., a non-urgent message)) that include the corresponding information to the second recipient in a messaging conversation separate from the messaging conversation that includes the one or more previous messages received from the user of the computer system (e.g., and sent to the second recipient) (e.g., according to fig. 11K and 11N). Displaying the message to the second recipient in a messaging conversation separate from another conversation that includes one or more previous messages provides improved visual feedback regarding the message as being different from the one or more previous messages (e.g., different in that the message is also sent to the first recipient).
In some embodiments, a messaging application of an external computer system associated with the second recipient (e.g., the messaging application that generated 1114) displays the message to the second recipient including at least a portion of the corresponding information in a messaging conversation that includes one or more previous messages received from the user of the computer system (e.g., the message is grouped with other messages from the user of the computer system in the messaging application) (e.g., as seen in fig. 11M and 11P). Displaying the message to the second recipient in a messaging conversation that also includes one or more previous messages provides improved visual feedback regarding the source of the message (e.g., from the same sender as the one or more previous messages).
In some embodiments, a messaging application of an external computer system associated with the second recipient (e.g., the messaging application that generates 1114) displays a fourth selectable user-interactive graphical element when displaying a messaging conversation that includes one or more previous messages received from a user of the computer system, which, when selected, initiates a process for displaying the message including at least a portion of the corresponding information to the second recipient in a messaging conversation separate from the messaging conversation that includes the one or more previous messages (e.g., the conversation in fig. 11N). In some embodiments, messages addressed to the second recipient that include at least a portion of the corresponding information may be accessed from a separate messaging conversation that includes one or more previous messages received from a user of the computer system without navigating back to a user interface of a messaging application that presents the plurality of messaging conversations. In some embodiments, a message including at least a portion of the corresponding information to a second recipient may be accessed while displaying a separate messaging conversation including one or more previous messages received from a user of the computer system by accessing an information panel associated with the user of the computer system. Displaying the fourth selectable user-interactive graphical element in a messaging conversation that includes one or more previous messages provides improved visual feedback regarding how to access the message and reduces the amount of input required to perform the operation of accessing the message while viewing the previous message. Displaying the message in a conversational user interface that does not include user interaction graphical elements for composing the response provides improved visual feedback regarding the unavailability of the response function.
In some embodiments, a messaging application of an external computer system associated with the second recipient displays the message to the second recipient including at least a portion of the corresponding information in a conversational user interface (e.g., 1114) that does not include user interaction graphical elements (e.g., does not include any user interaction graphical elements for composing a response to the message to the second recipient including at least a portion of the corresponding information) (e.g., the message is displayed in an interface that does not provide options/functionality for responding to the message). Displaying the message in a conversational user interface that does not include user interaction graphical elements for composing the response provides improved visual feedback regarding the unavailability of the response function.
In some embodiments, the conversation user interface (e.g., 1114) that does not include a user interaction graphical element for composing a response to the message to the second recipient including at least a portion of the corresponding information includes an indication (e.g., 1114A, 1114D) (e.g., a graphical indication or a textual indication) that the message to the second recipient including at least a portion of the corresponding information is an urgent message. In some embodiments, the indication is displayed at a location of the conversation user interface where the messaging application of the external computer system is to display one or more user interaction graphical elements for composing a response in a messaging conversation that is not an emergency conversation. Displaying an indication that the message is an urgent message provides the user with improved visual feedback regarding the nature of the received message.
In some embodiments, the external computer system generates one or more notifications (e.g., 1110A) for the message including at least a portion of the corresponding information to the second recipient based on a first set of notification criteria, and generates one or more notifications for a corresponding message (e.g., a non-urgent message from a user of the computer system) for the message including at least a portion of the corresponding information to the second recipient based on a second set of notification criteria different from the first set of notification criteria. In some embodiments, the first set of notification criteria is more tolerant than the second set of notification criteria (e.g., notifications are generated when no-disturb and/or silence modes are set for the first set, but not the second set). In some embodiments, the external computer system is configured (e.g., comprising a computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs including instructions for) to receive a corresponding message when the external computer system is in a first state (e.g., no-disturb state; silent mode). In response to receiving a respective message while the external computer system is in the first state and in accordance with a determination that the message is a first type of message (e.g., an urgent message), a notification corresponding to the respective message is delivered. In response to receiving the respective message while the external computer system is in the first state and in accordance with a determination that the message is a second type of message (e.g., a non-urgent message) different from the first type, delivery of the notification corresponding to the respective message is aborted. Notifications for different messages are generated using a different set of notification criteria than those used to generate notifications for the messages, doing so uses a different set of conditions to perform the operations of notification generation for the two different messages without further user input, which performs the operations when a set of conditions has been met without further user input, and also provides different feedback in the form of notifications for the two different types of messages. Displaying an indication that the message is an urgent message provides the user with improved visual feedback regarding the nature of the received message.
In some embodiments, a messaging application of an external computer system associated with the second recipient displays the message including at least a portion of the corresponding information to the second recipient in a second conversational user interface that includes a fifth user-selectable graphical element (e.g., 1114E) that, when selected, initiates a separate communication session (e.g., a separate text, telephone, or video communication session; separate from the communication session used to send the message) with the user of the computer system. The inclusion of the fifth user-selectable graphical element in displaying the message provides additional control options without cluttering the UI with additional display controls.
In some embodiments, the external computer system associated with the second recipient provides an option (e.g., a user-selectable graphical element) that, when enabled (e.g., when selected), prevents presentation at the external computer system of one or more update messages associated with the message to the second recipient that includes at least the portion of the corresponding information (in some embodiments, prevents receipt and/or transmission of the update message from the message server).
In some embodiments, the communication with the first recipient is a communication regarding an emergency, and preparing to initiate the communication with the first recipient comprises: a set of information (e.g., information included in 1114B) including one or more details regarding the emergency situation (e.g., nature of the emergency situation (e.g., medical, fire, police), details regarding the user, location of the user/computer system) is received via one or more input devices (e.g., via one or more of the interfaces shown in fig. 6M-6S).
In some embodiments, the portion of the corresponding information included in the message directed to the second recipient includes at least a portion of one or more details about the emergency (e.g., as seen in 1114B) (e.g., the nature of the emergency).
In some embodiments, preparing to initiate communication with the first recipient includes connecting to a non-terrestrial wireless communication network (e.g., a satellite communication network); and the message including the corresponding information to the first recipient is sent via the non-terrestrial wireless communication network (e.g., as indicated by text above 1114B). In some embodiments, enabling delivery of the message including the respective information to the second recipient includes aligning a computer system for communication with the one or more satellites; and wherein enabling delivery of the message including the corresponding information to the second recipient is via the one or more satellites. In some embodiments, the message is sent (e.g., to an emergency service) in response to determining that the terrestrial wireless network cannot be reached (e.g., the computer system cannot connect to the cellular network; and/or the computer system does not receive a cellular signal of sufficient strength and/or consistency).
In some embodiments, after enabling delivery of the message including at least a portion of the corresponding information to the second recipient (in some embodiments, and in accordance with a determination that the second recipient has received the message), the computer system displays an indication that the second recipient is receiving the message including at least a portion of the corresponding information to the second recipient (e.g., 1108B). Displaying an indication that the second recipient is receiving the message to the second recipient that includes at least a portion of the corresponding information provides improved visual feedback that the second recipient has been enabled to receive the message.
In some embodiments, after enabling delivery of the message including at least a portion of the corresponding information to the second recipient, the computer system displays a fifth user-interactive graphical element (e.g., "stop sharing" in 1108B) (e.g., an option to stop sharing updates with the second recipient), which, when selected, configures the computer system to send one or more subsequent (e.g., future) messages to the first recipient corresponding to the conversation with the first recipient without enabling delivery (e.g., relinquishing and/or preventing delivery) of the one or more subsequent messages to the second recipient. Displaying the fifth user interaction graphical element provides the user with the option of aborting or preventing performing the operation (sending a subsequent message to the second recipient) when a set of conditions is later met (a subsequent message is sent to the first recipient), which enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user provide appropriate input and reducing user errors in operating/interacting with the device), which in turn reduces power usage and prolongs battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.
It is noted that the details of the process described above with respect to method 1200 may also be applied in a similar manner to the methods described above and below. For example, methods 700, 800, 1000, 1400, 1600, 1800, 2000, and/or 2200 optionally include one or more features of the various methods described above with reference to method 1200. For example, method 1200 may optionally be performed as part of a communication initiated via method 700 or 800. For example, method 1200 optionally includes providing an alignment element according to method 1000. For example, the ability to manage message recipients as described in method 1200 may be simulated in the alternative communication network test mode in method 2000. For example, method 1200 may be a process that corresponds to a user interface object in method 2200. For the sake of brevity, these details are not repeated hereinafter.
Fig. 13A-13 AA illustrate exemplary user interfaces for transmitting updated location information according to some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the process in fig. 14.
Fig. 13A illustrates a computer system 1300A that includes a display 1302A (e.g., a touch-sensitive display). In some embodiments, computer system 1300A is a smart phone, a smart watch, a desktop computer, a laptop computer, a computer, or a tablet computer. In some embodiments, computer system 1300A is device 100, device 300, or device 500.
In some implementations, any of the inputs described herein (e.g., inputs 1310A, 1310B, 1310C, 1310D, 1310E, 1310F, 1310G, 1310H, 1310I, 1310J, 1310K, and/or 1310L) are or include touch inputs (e.g., tap gestures and/or swipe gestures). In some implementations, any of the inputs described herein (e.g., inputs 1310A, 1310B, 1310C, 1310D, 1310E, 1310F, 1310G, 1310H, 1310I, 1310J, 1310K, and/or 1310L) are or include voice inputs (e.g., voice commands to select a user interface element or to activate a feature or perform a function, such as a feature or function associated with a user interface element). In some implementations, any of the inputs described herein (e.g., inputs 1310A, 1310B, 1310C, 1310D, 1310E, 1310F, 1310G, 1310H, 1310I, 1310J, 1310K, and/or 1310L) are or include air gestures (e.g., air gestures to select a user interface element or to activate a feature or perform a function, such as a feature or function associated with a user interface element). In some embodiments, any of the inputs described herein (e.g., inputs 1310A, 1310B, 1310C, 1310D, 1310E, 1310F, 1310G, 1310H, 1310I, 1310J, 1310K, and/or 1310L) are or include activation (e.g., pressing, rotating, and/or moving) of a hardware device (e.g., button, rotatable input mechanism, rotatable depressible input mechanism, mouse button, remote control button, and/or joystick). In some embodiments, any of the user interface elements described herein as being selected (e.g., icons, affordances, buttons, and/or selectable options) are selected by activating a hardware device when the user interface element is in focus (e.g., highlighted, bolded, outlined, visually distinguished from other user interface elements, and/or located at or near a cursor).
In fig. 13A, a computer system 1300A displays a home screen 1304 that includes various icons that can be selected to open a corresponding application. The home screen 1304 includes icons 1306 that correspond to location sharing applications that provide a user interface and settings that allow a user to share and view location information with other users and/or devices.
In fig. 13A, computer system 1300A detects an input 1310A (e.g., a tap gesture or other selection input) that selects icon 1306. In response to detecting the input 1310A, the computer system 1300A displays a "people" tab user interface 1308A of the location sharing application corresponding to the icon 1306, as shown in fig. 13B. The "people" tab user interface 1308A corresponds to the "people" tab 1318A in the location sharing application, as indicated by the element 1318A being emphasized (e.g., bolded) as compared to, for example, the "me" tab 1320A. The "people" tab user interface 1308A displays a map with pins that indicate the location of the user and/or device. Tack 1312A indicates the location of computer system 1300A (also referred to as "Rachel's phone") associated with a user named Rachel; pushpin 1314A indicates the location of the user Jim (or a device associated with the user Jim); and tack 1316A indicates the location of user John (or the device associated with user John). A user may be associated with the computer system by logging onto computer system 1300A through a user account and/or by an application (such as a location sharing application) logging onto computer system 1300A under the user account.
The "people" tab user interface 1308A includes user information elements 1322A and 1324A. The user information element 1322A is associated with the user John and displays the city of John's location (e.g., san Francisco), the distance between John's location and Rachel's location (e.g., 15 miles), and the time when John's location information was most recently updated (e.g., now). Similarly, user information element 1324A is associated with user Jim and displays the city of the location of Jim (e.g., little Town), the distance between the location of Jim and the location of Rachel (e.g., 9 miles), and the time when the location information of Jim was most recently updated (e.g., now).
Fig. 13C shows a computer system 1300B (also referred to as Jim's phone) associated with user Jim discussed above with reference to "people" tab user interface 1308A displayed on computer system 1300A. Computer system 1300B includes a display 1302B (e.g., a touch-sensitive display). In some embodiments, computer system 1300A is a smart phone, a smart watch, a desktop computer, a laptop computer, a computer, or a tablet computer. In some embodiments, computer system 1300A is device 100, device 300, or device 500.
In fig. 13C, computer system 1300B displays a "people" tab user interface 1308B of the location sharing application on computer system 1300B, as indicated by element 1318B being emphasized (e.g., bolded) as compared to, for example, "me" tab 1320B. In the illustrated embodiment, computer system 1300A and computer system 1300B run the same location sharing application. In some embodiments, computer system 1300A and computer system 1300B run different location sharing applications. Thus, the "people" tab user interface 1308B is similar to the "people" tab user interface 1308A, but from the Jim's perspective. The "people" tab user interface 1308B displays a map with pins that indicate the location of the user and/or device. Tack 1312B indicates the location of computer system 1300A (Rachel's phone) and tack 1314B indicates the location of computer system 1300B (Jim's phone).
The "people" tab user interface 1308B includes user information elements 1322B and user information elements 1326B. The user information element 1322B is associated with the user John and displays a city of John's location (e.g., san Francisco), a distance between John's location and Jim's location (e.g., 24 miles), and a time when John's location information was most recently updated (e.g., now). Similarly, user information element 1326B is associated with the user Rachel and displays the city of the location of Rachel (e.g., livermore), the distance between the location of Rachel and Jim (e.g., 9 miles), and the time when the location information of Rachel was most recently updated (e.g., now).
Returning to fig. 13B, computer system 1300A detects an input 1310B (e.g., a tap gesture or other selection input) on "i" tab 1320A. In response to detecting the input 1310B (e.g., a tap gesture) on the "me" tab 1320A, the computer system 1300A displays the "me" tab user interface 1328A of the location sharing application, highlights the "me" tab 1320A, and de-highlights the "people" tab 1318A, as shown in fig. 13D. The "me" tab user interface 1328A includes a map with a tack 1330A representing the location of computer system 1300A, and a user information element 1331A. User information element 1331A includes update indicator 1332A, location 1334A, and source indicator 1336A. Update indicator 1332A displays when (or how long ago) the Rachel's location information was last updated (e.g., 1 minute ago). The location indicator 1336A displays the location of Rachel (e.g., 123Martin Ave., livermore, CA). The source indicator displays a source of Rachel location information, where the "local phone" indicates that computer system 1300A is a source of location information for the Rachel location. In FIG. 13E, computer system 1300B maintains a display of "people" tab user interface 1308B, and in contrast to FIG. 13C, user information element 1326B has been updated to reflect that the location of Rachel was recently updated 1 minute ago.
In fig. 13D, computer system 1300A detects an input 1310C (e.g., a flick gesture, a swipe up gesture, or other selection input) on user information element 1331A (or a specified portion of user information element 1331A, such as a pill and/or top). As shown in FIG. 13F, in response to detecting input 1310C, computer system 1300A expands or scrolls the display of user information element 1331A to display additional elements of user information element 1331A, including a "share My location" option 1342A, a secure alert notification option 1338A, and an invite notification option 1340A. The user may select the "share my location" option 1342A to enable and disable location sharing (e.g., by tapping or swipe the "share my location" option 1342A). In fig. 13F, the "share my location" option 1342A indicates that computer system 1300A is sharing a location (e.g., location sharing is enabled or turned on). In response to detecting an input (e.g., a tap gesture, swipe gesture, or other selection input) on the "share my location" option 1342A when the "share my location" option 1342A is open, the computer system 1300A closes (e.g., disables) the location sharing and sets the "share my location" option 1342A to the off state. In response to detecting an input (e.g., a tap gesture, swipe gesture, or other selection input) on the "share my location" option 1342A when the "share my location" option 1342A is closed, the computer system 1300A opens (e.g., enables) the location sharing and sets the "share my location" option 1342A to an open state.
In some implementations, when location sharing is enabled, computer system 1300A automatically sends updated location information (e.g., without user input) when certain criteria are met. For example, when location sharing is enabled, computer system 1300A may send updated location information at predetermined intervals (e.g., 30 seconds, 1 minute, 2 minutes, 5 minutes, or 10 minutes) when computer system 1300A is connected to a terrestrial communication network (e.g., wireless cellular communication and/or Wi-Fi network). In fig. 13B-13H, network indicator 1303A indicates that computer system 1300A has cellular service (e.g., is connected to and/or can communicate via cellular communication). Accordingly, computer system 1300A automatically sends updated location information between time 10:10 in FIGS. 13D-13G (e.g., where update indicator 1332A and user information element 1326B show that the location was updated 1 minute ago) and time 10:11 in FIGS. 13H-13I (e.g., where update indicator 1332A and user information element 1326B show that the location is now updated). The updated location information sent by computer system 1300A may be made available to other computer systems, such as computer system 1300B (Jim's phone), as indicated by user information element 1326B. In some embodiments, the updated location information sent by computer system 1300A may be used by other designated computer systems (such as computer systems of users identified as friends and/or family members).
Security alarm notification option 1338A allows a user to enable and disable notifications of security alarms received by computer system 1300A such that computer system 1300A outputs notifications of security alarms when security alarm notification option 1338A is enabled (e.g., on) and discards notifications of security alarms when security alarm notification option 1338A is disabled (e.g., off). The invitation notification option 1340A allows a user to enable and disable notifications of invitations received by the computer system 1300A, such as invitations by other users to receive updated location information from the computer system 1300A and/or invitations to the computer system 1300A to receive updated location information from other users. Computer system 1300A outputs a notification of the invitation when invitation notification option 1340A is enabled (e.g., on) and discards outputting a notification of the invitation when invitation notification option 1340A is disabled (e.g., off). In fig. 13G, user interface 1308B on computer system 1300B remains unchanged relative to fig. 13E.
In fig. 13F, computer system 1300A detects an input 1310D (e.g., a flick gesture, a swipe down gesture, or other selection input) on user information element 1331A (e.g., a specified portion of user information element 1331A, such as a pill and/or top). In response to detecting input 1310D, computer system 1300A reduces (e.g., minimizes) user information element 1331A, as shown in fig. 13H (e.g., to the same state shown in fig. 13D). In FIG. 13I, user interface 1308B displayed on computer system 1300B remains unchanged relative to FIG. 13G.
Fig. 13J shows computer system 1300A at a later time after approximately two hours have elapsed as compared to fig. 13H. In fig. 13J, computer system 1300A is in a locked state and a lock screen 1344A is displayed. Location sharing is enabled on computer system 1300A and network indicator 1303A indicates that the cellular communication network is not available to computer system 1300A (e.g., computer system 1300A does not have cellular services, cellular communication networks of service providers associated with computer system 1300A are not available, and/or cellular communication networks from any service provider are not available). Because location sharing is enabled, but the cellular communication network is not available, computer system 1300A displays a manual update notification 1346A. In some embodiments, computer system 1300A displays manual update notification 1346A in accordance with a determination that the cellular communication network is not available to computer system 1300A for a predetermined amount of time and/or computer system 1300A has not sent updated location information for a predetermined amount of time (e.g., because the cellular communication network is not yet available). In some embodiments, computer system 1300A activates display 1302A, or causes display 1302A to transition from a low power state to displaying manual update notification 1346A. In some embodiments, when computer system 1300A is not in a locked state (e.g., computer system 1300A is displaying a user interface of a home screen or application), computer system 1300A displays a manual update notification as a pop-up window and/or banner (e.g., at or near the top of display 1302A). Manual update notification 1346A includes text that notifies the user of the possibility of manually updating the location of computer system 1300A in a location sharing application via a satellite communication network when the cellular communication network is not available.
In fig. 13K, tack 1316B in user interface 1308B displayed on computer system 1300B indicates updated location information for John, and tack 1312B in user interface 1308B displayed on computer system 1300B is visually distinguished (e.g., grayed out) to indicate that the updated location information for Rachel was not received within a predetermined amount of time (e.g., the location information for Rachel was old or outdated), and user information element 1326B indicates that the location information for Rachel was recently updated two hours ago.
In fig. 13K, computer system 1300A detects an input 1310E (e.g., a flick gesture, a swipe gesture, or other selection input) on manual update notification 1346A. In response to detecting the input 1310E, computer system 1300A displays an "I" tab user interface 1328A, as shown in FIG. 13L. In some embodiments (e.g., when computer system 1300A is locked), computer system 1300A requires user authentication (e.g., entering a password, facial identification, and/or fingerprint identification) in addition to input 1310E in order to unlock computer system 1300A and display "me" tab user interface 1328A, as shown in fig. 13L.
In fig. 13L, computer system 1300A displays manual update option 1350A because the cellular communication network is not available for a predetermined amount of time. In some implementations (e.g., as shown in fig. 13D), the computer system 1300A does not display the manual update option 1350A when the cellular communication network is available (e.g., because sufficient bandwidth resources are available to automatically send the updated location). In the embodiment shown in FIG. 13L, a manual update option 1350A is displayed in user information element 1331A in the location sharing application's "I" tab user interface 1328A. The "me" tab user interface 1328A of the location sharing application does not include the map in fig. 13L because the cellular communication network is not available or is not available for a predetermined amount of time (e.g., to reserve bandwidth). In FIG. 13M, the "people" tab user interface 1308B displayed on computer system 1300B has not changed relative to FIG. 13K.
In fig. 13L, computer system 1300A detects an input 1310F (e.g., a flick gesture, a swipe gesture, or other selection input) on manual update option 1350A. In response to detecting input 1310F, computer system 1300A initiates a process for sending updated location information via a satellite communication network. In some embodiments, if computer system 1300A is properly aligned for communication with a satellite when manual update option 1350A is selected, the computer system automatically (e.g., without further user input) sends the updated location information via the satellite communication network. In some embodiments, when computer system 1300A is sending updated location information, computer system 1300A displays a notification (e.g., alignment assistance element 1352A shown in fig. 13P or banner 926 described in fig. 9K-9N 1) that instructs computer system 1300A to connect to a satellite communication network (e.g., 1352A1 in fig. 13P), provides instructions for keeping computer system 1300A pointed in a current direction (e.g., 1352A2 in fig. 13P and/or graphic alignment element 1352A3 in fig. 13P), and/or provides an indication of a transmission status of updated location information (e.g., 1352A4 in fig. 13P).
In the embodiment shown in fig. 13L, when manual update option 1350A is selected, computer system 1300A is not properly aligned for communication with the satellite. Thus, in response to detecting input 1310F, computer system 1300A initiates a process for instructing a user to properly align computer system 1300A with a satellite. In some embodiments, in response to detecting input 1310F when computer system 1300A is not properly aligned for communication with a satellite, computer system 1300A initiates an alignment process and/or displays one or more alignment interfaces or elements, such as alignment interfaces 902C-902J and 902O-902P depicted and described in fig. 9C-9J and 9O-9P, banner 926 depicted and described in fig. 9K-9N 1, and/or graphical element 931 depicted and described in fig. 9K-9N 1.
In fig. 13N, in response to detecting input 1310F when computer system 1300A is not properly aligned for communication with a satellite, computer system 1300A displays alignment assistance element 1352A, including a connection status indicator 1352A1 (e.g., "unconnected"), a text alignment instruction 1352A2 (e.g., "turn left to align with a satellite"), and a graphic alignment element 1352A3 (e.g., it includes a curved arrow pointing in a counterclockwise direction). In some embodiments, the alignment aid 1352A is (or operates in the same manner as) the banner 926 depicted in fig. 9K-9N 1. In some embodiments, the graphic alignment element 1352A3 is (or operates in the same manner as) the graphic element 931 described in fig. 9K-9N 1. In FIG. 13O, the "people" tab user interface 1308B displayed on computer system 1300B has not changed relative to FIG. 13M.
Fig. 13P shows that computer system 1300A has been properly aligned for communication with a satellite (e.g., after turning left relative to the position of computer system 1300A in fig. 13N). Because computer system 1300A is properly aligned for communication with satellites, computer system 1300A displays alignment assistance element 1352A (or updates its display) based on the current connection and transmission status of the updated position information. In particular, the connection status indicator 1352A1 indicates that the status is connected; manual alignment instructions 1352A2 instruct the user to remain pointed at the satellite to update the location (e.g., to remain pointed in the current direction and/or not move computer system 1300A); the graphic alignment element 1352A3 displays a graphic (e.g., represented by a fan element) indicating that the computer system 1300A is within range of a satellite; and transmission status indicator 1352A4 includes a status bar (e.g., it is filled to represent a percentage of transmission completed) and text indicating that computer system 1300A is in the process of sending updated location information. In FIG. 13Q, the "people" tab user interface 1308B displayed on computer system 1300B has not changed relative to FIG. 13O.
Fig. 13R shows computer system 1300A after updated location information is sent via a satellite communications network. After sending the updated location information via the satellite communication network (e.g., transmission of the updated location information via the satellite communication network is complete), computer system 1300A removes (e.g., stops displaying) alignment assistance element 1352A and displays (e.g., updates) update indicator 1332A and location 1334A based on the updated location information sent via the satellite communication network. Update indicator 1332A indicates that the location of Rachel was updated one minute ago, and location 1334A indicates the most recent location of Rachel (e.g., 202Mountain View).
Fig. 13S shows a "people" tab user interface 1308B displayed on computer system 1300B after accessing (or receiving) updated location information sent by computer system 1300A via a satellite communications network. Based on the updated location information, user information element 1326B corresponding to Rachel displays (or is updated to display) the updated location (e.g., palo Alto), how long ago the location was updated (e.g., one minute ago), and the distance (e.g., 102 miles) between the location of Jim and the updated location of Rachel. In fig. 13S, computer system 1300A displays tack 1312B on the map in "people" tab user interface 1308B to reflect the updated location of Rachel, and displays satellite indicator 1354B (e.g., on tack 1312B) to indicate that the location of Rachel is based on updated location information sent via the satellite communications network.
In fig. 13S, computer system 1300B detects an input 1310G (e.g., a flick gesture or other selection input) that selects tack 1312B. In response to detecting input 1310G, computer system 1300B displays additional information associated with the user (e.g., rachel) corresponding to the selected tack, including user information element 1356B, satellite location notification 1358B, directional affordance 1360B, and contact affordance 1362B. In the embodiment shown in fig. 13U, user information element 1356B, satellite position notification 1358B, directional affordance 1360B, and contact affordance 1362B replace user information element 1322B and user information element 1326B (e.g., computer system 1300B stops displaying user information element 1322B and user information element 1326B).
The user information element 1356B includes a satellite location element 1356B1 that describes the location of Rachel as being based on satellite location (e.g., updated location information sent via a satellite communications network and/or a location determined via one or more satellites), and a location status element 1356B2 that indicates how long ago the location of Rachel was updated (e.g., one minute ago). Satellite location notification 1358B includes a message indicating that the location of Rachel is based on satellite location and that the location of Rachel has not been updated (e.g., automatically updated) because Rachel is not currently connected (e.g., cellular and/or terrestrial wireless communications). The direction affordance 1360B may be selected (e.g., via a flick gesture), and in response to detecting selection of the direction affordance 1360B, the computer system 1300B displays a direction from the location of Jim to the location of Rachel. The contact affordance 1362B may be selected (e.g., via a tap gesture), and in response to detecting selection of the contact affordance 1362B, the computer system 1300B displays contact information associated with Rachel, such as a phone number, an address, an email address, and/or selectable options for contacting Rachel. In FIG. 13T, the "I" tab user interface 1328A displayed on computer system 1300A has not changed relative to FIG. 13R.
In fig. 13U, computer system 1300B detects an input 1310H (e.g., a tap gesture, swipe up gesture, or other selection input) on user information element 1356B (or a designated portion of user information element 1356B, such as a pill or top). As shown in FIG. 13W, in response to detecting input 1310H, computer system 1300B displays additional information and/or options associated with Rachel, such as notification affordance 1364B, which can be selected to display options for receiving notifications related to Rachel.
In fig. 13V, computer system 1300A displays an "I" tab user interface 1328A that has not changed from fig. 13T, and detects an input 1310I (e.g., a tap gesture or other selection input) that selects manual update option 1350A. In some implementations, the computer system 1300A limits whether the location information can be manually updated via satellite, such as the frequency with which the location information can be manually updated via satellite. In the embodiment shown in fig. 13V, the input 1310I is detected before a time threshold is met (e.g., a predetermined amount of time has not elapsed since the computer system 1300A sent updated location information via satellite). Because the time threshold has not been met, in response to detecting input 1310I, computer system 1300A discards transmitting (or initiating the transmission process) updated location information via the satellite or provides assistance to connect with the satellite, and displays error notification 1366A and erasure affordance 1368A (e.g., as part of error notification 1366A or separate from the error notification). Error notification 1366A notifies the user that computer system 1300A was unable to update the location because the location was recently updated and indicates that the user is waiting for a retry. In response to detecting the selection of the input 1310J (e.g., tap gesture or other selection input) that cancels the affordance 1368A, the computer system 1300A stops the display of the error notification 1366A and the dismissal affordance 1368A, as shown in fig. 13Z.
Returning to fig. 13W, computer system 1300B detects an input 1310L (e.g., a tap gesture, a swipe down gesture, or other selection input) on user information element 1356B (or a designated portion of user information element 1356B, such as a pill or top). As shown in fig. 13Y, in response to detecting input 1310L, computer system 1300B reduces the amount of display of information and/or options associated with Rachel (e.g., computer system returns to the interface shown in fig. 13U).
Returning to fig. 13X, computer system 1300A detects an input 1310K (e.g., a tap gesture or other selection input) that selects a "people" tab 1318A. In response to detecting the input 1310K, computer system 1300A displays a "people" tab user interface 1308A, as shown in FIG. 13Z. Because computer system 1300A does not have cellular services, as indicated by network indicator 1303A, unlike in fig. 13B when cellular services are available, "people" tab user interface 1308A does not include a map. In FIG. 13AA, the "people" tab user interface 1308B displayed on computer system 1300B has not changed relative to FIG. 13Y.
Fig. 14 is a flow chart illustrating a method for using a computer system, according to some embodiments. The method 1400 is performed at a computer system (e.g., 100, 300, 500, 600, 900, 1100, 1300A, 1300B, 1500A, 1500B, and/or 1500C) (e.g., a smart phone, a smart watch, a laptop computer, a tablet computer, a desktop computer, or a head-mounted device (e.g., a head-mounted augmented reality and/or augmented reality device)). In some embodiments, the computer system communicates with a display generating component (e.g., a display controller, a touch-sensitive display system, and/or a head-mounted display system) and/or one or more input devices (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface, a touch screen, buttons, a keyboard, a mouse, a rotatable crown, and/or a microphone). Some operations in method 1400 are optionally combined, the order of some operations is optionally changed, and some operations are optionally omitted.
As described below, method 1400 provides an intuitive way for sending updated location information. The method reduces the cognitive burden on the user in sending updated location information, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-powered computing devices, enabling users to send updated location information faster and more efficiently saves power and increases the time interval between battery charges.
When (1402) the computer system communicates with a first communication network (e.g., a terrestrial communication network, a wireless terrestrial communication network, a cellular communication network, and/or a Wi-Fi network): the computer system determines (1404) that the corresponding criteria (e.g., remote location update criteria) have been met. In some embodiments, the first communication network is a cellular network associated with the computer system (e.g., provided by a cellular service provider of the computer system). In some embodiments, the first communication network is a cellular network different from a cellular network associated with the computer system (e.g., provided by a cellular service provider different from a cellular service provider of the computer system). In some embodiments, it is determined that the computer system is communicating with the first communication network when the computer system is receiving sufficient signals and/or connection consistency for communicating via the first communication network. In some embodiments, the respective criteria are met if: when a user of the computer system has previously approved the recipient of the location information; when the location sharing mode is activated to transmit location information; when the selectable location sharing option is selected; when a predetermined amount of movement of the computer system has been detected; when a predetermined time threshold is met since the latest updated location information was sent; and/or when another user or device has requested updated location information for that user.
When (1402) the computer system communicates with the first communication network, in response to determining that the respective criteria have been met, the computer system automatically (e.g., at predetermined intervals or continuously) transmits (1406) (e.g., via the first communication network) updated location information (e.g., longitude, latitude, altitude, and/or global positioning system ("GPS") coordinates) indicating an updated location of the computer system (e.g., 1332A indicates that the location of Rachel was updated 1 minute ago in fig. 13F; 1332A indicates that the location of Rachel is now updated in fig. 13H; between fig. 13F (e.g., time 10: 10) and fig. 13H (e.g., time 10: 11), the system 1300A automatically transmits the updated location information when the computer system 1300A communicates with the cellular network (e.g., as indicated by cellular status indicator 1303A)), wherein the updated location information is accessible by devices other than the computer system. In some embodiments, the computer system sends the updated location information to a location information server and/or to a remote device to which the user has authorized to receive the updated location information. In some implementations, updated location information for the computer system is determined based on the terrestrial wireless communication network, the first communication network (e.g., using cell identification and/or satellite positioning information). In some implementations, the computer system displays a selectable option for manually sending updated location information of the computer system via the first communication network (e.g., a user may select the option to send updated location information before the computer system will automatically send updated location information). In some implementations, the location sharing mode remains active after the updated location information is sent.
After automatically sending the updated location information one or more times when the respective criteria are met, the computer system detects (1408) that the first communication network is not available (e.g., cellular status indicator 1303A in fig. 13J indicates that the cellular network is not available) (e.g., the computer system is not in communication with the terrestrial wireless communication network and/or the computer system does not receive sufficient signals and/or connection consistency for communicating via the terrestrial wireless communication network). In some embodiments, the computer system detects that the first communication network is unavailable after sending different updated location information at a plurality of different times. In some embodiments, in response to detecting that the first communication network is not available, the computer system provides an indication to the user that the first communication network is not available (e.g., changes the wireless connection status indicator to indicate that the first communication network is not available).
When (or optionally in response to or upon a determination) the first communication network is unavailable (e.g., cellular status indicator 1303A in fig. 13J indicates that the cellular network is not available), the computer system can update the location information via the second communication network (e.g., a non-terrestrial wireless communication network, a satellite communication network, a communication protocol that does not require cellular service, and/or a low bandwidth communication mode) (e.g., computer system 1300A can update the location information via the satellite communication network), and the corresponding criteria have been met, the computer system forego (1410) automatically sending the updated location information (e.g., in fig. 13J, computer system 1300A forego automatically sending the updated location information). In some embodiments, relinquishing automatically sending updated location information includes displaying (e.g., via a display generating component) a selectable non-terrestrial communication option (e.g., affordance, button, graphical element, graphical object, and/or icon) without updating location information via the second communication network, wherein selection of the selectable non-terrestrial communication option (e.g., via one or more input devices) (e.g., touch input on the selectable non-terrestrial communication option and/or voice command to select the non-terrestrial communication option via one or more input devices) initiates (e.g., sends, and/or attempts to send) updating location information via the second communication network. In some embodiments, the selectable non-terrestrial communication option is displayed on a location sharing user interface that includes a graphical indication (e.g., on a map) of the location of the computer system. In some embodiments, the location sharing mode ends when the first communication network is unavailable and the respective criteria have been met. Giving up automatically sending updated location information when the first communication network is not available, the computer system is able to update the location information via the second communication network, and when accurate location information may not be available and/or additional user input will be required to send (e.g., input will be required to align the computer system with the satellite network), having met the respective criteria saves computer resources, performs the operation when a set of conditions has been met without further user input, and reduces the amount of input required to perform the operation.
In some embodiments, when the first communication network is unavailable (e.g., as indicated by cellular status indicator 1303A in fig. 13J): in accordance with a determination (or in response to a determination) that a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 30 minutes, 1 hour, or 2 hours) has elapsed since the first communication network was available (e.g., after the first communication network became unavailable to the computer system), the computer system displays a notification (e.g., 1346A in fig. 13J) that the computer system is able to update the location information via the second communication network (e.g., graphical elements, banners, cues, and/or text). In some embodiments, the predetermined period of time is a period of time since the computer system was connected to the first communication network (e.g., last connected to the first communication network, in communication with the first communication network, and/or a connection having connection criteria that are based on the strength, stability, and/or consistency of signals between the computer system and the first communication network). Conditionally displaying that the computer system is able to update the notification of the location information via the second communication network in accordance with a determination that a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first communication network was available indicates to the user that the first communication network is not available without notifying the user of a brief interruption of the availability of the first communication network provides improved visual feedback and performs the operation without further user input when a set of conditions has been met.
In some embodiments, the predetermined period of time is a period of time since the first communication network was available when the computer system was enabled to communicate (e.g., capable of communicating) via the first communication network (e.g., when computer system 1300A was enabled to communicate via the cellular communication network) (e.g., the computer system was not in an in-flight mode or a mode in which cellular and/or Wi-Fi communication was turned off). Displaying a notification that the computer system is capable of updating location information via the second communication network based on a time period when the computer system is enabled to communicate via the first communication network, by providing the notification on a condition that the user will expect the computer system to automatically send updated location information, provides improved visual feedback, and performs an operation when a set of conditions has been met without further user input.
In some embodiments, the predetermined period of time is a period of time available from the first communication network when the computer system is enabled to make the updated location information accessible to devices other than the computer system (e.g., the "share my location" option 1342A is enabled) (e.g., enabled to automatically send the updated location information; location sharing with one or more other users (or devices associated with the user) is enabled, such as via a setting that is permanent or for a predetermined time). Displaying a notification that the computer system is capable of updating location information via the second communication network based on a time period when the computer system is enabled to generate updated location information accessible to devices other than the computer, doing so provides for the notification if the user would expect the computer system to automatically send the updated location information, which provides improved visual feedback, and performs the operation when a set of conditions has been met without further user input.
In some embodiments, when the first communication network is unavailable: after a first predetermined period of time (e.g., a non-zero amount of time, such as 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 30 minutes, 1 hour, or 2 hours) has elapsed since the first communication network was available (e.g., became unavailable to the computer system) (e.g., based on or in response to determining this condition), the computer system provides an option (e.g., 1350A) (e.g., selectable option, user interactive graphical element, affordance, icon, and/or button) for sending updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network (e.g., does not provide a notification that indicates that the option for sending updated location information via the second communication network is available); and after a second predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 minutes, 30 minutes, 1 hour, 2 hours, or 5 hours) has elapsed since the first communication network was available (e.g., made unavailable to the computer system) (e.g., based on or in response to determining this), wherein the second predetermined period of time is greater than the first predetermined period of time, the computer system displays (e.g., on a system user interface such as a wakeup screen or a home screen, or on a currently open application user interface) a notification (e.g., 1346A) (e.g., a graphical element, banner, prompt, and/or text) indicating that an option for sending updated location information for the computer system via the second communication network is available (e.g., manual update option 1350A is available in "me" tab user interface 1328A of the location sharing application prior to displaying the manual update notification 1346A). In some embodiments, the first predetermined period of time is a period of time since the computer system was connected to the first communication network (e.g., last connected to the first communication network, in communication with the first communication network, and/or a connection having connection criteria that satisfies the strength, stability, and/or consistency of signals between the computer system and the first communication network). In some embodiments, the second predetermined period of time is a period of time since the computer system was connected to the first communication network (e.g., last connected to the first communication network, in communication with the first communication network, and/or a connection having connection criteria that satisfies the strength, stability, and/or consistency of signals between the computer system and the first communication network). In some embodiments, the notification indicating the option to send updated location information for the computer system is a notification that is not displayed after the first predetermined period of time has elapsed. In some implementations, the option to send the updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network is provided (e.g., displayed) in a user interface of the location sharing application. In some embodiments, an option for sending updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network is displayed in response to a set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to display a user interface of the location sharing application (e.g., the user may access the option in the location sharing application). Providing an updated location information option for sending the computer system via the second communication network after the first predetermined period of time and displaying a notification that the option is available after the second predetermined period of time informs the user that the updated location information may be sent via the second communication network and reduces interference to the user, but allows the user to send the updated location information via the second communication network before receiving the notification, which provides improved visual feedback, provides additional control options without cluttering the user interface, and performs the operation without further user input when a set of conditions has been met.
In some embodiments, when the first communication network is not available (and/or when the computer system is capable of updating location information via the second communication network): the computer system detecting a request (e.g., 1310F) (e.g., a set of one or more inputs) to send (or share or make accessible to other devices) updated location information of the computer system via a second communication network; and in response to detecting the request to send the updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network, the computer system initiates a process for sending the updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network, wherein the process for sending the updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network includes displaying a prompt (e.g., 1352A, 931, 908C, 908D, 908E, 908F, 908G, 908F, 908I, 908O1, 926 and/or 931) (e.g., a notification, a banner, text, a graphical element, audio and/or instructions) for the user to take an action to connect to the second communication network. In some embodiments, the prompt to cause the user to take an action to connect to the second communication network includes instructions to move and/or position at least a portion of the computer system in a particular direction or location (e.g., turn left, point up, and/or move out). In some embodiments, the computer system displays a prompt for the user to take an action to connect to the second communication network in accordance with a determination that the computer system is not connected to the second communication network (e.g., not properly aligned for communication with one or more satellites of the second communication network). Initiating a process for sending updated location information of a computer system via a second communication network in response to detecting a request to send updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network provides a user with control over when and/or at what frequency the updated location information is sent, which reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation and provides additional control options without cluttering the user interface. Displaying a prompt (e.g., providing a connection assistant) for a user to take an action to connect to the second communication network allows the user to quickly and efficiently solve the problem of preventing the computer system from connecting to the second communication network (e.g., misalignment and/or obstruction) with less input, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform the operation.
In some embodiments, when the first communication network is not available (and/or when the computer system is capable of updating location information via the second communication network): the computer system detecting a first request (e.g., 1310F or 1310I) to send updated location information of the computer system via a second communication network (e.g., a set of one or more inputs); and in response to detecting the first request to send updated location information for the computer system via the second communication network: in accordance with a determination that a set of manual update criteria is met (e.g., at least a threshold amount of time has passed since a request to send updated location information via a second communication network was received, before the first request was detected), the computer system sends the updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network (e.g., as shown in fig. 13P); and in accordance with a determination that the set of manual update criteria is not met, the computer system relinquishes (e.g., prevents) the updated location information of the computer system from being sent via the second communication network (e.g., as shown in fig. 13X). In some implementations, the computer system limits how often manual location updates may occur (e.g., the computer system requires a threshold amount of time between sending manual requests for updated location information). In some implementations, the manual update criteria includes criteria that are met when at least a threshold amount of time has elapsed before the first request is detected since the request to send updated location information via the second communication network was received. Transmitting the updated location information in response to a request based on whether the manual update criteria is met enables the computer system to conserve resources by limiting transmission of the updated location information (e.g., preventing transmission of the updated location information when the computer system has less likely changed location by a distance greater than a resolution or accuracy of the location information provided by the second communication network since a previous update), which performs the operation when a set of conditions has been met without further user input.
In some embodiments, when the first communication network is unavailable (and/or when the computer system is capable of updating location information via the second communication network) and after detecting a first request to send updated location information for the computer system via the second communication network (e.g., 1310F) (or optionally after sending updated location information for the computer system via the second communication network in response to detecting the first request to send updated location information for the computer system via the second communication network): the computer system detecting a second request (e.g., 1310I) (e.g., a set of one or more inputs) to send updated location information of the computer system via a second communication network; and in response to detecting a second request to send updated location information for the computer system via the second communication network: in accordance with determining that an amount of time between a second request to send updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network and a first request to send updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network (or optionally, an amount of time between the second request to send updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network and sending updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network in response to the first request to send updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network) satisfies (e.g., is greater than, or equal to, or greater than) a time threshold (e.g., a non-zero amount of time, such as 1 minute, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, or 1 hour), the computer system sends updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network (e.g., as shown in fig. 13P); and in accordance with a determination that an amount of time between the second request to send updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network and the first request to send updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network (or optionally, an amount of time between the second request to send updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network and sending updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network in response to the first request to send updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network) does not satisfy (e.g., is less than, or equal to, or less than) the time threshold, the computer system relinquishes (e.g., prevents) sending updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network (e.g., as shown in fig. 13X). Transmitting the updated location information based on whether an amount of time between a second request to transmit the updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network and a first request to transmit the updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network meets a time threshold enables the computer system to conserve resources by limiting transmission of the updated location information (e.g., preventing transmission of the updated location information when the computer system has been less likely to have changed location by a distance greater than a resolution or accuracy of the location information provided by the second communication network since a previous update), which performs operations without further user input when a set of conditions has been met.
In some embodiments, when the first communication network is unavailable (and/or when the computer system is capable of updating location information via the second communication network) and after detecting a first request to send updated location information for the computer system via the second communication network (e.g., 1310F) (or optionally after sending updated location information for the computer system via the second communication network in response to detecting the first request to send updated location information for the computer system via the second communication network): the computer system detecting a second request (e.g., 1310I) (e.g., a set of one or more inputs) to send updated location information of the computer system via a second communication network; and in response to detecting a second request to send updated location information for the computer system via the second communication network: in accordance with a determination that an amount of time between a second request to send updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network and a first request to send updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network (or optionally, an amount of time between the second request to send updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network and sending updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network in response to the first request to send updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network) does not satisfy (e.g., is less than, or equal to, or less than) a time threshold (e.g., a non-zero amount of time, such as 1 minute, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, or 1 hour), the computer system provides a notification (e.g., 1366A) (e.g., message, audio alert, and/or haptic output) that updated location information of the computer system will not (or cannot) be sent. In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that an amount of time between a second request to send updated location information of a computer system via a second communication network and a first request to send updated location information of a computer system via a second communication network (or optionally, an amount of time between the second request to send updated location information of a computer system via the second communication network and sending updated location information of a computer system via the second communication network in response to the first request to send updated location information of a computer system via the second communication network) satisfies (e.g., is greater than, or equal to, or greater than) a time threshold (e.g., 1 minute, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, or 1 hour), the computer system foregoes providing notification that updated location information of a computer system is not to be sent, and sends updated location information of a computer system via the second communication network. Providing a notification to the user that the requested action will not be performed in response to a notification to send updated location information of the computer system in response to the request to send updated location information in accordance with determining that an amount of time between the second request to send updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network and the first request to send updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network does not satisfy a time threshold provides improved visual feedback and performs the operation without further user input when a set of conditions has been met.
In some implementations, the computer system displaying a location status indicator (e.g., 1312B and/or 1356B 1) (e.g., a graphical element, a tack on a map, and/or text) (e.g., the location status indicator indicates a geographic location represented by the updated location information) corresponding to the updated location information, including: in accordance with determining that the location status indicator (or, optionally, the location indicated by the location status indicator) corresponds to (e.g., is based on) updated location information sent via the first communication network, displaying the location status indicator in a first visual appearance (e.g., 1312B in fig. 13I); and in accordance with a determination that the location status indicator corresponds to the updated location information sent via the second communication network, displaying the location status indicator in a second visual appearance different from the first visual appearance (e.g., 1312B in fig. 13S). Displaying the location information corresponding to the location status indicator in an appearance based on the communication network used to transmit the indicator provides information to the user regarding the source of the location information (and potentially the accuracy of the location information if the first communication network has a different accuracy than the second communication network), which provides improved visual feedback.
In some embodiments, displaying the position status indicator in the second visual appearance includes displaying an image of the satellite (e.g., 1354B) (e.g., a glyph and/or thumbnail) (e.g., the status indicator includes an image of the satellite and/or the status indicator is displayed with an image of the satellite). Displaying an image of the satellite indicates to the user that the location of the location status indicator is based on location information transmitted via the satellite communications network (which may not be as accurate as location information transmitted via the terrestrial wireless communications network), which provides improved visual feedback.
In some implementations, the computer system displays an update status indicator (e.g., 1326B, 1332A, and/or 1356B 2) (e.g., graphical element and/or text) that indicates a time (e.g., a last time) to send the updated location information (and/or a last time to share the location information and/or an amount of time since the last sharing of the location information). Displaying an indication of the time at which the updated location information was sent provides the user with information about how recently the location information of the user was updated, especially in case the location information is updated manually instead of automatically, which provides improved visual feedback.
In some embodiments, the computer system displays a map (e.g., 1308A in FIG. 13B, 1308B or 1328A in FIG. 13D and FIG. 13H) when (or upon determination) the computer system is in communication with the first communication network (and optionally simultaneously displays a location indicator (e.g., a tack) at a location on the map corresponding to the location of the computer system) and discards the display of the map (and displays the location indicator or does not display the location indicator) when (or upon determination) the first communication network is not available to the computer system (e.g., FIG. 13L, FIG. 13N, FIG. 13P, FIG. 13R, FIG. 13T, FIG. 13V and 1308A in FIG. 13Z.) in some embodiments, the map is displayed in a user interface of a location sharing application. There is insufficient bandwidth to display accurate map information when the first communication network is not available), the computer system foregoes displaying the map. Displaying the map when the computer system is in communication with the first communication network and relinquishing the display of the map when the first communication network is not available to the computer system indicates to the user that the first communication network is not available, saves the computing resources required to display the map, and avoids displaying potentially inaccurate (or outdated) map information when there is insufficient bandwidth to update the map at a predetermined rate, which provides improved visual feedback, and performs the operation when a set of conditions has been met without further user input.
In some embodiments, when the first communication network is unavailable (or in accordance with or in response to determining the condition) (e.g., as indicated by cellular status indicator 1303A in fig. 13L), the computer system provides an option (e.g., 1350A) (e.g., selectable options, affordances, icons, buttons, and/or user-interactive graphical user interface elements) for sending updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network (e.g., displaying selectable graphical user interface objects in the location sharing application); and when the computer system communicates with the first communication network (or in accordance with determining the condition or in response to determining the condition) (e.g., as indicated by cellular status indicator 1303A in fig. 13D), the computer system relinquishes the option of providing (e.g., not providing by the computer system) updated location information for the computer system via the second communication network (e.g., manually updating option 1350A is not shown in fig. 13D) (e.g., the user interface of the location sharing application is displayed without selectable graphical user interface objects). In some embodiments, in response to detecting an input selecting the option, the computer system transmits updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network. In some implementations, the computer system does not provide an option (e.g., a manual option) for sending updated location information of the computer system (e.g., via the first communication network and/or the second communication network) because the location information of the computer system (or a user associated with the computer system) is being automatically updated on a regular schedule (e.g., at periodic intervals without requiring user input). Providing an option for sending updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network when the first communication network is not available and relinquishing the option for sending updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network when the computer system is in communication with the first communication network enables the user to manually share the updated location information when the computer system is not automatically sending updated location information without cluttering the user interface with additional elements when the updated location is automatically sent, which provides improved visual feedback and provides additional control options without cluttering the user interface.
In some embodiments, when the first communication network is unavailable, the computing system sends updated location information accessible to devices other than the computer system via the second communication network (e.g., in fig. 13L, 13P, 13R, 13T, or 13V, computer system 1300A sends the updated location information via the satellite communication network). In some implementations, in accordance with (or in response to) determining that the respective criteria (e.g., remote location update criteria) have been met, the computer system transmits the updated location information via the second communication network when the first communication network is not available. In some embodiments, the respective criteria are met if: when a user of the computer system has previously approved the recipient of the location information; when the location sharing mode is activated to transmit location information; when the selectable location sharing option is selected; when a predetermined amount of movement of the computer system has been detected; when a predetermined time threshold is met since the latest updated location information was sent; and/or when another user or device has requested updated location information for that user. In some implementations, the respective criteria for sending the updated location information via the second communication network is the same as the respective criteria for sending the updated location information via the first communication network. In some implementations, the respective criteria for transmitting the updated location information via the second communication network is different from the respective criteria for transmitting the updated location information via the first communication network. Sending updated location information accessible to devices other than the computer system via the second communication network enables the user to send the updated location information when the first communication network is not available without requiring additional input (such as moving the computer system to a different location) to connect to the first communication network, which reduces the amount of input required to perform the operation.
In some embodiments, sending updated location information accessible to devices other than the computer system via the second communication network is performed automatically without user input (e.g., in fig. 13L, 13P, 13R, 13T, or 13V, computer system 1300A sends updated location information via the satellite communication network without detecting (or requiring) selection of manual update option 1350A) (e.g., in accordance with (or optionally in response to) determining that the automatic update criteria have been met). In some embodiments, the automatically updated criteria include criteria that are met when the user falls. In some embodiments, the computer system is in communication with one or more motion sensors (e.g., accelerometers and/or gyroscopes) configured to detect motion of the computer system. In some implementations, a determination is made that the user has fallen when the motion (e.g., detected speed and/or acceleration) of the computer system (or another device associated with the user) meets a set of motion criteria (e.g., meets or exceeds a threshold speed and/or acceleration). In some embodiments, the computer system communicates with one or more biometric sensors (e.g., heart rate sensors and/or blood oxygen monitors) that can be used to determine that the user has fallen. Automatically sending the updated location information via the second communication network without user input enables the user to share the updated location information without user input and to provide the location information more quickly if an emergency exists and/or if the user cannot provide input (e.g., manual input) for updating the location information, which reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation.
In some embodiments, the computer system displays (e.g., in a user interface of the location sharing application) an option (e.g., 1350A) (e.g., selectable options, affordances, icons, buttons, and/or user-interactive graphical user interface objects) for sending updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network; and the computer system detects a set of one or more inputs (e.g., 1310E and/or 1310F) including a selection of an option to send updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network, wherein sending updated location information accessible to devices other than the computer system via the second communication network is performed in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs including a selection of an option to send updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network. Displaying the option for sending updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network provides the user with an efficient method of manually sharing the updated location information, which provides additional control options without cluttering the user interface.
In some embodiments, in response to determining that the predefined action has been successfully performed (e.g., the computer system has successfully connected to one or more satellites or has successfully transmitted updated location information), the computer system displays a message indicating that the predefined action has been successfully performed (e.g., 1322A indicates (e.g., displays "now") when location information has been transmitted, 1352A1 displays "connected" when a connection has been established, 908L, and/or 908M). Displaying a message indicating that the predefined action has been successfully performed in response to determining that the predefined action has been successfully performed enables the computer system to notify the user that a particularly relevant action has occurred without distraction to the user due to notification regarding non-predefined actions, which provides improved visual feedback to the user, and performs the operation without further user input when a set of conditions has been met. Feedback regarding the success of important actions enables the computer system to be controlled more quickly and efficiently, which is particularly important in situations where the user is responding to emergency or strenuous situations.
It is noted that the details of the process described above with respect to method 1400 (e.g., fig. 14) also apply in a similar manner to the methods described above and below. For example, methods 700, 800, 1000, 1200, 1600, 1800, 2000, and/or 2200 optionally include one or more of the features of the various methods described above with reference to method 1400. For example, methods 700, 800, 1000, 1200, and/or 1600 optionally include the techniques described in method 1400 for sending updated location information. For example, method 1800 may initiate the sending of updated location information from messaging application as described in method 1400. For example, the sending of updated location information described in method 1400 may be simulated in the alternative communication network test mode in method 2000. For example, the transmission of updated location information described in method 1400 may be a process corresponding to the user interface object in method 2200. For the sake of brevity, these details are not repeated hereinafter.
Fig. 15A-15 AF illustrate an exemplary user interface for initiating communications according to some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the process in fig. 16.
Fig. 15A shows a computer system 1500A and a computer system 1500B. In some embodiments, computer system 1500A is a smart phone, a smart watch, a desktop computer, a laptop computer, a computer, or a tablet computer. In some embodiments, computer system 1500A is device 100, device 300, or device 500. In some embodiments, computer system 1500B is a smart phone, a smart watch, a desktop computer, a laptop computer, a computer, or a tablet computer. In some embodiments, computer system 1500B is device 100, device 300, or device 500. In the embodiment shown in fig. 15A, computer system 1500A is a smartwatch that includes a display 1502A (e.g., a touch sensitive display), a rotatable (and optionally depressible) input mechanism 1505A, and hardware buttons 1507A. Computer system 1500B is a smart phone that includes a display 1502B (e.g., a touch sensitive display). In some embodiments, computer system 1500A and computer system 1500B communicate with each other wirelessly (e.g., via bluetooth and/or near field communication protocols). In some embodiments, computer system 1500A and computer system 1500B are paired.
In some implementations, any of the inputs described herein (e.g., inputs 1510A、1510B、1510C、1510D、1510E1、1510E2、1510E3、1510F、1510G、1510H、1510I、1510J、1510K、1510L、1510M、1510N、1510O、1510P、1510Q and/or 1510R) are or include touch inputs (e.g., tap gestures and/or swipe gestures). In some implementations, any of the inputs described herein (e.g., inputs 1510A、1510B、1510C、1510D、1510E1、1510E2、1510E3、1510F、1510G、1510H、1510I、1510J、1510K、1510L、1510M、1510N、1510O、1510P、1510Q and/or 1510R) are or include voice inputs (e.g., voice commands to select a user interface element or to activate a feature or perform a function, such as a feature or function associated with a user interface element). In some implementations, any of the inputs described herein (e.g., inputs 1510A、1510B、1510C、1510D、1510E1、1510E2、1510E3、1510F、1510G、1510H、1510I、1510J、1510K、1510L、1510M、1510N、1510O、1510P、1510Q and/or 1510R) are or include air gestures (e.g., air gestures to select a user interface element or to activate a feature or perform a function, such as a feature or function associated with a user interface element). In some embodiments, any of the inputs described herein (e.g., inputs 1510A、1510B、1510C、1510D、1510E1、1510E2、1510E3、1510F、1510G、1510H、1510I、1510J、1510K、1510L、1510M、1510N、1510O、1510P、1510Q and/or 1510R) are or include activation (e.g., pressing, rotating, and/or moving) of a hardware device (e.g., a button, a rotatable input mechanism, a rotatable depressible input mechanism, a mouse button, a remote control button, and/or a joystick). In some embodiments, any of the user interface elements described herein as being selected (e.g., icons, affordances, buttons, and/or selectable options) are selected by activating a hardware device when the user interface element is in focus (e.g., highlighted, bolded, outlined, visually distinguished from other user interface elements, and/or located at or near a cursor).
In fig. 15A, computer system 1500A and computer system 1500B coordinate to attempt to initiate a telephone call to a non-emergency number (e.g., a number that is not associated with an emergency service and is not designated as an emergency contact). Computer system 1500A and computer system 1500B exchange call information such that a call may be initiated and/or terminated by any of the computer systems, and call audio may be input and/or output by any of the computer systems. In some embodiments, computer system 1500A and computer system 1500B include selectable options for coordinating shared calls. In some embodiments, computer system 1500A does not have cellular capability and is not capable of making telephone calls independently (e.g., without computer system 1500B or other cellular-enabled devices). When computer system 1500A does not have cellular capability, computer system 1500A makes a telephone call via computer system 1500B, such that computer system 1500B establishes a cellular connection and sends call data to computer system 1500A.
In fig. 15A, computer system 1500A and computer system 1500B each display a call interface for a telephony application that provides information and/or options associated with the call. Computer system 1500A displays a call interface 1504A for a telephony application that includes the number 1504A1 being called, a call state 1504A2 (e.g., "in call"), an end call option 1504A3, and a keypad option 1504A4. In response to detecting selection of the end call option 1504A3 (e.g., a tap gesture or other selection input on the end call option 1504 A3), the computer system 1500A ends the call or ends the attempt to initiate the call. In response to detecting a selection of keypad option 1504A4 (e.g., a tap gesture or other selection input on keypad option 1504 A4), computer system 1500A displays a keypad with selectable number options.
Computer system 1500B displays a call interface 1504B for a telephony application that includes the number 1504B1 being called, a call state 1504B2 (e.g., "no connection"), a call management option 1504B3, and an end call option 1504B4. In some embodiments, call management options 1504B3 include one or more (e.g., all or a subset) of call management buttons 603 shown and described in fig. 6K-6L. The call state 1504B2 indicates that computer system 1500B does not have a cellular connection, which is also indicated by network indicator 1503B, so the call cannot be initiated. Because computer system 1500B does not have a cellular connection, some or all of call management options 1504B3 are disabled.
Because the call is directed to a non-emergency number, when the attempt to initiate the call fails, computer system 1500A and computer system 1500B display menu user interface 1506A and home screen 1506B, respectively, as shown in FIG. 15B. The menu user interface 1506A displayed on computer system 1500A is a menu interface for a telephony application on computer system 1500A. Thus, when an attempt to initiate a call to a non-emergency number fails, computer system 1500A stops displaying call interface 1504A and displays (e.g., returns to) menu user interface 1506A. The home screen 1506B displayed on computer system 1500B includes selectable icons corresponding to respective applications that, when selected, open and/or launch the respective applications. Thus, when an attempt to initiate a call to a non-emergency number fails, computer system 1500B stops displaying call interface 1504B and displays (e.g., returns to) home screen 1506B. In some embodiments, if an attempt to initiate a call to a non-emergency number fails when computer system 1500A initiates the call, computer system 1500B displays home screen 1506B. In some embodiments, when computer system 1500B initiates the call, if the attempt to initiate the call to the non-emergency number fails, computer system 1500B displays a menu user interface for the telephony application (e.g., similar to menu user interface 1506A displayed on computer system 1500A). In some embodiments, when an attempt to initiate a call to a non-emergency number fails, computer system 1500B displays a user interface that was displayed when the attempt to initiate the call was made.
Fig. 15C illustrates an exemplary technique for initiating a communication (such as a telephone call) with a specified entity (such as an emergency contact or emergency service, e.g., 911). The computer system detects an input 1510A (e.g., press, multiple presses, or press and hold) on the hardware button 1507A while the clock face user interface 1508A is displayed. In response to detecting input 1510A, computer system 1500A displays user interface 1512A, which includes shutdown option 1512A1, medical ID option 1512A2, and emergency SOS option 1512A3. In response to detecting the input 1510B (e.g., a tap gesture, swipe gesture, or other selection input) selecting the emergency SOS option 1512A3, the computer system 1500A attempts to initiate communication with an emergency service (e.g., 911) via the computer system 1500B.
Fig. 15E-15G illustrate alternative or additional techniques for initiating a call to emergency services. In fig. 15E, computer system 1500A displays a home screen 1514A (also referred to as a springboard springboard or launch screen) that includes selectable icons corresponding to respective applications that, when selected, cause computer system 1500A to open or launch the respective applications. In response to detecting input 1510C (e.g., a tap gesture or other selection input) selecting icon 1514A1 (corresponding to a telephony application), computer system 1500A displays a menu user interface 1506A of the telephony application, as shown in fig. 15F. In response to detecting an input 1510D (e.g., a tap gesture or other selection input) selecting a keypad option 1515D, computer system 1500A displays a keypad user interface 1516A of the telephony application, as shown in fig. 15G. In fig. 15G, computer system 1500A detects a set of inputs including input 1510E1 (e.g., a tap gesture or other selection input on "9" button 1516 A1), input 1510E2 (e.g., two tap gestures or other selection inputs on "1" button 1516 A2), and 1510E3 (e.g., a tap gesture or other selection input on call button 1516 A3). In response to detecting the set of inputs in fig. 15G, computer system 1500A attempts to initiate communication with an emergency service (e.g., 911) via computer system 1500B.
Fig. 15H illustrates an alternative or additional technique for initiating a call to emergency services. In some embodiments, computer system 1500A can detect that the user has fallen. In response to detecting that the user has fallen, computer system 1500A initiates a process for attempting to communicate (e.g., make a call) with emergency services and/or emergency contacts. In some embodiments, in response to detecting that the user has fallen, computer system 1500A displays menu user interface 1512A shown in fig. 15D that allows the user to easily access emergency SOS option 1512A3 for initiating communication with emergency services. In some embodiments, if computer system 1500A does not detect an input within a predetermined amount of time (e.g., 5 seconds, 10 seconds, 30 seconds, or one minute), then the computer system displays user interface 1518A, as shown in fig. 15H. The user interface 1518A includes an indication 1518A1, a countdown timer 1518A2, and a cancel option 1518A3. Indication 1518A1 indicates that computer system 1500A is to initiate a call to emergency services. The countdown timer 1518A2 displays the amount of time (e.g., seconds) until the computer system 1500A will automatically initiate a call to emergency services. The user may select cancel option 1518A3 (e.g., via a tap gesture) to end the countdown and prevent computer system 1500A from automatically initiating a call to emergency services. If the countdown reaches zero before being cancelled, computer system 1500A automatically initiates a call to emergency services. In some embodiments, in response to detecting that the user has fallen, the computer system displays the user interface 1518A and initiates the countdown without first displaying the menu user interface 1512A.
Once computer system 1500A initiates a call to emergency services via computer system 1500B in accordance with the techniques described with reference to fig. 15C-15H, computer system 1500A displays call interface 1520A (e.g., as shown in fig. 15I) and computer system 1500B displays a corresponding call interface 1520B (e.g., as shown in fig. 15J). Call interface 1520A includes a recipient indicator 1520A1 that indicates that 911 is being called. Call interface 1520B includes a recipient indicator 1520B1, a call state indicator 1520B2, a call management option 1520B3, and an end call affordance 1520B4. In some embodiments, call interface 1520B is call interface 1503B shown and described in fig. 15A. In some embodiments, call interface 1520B is call interface 602K or 602L shown and described in fig. 6K and 6L, respectively. In some embodiments, call management options 1520B3 include one or more (e.g., all or a subset) of call management buttons 603 shown and described in fig. 6K-6L.
In fig. 15J, network indicator 1503B indicates that computer system 1500B does not have a cellular connection. Because computer system 1500B does not have a cellular connection and therefore cannot initiate a call to 911, and because the call is directed to emergency services, computer system 1500A displays satellite communication button 1520B5 (e.g., as shown in fig. 15L) and computer system 1500A displays prompt 1522A2 (e.g., as shown in fig. 15K) that includes instructions to cause the user to attempt to send a sms to 911 via satellite on computer system 1500B. In some implementations, the satellite communication button 1520B5 is the satellite communication button 604G in fig. 6G, the satellite communication button 604I in fig. 6I, or the satellite communication button 904A in fig. 9A.
In fig. 15K, since computer system 1500B does not have a cellular connection, in addition to (e.g., concurrently with) prompt 1522A2, computer system 1500A also displays a call status indicator 1522A1 and a recall option 1522A3 in user interface 1522A (e.g., as described with reference to fig. 15O), the call status indicator utilizing a warning graphic (e.g., an exclamation mark within a circle) to indicate a connectionless state. In some embodiments, computer system 1500A replaces user interface 1520A with user interface 1522A (e.g., computer system 1500A stops the display of user interface 1520A and displays user interface 1522A). In some embodiments, in addition to or instead of the recall option 1522A3, the computer system 1500A displays a dismissal option that, when selected, causes the computer system 1500A to cease display of the user interface 1522A, display a telephone user interface (e.g., 1506A, 1516A, 1520A) or other user interface, and optionally end the attempt to initiate the call. In some embodiments, in response to detecting an input (e.g., a depression of rotatable input mechanism 1505A, a rotation of rotatable input mechanism 1505A, and/or a depression of hardware button 1507A), computer system 1500A stops the display of user interface 1522A, displays a telephone user interface (e.g., 1506A, 1516A, or 1520A) or other user interface, and optionally ends the attempt to initiate the call.
In fig. 15L, since computer system 1500B does not have a cellular connection, call state indicator 1520B2 has a warning graphic (e.g., an exclamation mark within a circle) display (or updated to display) no connection state. In response to detecting an input 1510F (e.g., a tap gesture or other selection input) selecting the end call option 1520B4 in fig. 15L, the computer system 1500B stops attempting to initiate a call to 911. In response to detecting the input 1510G (e.g., a tap gesture or other selection input) that selects the satellite communication button 1520B5 in fig. 15L, the computer system 1500B initiates a process for aligning the computer system 1500B with a satellite and/or sending communications via a satellite communication network, as described in fig. 6M-6Y and/or fig. 9A-9U. In some embodiments, in response to detecting the input 1510G selecting the satellite communication button 1520B5 when the computer system 1500B is not properly aligned for communication with a satellite, the computer system 1500B initiates an alignment process and/or displays one or more alignment interfaces or elements, such as the alignment interfaces 902C-902J and 902O-902P depicted and described in fig. 9C-9J and 9O-9P, the banner 926 depicted and described in fig. 9K-9N 1, and/or the graphical element 931 depicted and described in fig. 9K-9N 1.
In some embodiments, if computer system 1500B does not detect a selection of satellite communication button 1520B5 within a predetermined amount of time, computer system 1500B automatically transmits a communication via a satellite communication network (or initiates a process of transmitting a communication via a satellite communication network), as described in fig. 6I, 6M-6Y, and/or 9A-9B.
After the communication has been sent by the satellite communication network, computer system 1500A maintains a display of user interface 1522A (e.g., as shown in fig. 15M) and computer system 1500B displays notification 1524B1 (e.g., as shown in fig. 15N). In some implementations, the user interface 1522A is updated to indicate a change in cellular signal state and to maintain the display of the prompt 1522A1 or to stop the display of the prompt 1522A 1. Notification 1524B1 notifies the user that computer system 1500B sent the request via satellite. In fig. 15N, a notification 1524B1 is displayed on the lock screen 1524B. In some embodiments, when computer system 1500B is in a sleep state or a low power state, computer system 1500B displays notification 1524B1, as shown in fig. 15N. In some embodiments, notification 1524B1 is displayed as a banner (e.g., at or near the top of display 1502B) when computer system 1500B is in an active state (e.g., not in a locked state and not in a sleep state or low power state). In some embodiments, computer system 1500B displays notification 1524B1 based on determining (e.g., only when) that the communication is automatically sent via satellite (e.g., without user input and/or because the user is not responding).
In fig. 15N, computer system 1500B detects input 1510H (e.g., a flick gesture or other selection input) of selection notification 1524B 1. In response to detecting input 1510H, computer system 1500B displays report interface 1526B as shown in fig. 15P. In some embodiments, the report interface 1526B includes an end button 1526B1, a message area 1526B2, a short message 1526B3, a text input field 1526B4, and a send button 1526B5. In some embodiments, report interface 1526B is (or provides the same functionality as) messaging interface 602T depicted in fig. 6T, report interface 602U depicted in fig. 6U, or summary interface 602W depicted in fig. 6W.
In fig. 15O, computer system 1500A detects an input 1510I (e.g., a tap gesture or other selection input) that selects the recall option 1522 A3. In response to detecting input 1510I, computer system 1500A attempts (e.g., retries) to initiate a call to emergency services via computer system 1500B. Since computer system 1500B has cellular service (e.g., as indicated by network indicator 1503B in fig. 15P) when computer system 1500A attempts to initiate the call, computer system 1500A and computer system 1500B are able to establish a call with 911, as shown in fig. 15Q and 15R. In fig. 15Q, computer system 1500A displays a call interface 1520A that shows the recipient (911) and the duration of the call (1 minute 16 seconds). In fig. 15R, computer system 1500B displays call interface 1520B. In contrast to the call interface 1520B (e.g., as shown in fig. 15J and 15L) that is displayed when cellular service is not available, the call status indicator 1520B2 displays the duration of the call and the call management option 1520B3 is enabled.
Fig. 15S-15 AF illustrate techniques for attempting to initiate a call with computer system 1500B and computer system 1500C and for transmitting communications via satellite if a cellular communication network is not available. Fig. 15S illustrates a computer system 1500C that includes a display 1502C (e.g., a touch-sensitive display). In some embodiments, computer system 1500C is included in a vehicle (e.g., an automobile or truck). In some embodiments, computer system 1500C is or includes an in-vehicle infotainment system. In some embodiments, computer system 1500C displays a user interface on a display in the vehicle (e.g., on a console of the vehicle). In some embodiments, the user interface displayed by computer system 1500C is controlled by computer system 1500B (e.g., via a wired or wireless communication link). In some embodiments, the user interface displayed by computer system 1500C is generated by computer system 1500B. In some embodiments, the user interface displayed by computer system 1500C is generated by computer system 1500C and displays information provided by computer system 1500B (e.g., computer system 1500B coordinates with computer system 1500C to display information).
In FIG. 15S, computer system 1500C displays a user interface 1527C that includes a home screen 1528C and a taskbar 1530C. Home screen 1528C includes selectable icons corresponding to respective applications that, when selected, open and/or launch the respective applications. The taskbar 1530C includes a network indicator 1503C. In some embodiments, network indicator 1503C indicates the network state of computer system 1500B. In some embodiments, network indicator 1503C indicates the network state of computer system 1500C (e.g., if computer system 1500C is enabled to communicate independently via cellular communications). In fig. 15T, when the computer system 1500C displays the user interface shown in fig. 15S, the computer system 1500B displays the main screen 1506B described with reference to fig. 15B.
In fig. 15S, computer system 1500C detects an input 1520J (e.g., a tap gesture or other selection input) that selects an icon 1528C1 corresponding to a telephony application. In response to detecting the input 1520J, the computer system 1500C displays a telephone user interface 1532C of the telephone application corresponding to the icon 1528C1, as shown in fig. 15U. The phone user interface 1532C includes options 1532C1-1532C5 (e.g., tabs) that can be selected to display the favorite reachable users, the most recently contacted users, contact lists (e.g., a list of reachable users associated with the computer system 1500C), keypads, and voicemails, respectively. In fig. 15U, as favorites 1532C1 is selected (e.g., as indicated by the outline surrounding favorites 1532C 1), computer system 1500C displays a list of specified reachable entities, including emergency service options 1532C6 associated with emergency services. In FIG. 15V, user interface 1506B displayed on computer system 1500B remains unchanged from FIG. 15T.
In fig. 15U, computer system 1500C detects an input 1510K (e.g., a tap gesture or other selection input) that selects keypad option 1532C 6. In response to detecting input 1510K, computer system 1500C displays keypad 1532C7, recipient indicator 1532C8, and call option 1532C9. In fig. 15X, when computer system 1500C displays the user interface shown in fig. 15W, user interface 1506B displayed on computer system 1500B remains unchanged from fig. 15V.
In fig. 15W, keypad 1532C7 has been used to enter number 911 as indicated by recipient indicator 1532C8, and computer system 1500C detects input 1510M (e.g., a tap gesture or other selection input) selecting call option 1532C 9. In response to detecting input 1510M, computer system 1500C displays call interface 1534C (e.g., as shown in fig. 15Y), and computer system 1500B displays call interface 1520B (e.g., as shown in fig. 15Z). Call interface 1534C includes a recipient indicator 1534C1, a call status indicator 1534C2, and call management options 1534C3-1534C7, including an end call option 1534C3, a mute option 1534C4, and a keypad option 1534C5. In some embodiments, call management options 1534C3-1534C7 perform functions similar to call management button 603 shown and described in fig. 6K-6L. In some embodiments, computer system 1500C displays call interface 1534C (e.g., as shown in fig. 15Y), and computer system 1500B displays call interface 1520B (e.g., as shown in fig. 15Z) in response to detecting input 1510L (e.g., a tap gesture or other selection input) selecting emergency services option 1532C6 in fig. 15U.
The network indicator 1503C in fig. 15Y and the network indicator 1503B in fig. 15Z indicate that cellular service is not available. Because cellular services are not available and the attempted call is directed to emergency services, computer system 1500C and computer system 1500B display options for sending communications via satellite, as shown in FIG. 15AA and FIG. 15 AB. Computer system 1500C displays satellite communication button 1534C6 on call interface 1534C and computer system 1500B displays satellite communication button 1520B5 on call interface 1520B (e.g., described above with reference to fig. 15L). In some implementations, the satellite communication button 1534C6 is the satellite communication button 604G in fig. 6G, the satellite communication button 604I in fig. 6I, or the satellite communication button 904A in fig. 9A.
In fig. 15AA, in response to detecting the input 1510N (e.g., a tap gesture or other selection input) selecting the end call option 1534C3, the computer system 1500C causes the call to end. Similarly, in fig. 15AB, in response to detecting an input 1510P (e.g., a tap gesture or other selection input) selecting end call option 1520B4, computer system 1500B causes the call to end. In response to detecting the input 1510O (e.g., a tap gesture or other selection input) that selects the satellite communication button 1534C6 in fig. 15AA, the computer system 1500C initiates a process for aligning the computer system 1500B with a satellite and/or sending communications via a satellite communication network, as described in fig. 6M-6Y and/or fig. 9A-9U. In some embodiments, in response to detecting the input 1510O selecting the satellite communication button 1534C6 when the computer system 1500B is not properly aligned for communication with a satellite, the computer system 1500B initiates an alignment process and/or displays one or more alignment interfaces or elements, such as the alignment interfaces 902C-902J and 902O-902P depicted and described in fig. 9C-9J and 9O-9P, the banner 926 depicted and described in fig. 9K-9N 1, and/or the graphical element 931 depicted and described in fig. 9K-9N 1.
In some embodiments, if computer system 1500C and computer system 1500B did not receive any input while displaying user interface 1534C in fig. 15AA and user interface 1520B in fig. 15AB, respectively, computer system 1500B will attempt to use satellite in order to contact emergency services with a short message, as indicated on user interface 1536C displayed on computer system 1500C in fig. 15 AC. The user interface 1536C includes an indication 1536C1 that indicates emergency communications via satellite are available, an indication 1536C2 that the computer system 1500B will attempt to use satellite to send a short message to contact emergency services, a ping option 1536C3, and a recall option 1536C4. In response to detecting input 1510Q (e.g., a tap gesture or other selection input) selecting ping option 1536C3, computer system 1500C causes computer system 1500B to output audio (e.g., send instructions to the latter to do so), as shown in fig. 15AD, to help the user locate computer system 1500B. In response to detecting the selection of the re-call option 1536C4 input 1510R (e.g., a tap gesture or other selection input), the computer system 1500C attempts (e.g., re-attempts) to initiate a call to emergency services using the cellular communication network (e.g., independently or via the computer system 1500B). In response to detecting the selection of the input 1510R of the recall option 1536C4 in fig. 15AC, a call to emergency services can be established because the cellular communication network is available, as indicated by the network indicator 1503C in fig. 15AE and the network indicator 1503B in fig. 15 AF. Fig. 15AE illustrates a call interface 1534C displayed on computer system 1500C in response to detecting the selection of input 1510R of recall option 1536C4 in fig. 15AC and indicates that the call has been established by displaying the duration of the call in call state indicator 1534C2 and by enabling call management options 1534C3-1534C 7. Similarly, fig. 15AF shows a call interface 1520B displayed on computer system 1500B in response to detecting the selection of input 1510R of recall option 1536C4 in fig. 15AC and indicates that the call has been established by displaying the duration of the call in call state indicator 1520B2 and by enabling call management option 1520B 3.
Fig. 16 is a flow chart illustrating a method for initiating communications using a computer system, according to some embodiments. The method 1600 is performed at a computer system (e.g., 100, 300, 500, 600, 900, 1100, 1300A, 1300B, 1500A, and/or 1500C) (e.g., a device wired and/or wirelessly connected to an external computer system, a vehicle-mounted infotainment device, a smart watch, a laptop computer, a tablet computer, a smartphone, a desktop computer, or a head-mounted device (e.g., a head-mounted augmented reality and/or augmented reality device)) in communication with an output-generating component (e.g., a display controller, a display-generating component, a touch-sensitive display system, a speaker, a haptic-generating component, and/or a head-mounted display system), one or more input devices (e.g., 1502A, 1502B, or 1502C) (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface, a touch screen, a button, an accelerometer, a heart rate sensor, an blood oxygen monitor, and/or a microphone), and an external system (e.g., 1500B) (e.g., a smartphone, a smartwatch, a laptop computer, and/or a tablet computer). In some embodiments, the computer system communicates with external computer systems via wired and/or wireless networks (e.g., bluetooth and/or Wi-Fi). Some operations in method 1600 are optionally combined, the order of some operations is optionally changed, and some operations are optionally omitted.
As described below, method 1600 provides an intuitive way for initiating a communication. The method reduces the cognitive burden of the user to initiate communication, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-powered computing devices, enabling a user to initiate communications faster and more efficiently saves power and increases the time interval between battery charges.
The computer system receives (1602) a request (e.g., 1510A, 1510B, 1510C, 1510D, 1510E1, 1510E2, 1510E3, 1510I, 1510J, 1510K, 1510L, 1510M, and/or 1510R) (e.g., inputs on selectable options, affordances, buttons, graphical elements, graphical objects, and/or icons displayed on an output generation component) to initiate (1602) communication (e.g., to an emergency service and/or emergency contact) via the one or more input devices. In some embodiments, the request is a voice command. In some embodiments, the request to initiate communication is directed to an external computer system. In response to receiving a request to initiate a communication (1604): in accordance with a determination that an external computer system is connected to (e.g., in communication with) a terrestrial wireless communication network (e.g., as indicated by cellular status indicators 1303A, 1503B, and/or 1503C) (e.g., cellular network and/or Wi-Fi network), the computer system initiates (1606) a process for communicating via the terrestrial wireless communication network (e.g., in communication with an emergency service or contact, sending a short message, initiating an audio call, sending an email, and/or initiating an audio/video conference) (e.g., as shown in fig. 15Q, 15R, 15AE, and/or 15 AF); and in accordance with a determination that the external computer system is not connected to the terrestrial wireless communication network (e.g., the external computer system is not connected to the terrestrial wireless communication network and/or the computer system is unable to receive signals having sufficient reception and/or consistency for communication via the terrestrial wireless communication network), the computer system provides (1608) via the output generation component a prompt (e.g., 1522A2 or 1534C 6) (e.g., notification, audio output, tactile output, visual notification, text instruction, video instruction, graphical element, graphical object, and/or icon) to connect (e.g., connect the computer system and/or the external computer system to) a non-terrestrial network (e.g., a satellite communication network and/or a low bandwidth communication network) using the external computer system. Providing a prompt to connect to a non-terrestrial network using an external computer system in accordance with a determination that the external computer system is not connected to a terrestrial wireless network provides information to a user regarding operations available on the external computer system and directs the user to an appropriate device to initiate the communication, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operations.
In some embodiments, the terrestrial wireless communication network is a cellular network (e.g., provided by a cellular service provider of the user) or another cellular network (e.g., provided by another cellular service provider) associated with the computer system. In some embodiments, for emergency calls, the computer system may use a network provided by a network provider that is different from the provider associated with the computer system. In some embodiments, the external computer system is connected to the terrestrial wireless communication network when the external computer system is receiving sufficient cellular service and/or connection consistency for communication. In some embodiments, the prompt is not previously displayed. In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that an external computer system is connected to a terrestrial wireless communication network, the computer system foregoes providing a reminder to connect to a non-terrestrial network using the external computer system (e.g., initiates a process for communicating via the terrestrial wireless communication network without providing a reminder to connect to a non-terrestrial network using the external computer system). In some embodiments, in response to receiving a request to initiate a communication, the computer system provides a prompt to connect to a non-terrestrial network using the external computer system in accordance with a determination that the external computer system is configured to connect to the non-terrestrial network, and/or to communicate via the non-terrestrial network. In some embodiments, in response to receiving the request to initiate communication, the computer system forgoes providing a prompt to connect to the non-terrestrial network using the external computer system in accordance with a determination that the external computer system is not configured to connect to the non-terrestrial network, is not connected to the non-terrestrial network, and/or is not configured to communicate via the non-terrestrial network.
In some embodiments, the prompt to connect to the non-terrestrial network using the external computer system includes an indication (e.g., an instruction, text, and/or graphical indicator) that satellite communications are available (e.g., the external computer system is capable of connecting to the satellite communications network and/or the external computer system is capable of communicating via satellite communications, such as sending a short message) (e.g., "try to send a short message to 911 via satellite on your phone" in 1522A2 and/or "send a short message to 911 via satellite" displayed below satellite communications button 1534C 6). Displaying an indication that satellite communications are available provides the user with additional information regarding the types of communications that can be performed with the external computer system, which improves visual feedback to the user and reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation.
In some embodiments, after receiving a request to initiate a communication (e.g., 1510A, 1510B, 1510C, 1510D, 1510E1, 1510E2, 1510E3, 1510I, 1510J, 1510K, 1510L, 1510M, and/or 1510R): in accordance with a determination that an attempt to communicate via a non-terrestrial network has been made (e.g., by the computer system and/or by an external computer system) (or optionally, a communication has been sent), the computer system causes an output (e.g., display) (e.g., on the computer system and/or external computer system) to have made an attempted communication notification (e.g., 1524B 1) (e.g., a visual notification, a text notification, a tactile notification, and/or an audio notification) of the attempt to communicate via the non-terrestrial network. In some implementations, the attempted communication notification is displayed on a wake screen (e.g., a lock screen). Providing a notification in accordance with a determination that an attempt to communicate via a non-terrestrial network has been made provides information to the user regarding operations performed by the computer system that may not be known to the user, which provides improved visual feedback.
In some embodiments, the computer system is wearable (e.g., the computer system is 1500A) (e.g., the computer system includes a wearable device, a watch, a bracelet, a strap, and/or an operating system on a wearable device). The wearable computer system provides convenient access to information and an efficient way of providing input, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the number of inputs required to perform an operation. In some embodiments, the computer system is included in a vehicle (e.g., the computer system is 1500C) (e.g., an automobile or truck; the computer system is or includes an in-vehicle infotainment system). In some embodiments, the computer system displays the user interface on a display in the vehicle (e.g., on a console of the vehicle). In some embodiments, the user interface is controlled by an external computer system (e.g., via a wired or wireless communication link). In some embodiments, the user interface is generated by an external computer system. In some embodiments, the user interface is generated by a computer system and displays information provided by an external computer system (e.g., the external computer system coordinates with the computer system to display the information). Including the computer system in the vehicle provides convenient access to prompts that are connected to a non-terrestrial network using an external computer system while the user is in the vehicle, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation.
In some embodiments, when a prompt to connect to a non-terrestrial network using an external computer system is provided, the computer system attempts (e.g., continues to attempt) to communicate via a terrestrial wireless communication network (e.g., when computer system 1500A displays prompt 1522A2 in fig. 15K, 15M, and/or 15O, computer system 1500A and/or computer system 1500B attempts to communicate via a cellular communication network, when computer system 1500C displays satellite communication button 1534C6 in fig. 15AA, computer system 1500C and/or computer system 1500B attempts to communicate via a cellular communication network). In some embodiments, the computer system and/or external computer system attempts to communicate via a terrestrial wireless communication network when providing a prompt to connect to a non-terrestrial network using the external computer system. In some embodiments, attempting to communicate via the terrestrial wireless communication network while providing a prompt to connect to a non-terrestrial network using the external computer system is performed in accordance with a determination that the request to initiate communication is a request to initiate communication with an emergency service. In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the request to initiate communication is not a request to initiate communication with an emergency service, the computer system (and/or optionally the external computer system) foregoes attempting (or continuing to attempt) to communicate via the terrestrial wireless communication network while providing a prompt to connect to a non-terrestrial network using the external computer system (e.g., the computer system and/or the external computer system attempts to communicate via the terrestrial wireless communication network while providing a prompt to connect to a non-terrestrial network using the external computer system only in accordance with the request to initiate communication with an emergency service). Attempting to communicate via a terrestrial wireless communication network allows the computer system to continue to attempt one communication method (e.g., a more data-intensive method) without additional user input while providing the option of another communication method, which reduces the amount of input required by the user to perform an action and provides additional control options without cluttering the user interface.
In some embodiments, after attempting to communicate via a terrestrial wireless communication network while providing a prompt to connect to a non-terrestrial network using an external computer system: in accordance with a determination that the attempt to communicate via the terrestrial wireless communication network has ceased (e.g., in response to receiving an input corresponding to a request to cease attempting communication or in accordance with a determination that a time threshold is met), the computer system changes (e.g., updates) the user interface (e.g., computer system 1500A ceases 1522A2 display and optionally displays user interfaces 1506A, 1508A, 1514A, or 1516A; computer system 1500C ceases satellite communication button 1534C6 display and optionally displays user interface 1527C, 1532C in fig. 15U, 1532C in fig. 15W, or 1536C). Changing the user interface in accordance with a determination that the attempt to communicate via the terrestrial wireless communication network has ceased provides feedback to the user that the computer system and/or the external computer system is no longer attempting to communicate via the terrestrial wireless communication network, and indicates to the user that further user input may be required to reinitiate the attempt to communicate via the terrestrial wireless communication network, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform the operation. In some embodiments, the computer system and/or the external computer system ceases attempting to communicate via the terrestrial wireless communication network in response to detecting a user input corresponding to a request to cease attempting to communicate via the terrestrial wireless communication network. In some embodiments, changing the user interface is performed in response to detecting a user input corresponding to a request to cease attempting to communicate via the terrestrial wireless communication network. In some embodiments, changing the user interface includes changing one or more elements (e.g., notifications, hints, text, and/or graphical indications) of the user interface. In some embodiments, the computer system and/or external computer system ceases attempting to communicate via the terrestrial wireless communication network in accordance with a determination that a time threshold has been met (such as a predetermined amount of time after receiving a request to initiate communication or after providing the prompt for a predetermined amount of time). In some embodiments, changing the user interface includes displaying an option that, when selected, causes the computer system and/or external computer system to attempt to communicate via the terrestrial wireless communication network (e.g., call or re-dial emergency services). In some embodiments, changing the user interface includes replacing the end service and/or the drop option with an option that, when selected, causes the computer system and/or the external computer system to attempt to communicate (e.g., call or re-dial an emergency call service) via the terrestrial wireless communication network.
In some embodiments, upon providing a prompt (e.g., 1522A2 and/or 1534C 6) to connect to a non-terrestrial network using an external computer system and attempting (e.g., continuing to attempt) to communicate via a terrestrial wireless communication network, the computer system detects a user input (e.g., 1510I, pressing of rotatable input mechanism 1505A, rotation of rotatable input mechanism 1505A and/or pressing of hardware button 1507A, such as input 1510A) corresponding to a request to dismiss a prompt to connect to a non-terrestrial network using an external computer system (e.g., a tap gesture or other selection input on dismissal option, and/or a voice command); and in response to detecting a user input corresponding to a request to cancel a prompt to connect to a non-terrestrial network using an external computer system, the computer system displays a telephone user interface (e.g., 1506A, 1516A or 1532C in fig. 15U or 15W) (e.g., a user interface of a telephone application and/or a call user interface). In some embodiments, the telephone user interface includes an indication that an attempt to communicate via the terrestrial wireless communication network is being made (e.g., by the computer system and/or by an external computer system). In some embodiments, the telephone user interface includes options for controlling telephone calls (e.g., ending telephone calls and/or attempting to initiate telephone calls), controlling speaker functions, controlling mute functions, displaying a keypad, and/or viewing and/or selecting options available to contact a user. In some embodiments, the telephony user interface is displayed prior to providing the prompt to connect to the non-terrestrial network using the external computer system (e.g., redisplaying the telephony user interface in response to detecting a user input corresponding to a request to cancel the prompt to connect to the non-terrestrial network using the external computer system). In some embodiments, the computer system and/or the external computer system ceases attempting to communicate via the terrestrial wireless communication network in response to detecting a user input corresponding to a request to eliminate a prompt to connect to a non-terrestrial network using the external computer system. In some embodiments, in response to detecting a user input corresponding to a request to eliminate a reminder to connect to a non-terrestrial network using an external computer system, the computer system and/or the external computer system ceases to display an option to eliminate the reminder to connect to the non-terrestrial network using the external computer system. Displaying a state of the telephone user interface informing the user of an attempt to communicate via the terrestrial wireless communication network in response to detecting a user input corresponding to a request to cancel a prompt to connect to a non-terrestrial network using an external computer system, and providing the user with quick access to the ability to attempt (or reattempt) to initiate communication (with an emergency service or another entity) via the terrestrial wireless communication network provides the user with improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform the operation.
In some embodiments, attempting to communicate via the terrestrial wireless communication network includes automatically (e.g., without user input) attempting to initiate the communication (e.g., a telephone call and/or a test message) via the terrestrial wireless communication network in response to receiving a request to initiate the communication (e.g., 1510A, 1510B, 1510C, 1510D, 1510E1, 1510E2, 1510E3, 1510I, 1510J, 1510K, 1510L, 1510M and/or 1510R), and displaying, by the external computer system (e.g., 1500B), a telephone user interface (e.g., 1505B or 1520B) after (or optionally while) attempting to communicate via the terrestrial wireless communication network and while providing a prompt (e.g., 1522A2 and/or 1534C 6) to connect to a non-terrestrial network using the external computer system. In some embodiments, the telephone user interface includes an indication that an attempt to communicate via the terrestrial wireless communication network is being made (e.g., by the computer system and/or by an external computer system). In some embodiments, the telephone user interface includes options for controlling telephone calls (e.g., ending telephone calls and/or attempting to initiate telephone calls), controlling speaker functions, controlling mute functions, displaying a keypad, and/or viewing and/or selecting options available to contact a user. Automatically attempting to initiate the communication via the terrestrial wireless communication network and displaying the telephone user interface enables the communication without requiring user input, which is beneficial in emergency situations where the user cannot provide user input to initiate the communication via the terrestrial wireless network, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform the operation.
In some embodiments, in response to receiving a request to initiate the communication (e.g., 1510A, 1510B, 1510C, 1510D, 1510E1, 1510E2, 1510E3, 1510I, 1510J, 1510K, 1510L, 1510M, and/or 1510R), and in accordance with a determination that an external computer system (e.g., 1500B) is not connected to the terrestrial wireless communication network, the computer system displays an option (e.g., 1534C 6) via the output generating component that, when selected (e.g., via a tap gesture on the option), initiates a process (e.g., on the computer system and/or the external computer system) for communicating (e.g., sending a short message, an instant message, a voice message, and/or an email) via a non-terrestrial network (e.g., using the computer system and/or the external computer system). In some embodiments, the prompt to connect to the non-terrestrial network using the external computer system includes an option to initiate a process for communicating via the non-terrestrial network when selected. Displaying an option to initiate a process for communicating via a non-terrestrial network in response to receiving a request to initiate a communication and in accordance with a determination that an external computer system is not connected to the terrestrial wireless communication network provides the user with an option to initiate a communication using a less data intensive method than a call or other form of communication, which may be beneficial in situations where the computer system is unable to communicate via other forms of communication, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation.
In some embodiments, the request to initiate the communication includes data indicating that the user of the computer system has fallen (e.g., as described with reference to fig. 15H). In some embodiments, in response to receiving a request to initiate the communication: the computer system automatically (e.g., without user input) attempts to communicate (e.g., via a terrestrial wireless communication network and/or a non-terrestrial wireless communication network) with a predetermined entity (e.g., 911, emergency services, and/or one or more predetermined reachable entities such as designated emergency contacts) (e.g., as described with reference to fig. 15H). In some embodiments, the computer system is in communication with one or more motion sensors (e.g., accelerometers and/or gyroscopes) configured to detect motion of the computer system. In some implementations, a determination is made that the user has fallen when the motion (e.g., detected speed and/or acceleration) of the computer system (or another device associated with the user) meets a set of motion criteria (e.g., meets or exceeds a threshold speed and/or acceleration). In some embodiments, the computer system communicates with one or more biometric sensors (e.g., heart rate sensors and/or blood oxygen monitors) that can be used to determine that the user has fallen. In some embodiments, in response to receiving a request to initiate the communication, and prior to automatically attempting the communication, the computer system displays a countdown (e.g., a digital countdown of the amount of time until the computer system will automatically attempt the communication). In some embodiments, the computer system displays a selectable option to cancel the countdown simultaneously with the countdown (e.g., if the option to cancel the countdown is selected before the countdown is over, the computer system does not automatically attempt communication). In some embodiments, the computer system displays the countdown, displays an option to cancel the countdown, and/or automatically attempts communication based on determining that the user of the computer system has fallen. Automatically attempting to communicate in response to detecting that the user has fallen provides the user with a means to communicate when the user is injured and/or unable to interact with the computer system (e.g., if the user is unable to initiate communication), which reduces the amount of input required to perform the operation.
In some embodiments, after automatically attempting to communicate with the predetermined entity: in accordance with a determination that the message was automatically sent via the non-terrestrial network (e.g., via one or more satellites), the computer system (e.g., 1500A, 1500B, and/or 1500C) displays an indication (e.g., 1524B1, 1526B3, and/or 1536C 2) (e.g., a summary user interface, notification, text, and/or graphics) that the message was automatically sent via the non-terrestrial network. In some embodiments, an indication that the message was automatically sent via the non-terrestrial network (e.g., in accordance with a determination that the message was automatically sent via the non-terrestrial network) is displayed on an external computer system. In some embodiments, displaying an indication that a message was automatically sent via a non-terrestrial network includes displaying a summary of information (e.g., location, medical information, and/or identification information) included in the message. Providing information to the user regarding the message in accordance with the determination that the message was automatically sent via the non-terrestrial network and displaying an indication that the message was automatically sent via the non-terrestrial network enables the user to take remedial action without requiring or desiring to attempt to communicate (e.g., attempt to call emergency services) and/or enables the user to provide additional information, which provides improved visual feedback to the user.
In some embodiments, upon (or optionally in response to) receiving a request to initiate the communication, the computer system displays a selectable sound option (e.g., 1536C 3) (e.g., a button, affordance, and/or graphical indication) via the output generation component that, when selected, causes the external computer system to output audio (e.g., as shown in fig. 15 AD). In some embodiments, the computer system displays the selectable sound options in accordance with a determination that the external computer system is not connected to the terrestrial wireless communication network. In some embodiments, the computer system displays the selectable sound options simultaneously with a prompt to connect to a non-terrestrial network using an external computer system. In some embodiments, the computer system displays a selectable sound option in response to detecting a selection of a prompt to connect to a non-terrestrial network using an external computer system. In some embodiments, the computer system displays the selectable sound options simultaneously with an option (e.g., a recall option) that, when selected, causes the computer system and/or external computer system to attempt (or reattempt) to call the predetermined entity via the terrestrial wireless communication network. Displaying selectable sound options provides the user with a technique to locate the external computer system that reduces the amount of time required for the user to locate the external computer system and provides additional control options without cluttering the user interface.
In some embodiments, after receiving the request to initiate the communication, the computer system attempts to communicate via a terrestrial wireless communication network; and after attempting (e.g., unsuccessful attempting) to communicate via the terrestrial wireless communication network, the computer system displays a selectable call option (e.g., 1522A3 and/or 1536C 4) (e.g., a button, affordance, and/or graphical indication) via the output generation component that, when selected, initiates an attempt (e.g., another attempt) to communicate via the terrestrial wireless communication network. In some embodiments, the selectable call option is displayed simultaneously with a prompt to connect to a non-terrestrial network using an external computer system. Displaying the selectable call option after attempting to communicate via the terrestrial wireless communication network provides the user with an efficient means to reattempt communication via the terrestrial wireless communication network (which may be a preferred communication method), which improves visual feedback to the user and reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation.
In some embodiments, providing a prompt to connect to a non-terrestrial network using an external computer system is performed in accordance with a determination that the request to initiate the communication includes a request to initiate a communication with a predefined entity (e.g., emergency services, or a reachable user for whom a user associated with the computer system has been designated as an emergency contact) (e.g., computer system 1500A displays prompt 1522A2 of fig. 15I for a call to 911). In some embodiments, in response to receiving a request to initiate the communication: in accordance with a determination that the external computer system is not connected to the terrestrial wireless communication network and the request to initiate the communication does not include a request to initiate communication with the predefined entity, the computer system foregoes providing a hint to connect to the non-terrestrial network using the external computer system (e.g., computer system 1500A does not display hint 1522A2 of the number called in fig. 15A) (e.g., the computer system provides a hint to connect to the non-terrestrial network using the external computer system only in response to the request to initiate communication with the predefined entity). Providing (or relinquishing) a reminder to connect to a non-terrestrial network using an external computer system based on whether the request to initiate the communication includes a request to initiate a communication with a predefined entity would provide the reminder when context is relevant and avoid distracting the user because of options that are typically less likely to be relevant, provide improved visual feedback, perform operations when a set of conditions has been met without further user input, and provide additional control options without cluttering the user interface. Discarding the provision of a hint to use the external computer system to connect to a non-terrestrial network when the request to initiate the communication does not include a request to initiate communication with a predefined entity (e.g., emergency services) reduces non-emergency use of bandwidth when bandwidth is limited, which increases the likelihood that sufficient bandwidth will be available for emergency communication.
In some embodiments, providing a hint (e.g., 1522A2 and/or 1534C 6) to connect to the non-terrestrial network using the external computer system is performed in accordance with determining that the external computer system (e.g., 1500B) is capable of connecting to (or optionally communicating via) the non-terrestrial network (e.g., the external computer system includes hardware and/or software that enables the external computer system to connect to and communicate via the non-terrestrial network). In some embodiments, in response to receiving a request to initiate the communication: in accordance with a determination that the external computer system is not connected to the terrestrial wireless communication network and the external computer system is capable of connecting to the non-terrestrial network (or optionally communicating via the non-terrestrial network), the computer system foregoes providing a prompt to connect to the non-terrestrial network using the external computer system (e.g., the computer system provides a prompt to connect to the non-terrestrial network using the external computer system only when the external computer system is capable of connecting to the non-terrestrial network and/or communicating via the non-terrestrial network). Providing (or relinquishing) a reminder to connect to a non-terrestrial network based on whether the external computer system is capable of connecting to the non-terrestrial network would provide the reminder when context relevant and avoid distracting the user because of options that are not available based on the capabilities of the external computer system, providing improved visual feedback, performing operations without further user input when a set of conditions has been met, and providing additional control options without cluttering the user interface.
It is noted that the details of the process described above with respect to method 1600 (e.g., fig. 16) also apply in a similar manner to the method described above. For example, methods 700, 800, 1000, 1200, 1400, 1800, 2000, and/or 2200 optionally include one or more of the features of the various methods described above with reference to method 1600. For example, methods 700, 800, 1000, 1200, and/or 1400 optionally include the techniques described in method 1600 for initiating communications. For example, method 1800 may initiate a communication from a messaging application in accordance with method 1600. For example, the initiating communication described in method 1600 may be simulated in an alternative communication network test mode in method 2000. For example, the initiating communication described in method 1600 may be a process corresponding to a user interface object in method 2200. For the sake of brevity, these details are not repeated hereinafter.
Fig. 17A-17R illustrate an exemplary user interface for initiating communications via an alternative communication network, according to some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the process in fig. 18. In some embodiments, initiating and/or completing communications via the alternative communications network includes performing one or more of the methods described with reference to fig. 7, 8, and/or 10 (e.g., methods 700, 800, and/or 1000).
In some embodiments, any of the selections, requests, and/or inputs described herein (e.g., 1750a-1750 z) are or include touch inputs (e.g., flick gestures and/or swipe gestures). In some embodiments, any of the selections, requests, and/or inputs described herein (e.g., 1750a-1750 z) are or include speech inputs (e.g., speech commands to select user interface elements or activate features or perform functions, such as features or functions associated with user interface elements). In some implementations, any of the selections, requests, and/or inputs described herein (e.g., 1750a-1750 z) are or include air gestures (e.g., air gestures to select user interface elements or activate features or perform functions such as features or functions associated with user interface elements). In some embodiments, any of the selections, requests, and/or inputs described herein (e.g., 1750a-1750 z) are or include activation (e.g., pressing, rotating, and/or moving) of hardware devices (e.g., buttons, rotatable input mechanisms, rotatable depressible input mechanisms, mouse buttons, buttons of a remote control, and/or a joystick). In some embodiments, any of the user interface elements described herein as being selected (e.g., icons, affordances, buttons, and/or selectable options) are selected by activating a hardware device when the user interface element is in focus (e.g., highlighted, bolded, outlined, visually distinguished from other user interface elements, and/or located at or near a cursor).
Fig. 17A-17R illustrate a computer system 600 described above with reference to, for example, fig. 6A. It is noted that fig. 17C-17F illustrate embodiments in which computer system 600 has cellular service, while fig. 17G-17R illustrate embodiments in which computer system 600 does not have cellular service, as indicated by cellular status indicator 1701.
In fig. 17A, the computer system displays a home screen 1700 that includes selectable application icons for launching corresponding applications, including messaging application icon 1700a. In response to detecting selection 1750a of messaging application icon 1700a, computer system 600 displays user interface 1702 of the messaging application, as shown in fig. 17B. The user interface 1702 includes a new message option 1702a and a list of messaging conversations (e.g., previous and/or existing messaging conversations) between a user associated with the computer system 600 and one or more other entities. The list of messaging conversations in the user interface 1702 includes conversation item 1702b corresponding to a message conversation with an emergency service, conversation item 1702c corresponding to a message conversation with 911 (e.g., an emergency number), and conversation item 1702d corresponding to a message conversation with a non-emergency service or number (e.g., a reachable user named Trevor).
In response to detecting selection 1750b of new message option 1702a, computer system 600 displays a new message interface 1704 for sending a new message, as shown in fig. 17C. The new message interface 1704 includes a recipient field 1704a, a message composition field 1704c for entering the contents (e.g., text, images, and/or icons) of the new message, a send option 1704d for sending a message including the contents entered into the message composition field 1704c, and a keyboard 1704e for selecting text for entry into the message composition field 1704 c. In FIG. 17C, the user has entered an emergency number (e.g., 911 or other local emergency number) into the recipient field 1704a (e.g., via inputs 1750x and 1750y on keys "9" and "1" in the keyboard 1704e, respectively). In some embodiments, as shown in fig. 17C, in response to entering the emergency number into the recipient field 1704a, the computer system 600 displays a recipient suggestion 1704b corresponding to the emergency service because the emergency number was entered into the recipient field 104 a. In some embodiments, in response to the emergency number being entered into the recipient field 1704a, the computer system 600 does not display the emergency service as a suggested recipient (e.g., recipient suggestion 1704 b).
In response to detecting a selection 1750g of the message composition field 1704C in FIG. 17C, the computer system 600 displays a message conversation with the emergency number, as shown in FIG. 17D. Message area 1706 includes previous messages between users associated with computer system 600 and 911, including message 1706b from the user associated with computer system 600 to the emergency number and message 1706c from the emergency number to the user associated with computer system 600. The time indicator 1706a indicates the time at which the message 1706b was sent. In the new message interface 1704, the user may use the keypad 1704 to generate a message in the message composition field 1704c and select the send option 1704d to send the message to the emergency number.
Turning to fig. 17E, computer system 600 displays a user interface 1708 (e.g., of a messaging application or an emergency messaging application) that includes a message conversation between an emergency service and a user associated with computer system 600. In some embodiments, the user interface 1708 is (or includes features of) a messaging interface 602T, a reporting interface 602U, a messaging interface 902K, a messaging interface 902L, a messaging interface 902M, a messaging interface 902N, and/or a reporting interface 1526B. In some embodiments, the computer system 600 displays the user interface 1708 in response to detecting a selection 1750f of the recipient suggestion 1704b in FIG. 17C that corresponds to an emergency service. In some embodiments, when computer system 600 has cellular service, computer system 600 displays user interface 1708 as shown in fig. 17E in response to detecting selection 1750c of dialogue item 1702B in fig. 17B that corresponds to emergency service.
In fig. 17E, the user interface 1708 includes a send sms to emergency number option 1710a and a call emergency number option 1710b. In response to detecting selection of call emergency number option 1710b, computer system 600 initiates a call to an emergency number (e.g., 911 or other emergency number). In response to detecting 1750h of the selection of the send short message to emergency number option 1710a, the computer system 600 initiates a process for sending a short message to an emergency number. For example, in some embodiments, in response to detecting a selection 1750h of the send text message to emergency number option 1710a, the computer system 600 initiates a new text message to the emergency number (e.g., displaying a new message interface 1704 as shown in fig. 17D, with the recipient field pre-populated with the emergency number, and optionally displaying a previous message conversation 1706 with 911). In some embodiments, when computer system 600 has cellular services, user interface 1708 includes message composition field 1708b, send option 1708c, and optional keyboard 1706d (e.g., as shown in FIG. 17I).
In some embodiments, as shown in fig. 17F, in response to detecting selection 1710h of the send short message to emergency number option 1750a, the computer system 600 displays a user interface 1712 of the messaging application having a message area 1712a, a message composition field 1712b, a send message option 1712c, and a keyboard 1712d. Message area 1712a includes messages 1706b from users associated with computer system 600 to 911 and messages 1706c from 911 to users associated with computer system 600 (e.g., the same messages as in message area 1706). In the user interface 1712, the user can use the keypad 1712d to generate a message in the message composition field 1712b and select the send option 1712b to send the message to 911. In some implementations, the computer system 600 displays the user interface 1712 in response to detecting the selection 1750d of the conversation item 1702c in fig. 17B.
Fig. 17G shows an embodiment in which computer system 600 does not have cellular services, as indicated by cellular status indicator 1701. In some embodiments, as shown in fig. 17G, when the computer system 600 does not have a cellular connection, the computer system 600 displays a recipient suggestion 1704b and a call emergency number option 1704f corresponding to an emergency service (e.g., because an emergency number is entered into the recipient field 1704a and the computer system 600 does not have a cellular connection) in response to entering the emergency number (e.g., 911) into the recipient field 1704a of the new message interface 1704 (e.g., via inputs 1750x and 1750y on keys "9" and "1", respectively, in the keyboard 1704 e). The call emergency number option 1704f indicates that the computer system 600 is attempting to connect to a cellular network (e.g., "looking for service …"). In some implementations, in response to detecting a selection of the call emergency number option 1704f, the computer system 600 attempts to initiate a call to the emergency number (e.g., as shown in fig. 6E).
In FIG. 17G, computer system 600 detects a selection 1750r of message write field 1704 c. As shown in fig. 17H, in response to detecting selection 1750r of message writing field 1704c, computer system 600 displays message area 1706 including time indicator 1706a, message 1706b from the user associated with computer system 600 to the emergency number, and message 1706c from the emergency number to the user associated with computer system 600 (e.g., as described in fig. 17D). Because computer system 600 does not have cellular service (e.g., for standard communication and/or emergency communication purposes) in fig. 17H, computer system 600 displays via satellite connection option 1706d (e.g., in message area 1706). In some embodiments, when the message area 1706 is initially displayed (e.g., in response to detecting selection 1750r of the message writing field 1704c in fig. 17G), the computer system 600 displays the via satellite connection option 1706d. In some embodiments, when the computer system 600 does not have cellular service, the computer system 600 displays the via satellite connection option 1706d when the user attempts to send a message to the emergency number (e.g., in response to detecting a selection of content to be included in the message composition field 1704c (such as an input 1750u on the keyboard 1704 e) and/or a selection 1750t of the send option 1704 d).
In some embodiments, as shown in fig. 17I, in response to detecting selection 1750j of via satellite connection option 1706d, computer system 600 displays a user interface 1708 for sending a message to an emergency service via a satellite communications network. The user interface 1708 includes a messaging conversation between emergency services and users associated with the computer system 600. In some embodiments, the user interface 1708 is (or includes features of) a messaging interface 602T, a reporting interface 602U, a messaging interface 902K, a messaging interface 902L, a messaging interface 902M, a messaging interface 902N, and/or a reporting interface 1526B. In some embodiments, because computer system 600 does not have cellular services, user interface 1708 includes message composition field 1708b, send option 1708c, and keyboard 1706d (e.g., instead of sending a short message to emergency number option 1710a and/or calling emergency number option 1710b, as described above with reference to fig. 17E). In the user interface 1708 shown in fig. 17I, the user may use the keypad 1708d to generate a message in the message composition field 1708b and select the send option 1708c to send the message to the emergency service. In some embodiments, when computer system 600 does not have cellular service, computer system 600 displays user interface 1708 as shown in fig. 17I in response to detecting selection 1750c of dialogue item 1702B in fig. 17B that corresponds to emergency service.
Turning to fig. 17J, the computer system 600 displays a user interface 1712 of a messaging application (e.g., described above with reference to fig. 17F). In some embodiments, when the computer system 600 does not have cellular service, the computer system 600 displays a user interface 1712 as shown in fig. 17J in response to detecting 1750d the selection of the conversation item 1702c in fig. 17B.
In fig. 17J, because the computer system 600 does not have cellular service (e.g., as opposed to fig. 17F), the user interface 1712 (e.g., in the message area 1712) includes the via satellite connection option 1706d. In some embodiments, when user interface 1712 is initially displayed, computer system 600 displays via satellite connection option 1706d (e.g., in response to detecting selection 1750d of dialogue item 1702c in fig. 17B when computer system 600 does not have cellular service). In some embodiments, when the computer system 600 does not have cellular service, the computer system 600 displays the via satellite connection option 1706d when the user attempts to send a message to the emergency number (e.g., in response to detecting a selection of content to be included in the message composition field 1712b (such as input 1750v on the keyboard 1712 d) and/or a selection 1750s of the send option 1712 c).
In some embodiments, in response to detecting a selection 1750k of the via satellite connection option 1706d, the computer system 600 displays a user interface 1708 for sending a message to an emergency service, as shown and described with reference to fig. 17I.
In some embodiments, in response to detecting a selection via satellite connection option 1706d (e.g., selection 1750J in fig. 17H or selection 1750k in fig. 17J), computer system 600 initiates a process for generating communications to be sent to emergency services and/or connecting computer system 600 to an alternative communications network, such as a non-terrestrial wireless communications network (e.g., a satellite communications network). For example, in response to detecting a selection of the via satellite connection option 1706d, the computer system 600 performs the process described in fig. 6M-6Y, the method 800, the process described in fig. 9C-9U, and/or the method 1000. In some embodiments, when computer system 600 does not have cellular service, computer system 600 performs the processes described in fig. 6M-6Y, method 800, the processes described in fig. 9C-9U, and/or method 1000 in response to detecting selection 1750d of conversation item 1702C in fig. 17B. In some embodiments, when computer system 600 does not have cellular service, computer system 600 performs the processes described in fig. 6M-6Y, method 800, and the processes described in fig. 9C-9U and/or method 1000 in response to detecting an attempt to send a message to an emergency number (e.g., selection 1750t of send option 1704d in fig. 17H and/or selection 1750s of send option 1712C in fig. 17J).
In some embodiments, in response to detecting selection 1750K of via satellite connection option 1706d in fig. 17J, computer system 600 displays report interface 1714 for generating a communication to be sent via the alternative communication network, as shown in fig. 17K. In some implementations, the computer system displays the report interface 1714 in response to selection 1750j in fig. 17H of the via satellite connection option 1706 d. In some embodiments, when computer system 600 does not have cellular service, the computer system displays report interface 1714 in response to detecting selection 1750d of dialogue item 1702c in fig. 17B. In some embodiments, when computer system 600 does not have cellular service, the computer system displays reporting interface 1714 in response to detecting an attempt to send a message to an emergency number (e.g., selection 1750t of send option 1704d in fig. 17H and/or selection 1750s of send option 1712c in fig. 17J).
In some embodiments, reporting interface 1714 is (or includes features of) reporting interface 602M (e.g., as described with reference to fig. 6M). In fig. 17K, reporting interface 1714 includes an interface for receiving a selection of an emergency type option via selection of an option from a set of options 1714 a. The set of options 1714a includes selectable options for various types of emergency situations (e.g., vehicle problems, illness/injury, crimes, lost or trapped, and fire). In response to receiving a selection of an emergency type (e.g., an option in the set of options 1714 a), the emergency type is included in a communication to be sent to the emergency service. For example, the set of options 1714a includes the lost or trapped option 1714a1.
In response to detecting a selection 1750L of the lost or trapped option 1714a1, the computer system 600 displays a report interface 1716, as shown in FIG. 17L. Reporting interface 1716 includes a set of options 1716a for providing additional information regarding the type of emergency situation selected. For example, as shown in fig. 17L, the set of options 1716a includes an option for selecting who needs help.
In response to detecting the selection 1750M of the multiple person option 1716a1, the computer system 600 displays a summary 1718a of the content selected for the communication to be sent to the emergency service, as shown in the summary interface 1718 in fig. 17M. In some embodiments, the computer system 600 displays one or more additional sets of options for content to be included in the communication before displaying the summary interface 1718. In some embodiments, the summary interface 1718 is (or is similar to or includes features of) the summary interface 602R and/or the summary interface 602S.
In response to detecting selection 1750n of send report option 1718b or expiration of timer 1718c in FIG. 17M, computer system 600 initiates a process for sending the communication summarized in summary interface 1718. In some embodiments, if the computer system 600 is connected to an alternative communication network, the computer system 600 begins sending the communication (e.g., displaying the user interface 1722 described with reference to fig. 17P) in response to detecting the selection 1750n of the send report option 1718b or expiration of the timer 1718c in fig. 17M.
In some embodiments, as shown in fig. 17N, if the computer system 600 is not aligned with and/or connected to an alternative communication network, the computer system 600 initiates a process for aligning the computer system 600 with and/or connecting the computer system 600 with the alternative communication network. In some embodiments, the process for aligning computer system 600 with an alternative communications network and/or connecting computer system 600 with an alternative communications network is the process and/or method 1000 described in fig. 9C-9Q (or includes features thereof).
For example, in some embodiments, if computer system 600 is not aligned with an alternative communications network, computer system 600 displays alignment interface 1720, as shown in FIG. 17N. For example, if the computer system 600 is not aligned with an alternative communication network, the computer system 600 displays an alignment interface 1720 as shown in FIG. 17N in response to detecting the selection 1750N of the send report option 1718b or expiration of the timer 1718c in FIG. 17M.
In some embodiments, alignment interface 1720 is an alignment interface 902C, an alignment interface 902D, an alignment interface 902E, an alignment interface 902F, an alignment interface 902G, an alignment interface 902H, an alignment interface 902I, an alignment interface 902J, an alignment interface 902O1, and/or an alignment interface 902P (or including features thereof), depending on the alignment and/or connection between computer system 600 and the alternative communication network, any obstructions between computer system 600 and the alternative communication network, and/or availability of the alternative communication network (e.g., the location of one or more satellites and/or whether satellites are within range). For example, in some embodiments, alignment interface 1720 includes alignment element 909 as described with reference to fig. 9C-9J and 9O-9P.
In fig. 17N, alignment interface 1720 includes an alignment element 1720a, a connection status indicator 1720b, and connection information 1720c. Alignment element 1720a provides a graphical representation of the alignment and/or connection status between computer system 600 and the alternative communication network. In some embodiments, alignment element 1720a is (or includes a feature of) graphic element 931. Connection status indicator 1720b provides a textual indication of the status of the connection between computer system 600 and the alternative communication network (e.g., looking for a signal, connected, unconnected, poorly connected, satellites out of range, and/or satellites moving out of range). Connection information 1720c includes additional information regarding the connection status and/or instructions for connecting (or maintaining a connection) to an alternative communication network. In some embodiments, connection status indicator 1720b and/or connection information 1720C is (or includes) text element 908C, text element 908D, text element 908E, text element 908F, text element 908G, text element 908H, text element 908I, text element 908J, text element 908O1, and/or text element 908P as described with reference to fig. 9C-9J and 9O-9P, depending on the alignment and/or connection between computer system 600 and the alternative communication network, any obstructions between computer system 600 and the alternative communication network, and/or the availability of the alternative communication network (e.g., the location of one or more satellites and/or whether the satellites are within range).
In fig. 17N, as indicated by connection status indicator 1720b, computer system 600 is looking for a signal (e.g., computer system 600 has just begun attempting a connection, there is an obstruction between computer system 600 and a satellite, and/or no satellite is in range). Thus, alignment element 1720a displays neither a connection nor an indication of an action to be taken by the user, and connection information 1720c provides general guidance for tracking satellites to send and receive messages.
Turning to fig. 17O, computer system 600 is connected to an alternative communication network and alignment interface 1720 (including alignment element 1720a and connection status indicator 1720 b) has been updated accordingly. For example, in fig. 17O, computer system 600 is in the same connected state as in fig. 9J, and alignment interface 1720 is similar to alignment interface 902J described with reference to fig. 9J, including the display of open message option 1720 d.
In response to detecting selection 1750o (or expiration of a time threshold) of open message option 1720d, computer system 600 displays messaging interface 1722 as shown in fig. 17P. Messaging interface 1722 is, for example, messaging interface 902K (or includes features thereof). For example, messaging interface 1722 includes a banner 1724 (e.g., banner 926), a message area 1722a, a message composition field 1722b (e.g., text box 912K), a send option 1722c (e.g., send affordance 916K), and a message 1722d. In response to selection 1750p of message writing field 1722b, computer system 600 displays a keyboard. The user may send a message to the emergency service via messaging interface 1722 by entering the content into message composition field 1722b and selecting send option 1722 c.
In some embodiments, computer system 600 performs a process (e.g., the process described in fig. 17N-17P, the process described in fig. 9C-9U, and/or method 1000) for aligning computer system 600 with an alternative communication network and/or connecting computer system 600 with an alternative communication network prior to a process (e.g., the process described in fig. 17K-17M, the process described in fig. 6M-6Y, and/or method 800) of generating and/or initiating the transmission of the communication. For example, in some embodiments, computer system 600 displays alignment interface 1720 in response to detecting selection 1750k of via satellite connection option 1706d in fig. 17J, in response to selecting 1750J of via satellite connection option 1706d in fig. 17H, in response to detecting selection 1750d of conversation item 1702c in fig. 17B when computer system 600 does not have cellular service, and/or in response to detecting an attempt to send a message to an emergency number when computer system 600 does not have cellular service (e.g., selection 1750t of send option 1704d in fig. 17H and/or selection 1750s of send option 1712c in fig. 17J).
Turning to FIG. 17Q, the computer system 600 displays the new message interface 1704 described with reference to FIGS. 17C-17D and 17G-17H. In FIG. 17Q, the text "TREVOR" has been entered into the recipient field 1704a (e.g., via input 1750z on the keyboard 1704 e). In response to entering "TREVOR" into the recipient field 1704a, the computer system 600 displays a recipient suggestion 1704g corresponding to the reachable user named Trevor, the recipient being a non-urgent service or number. Notably, unlike the new message interface 1704 in FIGS. 17C and 17G, since the recipient entered into the recipient field 1704a is not an emergency number, the computer system 600 does not display an option to contact emergency services (e.g., does not display a recipient suggestion 1704b or call emergency number option 1704f corresponding to emergency services) even though the computer system 600 does not have cellular services (e.g., as indicated by the cellular status indicator 1701).
In some embodiments, in response to detecting a selection 1750q of the recipient suggestion 1704g (or in response to detecting a selection 1750e of the conversation item 1702d in FIG. 17B), the computer system 600 displays a messaging interface 1726 of a message conversation in a messaging application between a user associated with the computer system 600 and the reachable user Trevor, as shown in FIG. 17R. Messaging interface 1726 includes message area 1726a, message composition field 1726b, send option 1726c, and keyboard 1726d. Message area 1726a includes message 1726e from the user associated with computer system 600 to reachable user Trevor and message 1726f from reachable user Trevor to the user associated with computer system 600. Notably, unlike the new message interface 1704 in fig. 17H and the user interface 1712 in fig. 17J, because the message conversation is not with an emergency number, the message interface 1726 does not include an option to connect and/or send messages via an alternative communications network (e.g., the message interface 1726 does not include the option 1706d via a satellite connection), even though the computer system 600 does not have cellular service (e.g., as indicated by the cellular status indicator 1701).
Fig. 18 is a flow chart illustrating a method for initiating communications via an alternative communications network using a computer system, in accordance with some embodiments. The method 1800 is performed at a computer system (e.g., 100, 300, 500, 600, 900, 1100, 1300A, 1300B, 1500A, 1500B, 1500C, smart phone, smartwatch, laptop, desktop computer, and/or tablet computer) in communication with an output generating component (e.g., a display generating component, a display controller, a display device, a monitor, a touch-sensitive display system, one or more speakers, and/or one or more tactile output generators) and one or more input devices (e.g., 601, 901, 1106, 1302A, 1302B, 1502A, 1502B, 1502C, touch-sensitive surface, touch screen, button, keyboard, mouse, camera, rotatable input mechanism, and/or microphone). Some operations in method 1800 may optionally be combined, the order of some operations may optionally be changed, and some operations may optionally be omitted.
As described below, method 1800 provides an intuitive way for initiating communications via an alternative communications network. The method reduces the cognitive burden of a user to initiate communication via the alternative communication network, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-powered computing devices, enabling users to initiate communication sessions via alternative communication networks faster and more efficiently saves power and increases the time interval between battery charges.
The computer system detects (1802), via one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs (e.g., 1750b, 1750d, 1750G, 1750x, 1750y, input of "911" in 1704a, selection 1750r of 1704c in fig. 17G, contact and/or touch gestures on a touch sensitive surface, air gestures, mouse clicks, key presses, button presses, and/or voice commands), including selection of a corresponding number (or, in some embodiments, a corresponding recipient) for text-based communications (e.g., SMS, MMS, instant messaging, IP-based messaging, or other text-based messaging communications). In some implementations, the respective numbers are associated with and/or correspond to a reachable entity (e.g., a person, user, business, and/or service). In some implementations, selection of the respective number includes entry of the respective number (e.g., via a keyboard) or selection of a contactable entity associated with the respective number from a menu or list (e.g., a contact list and/or a search result list). In some embodiments, the selection of the respective number for the text-based communication includes selecting the respective number as an intended recipient of the text-based communication. In some embodiments, the computer system detects the set of one or more inputs in a user interface of a messaging application (e.g., a text messaging application and/or an instant messaging application; the set of one or more inputs corresponds to a selection of an intended recipient of a new sms message, a search request for a corresponding number in the messaging application, and/or a selection of an existing or previous sms conversation including the corresponding number) (e.g., while the user interface is displayed). In some embodiments, the short message dialogs including the corresponding numbers are included in a list of existing and/or previous short messages and/or short message dialogs.
Responsive to (1804) detecting the set of one or more inputs including a selection of a respective number (or, in some embodiments, a respective recipient) for the text-based communication: determining (1806) that a set of alternative communication criteria is satisfied, wherein the set of alternative communication criteria includes a first criterion that is satisfied when the respective number (or in some embodiments, the respective recipient) is a respective type of number (or in some embodiments, the respective type of recipient), and a second criterion that is satisfied when the respective communication network (or in some embodiments, the respective communication service, the respective communication protocol, the respective type of communication network, the respective type of communication service, or the respective type of communication protocol) is unavailable (e.g., when a terrestrial communication network such as a cellular communication network or a Wi-Fi network is unavailable; when no terrestrial communication network is available): the computer system outputs (1808), via the output generation component, a prompt (e.g., 1704b and/or 1706 d) including an indication (e.g., visual appearance, text, font, highlighting, animation, color, graphics, sound, and/or tactile output) that communication with the respective number (or, in some embodiments, the respective recipient or emergency service) may be performed (e.g., using a computer system) via an alternative communication network (or, in some embodiments, an alternative communication service, an alternative communication protocol, an alternative type of communication network, an alternative type of communication service, or an alternative type of communication protocol) that is different from the respective communication network. Outputting a prompt including an indication that communication with the respective number is performable via the alternative communication network in accordance with a determination that a set of alternative communication standards is satisfied informs the user that communication with the respective number is viable (even if the respective communication network is not available) and may provide a quick and efficient means for communicating via the alternative communication network, which provides improved feedback to the user, reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation, provides additional control options without cluttering the user interface with additional display controls, and performs the operation without further user input when a set of conditions has been satisfied. Providing quick and efficient access to the corresponding numbers enables the computer system to be controlled more quickly and efficiently, which is particularly important in emergency situations, as users may be stressed and more prone to error.
In some embodiments, the respective type of number is a number associated with the emergency service, a number designated as an emergency number, and/or a number associated with an emergency contact (e.g., a reachable entity designated as an emergency contact). Examples of numbers associated with emergency services include 911 in the united states, 999 in the united kingdom, 112 in europe, 110 and/or 119 in japan, and 000 in australia. In some embodiments, the respective communication network is a terrestrial communication network, a wireless terrestrial communication network, a cellular communication network, and/or a Wi-Fi network. In some embodiments, the second criterion is satisfied only if no terrestrial communication network is available, including a cellular communication network of a service provider not associated with the computer system. In some embodiments, the set of alternative communication standards is not satisfied if the first standard is not satisfied and/or the second standard is not satisfied (e.g., the first standard and the second standard are necessary to satisfy the set of alternative communication standards). In some embodiments, a communication network is unavailable if the strength and/or consistency of the signals and/or connections of the communication network is insufficient (e.g., a set of signal criteria is not met) to cause a computer system to communicate via the communication network (e.g., make a telephone call and/or send a short message via the communication network). In some embodiments, if the computer system is not authorized to use or join a communication network (e.g., wi-Fi network) (e.g., the computer system is not provided with the required authentication and/or password), the communication network is not available. In some embodiments, outputting the alert includes displaying the alert, outputting audio, and/or generating a haptic output. In some embodiments, the prompt includes (or is) a graphical user interface object, icon, graphic, animation, selectable graphical user interface object, affordance, button, text, sound, tactile output, pop-up menu, and/or selectable options (such as those in a list of selectable options for a method of communicating with a corresponding number). Examples of methods for communicating with the respective numbers include, but are not limited to, telephone calls, short messages (e.g., via a terrestrial communication network such as a cellular communication network or Wi-Fi network, or a non-terrestrial communication network such as a satellite communication network), video calls, and emails. In some embodiments, the alternative communication network is a non-terrestrial communication network (e.g., a satellite communication network). In some embodiments, the alternative communication network has a communication bandwidth (e.g., data rate) that is lower than a communication bandwidth of the corresponding communication network.
In some embodiments, in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs including a selection of a respective number for text-based communication: in response to determining that the corresponding number is not a corresponding type of number (e.g., the corresponding number is not a number associated with an emergency service; and/or the set of alternative target criteria is not satisfied), the computer system discards the output of the prompt (e.g., neither 1704b nor 1706d are displayed in FIG. 17P or 17Q). Discarding the output of the prompt in accordance with a determination that the corresponding number is not a corresponding type of number enables the computer system to provide the prompt only for a particular type of number (e.g., an emergency number) and avoids cluttering the user interface with options when no options are needed, which provides improved feedback to the user, provides additional control options without cluttering the user interface with additional display controls, and performs the operation when a set of conditions has been met without further user input.
In some implementations, the respective communication network is a terrestrial wireless communication network (e.g., a cellular network and/or a Wi-Fi network). In some embodiments, the second criterion is met when the terrestrial wireless communication network is not available (e.g., when no terrestrial wireless communication network is available; and/or the computer system lacks connectivity with the terrestrial wireless communication network). Providing the prompt (and other criteria) when the terrestrial wireless communication network is not available enables the computer system to provide the prompt only when a preferred (e.g., higher speed, higher bandwidth, and/or lower power) communication network is not available and avoids cluttering the user interface with the prompt when the prompt is not needed, provides improved visual feedback to the user, and provides additional control options without cluttering the user interface with additional display controls.
In some embodiments, after outputting the prompt, the computer system detects a set of one or more inputs (e.g., 1750i, 1750J, 1750k, selection 1750r of 1704c in fig. 17G, and/or selection 1750s of 1712c in fig. 17J) that include a request to communicate with (e.g., send a message to) a corresponding entity (e.g., a corresponding number and/or emergency service) via the alternative communication network; and in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs comprising a request to communicate with a respective entity via the alternative communication network, the computer system displays a set of selectable communication content options (e.g., 1714a, 1716a, 604M, 604N, 604O, 604P, and/or 604Q as shown in fig. 6M-6Q) corresponding to the respective content (e.g., 1722 d) for communication. In some embodiments, the set of selectable communication content options is specific to a mode for communicating via the alternative communication network (e.g., a low bandwidth communication mode). In some embodiments, the computer system performs the operations described in fig. 6M-6W and/or method 800 in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs comprising a request to communicate with a respective entity via the alternative communication network. Displaying a set of selectable communication content options corresponding to respective content for communication in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs including a request to communicate with the respective entity via the alternative communication network provides an option that is optimal (e.g., requires limited bandwidth) for communication via the alternative communication network, reduces the number of inputs required to generate the message (e.g., without using a keyboard), and directs the user through a process for communication via the alternative communication network, which provides improved visual feedback to the user, reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation, provides additional control options, and does not clutter the user interface with additional display controls.
In some embodiments, after outputting the prompt, the computer system detects a set of one or more inputs (e.g., 1750i, 1750J, 1750k, 1750n, selection 1750r of 1704c in fig. 17G, and/or selection 1750s of 1712c in fig. 17J) that include a request to communicate with (e.g., send a message to) a respective entity (e.g., a respective number and/or emergency service) via an alternative communication network; and in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs comprising a request to communicate with a respective entity via the alternative communication network, the computer system initiates a process for connecting to the alternative communication network (or in some embodiments, remains connected to the alternative communication network if the computer system has already been connected to the alternative communication network), wherein the process for connecting to the alternative communication network comprises displaying a prompt (e.g., 1720a, 1720C, 1724, notification, banner, text, graphical element, audio, and/or instruction; and/or 908C, 908D, 908E, 908F, 908G, 908H, 908I, 908J, 908O1, 908P, 926, and/or 931) that causes a user to take action to connect to (or in some embodiments, keep the computer system connected to) the alternative communication network. In some embodiments, the process for connecting to an alternative communication network includes the user interfaces and/or features described in fig. 9C-9Q and method 1000. In some embodiments, the prompt to cause the user to take an action to connect to the alternative communication network includes instructions to move and/or position at least a portion of the computer system in a particular direction or location (e.g., turn left, point up, and/or move out). In some embodiments, the computer system displays a prompt for the user to take action to connect to the alternative communication network in accordance with a determination that the computer system is not connected to the alternative communication network (e.g., not properly aligned to communicate with one or more satellites of the alternative communication network). In some embodiments, the process for connecting to the alternative communication network includes displaying an indication of a status of a connection (e.g., unconnected, poorly connected, attempting to connect, in-connection, and/or connected) between the computing system and the alternative communication network. Initiating a process for connecting to an alternative communication network in response to detecting a request to communicate with a corresponding entity via the alternative communication network provides a user with a fast and efficient method of communicating via the alternative communication network, which reduces the number of inputs required to perform an operation and provides additional control options without cluttering the user interface. Displaying cues that cause a user to take action to connect to an alternative communication network (e.g., providing a connection assistant) allows the user to quickly and efficiently solve problems (e.g., misalignment and/or obstruction) that prevent a computer system from connecting to an alternative communication network with less input, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform an operation.
In some embodiments, after outputting the prompt, the computer system detects a set of one or more inputs (e.g., 1750l, 1750m, and/or 1750 n) including a request (or in some embodiments, a command) to send a message (e.g., a short message) via the alternative communication network; and in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs comprising a request to send the message via the alternative communication network, the computer system sends the message via the alternative communication network. In some embodiments, the set of one or more inputs that includes a request to send a message via the alternative communication network includes a selection of an option to generate the message, a selection of message content (e.g., via a keyboard and/or a selection of predefined content options), and/or a selection of an option to send the generated message. Sending the message via the alternative communication network enables the user to send the message even if the primary communication network is not available, which provides additional control options without cluttering the user interface with additional display controls.
In some embodiments, in accordance with (or in some embodiments in response to) determining that the respective communication network is unavailable, the computer system displays an indication of the communication capabilities of the computer system (e.g., 1701, graphical indication, icon, color, font, text, animation, symbol, thumbnail, image, and/or pictorial representation in fig. 17G-17Q) via the display generation component (e.g., an indication of the capability of the computer system to communicate with the respective number or entity (such as an emergency number or emergency service); and in accordance with a determination that the corresponding communication network is available, the computer system relinquishes the indication of the status of the communication capabilities of the computer system (e.g., 1701 in fig. 17A-17F does not include an "SOS"). In some embodiments, an indication of the communication capabilities of the computer system is displayed in a portion of a user interface that includes one or more indicators of the status of the computer system (e.g., cellular status, wi-Fi status, time, short-range communication status, and/or battery power). In some embodiments, an indication of the communication capabilities of the computer system is displayed at a location of the display and/or user interface where a cellular status indicator is displayed when cellular service is available. Automatically providing relevant information regarding the communication capabilities of the computer system to the user when the information is needed (e.g., when the respective communication network is not available) based on an indication of whether the respective communication network is available to display (or forgo displaying) the communication capabilities of the computer system and preventing cluttering the user interface when the respective communication network is available provides improved visual feedback to the user and performs the operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input.
In some embodiments, displaying an indication of the communication capabilities of the computer system includes displaying an indication (e.g., 607 c) of the capabilities of the computer system to communicate via the satellite communication network (e.g., an indication of satellite connectivity and/or an image, pictorial or other graphical representation of the satellite). In some embodiments, if (e.g., only when) the Wi-Fi capabilities of the computer system are disabled (e.g., wi-Fi is turned off), the computer system displays an indication of the capability of the computer system to communicate via the satellite communications network, and if the Wi-Fi capabilities of the computer system are enabled (e.g., wi-Fi is turned on), the computer system foregoes displaying an indication of the capability of the computer system to communicate via the satellite communications network. Displaying an indication of the ability of the computer system to communicate via the satellite communication network provides the user with clear feedback that communication via the satellite is possible even if the corresponding communication network is not available, and the user does not have to navigate the user interface to determine the communication ability of the computer system, which provides the user with improved visual feedback and reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation. Feedback regarding the communication capabilities of the computer system enables the computer system to be controlled more quickly and efficiently, which is particularly important in situations where the user is responding to emergency or stress situations.
In some embodiments, displaying an indication of the communication capabilities of the computer system comprises: in accordance with a determination that the computer system is displaying a first type of user interface (e.g., 602Y, a user interface having a full or extended area for displaying status icons, and/or a control center user interface including selectable controls for setting operational parameters and/or activating functions of the computer system), an indication of the ability of the computer system to communicate via a satellite communications network (e.g., 607 c) (e.g., an indication of satellite connectivity and/or an image, glyph, or other graphical representation of a satellite) is displayed; and in accordance with a determination that the computer system is displaying a second type of user interface (e.g., 602J, a user interface having a reduced size or compact area for displaying status icons), forgoing displaying an indication of the computer system's ability to communicate via the satellite communications network. Displaying an indication of the ability of a computer system to communicate via a satellite communications network based on the type of user interface displayed by the computer system provides a clear feedback to a user that communication is possible via the satellite even if the corresponding communications network is not available when there is sufficient space on the user interface, and the user does not have to navigate the user interface to determine the communication ability of the computer system, while discarding displaying the indication when there is less space on the user interface, which provides improved visual feedback to the user, reduces clutter on the user interface, and reduces the number of inputs required to perform an operation. Feedback regarding the communication capabilities of the computer system enables the computer system to be controlled more quickly and efficiently, which is particularly important in situations where the user is responding to emergency or stress situations.
In some embodiments, the corresponding type of number is an emergency number (e.g., 911 in the united states, 999 in the united kingdom, 112 in europe, 110 and/or 119 in japan, or 000 in australia), and: in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs (e.g., 1750b, 1750d, 1750G, 1750x, 1750y, input of "911" in 1704a, selection 1750r of 1704c in fig. 17G) comprising a selection of a corresponding number for text-based communication, the computer system displays an option (e.g., 1704b and/or 1706 d) (the option being a selectable option, icon, button, affordance, and/or user-interactive graphical user interface object) for initiating a process for communicating with emergency services. In some embodiments, in response to sending a message to the emergency number or a request to search for the emergency number (e.g., starting a new conversation or continuing a previous conversation), the computer system initiates a process for communicating with the emergency service or displays an option to initiate a process for communicating with the emergency service. In some embodiments, if the user selects 911 as the recipient of the SMS when the corresponding communication network is not available, the computer system displays an option to initiate a process for sending a message to the emergency service. In some embodiments, in response to detecting selection of an option to initiate a process for sending a message to an emergency service, the computer system displays a set of user interfaces for generating and/or sending a message to the emergency service (e.g., as shown in fig. 6M-6S) and/or for aligning and/or connecting the computer system with an alternative communication network (e.g., as shown in fig. 9C-9P). In some embodiments, in response to detecting selection of an option to initiate a process for sending a message to an emergency service, the computer system displays a messaging interface (e.g., of a messaging application) for sending the message to the emergency service. In some embodiments, if the user selects 911 as the recipient of the sms message when the corresponding communication network is not available, the computer system automatically (e.g., does not display an option to initiate a process for sending a message to the emergency service) displays: a set of user interfaces for generating and/or sending messages to emergency services (e.g., as shown in fig. 6M-6S); a set of user interfaces for aligning and/or connecting the computer system with an alternative communications network (e.g., as shown in fig. 9C-9P); and/or a messaging interface (e.g., of a messaging application) for sending messages to emergency services. Displaying the option to initiate the process for communicating with the emergency service in accordance with determining that the set of alternative communication criteria is met provides feedback to the user regarding being able to communicate in the emergency situation and provides the user with a quick and efficient way of communicating in the emergency situation without cluttering the user interface in a non-emergency environment, which provides the user with improved visual feedback, provides additional control options without cluttering the user interface with additional display controls, and performs the operation without further user input when a set of conditions has been met. Feedback regarding the communication capabilities of the computer system enables the computer system to be controlled more quickly and efficiently, which is particularly important in situations where the user is responding to emergency or stress situations.
In some embodiments, in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs comprising selection of a respective number for text-based communication: in accordance with a determination that the respective communication network is available, the computer system displays options (e.g., 1704b, 1710a, 1710b, selectable options, icons, buttons, affordances, and/or user-interactive graphical user interface objects in fig. 17C) for initiating a process for communicating with the emergency service via the respective communication network (e.g., a process for calling and/or sending a short message to the emergency service). Displaying the option to initiate the process for communicating with the emergency service via the respective communication network in accordance with the determination that the respective communication network is available provides feedback to the user regarding being able to communicate in the emergency situation and enables the user to communicate with the emergency service more quickly and easily, which provides the user with improved visual feedback, reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation, provides additional control options without cluttering the user interface with additional display controls, and performs the operation without further user input when a set of conditions has been met. Feedback regarding the communication capabilities of the computer system enables the computer system to be controlled more quickly and efficiently, which is particularly important in situations where the user is responding to emergency or stress situations.
In some embodiments, the computer system detects a set of one or more inputs (e.g., 1750d and/or 1750 r) including a request to display a message conversation with a respective number (e.g., a user interface of a messaging application that includes a message conversation between a user associated with the computer system and the respective number, wherein the message conversation includes one or more messages between the user associated with the computer system and the respective number); in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs including a request to display a message conversation with a corresponding number, the computer system displays a message conversation with the corresponding number (e.g., 1706 in fig. 17H and/or 1712a in fig. 17I); and while displaying a message conversation with the corresponding number: in accordance with a determination that a set of message communication criteria (e.g., the set of alternative communication criteria) is satisfied, wherein the set of message communication criteria includes criteria that are satisfied when a corresponding communication network is not available (or in some embodiments, when a terrestrial communication network is not available), the computer system displays options (e.g., 1706d, selectable options, icons, buttons, affordances, and/or user-interactive graphical user interface objects) for connecting to the alternative communication network (and/or in some embodiments, initiates an option for connecting to the alternative communication network). Displaying an option to connect to an alternative communication network upon displaying a message conversation with a corresponding number and in accordance with a determination that a set of message communication criteria is met provides a user with a quick and efficient means of enabling communication in an emergency and connecting to the alternative communication network, without navigating the user interface when the option may be needed and without cluttering the user interface when the option is not needed, provides improved visual feedback to the user, reduces the number of inputs required to perform an operation, provides additional control options without cluttering the user interface with additional display controls, and performs an operation without further user input when a set of conditions has been met. Feedback regarding the communication capabilities of the computer system enables the computer system to be controlled more quickly and efficiently, which is particularly important in situations where the user is responding to emergency or stress situations.
In some embodiments, displaying the option to connect to the alternative communication network in accordance with determining that the set of messaging criteria is met occurs in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs including a request to display a message conversation with the corresponding number (e.g., display 1706d when display 1706 and/or 1712) (e.g., if the corresponding communication network is not available, the computer system displays the option to connect to the alternative communication network when displaying the message conversation). Displaying an option connected to the alternative communication network in response to detecting a request to display a message conversation with a corresponding number enables the computer system to display the option while displaying the message conversation without requiring the user to navigate the user interface and without cluttering the user interface when the option is not required, provides improved visual feedback to the user, reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation, and provides additional control options without cluttering the user interface with additional display controls.
In some embodiments, displaying the option to connect to the alternative communication network in accordance with determining that the set of messaging criteria is met occurs in response to detecting a set of one or more inputs that include a request to send a message to the corresponding number (e.g., 1706d when 1706c and/or 1712c are selected) (e.g., send a new message in a message conversation) (e.g., if the corresponding communication network is not available), the computer system displays the option to connect to the alternative communication network in response to receiving the request to send a short message to the corresponding number in the message conversation). Displaying an option to connect to the alternative communication network in response to detecting a request to send a message to a corresponding number enables the computer system to avoid displaying the option until the user indicates an intent to send the message and without requiring the user to navigate the user interface for the option to connect to the alternative communication network, which provides improved visual feedback to the user, reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation, and provides additional control options without cluttering the user interface with additional display controls.
In some embodiments, outputting the prompt (e.g., 1704b and/or 1706 d) includes displaying the prompt in a user interface of a messaging application (e.g., 1704, 1712, an application providing a user interface for generating and/or sending a short message and/or for displaying a message conversation between two or more participants of the message conversation). Displaying the prompt in the user interface of the messaging application automatically informs the user that communication with the corresponding number may be performed via the alternative communication network in the context that the user has indicated an intent to send the communication, provides improved visual feedback to the user, reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation, and provides additional control options without cluttering the user interface with additional display controls.
It is noted that the details of the process described above with respect to method 1800 (e.g., fig. 18) also apply in a similar manner to the methods described below and above. For example, methods 700, 800, 1000, 1200, 1400, 1600, 2000, and/or 2200 optionally include one or more of the features of the various methods described above with reference to method 1800. For example, initiating a communication according to method 1800 may initiate display of a set of options in method 800. For example, initiating communication according to method 1800 may initiate display of an alignment element in method 1000. For the sake of brevity, these details are not repeated hereinafter.
Fig. 19A-19O illustrate an exemplary user interface for providing alternative communication network test modes, according to some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the process in fig. 20. In some embodiments, providing an alternative communication network test mode includes performing one or more of the methods described with reference to fig. 7, 8, and/or 10 (e.g., methods 700, 800, and/or 1000).
In some embodiments, any of the selections, requests, and/or inputs described herein (e.g., 1950a-1950 s) are or include touch inputs (e.g., tap gestures and/or swipe gestures). In some embodiments, any of the selections, requests, and/or inputs described herein (e.g., 1950a-1950 s) are or include voice inputs (e.g., voice commands to select user interface elements or activate features or perform functions such as features or functions associated with user interface elements). In some embodiments, any of the selections, requests, and/or inputs described herein (e.g., 1950a-1950 s) are or include air gestures (e.g., air gestures to select a user interface element or activate a feature or perform a function, such as a feature or function associated with a user interface element). In some embodiments, any of the selections, requests, and/or inputs described herein (e.g., 1950a-1950 s) are or include activation (e.g., pressing, rotating, and/or moving) of hardware devices (e.g., buttons, rotatable input mechanisms, rotatable depressible input mechanisms, mouse buttons, buttons of a remote control, and/or a joystick). In some embodiments, any of the user interface elements described herein as being selected (e.g., icons, affordances, buttons, and/or selectable options) are selected by activating a hardware device when the user interface element is in focus (e.g., highlighted, bolded, outlined, visually distinguished from other user interface elements, and/or located at or near a cursor).
Fig. 19A illustrates a computer system 600 described above with reference to fig. 6A, for example. In fig. 6A, computer system 600 has cellular services as indicated by network indicator 607, and displays a home screen 1900 that includes application icons for launching, opening, and/or displaying corresponding applications and/or user interfaces. The computer system detects a request 1950a to display selectable options for displaying medical information of a user associated with computer system 600 (e.g., one or more presses on button 617a and/or button 617 b; in some embodiments, button 617a and button 617b are pressed simultaneously). In response to detecting request 1950a, computer system 600 displays user interface 1902, as shown in fig. 19B, including display shutdown option 1902a, medical ID option 1902B, and emergency communication option 1902c. In fig. 19B, computer system 600 detects selection 1950c of medical ID option 1902B (e.g., touch and drag or swipe, tap, and/or other selection input to the right).
In response to detecting selection 1950C of medical ID option 1902b, computer system 600 displays a user interface 1904, as shown in fig. 19C, that includes medical information about a user associated with computer system 600, the medical information relating to the user's medical history and/or status, or possibly in a medical emergency. The medical information includes, but is not limited to, for example, the name, age, medical condition, allergies and reactions, medications, blood type, weight and/or height of the user. Displaying the user interface 1904 includes displaying an emergency communication object 1906 (e.g., the user interface 1904 includes the emergency communication object 1906). The emergency communication object 1906 includes a description 1906a of the emergency communication capabilities of computer system 600 for connecting to and communicating with a satellite when cellular service is not available (e.g., via the satellite's emergency SOS: your phone can initiate a satellite connection, helping to contact emergency service when a call cannot be completed). The emergency communication object 1906 includes a presentation option 1906b for initiating an alternate communication network test mode for presenting and/or simulating emergency communication capabilities. For example, in response to detecting selection 1950o of presentation option 1906b (e.g., a tap on presentation option 1906b and/or other input selecting presentation option 1906 b), computer system 600 displays guide user interface 1912 shown in fig. 19F.
Returning to fig. 19A, computer system 600 detects selection 1950b of setup icon 1900a (e.g., a tap on setup icon 1900a and/or other input selecting setup icon 1900 a). In response to detecting selection 1950b of the settings icon 1900a, the computer system 600 displays a settings menu user interface 1908, as shown in FIG. 19D. The setup menu user interface 1908 includes an emergency SOS option 1908a. In fig. 19D, computer system 600 detects selection 1950D of emergency SOS option 1908a (e.g., a tap on emergency SOS option 1908a and/or other input selecting emergency SOS option 1908 a).
In response to detecting selection of the emergency SOS option 1908a, the computer system 600 displays an emergency SOS settings user interface 1910, as shown in fig. 19E. The emergency SOS settings user interface 1910 includes information for emergency communication features of the computer system 600 and setup options, such as how an emergency call is made. The emergency SOS settings user interface 1910 includes the emergency communication object 1906 described with reference to fig. 19C. In some implementations, as shown in fig. 19E, emergency communication object 1906 is displayed in a highlighted position (e.g., overlaid on or at or near the top of emergency SOS settings user interface 1910). By displaying the emergency communication object 1906 in the highlighted position, the computer system 600 prompts the user to use the alternative communication network test mode, suggests an alternative communication network test mode to the user, and/or provides the emergency communication object 1906 as a prompt informing the user that the alternative communication network test mode is available. In some implementations, the emergency communication object 1906 is displayed at a different location in the emergency settings user interface 1910 (e.g., away from the top of the emergency settings user interface 1910, in the middle or near the middle, and/or toward the bottom thereof). In some embodiments, computer system 600 displays emergency communication object 1906 overlaid on or at or near the top of user interface 1904 shown in fig. 19C to prompt the user to use alternative communication network test modes, suggest alternative communication network test modes to the user, and/or provide emergency communication object 1906 as a prompt informing the user that alternative communication network test modes are available.
In fig. 19E, computer system 600 detects selection 1950E of presentation option 1906b (e.g., a tap on presentation option 1906b and/or other input selecting presentation option 1906 b). In response to detecting selection 1950e of presentation option 1906b, computer system 600 displays guide user interface 1912 shown in FIG. 19F. The instructional user interface 1912 includes text (e.g., 1912 b), graphics (e.g., 1912 a), animations, presentations, and/or other information regarding emergency communication capabilities and/or alternative communication network test modes.
In fig. 19E, the instructional user interface includes a next button 1912c, and the computer system 600 detects a selection 1950f of the next button 1912c (e.g., a tap on the next button 1912c and/or other input selecting the next button 1912 c). In response to detecting selection 1950f of next button 1912c, computer system 600 displays notification 1914 shown in FIG. 19G. The notification 1914 includes a prompt 1914a (e.g., "temporarily closing the cell in order to test the satellite connection") indicating that the cellular communication capability of the computer system 600 is disabled during the alternative communication network test mode and prompting the user to close the cellular communication capability (e.g., in order to test the satellite connection). Notification 1914 includes close option 1914b and cancel option 1914. In response to detecting selection of cancel option 1914c, computer system 600 ceases to display notification 1914 and relinquishes to turn off the cellular communication capability (e.g., keep the cellular communication capability enabled and/or turned on).
In FIG. 19G, computer system 600 detects selection 1950G of closing option 1914 b. In response to detecting selection 1950g of the close option 1914b, the computer system 600 closes the cellular communication capability (e.g., as indicated by the network indicator 607) and displays the presentation interface 1916 shown in fig. 19H. The presentation interface 1916 is similar to the report interface 602M (e.g., as shown in fig. 6M) displayed in response to, for example, selection of the send sms button 604G (e.g., as shown in fig. 6G) via satellite communications. For example, presentation interface 1916 includes a set of options 1916a corresponding to information of test reports to be sent in the alternative communication network test mode.
In contrast to report interface 602M (and other report interfaces displayed for generating reports, as described with reference to, for example, fig. 6M-6Y), presentation report interface 1916 includes a presentation notification 1918 (e.g., at the top of presentation report interface 1916) that informs the user that the alternative communication network test mode is activated and that presentation report interface 1916 is for presentation and/or testing purposes and not for reporting a true emergency (e.g., "emergency SOS presentation: this is not a true emergency"). In some embodiments, presentation notification 1918 is persistently displayed when computer system 600 is in the alternative communications network test mode to continuously alert the user that the user interface is for presentation and/or testing purposes.
Fig. 19H shows a satellite 1975 indicating to the computer system 600 the ability to connect to a satellite for communication in an alternative communication network test mode. In fig. 19H, there is empty space between computer system 600 and satellite 1975, which indicates that computer system 600 is not connected to satellite 1975.
As shown in fig. 19H, computer system 600 detects a selection 1950H of option 1916a1 corresponding to a hypothetical emergency where the person is lost or trapped. In response to selection 1950H of option 1916a1, computer system 600 displays presentation interface 1917 that includes another set of options 1917a corresponding to further information regarding the hypothetical emergency as shown in FIG. 19H 1. In response to selection 1950p of multi-person option 1917a1, computer system 600 displays summary interface 1919 shown in FIG. 19H2, which includes summary 1919a of the presentation, timer 1919b, and send option 1919c. In some embodiments, computer system 600 displays options for generating presentation reports and sending presentation reports, similar to the options and user interfaces described with reference to fig. 6M-6Y. In some embodiments, as shown in fig. 19H, 19H1, and 19H2, computer system 600 maintains the display of presentation notification 1918 while displaying options for generating presentation reports and sending presentation reports in the alternative communication network test mode.
After initiating the transmission of the presentation report (e.g., in response to selection 1950q of send option 1919c, or in response to expiration of timer 1919 b), computer system 600 displays alignment interface 1922 (e.g., similar to alignment interface 902F and/or alignment interface 902G) and continues to display presentation notification 1918 as shown in fig. 19I. Alignment interface 1922 includes graphical element 1922a, connection status indicator 1922b, and connection instructions 1922c. Graphical element 1922a provides a graphical indication of the alignment status between computer system 600 and satellite 1975 (e.g., similar to or the same as graphical element 931). In fig. 19I, graphical element 1922a indicates that computer system 600 is not aligned with a satellite and that computer system 600 needs to be turned left to find a satellite. The connection status indicator 1922b provides a textual indication of the connection status between the computer system 600 and the satellite 1975. In FIG. 19I, connection status indicator 1922b indicates that computer system 600 is looking for signals from satellite 1975. The connect instructions 1922c provide instructions for aligning and/or connecting the computer system 600 with the satellite 1975. In fig. 19I, the connect instruction 1922c prompts the user to turn left to find satellite 1975.
Turning to fig. 19J, computer system 600 is connected to satellite 1975 (e.g., turned left to align with satellite 1975 and establish a communication connection), as indicated by the double-headed arrow between computer system 600 and satellite 1975. Graphical element 1922a and connection status indicator 1922b (e.g., "connected") indicate that computer system 600 is connected to satellite 1975. In fig. 19J, connection instructions 1922c instruct the user to keep computer system 600 pointed at satellite 1975. Since computer system 600 is connected to satellite 1975 in fig. 19J, alignment interface 1922 includes an open message option 1922d to indicate that the computer system is opening a messaging application (e.g., automatically, without further user input). In some embodiments, in response to detecting selection 1950r of open message option 1922d, computer system 600 opens the messaging application (e.g., prior to automatically displaying the messaging application).
In some embodiments, computer system 600 updates alignment interface 1922 (including graphical element 1922a, connection status indicator 1922b, and connection instructions 1922C) based on the alignment and/or connection status of computer system 600 as described with respect to alignment interfaces 902C, 902D, 902E, 902F, 902G, 902H, 902I, 902J, 902O1, and/or 902P and/or method 1000 shown in fig. 9C-9J and 9O-9P.
Turning to fig. 19K, computer system 600 displays messaging interface 1924 and maintains the display of presentation notification 1918. In some embodiments, messaging interface 1924 is similar to messaging interfaces 902K, 902L, 902M, and/or 902N. In fig. 19K, the message interface 1924 displays a presentation message 1924a including a summary of presentation reports sent via the satellite communications network in the alternative communications network test mode based on the options selected in the presentation report interface 1916 and/or other options selected when generating the report (e.g., as described with reference to fig. 6M-6Y and/or method 800).
The messaging interface 1924 includes a message input field 1924b for generating a message, a send option 1924c for sending the generated message, and a presentation indicator 1924d indicating that a message sent and/or received via the messaging user interface 1924 is an exemplary conversation with an emergency service.
In fig. 19K, computer system 600 displays banner 926 (e.g., based on the alignment of computer system 600 with satellite 1975 and/or the status of messages between computer system 600 and satellite 1975) in accordance with the techniques described with reference to fig. 9K-9N 1.
Turning to fig. 19L, computer system 600 has received a presentation response 1924e from a presentation communication service (e.g., a communication service that received presentation report 1924 a) via satellite communication. The presentation response 1924e includes an indication that the presentation response 1924e is an exemplary response for testing purposes (e.g., "emergency services response example"). Since computer system 600 is still in the alternative communication network test mode, computer system 600 continues to display presentation notification 1918.
In fig. 19L, the user has entered a presentation message into message input field 1924b (e.g., via input 1950s on keyboard 1924 g) and computer system 600 detects a selection 1950i (e.g., tap and/or other selection input) of send option 1924 c. As shown in fig. 19M, in response to detecting selection 1950i of send option 1924c, computer system 600 sends text entered into message input field 1924b via satellite communication and message 1924f is added to the conversation, for example, in message conversation area 1924h of messaging interface 1924. Banner 926 indicates that computer system 600 is sending the message and that the user remains directing computer system 600 at satellite 1975.
In FIG. 19M, computer system 600 detects a request to exit an alternative communication network test mode. In some embodiments, the request to exit the alternative communication network test mode includes pressing (e.g., 1950 k) a physical button (e.g., 617a, 617b, and/or 617 c), selecting (e.g., 1950j, tapping, and/or other selection input) an end option 1920, and/or a request to display a home screen (e.g., 1950l, such as a tap and/or swipe gesture at a predetermined location of messaging interface 1924).
In response to detecting a request to exit the alternative communication network test mode, computer system 600 displays a confirmation prompt 1926 (e.g., pop-up object, user interface, and/or notification) and obscures messaging interface 1924, as shown in FIG. 19N. In response to detecting a request to remain in the alternative communication network test mode (e.g., input 1950m, such as a tap or other input that does not point to acknowledgement prompt 1926), computer system 600 removes acknowledgement prompt 1926 and displays messaging interface 1924 (e.g., no occlusion).
The acknowledgement prompt 1926 includes an indication 1926a that the alternative communications network test mode has ended and that the cellular and Wi-Fi capabilities of the system 600 are to be enabled (e.g., turned on). In some embodiments, the Wi-Fi capabilities of computer system 600 will not be turned off during the alternative communications network test mode, and in such embodiments, acknowledgement prompt 1926 does not indicate that the Wi-Fi capabilities of computer system 600 are to be enabled.
The confirmation prompt 1926 includes a confirmation option 1926b. In response to detecting selection 1950n of confirmation option 1926b (e.g., a tap and/or other selection input), computer system 600 exits the alternative communication network test mode, displays, for example, user interface 1928, and enables cellular capabilities of computer system 600, as indicated by network indicator 607 shown in fig. 19O.
Fig. 20 is a flow chart illustrating a method for testing an alternative communications network using a computer system, in accordance with some embodiments. The method 2000 is performed at a computer system (e.g., 100, 300, 500, 600, 900, 1100, 1300A, 1300B, 1500A, 1500B, 1500C, a smart phone, a smartwatch, a laptop, a desktop computer, and/or a tablet computer) that communicates with a display generating component (e.g., 601, 901, 1106, 1302A, 1302B, 1502A, 1502B, 1502C, a display controller, a display device, a monitor, and/or a touch-sensitive display system) and one or more input devices (e.g., 601, 901, 617a, 617B, 617C, a touch-sensitive surface, a touch screen, a button, a keyboard, a mouse, a camera, a rotatable input mechanism, and/or a microphone), wherein the computer system is configured to communicate via an alternative communication network (e.g., a non-terrestrial communication network, such as a satellite communication network) when the respective communication network (e.g., a terrestrial communication network, such as a cellular communication network or Wi-Fi network) is not available (e.g., when the terrestrial communication network is not available). In some embodiments, the computer system is configured to communicate via the alternative communication network only when the respective communication network is unavailable (e.g., the ability to communicate via the respective communication network is disabled and/or a connection with the respective communication network sufficient to communicate cannot be established). Some operations in method 2000 are optionally combined, the order of some operations is optionally changed, and some operations are optionally omitted.
As described below, the method 2000 provides an intuitive way for testing alternative communication networks. The method reduces the cognitive burden of the user testing alternative communication network, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-powered computing devices, enabling users to test alternative communication networks faster and more efficiently saves power and increases the time interval between battery charges.
When a computer system communicates via a respective communication network (and/or the capability of connecting to the respective communication network is enabled (e.g., wi-Fi and/or cellular communication capability is enabled)) the computer system detects (2002), via one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs (e.g., 1950a, 1950b, 1950c, 1950o, 1950d, 1950e, 1950f, 1950g, contact and/or touch gestures on a touch-sensitive surface, air gestures, mouse clicks, button presses, and/or voice commands) corresponding to a request to activate an alternate communication network test mode (e.g., an operational mode of the computer system that simulates a procedure for connecting and/or transmitting communications via an alternate communication network test mode, the computer system is capable of transmitting communications via an alternate communication network test mode in some embodiments.
In response to detecting a set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to activate an alternative communication network test mode, the computer system activates (2004) the alternative communication network test mode (e.g., as shown in fig. 19F, 19G, or 19H). When the alternative communications network test mode is activated (e.g., when the computer system is operating in the alternative communications network test mode), the computer system displays (2006) a set of user interfaces (e.g., 1916, 1922, 926, and/or 1924) via the display generating component. Activating the alternative communication network test mode and displaying a set of user interfaces provides the user with a means for testing features that are suitable only for use in emergency situations other than emergency situations, so that the user knows how to use the features in emergency situations with fewer errors (e.g., so that the user does not have to learn how to use the features during an actual emergency situation), which enables the user to use the computer system more quickly and efficiently and reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation.
In some embodiments, activating the alternative communication network test mode includes disabling the ability of the computer system to communicate via (and/or connect to) the respective communication network (e.g., turning off Wi-Fi and/or cellular capabilities in some embodiments) (e.g., as shown in fig. 19G and 19H). Disabling the ability of the computer system to communicate via the respective communication network enables the computer system to more accurately simulate the process of connecting to and/or communicating via the alternative communication network, disabling the communication antenna, reducing electromagnetic interference with the alternative communication network, and/or reducing the amount of energy transmitted, which reduces power usage and extends battery life.
In some embodiments, displaying the set of user interfaces includes displaying (e.g., the set of user interfaces includes: including an indication of a connection status with the alternative communication network (e.g., a graphical indication, an icon, a color, a font, text, an animation, a symbol, a thumbnail, an image, and/or a pictorial indicator; and/or 1922a, 1922b, 908C, 908D, 908E, 908F, 908G, 908H, 908I, 908J, 908O1, 908P, 926, and/or 931) a user interface (e.g., 1922, 1924, 926, and/or a connection assistant user interface) of instructions for establishing a connection (or maintaining the connection in some embodiments) with an alternative communication network (e.g., 1922a, 1922C, 908D, 908E, 908F, 908G, 908H, 908I, 908J, 908O1, 908P, 926, and/or 931). And/or a user interface (e.g., 1916, 602M, 602N, 602O, 602P, 602Q, 602R, 602S, 602T, 602U, 602V, and/or 602W) for generating a communication (e.g., 1924a, a short message, and/or an audio message) capable of being sent via the alternative communication network when the alternative communication network test mode is activated. In some embodiments, the user interface including an indication of a connection status with the alternative communication network and instructions for establishing a connection with the alternative communication network includes the user interfaces and/or features described in fig. 9C-9Q and method 1000. In some embodiments, the user interface for generating the communication includes the user interfaces, options, and/or operations described in fig. 6M-6W and/or method 800. Displaying a user interface that includes an indication of a connection status with the alternative communication network allows a user to quickly and efficiently solve problems (e.g., misalignment and/or obstruction) that prevent a computer system from connecting to the alternative communication network with less input, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation. Displaying a user interface for generating communications capable of being sent via an alternative communications network enables the computer system to provide an option that is optimal (e.g., requires limited bandwidth) for communication via the alternative communications network, reduces the amount of input required to generate messages (e.g., without using a keyboard), and directs the user through the process of communicating via the alternative communications network, which provides improved visual feedback to the user, reduces the amount of input required to perform an operation, and provides additional control options without cluttering the user interface with additional display controls.
In some embodiments, the computer system detects a set of one or more inputs (e.g., 1950 h) directed to a user interface for generating the communication (e.g., selection of one or more options corresponding to information to be included in the communication); and after (e.g., in response to) detecting the set of one or more inputs directed to the user interface used to generate the communication, the computer system sends the communication (e.g., 1924 a) via the alternative communication network, wherein the communication includes content based on the set of one or more inputs directed to the user interface used to generate the communication (e.g., 1924a is based on 1950 h). In some embodiments, the content of the communication includes a text message composed by the user (e.g., using a keyboard). In some embodiments, the content of the communication includes a representation of a user's response to questions and/or prompts (e.g., questionnaires, 1916a, 604M, 604N, 604O, 604P, and/or 604Q) in a user interface (e.g., 1916, 602M, 602N, 602O, 602P, and/or 602Q) used to generate the communication. The communication is sent via the alternative communication network, the communication comprising content based on the set of one or more inputs directed to the user interface used to generate the communication, which enables the user to quickly and efficiently generate messages, which provides improved visual feedback to the user and reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation.
In some implementations, the active alternative communication network test mode simulates an emergency communication procedure (e.g., a low bandwidth communication procedure that may be used to communicate with emergency services when a higher bandwidth communication network is not available; e.g., as indicated at 1918). Simulating the emergency communication process enables the user to test the emergency communication features in non-emergency situations so that the user can use the computer system more quickly and efficiently in emergency situations, which reduces power usage and extends battery life of the computer system.
In some embodiments, the alternative communication network is a non-terrestrial communication network (e.g., a satellite communication network). Activating a mode for testing communications via a non-terrestrial communication network enables a computer system to provide a user interface that is not needed for communications via a terrestrial communication network, such as an interface for aligning with a non-terrestrial communication network and generating low bandwidth messages, so that a user can more quickly and efficiently use the computer system in an emergency situation, which reduces the number of inputs required to perform an operation, reduces power usage, and extends the battery life of the computer system.
In some embodiments, displaying the set of user interfaces includes displaying an indication (e.g., 1922a, 931, 926, a graphical indication, an icon, a color, a font, text, an animation, a symbol, a thumbnail, an image, and/or a pictorial indicator) of an alignment of the computer system with one or more elements (e.g., satellites, transmitters, and/or receivers) of the non-terrestrial communication network. Displaying an indication of the alignment of the computer system with one or more elements of the non-terrestrial communication network enables a user to align the computer system with one or more elements of the non-terrestrial communication network with fewer errors, which provides improved visual feedback to the user and reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation.
In some embodiments, displaying the set of user interfaces includes outputting an indication (e.g., 1914a, a graphical indication, sound, tactile output, an icon, a color, a font, text, an animation, a symbol, a thumbnail, an image, and/or a pictorial indicator) that the ability of the computer system to communicate via (and/or in some embodiments, connect to) the respective communication network when the alternative communication network test mode is activated is to be disabled (e.g., wi-Fi and/or cellular capabilities are to be turned off) (e.g., the cellular antenna of the computer system is to be turned off during the alternative communication network test mode). The output indicates that the ability of the computer system to communicate via the respective communication network when the alternative communication network test mode is activated is to be disabled, informing the user that the potential primary means of communication will not be available and that there may be missed communications (e.g., communications requiring receipt of the respective communication network) during the test mode, which provides improved feedback to the user.
In some embodiments, when the alternative communication network test mode is activated, the computer system sends a communication (e.g., 1924 a) to a non-urgent entity (e.g., an entity different from the entity that received the communication when the actual process emulated by the alternative communication network test mode was performed) via the alternative communication network. In some embodiments, the computer system is not in communication with the emergency service and/or is unable to communicate with the emergency service when the alternative communication network test mode is activated. Sending communications to non-emergency entities via the alternative communications network enables the computer system to closely simulate communications via the alternative communications network and enables a user to quickly and efficiently test communications via the alternative communications network without contacting emergency services and preventing emergency services from engaging in actual emergency messages, which enables the user to more quickly and efficiently use the computer system, reduces power usage, and extends battery life.
In some embodiments, when the alternative communication network test mode is activated and after sending the communication to the non-emergency entity via the alternative communication network, the computer system receives the communication (e.g., 1924 b) from the non-emergency entity via the alternative communication network (e.g., in response to the communication sent to the non-emergency entity). Receiving communications from the non-emergency entity via the alternative communication network provides the user with fast feedback of the success of the communications via the alternative communication network without burdening the emergency service and preventing the emergency service from attending the actual emergency message, which enables the user to use the computer system more quickly and efficiently, reduces power usage, and extends battery life.
ISE communications from non-urgent entities include predetermined content (e.g., pre-recorded responses, predetermined messages, and/or content not based on communications that have been sent to non-urgent entities); for example, 1924b includes predetermined content). In some embodiments, the communication from the emergency service includes a customized response with content responsive to the emergency situation and/or content of a message sent to the emergency service. Receiving a communication with predetermined content enables the computer system to indicate to the user that the communication is for testing purposes (e.g., the communication is not sent to the emergency service) and to provide the user with quick feedback of the success of the communication via the alternative communication network without burdening the emergency service and preventing the emergency service from attending the actual emergency message, and allows the computer system to enable the user to use the computer system more quickly and efficiently, reducing power usage, and extending battery life.
In some embodiments, when the alternative communication network test mode is activated, communication with the alternative communication network (and/or in some embodiments, connection with the alternative communication network) is restricted in the following manner: when the alternative communication network test mode is not activated (e.g., during the actual process simulated by the alternative communication network test mode; e.g., computer system 600 is restricted in the same manner as in fig. 6M-6W and/or 9B-9M in fig. 19H-19M), communication with (and/or in some embodiments, connection to) the alternative communication network is restricted. In some embodiments, when the alternative communications network test mode is activated, the computer system is unable to send messages via the alternative communications network unless the computer system is aligned with and connected to one or more satellites. Restricting communication with the alternative communication network in a manner that restricts communication with the alternative communication network when the alternative communication network test mode is inactive enables the computer system to more accurately simulate a process for connecting to and/or communicating via the alternative communication network in an emergency situation, such that a user can more quickly and efficiently use the computer system in an emergency situation, which reduces power usage and extends battery life.
In some embodiments, the computer system displays a settings user interface (e.g., 1908 and/or 1910) that includes options (e.g., selectable options, icons, buttons, affordances, and/or user-interactive graphical user interface objects) for controlling one or more settings of the computer system, e.g., options such as "call hold" and "press 5 times to call" among the options in the list of options and/or 1910 in fig. 1908, and options (e.g., 1906 and/or 1906 b) for initiating activation of an alternative communications network test mode (e.g., activating the mode), wherein the set of one or more inputs corresponding to the request to activate the alternative communications network test mode includes inputs (e.g., 1950o and/or 1950 e) for selecting the options for initiating activation of the alternative communications network test mode. In some embodiments, in response to detecting selection of a respective one of the options for controlling one or more settings of the computer system, the computer system adjusts the respective setting of the computer system corresponding to the selected respective option. In some embodiments, the computer system initiates activation of the alternative communication network test mode in response to detecting selection of an option to initiate activation of the alternative communication network test mode. Displaying an option in the setup user interface to initiate activation of the alternative communication network test mode informs the user of the availability of the alternative communication network test mode and provides a quick and efficient means for accessing the alternative communication network test mode, which reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation.
In some embodiments, the computer system displays medical ID options (e.g., 1902b, selectable options, icons, buttons, affordances, and/or user-interactive graphical user interface objects); the computer system detects a selection of a medical ID option (e.g., 1950 c); and in response to detecting selection of the medical ID option, the computer system displays information of a user associated with the computer system (e.g., 1904) and options for initiating activation of the alternate communication network test mode (e.g., activating the mode) (e.g., 1906b, selectable options, icons, buttons, affordances, and/or user interactive graphical user interface objects), wherein the set of one or more inputs corresponding to the request to activate the alternate communication network test mode includes an input selecting the options for initiating activation of the alternate communication network test mode (e.g., 1950o and/or 1950 e). In some embodiments, the information of the user includes the user's name, the user's age, the user's weight, the user's height, allergies, blood type, medical conditions, specified contacts (e.g., the name of an emergency contact), and/or contact information (e.g., a phone number) of the specified contacts. Displaying an option to initiate activation of an alternative communication network test mode in response to detecting selection of a medical ID option informs a user of the availability of the alternative communication network test mode at the relevant location and provides a quick and efficient means for accessing the alternative communication network test mode, which reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation.
In some embodiments, the computer system displays a prompt (e.g., 1906) including a suggestion (e.g., 1906a, notification that a prompt and/or feature is available) regarding the alternative communication network test mode, wherein the prompt includes an option (e.g., 1906b, selectable option, icon, button, affordance, and/or user-interactive graphical user interface object) for initiating activation of the alternative communication network test mode, wherein the set of one or more inputs corresponding to the request to activate the alternative communication network test mode includes an input (e.g., 1950o and/or 1950 e) for selecting the option for initiating activation of the alternative communication network test mode. Displaying an option to initiate activation of the alternative communication network test mode in a prompt including advice regarding the alternative communication network test mode informs a user of the availability of the alternative communication network test mode and provides a quick and efficient means for accessing the alternative communication network test mode, which reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation.
In some embodiments, prior to activating the alternative communication test mode (and in some embodiments, in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to activate the alternative communication network test mode), the computer system displays guidance (e.g., 1912a, and/or 1912 b) including information (e.g., instructions and/or demonstrations) about the alternative communication network test mode (and/or in some embodiments, information about the actual process simulated by the alternative communication network test mode). In some embodiments, activating the alternative communication network test mode includes displaying the guidance when activating the alternative communication network test mode, such as in an initial user interface. In some embodiments, the computer system displays the guidance in an initial user interface in the set of user interfaces. Displaying guidance including information about alternative communication network test modes prior to activating the alternative communication network test modes provides the user with information about the test modes prior to attempting to use the test modes and enables the user to use the test modes with fewer errors, which provides the user with improved visual feedback and reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation.
In some embodiments, the computer system displays an indication (e.g., 1918, a graphical indication, an icon, a color, a font, text, an animation, a symbol, a thumbnail, an image, and/or a pictorial symbol) that the alternative communication network test mode is active when the alternative communication network test mode is active, the indication not being displayed during the process of communicating via (and/or in some embodiments, connecting to) the alternative communication network (e.g., during the actual process simulated by the alternative communication network test mode; e.g., 1918 not being displayed in fig. 6M-6W and/or fig. 9B-9Q) when the alternative communication network test mode is inactive. In some embodiments, the computer system maintains display of an indication of activation of the alternative communication network test mode until the alternative communication network test mode is deactivated (e.g., the indication is persistent). Displaying an indication of the activation of the alternative communication network test mode informs the user of the status of the computer system and prevents the user from providing input that is not related to the status of the computer system, which provides the user with improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform the operation.
In some embodiments, the computer system detects a set of one or more inputs (e.g., 1950j, 1950k, 1950l, and/or 1950 n) including a request to exit (e.g., end, shut down, disable, and/or deactivate) an alternative communication network test mode; and in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs comprising a request to exit the alternative communication network test mode, the computer system exits (e.g., ends, closes, disables, and/or deactivates) the alternative communication network test mode (e.g., as shown in fig. 19N and/or fig. 19O) including enabling (e.g., turning on) the computer system's ability to communicate via (and/or in some embodiments connect to) the respective communication network (e.g., turn on Wi-Fi and/or cellular capabilities). Enabling the ability of the computer system to communicate via the respective communication network in response to detecting a request to exit the alternative communication network test mode allows the user to automatically resume communication via the respective communication network without having to manually enable the ability to communicate via the respective communication network, which reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation. Enabling the ability of the computer system to communicate via the respective communication network in response to detecting a request to exit the alternative communication network test mode enables the computer system to automatically enable (or re-enable) the ability of the computer system to communicate via the respective communication network such that the computer system can send and receive information using the respective communication network (e.g., if the user has disabled the ability of the computer system to communicate via the respective communication network and has not (or has forgotten) turned on the ability of the computer system to communicate via the respective communication network), which reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation. The ability to enable the computer system to communicate via the respective communication network in response to detecting a request to exit the alternative communication network test mode enables the computer system to automatically operate in (or switch to) a lower power mode (e.g., if the user has enabled the computer system to operate in a higher power mode and has not (or has forgotten to) shut down the higher power mode in the alternative communication network test mode), which reduces power usage and extends battery life.
In some embodiments, the set of one or more inputs including a request to exit the alternative communication network test mode includes a request (e.g., 1950j and/or 1950 l) to close an application (and/or in some embodiments, a user interface of the application) that provides (e.g., runs) the alternative communication network test mode (e.g., the computer system exits the alternative communication network test mode in response to detecting the request to close the application). Exiting the alternative communication network test mode in response to a request to close an application providing the alternative communication network test mode provides a quick and efficient method for ending the alternative communication network test mode, which reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation. Exiting the alternative communication network test mode in response to a request to close an application providing the alternative communication network test mode enables the computer system to automatically enable (or re-enable) the ability of the computer system to communicate via the respective communication network such that the computer system can send and receive information using the respective communication network (e.g., if the user has disabled the ability of the computer system to communicate via the respective communication network and has not (or has forgotten to) turn on the ability of the computer system to communicate via the respective communication network), which reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation. Exiting the alternative communication network test mode in response to a request to shut down an application providing the alternative communication network test mode enables the computer system to automatically operate in (or switch to) a lower power mode (e.g., if the user has enabled the computer system to operate in a higher power mode and has not (or has forgotten to) shut down the higher power mode in the alternative communication network test mode), which reduces power usage and extends battery life.
In some embodiments, the set of one or more inputs including a request to exit the alternative communication network test mode includes a request to lock the user interface of the computer system (e.g., 1950 k) (and/or in some embodiments, a request to place the computer system in a sleep state, a low power state, and/or an awake state) (e.g., the computer system exits the alternative communication network test mode in response to detecting a request to lock the user interface of the computer system). Exiting the alternative communication network test mode in response to a request to lock the user interface of the computer system provides a quick and efficient method of ending the alternative communication network test mode without requiring additional user input, which reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation. Exiting the alternative communication network test mode in response to a request to lock the user interface of the computer system enables the computer system to automatically enable (or re-enable) the ability of the computer system to communicate via the respective communication network so that the computer system can send and receive information using the respective communication network (e.g., if the user has disabled the ability of the computer system to communicate via the respective communication network and has not (or has forgotten to) turn on the ability of the computer system to communicate via the respective communication network), which reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation. Exiting the alternative communication network test mode in response to a request to lock the user interface of the computer system enables the computer system to automatically operate in (or switch to) the lower power mode (e.g., if the user has enabled the computer system to operate in the higher power mode and has not (or has forgotten to) shut down the higher power mode in the alternative communication network test mode), which reduces power usage and extends battery life.
It is noted that the details of the process described above with respect to method 2000 (e.g., fig. 20) also apply in a similar manner to the methods described below and above. For example, methods 700, 800, 1000, 1200, 1400, 1600, 1800, and/or 2200 optionally include one or more of the features of the various methods described above with reference to method 2000. For example, the alternative communication network test patterns in method 2000 may simulate methods 700, 800, 1000, 1200, 1400, 1600, 1800, and/or 2200. For the sake of brevity, these details are not repeated hereinafter.
Fig. 21A-21L illustrate an exemplary user interface for providing user interface objects corresponding to a process, according to some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the process in fig. 22. In some embodiments, the process associated with the user interface object includes one or more of the methods described with reference to fig. 7, 8, and/or 10 (e.g., methods 700, 800, and/or 1000).
In some embodiments, any of the selections, requests, and/or inputs described herein (e.g., 2150a-2150 l) are or include touch inputs (e.g., tap gestures and/or swipe gestures). In some embodiments, any of the selections, requests, and/or inputs described herein (e.g., 2150a-2150 l) are or include voice inputs (e.g., voice commands to select user interface elements or activate features or perform functions, such as features or functions associated with user interface elements). In some embodiments, any of the selections, requests, and/or inputs described herein (e.g., 2150a-2150 l) are or include air gestures (e.g., air gestures to select a user interface element or activate a feature or perform a function, such as a feature or function associated with a user interface element). In some embodiments, any of the selections, requests, and/or inputs described herein (e.g., 2150a-2150 l) are or include activation (e.g., pressing, rotating, and/or moving) of hardware devices (e.g., buttons, rotatable input mechanisms, rotatable depressible input mechanisms, mouse buttons, buttons of a remote control, and/or a joystick). In some embodiments, any of the user interface elements described herein as being selected (e.g., icons, affordances, buttons, and/or selectable options) are selected by activating a hardware device when the user interface element is in focus (e.g., highlighted, bolded, outlined, visually distinguished from other user interface elements, and/or located at or near a cursor).
Fig. 21A illustrates a computer system 600 described above, for example, in fig. 6A. In fig. 21A, computer system 600 displays call management interface 602G depicted in fig. 6G and detects selection 2150a (e.g., tap or other selection input) of send text message button 604G via satellite communication. In response to detecting selection of the send message via satellite button 604G, the computer system 600 initiates a process, such as processes 700, 800, and/or 1000, for sending communications via satellite communications.
In some embodiments, the process initiated in response to detecting selection of the send via satellite button 604G for communication via satellite communication includes displaying one or more reporting interfaces (e.g., 602M, 602N, 602O, 602P, and/or 602Q), such as reporting interface 602M shown in fig. 21B and described with reference to fig. 6M. While the report interface 602M is displayed, the computer system 600 detects a request to stop displaying the report interface 602M (e.g., a request to display a system user interface such as a lock screen, a wake screen, or a home screen). In fig. 21B, input 2150B (e.g., a press of a physical button) corresponds to a request to lock the user interface of computer system 600, and input 2150c (e.g., a tap, swipe up from a predefined portion of display 601 and/or interface 602N, and/or other input) corresponds to a request to display a home screen (e.g., 1304 depicted in fig. 13A). In some embodiments, in response to detecting input 2150c, computer system 600 displays home screen 2108 and active user interface object 2106 as described in more detail with reference to fig. 21D.
In response to detecting input 2150b, computer system 600 locks the user interface of computer system 600, including turning off or dimming display 601, or displaying user interface 2102, as shown in fig. 21C. In some embodiments, computer system 600 displays user interface 2102 in response to detecting input 2150 b. In some embodiments, computer system 600 turns off display 601 in response to input 2150b, and then displays user interface 2102 in response to detecting further input, such as a button press on computer system 600, a contact on display 601, and/or movement of computer system 600 (e.g., movement meeting movement criteria). In fig. 21C, user interface 2102 is a system user interface such as a lock screen or a wake screen that is displayed when computer system 600 transitions from a low power state (e.g., when computer system 600 turns on display 601).
In some embodiments, computer system 600 continues to run the process for sending the communication (e.g., as a background process) while user interface 2102 is displayed. In fig. 21C, computer system 600 displays an active user interface object 2106 corresponding to a process for sending the communication (e.g., an activity of sending the communication) and notifications from a different application (e.g., notification 2112a of an email in an email application and notification 2112b of a message in a messaging application). In some embodiments, computer system 600 displays active user interface object 2106 concurrently with user interface 2102 (e.g., on or in the user interface) and/or concurrently with notification 2112a and/or notification 2112 b. In some embodiments, as shown in fig. 21C, computer system 600 displays notifications in a stacked configuration (e.g., a stack of notifications separate from active user interface object 2106).
The active user interface object 2106 includes a process indicator 2106a, process graphic 2106b, and a process status indicator 2106c. The process indicator 2106a indicates a process and/or application associated with the active user interface object 2106 (e.g., a process for transmitting the communication). The process graphic 2106b is a graphic that indicates a process and/or application associated with the active user interface object 2106 (e.g., a process for sending the communication). The process status indicator 2106c indicates the current state or status of a process for transmitting the communication via satellite communication. For example, the process status indicator 2106c is based on the current state or status of the process used to transmit the communication. In some embodiments, the process graphic 2106b is based on the current state or status of the process used to send the communication. Because computer system 600 is displaying report interface 602N when input 2150b is received, the process for sending the communication is in a state that prompts the user to answer a question and/or provides a response for generating content for the communication. The process status indicator 2106c includes content (e.g., text and/or graphics) indicating that the process for sending the communication is in a state that prompts the user to answer the question and/or provides input for generating content of the communication based on the process for sending the communication being in a state that prompts the user to answer the question and/or provides a response for generating content of the communication. In the embodiment shown in fig. 21C, the process status indicator 2106C indicates that the process for sending the communication is in a state that prompts the user to answer a question and/or provides input for generating content of the communication by displaying text that prompts the user to answer the question and/or provides input for generating content of the communication (e.g., "answer a question to help get a faster response").
In some embodiments, when a non-system user interface (e.g., a user interface of an application such as an email application, a web browsing application, and/or a messaging application) is displayed, computer system 600 does not display active user interface object 2106 (e.g., stops its display). In some implementations, in accordance with a determination that the displayed user interface is a corresponding type of user interface (e.g., a system user interface), computer system 600 displays active user interface object 2106; and determines that computer system 600 displays the user interface without displaying active user interface object 2106 based on the user interface not being the corresponding type of user interface.
In fig. 21C, computer system 600 detects a request 2150d to unlock the user interface of computer system 600 and/or display a home screen (e.g., swipe up from a predefined portion of user interface 2102 and/or other inputs). In response to detecting the request 2150D, the computer system 600 displays the home screen 2108 shown in fig. 21D. Home screen 2108 is a system user interface including application icons for launching, opening, and/or displaying user interfaces for corresponding applications. While home screen 2108 is displayed, computer system 600 displays active user interface object 2106. In contrast to fig. 21C, where active user interface object 2106 is displayed on user interface 2102, active user interface object 2106 is displayed (e.g., moved) in a different position relative to home screen 2108 (e.g., at or near the top of home screen 2108). In some implementations, the active user interface object 2106 has the same appearance when displayed with the home screen 2108 as when displayed with the user interface 2102 (e.g., the process indication 2106a, the process graphic 2106b, and the process status indicator 2106C in fig. 21C are the same as in fig. 21D). In some implementations, the appearance and/or content of the active user interface object 2106 is not dependent on (e.g., not based on) the user interface displayed with the active user interface object 2106.
In fig. 21D, computer system 600 detects selection 2150f (e.g., tap and/or other selection input) of active user interface object 2106. In response to detecting selection 2150f of active user interface object 2106, computer system 600 displays a user interface for transmitting a process of communication corresponding to the current state of the process indicated by active user interface object 2106. For example, in response to detecting selection 2150f of active user interface object 2106 in fig. 21D, computer system 600 displays (e.g., returns to) reporting interface 602M because reporting interface 602M displays when computer system 600 detects a request to navigate away from a process for sending the communication (e.g., and because the process did not proceed due to detecting a request to navigate away from the process), as shown in fig. 21E.
In some embodiments, computer system 600 displays (e.g., returns to) report interface 602M as shown in fig. 21E in response to detecting selection 2150E of active user interface object 2106 in user interface 2102 in fig. 21C. In some embodiments, computer system 600 displays (e.g., returns to) report interface 602M as shown in fig. 21E in response to detecting selection 2150E of active user interface object 2106 and in accordance with a determination that the user is authorized to unlock computer system 600 (e.g., via facial recognition). In some embodiments, in response to detecting selection 2150E of active user interface object 2106, the computer system initiates a process for unlocking the user interface of computer system 600 (e.g., via entry of a face ID, fingerprint ID, and/or personal identification number), and displays reporting interface 602M as shown in fig. 21E once computer system 600 is unlocked.
After displaying report interface 602M in fig. 21E, computer system 600 detects one or more inputs that continue to generate content for the communication (e.g., selection 2150j of an option in option group 604M, or selection 2150k of skip button 616). In some embodiments, generating the content of the communication and transmitting the communication are performed according to the techniques described in fig. 6M-6Y. For example, in some embodiments, in response to selection of an option in the set of options 604M (e.g., selection 2150 j) or selection 2150k of skip button 616, computer system 600 displays one or more additional sets of options (e.g., 604N, 604O, and/or 604P) and/or selection of additional options (e.g., 608N, 608O, and/or 608P), and then displays a summary interface, such as summary interface 2109 in fig. 21E1, according to the selected option.
In some embodiments, the process for transmitting the communication includes aligning with and/or connecting to a communication network. For example, in some embodiments, in response to detecting selection 2150a of send message button 604G via satellite communication in fig. 21A or after initiating transmission of the communication (e.g., in response to detecting expiration of timer 2109b or selection 2150l of send option 2109C in fig. 21E 1), computer system 600 provides a user interface, prompt, and/or output for aligning with and/or connecting to a satellite communication network, as described with reference to fig. 9C-9U and/or process 1000, such as alignment user interface 2110 shown in fig. 21F. The alignment user interface 2110 includes the alignment element 909 described with reference to, for example, fig. 9C through 9J and 9O through 9P.
When the process for transmitting the communication is in a state of alignment and/or connection with the satellite communication network, the computer system 600 may detect a request to stop displaying a user interface for the process for transmitting the communication. For example, while the aim user interface 2110 is displayed, the computer system 600 detects a request to stop displaying the aim user interface 2110 (e.g., a request to display a system user interface such as a lock screen, a wake screen, or a home screen). In fig. 21F, input 2150h (e.g., a press of a physical button) corresponds to a request to lock the user interface of computer system 600, and input 2150h (e.g., a tap, swipe up from a predefined portion of display 601 and/or interface 2110, and/or other input) corresponds to a request to display a home screen (e.g., 1304 depicted in fig. 13A). In some embodiments, in response to detecting input 2150h, computer system 600 displays active user interface object 2106 as shown in fig. 21G on home screen 2108 as shown in fig. 21D.
In response to detecting input 2150G, computer system 600 locks the user interface of computer system 600, including turning off or dimming display 601, or displaying user interface 2102, as shown in fig. 21G. In some embodiments, computer system 600 displays user interface 2102 in response to detecting input 2150 g. In some embodiments, computer system 600 turns off display 601 in response to input 2150g, and then displays user interface 2102 in response to detecting further input, such as a button press on computer system 600, a contact on display 601, and/or movement of computer system 600 (e.g., movement meeting movement criteria). As described with reference to, for example, fig. 21C, the user interface 2102 is a system user interface such as a lock screen or a wake screen that is displayed when the computer system 600 transitions from a low power state (e.g., when the computer system 600 turns on the display 601).
In FIG. 21G, computer system 600 displays notification 2112a, notification 2112b, and active user interface object 2106 on user interface 2102. As described with reference to fig. 21C and 21D, the appearance of the active user interface object 2106 is based on the current state of a process for transmitting the communication via satellite communication. In contrast to the active user interface object 2106 in fig. 21C and 21D, the process indicator 2106a is the same (e.g., the active user interface object 2106 corresponds to the same process in fig. 21G as in fig. 21C and 21D), while the process graphic 2106b and the process status indicator 2106C are different because the state of the process in fig. 21G for sending the communication is different from the state of the process in fig. 21C and 21D for sending the communication.
In fig. 21G, since the process for transmitting the communication is in a state of alignment and/or connection with the satellite communication network, process graphic 2106b displays a graphical element (e.g., 931) corresponding to the state of alignment with the satellite communication network and indicates that the user may take an action to align with the satellite communication network (e.g., a curved arrow indicating that computer system 600 is turned left). Similarly, because the process for transmitting the communication is in an aligned and/or connected state with the satellite communication network, the process status indicator 2106c displays the connection status between the computer system 600 and the satellite communication network (e.g., "unconnected"), actions that the user may take to align with the satellite communication network (e.g., "turn left to find a satellite"), and graphical indications (e.g., exclamation marks within circles) that indicate that the computer system 600 is not connected to the satellite communication network. In some embodiments, the active user interface object 2106 is (or includes features of) a banner 926 described with reference to, for example, fig. 9K-9M 1 when the process for transmitting the communication is in a state of alignment and/or connection with a satellite communication network.
As the connection state of computer system 600 changes, active user interface object 2106 updates to reflect the current connection state of computer system 600. For example, when computer system 600 is rotated to the left as indicated in action user interface object 2106 in FIG. 21G by an amount that properly aligns computer system 600 with a satellite communications network, computer system 600 begins establishing a connection with the satellite communications network. In response to a change in the state of the process for sending the communication (e.g., a change in the connection state from unaligned to aligned), computer system 600 updates active user interface object 2106, as shown in FIG. 21H. In particular, computer system 600 updates process graphic 2106b to indicate that computer system 600 is properly aligned, and updates process status indicator 2106c to indicate that computer system 600 is being connected (e.g., "connected …"), to indicate that the user holds the device pointing in the current direction (e.g., "remains pointed to the satellite to send and receive messages"), and to display a progress indicator (e.g., a ring, the filled portion of which represents the amount of progress) of connecting to the satellite communication network and/or sending the communication.
Turning to fig. 21I, computer system 600 has been successfully connected to a satellite communications network (e.g., computer system 600 has been connected) and the communications have been sent. In response, the process status indicator 2106c indicates that the computer system 600 is connected (e.g., by changing "in connection …" to "connected") and updates the progress indicator to indicate that the message has been sent (e.g., that the ring is completely filled or another indication that the message is being sent is displayed in the user interface).
Turning to fig. 21J, computer system 600 is no longer connected to the satellite communications network because the satellite has moved outside the range of computer system 600. In response, computer system 600 updates process graphic 2106b to indicate that computer system 600 is not connected and that alignment is not currently possible (e.g., process graphic 2106b does not indicate an action to align computer system 600). Computer system 600 updates process status indicator 2106c to indicate that satellite communications are currently unavailable (e.g., by changing "connected" to "service unavailable"), to indicate the amount of time until the next satellite will be available (e.g., "next satellite available after 4 minutes"), and to display a graphical indication of the status (e.g., an exclamation mark in an octagon, or other indication of the status).
Turning to fig. 21K, computer system 600 has successfully re-established a connection to a satellite communications network. In response, computer system 600 updates (e.g., returns) process status indicator 2106c to the same state as in FIG. 21I, except that there is no process indicator because no new message is being sent. In fig. 21K, computer system 600 has received a message from an emergency service. In some embodiments, the emergency service is a recipient of the communication and the message from the emergency service is a response to the communication. In response to receiving the message from the emergency service, computer system 600 displays a message notification 2114 on user interface 2102. For example, as shown in fig. 2K, computer system 600 updates the notification stack to display message notification 2114 as the top or first notification in the notification stack that includes notification 2112a and/or notification 2112 b. The message notification 2114 includes an indication of the application associated with the notification (e.g., an icon representing a conversation bubble of the messaging application), an indication of the sender (e.g., the text "emergency SOS" and a circle with "SOS" inside), at least a portion of the content of the message (e.g., "hello, we have received your request"), and an indication of the time at which the message was received (e.g., "now"). In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 21K, the active user interface object 2106 is moved (e.g., moved up) in order to display the message notification 2114 (e.g., the active user interface object 2106 has not been removed and/or replaced by the message notification 2114; and/or the active user interface object 2106 is displayed concurrently with the message notification 2114). In some implementations, the computer system 600 is unlocked in response to a user aligning a sensor (e.g., a camera) with a user's face for facial recognition, a user placing a finger on a fingerprint sensor for a fingerprint ID, and/or entering a personal identification number or password.
In fig. 21K, computer system 600 detects selection 2150i (e.g., tap or other selection input) of message notification 2114. In response to detecting the selection of the message notification 2114 (and in some embodiments, an input to unlock the computer system 600), the computer system 600 displays a messaging user interface 2116 of the messaging application, as shown in fig. 21L. The messaging user interface 2116 includes a message area 2116a that includes messages between a user associated with the computer system 600 and emergency services. In fig. 21L, a message area 2116a includes: a message 2116b including a summary of the communication sent to the emergency service as a result of the process for sending the communication via satellite communication; and a message 2116c received from the emergency service, the message corresponding to a message associated with the message notification 2114.
In some embodiments, when the messaging user interface 2116 is displayed (e.g., in response to selection 2150 i), the computer system 600 does not display (e.g., stops displaying) the active user interface object 2106, e.g., because the messaging user interface 2116 is not a system user interface. In fig. 21L, upon display of the messaging user interface 2116, the computer system 600 displays the banner 926 described with reference to fig. 9K-9N 1 (e.g., in place of the active user interface object 2106).
FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating a method for providing user interface objects corresponding to a process using a computer system, according to some embodiments. The method 2200 is performed at a computer system (e.g., 100, 300, 500, 600, 900, 1100, 1300A, 1300B, 1500A, 1500B, 1500C, smart phone, smartwatch, laptop, desktop computer, and/or tablet computer) in communication with a display generating component (e.g., 601, 901, 1106, 1302A, 1302B, 1502A, 1502B, 1502C, a display controller, a display device, a monitor, and/or a touch-sensitive display system) and one or more input devices (e.g., 601, 901, 1106, 1302A, 1302B, 1502A, 1502B, 1502C, 617a, 617B, 617C, a touch-sensitive surface, a touch screen, a button, a keyboard, a mouse, a camera, a rotatable input mechanism, and/or a microphone). Some operations in method 2200 are optionally combined, the order of some operations are optionally changed, and some operations are optionally omitted.
As described below, the method 2200 provides an intuitive way for providing user interface objects corresponding to a process. The method reduces the cognitive burden on a user to provide user interface objects corresponding to a process, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-powered computing devices, enabling a user to interact with user interface objects corresponding to a process faster and more efficiently saves power and increases the time interval between battery charges.
The computer system detects (2202), via one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs (e.g., 2150a, 616M, 612M, 613M, 608N, 610N, 608O, 608P, 608Q, 604R, 604S, 906A, 906B, contact and/or touch gestures on the touch-sensitive surface, air gestures, mouse clicks, key presses, button presses, and/or voice commands) corresponding to a request to initiate a process for sending a communication (e.g., an emergency communication, a short message, and/or an audio message) to a respective recipient (e.g., an emergency service, a designated entity, and/or an emergency contact). In response to detecting the set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to initiate a process for sending communications to a respective recipient, the computer system initiates (2204) a process for sending communications to a responding recipient (e.g., the processes described in fig. 6M-6Y, method 800, fig. 9B-9U, and/or method 1000, or portions thereof). During a process for sending the communication to the respective recipient (e.g., when a process for sending the communication to the respective recipient is active and/or when a (e.g., unique and/or specific) user interface associated with the process for sending the communication to the respective recipient is displayed), the computer system detects (2206), via one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs (e.g., 2150B, 2150c, 2150d, 2150g, and/or 2150 h) corresponding to a request to display a system user interface (e.g., 2102, 2108, 1900, 1304, 1506B, 1508A, 1514A, 1524B, other than the user interface associated with the process for sending the communication to the respective recipient).
In response to detecting the set of one or more inputs corresponding to the request to display the system user interface, the computer system displays (2208) (e.g., concurrently displays) the system user interface (e.g., a user interface of an operating system, such as a lock screen, a wake screen, a home screen, a notification center, or other system user interface or another application other than an application for sending messages) and a user interface object (e.g., 2106) (e.g., notification, text, graphics, icon, button, affordance, banner, pop-up window, and/or selectable graphical user interface object) corresponding to the communication (e.g., corresponding to a process for sending the communication) (in some embodiments, the user interface object is overlaid on the system user interface), including: in accordance with determining that the process for sending the communication to the respective recipient is in a first state (e.g., 600 in FIG. 21B), the computer system displays (2210) a user interface object corresponding to the communication in a first appearance (e.g., 2106 in FIG. 21C, first visual appearance, text, graphics, image, icon, color, font, highlighting, and/or animation; appearance indicating the first state of the process for sending the communication to the respective recipient); and in accordance with a determination that the process for sending the communication to the respective recipient is in a second state (e.g., 600 in fig. 21F) different from the first state, the computer system displays (2212) a user interface object corresponding to the communication in a second appearance (e.g., 2106 in fig. 21G, a second visual appearance, text, graphics, images, icons, colors, fonts, highlighting and/or animations; appearance indicating the second state of the process for sending the communication to the respective recipient), the second appearance being different from the first appearance (e.g., the appearance of the user interface object being based on the current state of the process for sending the communication to the respective recipient). In some embodiments, the user interface object corresponding to the communication is displayed concurrently with (or overlaid on) the user interface of an application other than the application used to generate, compose, and/or send the communication, rather than or in addition to being displayed concurrently with the system user interface. Displaying a system user interface and a user interface object corresponding to the communication, wherein the appearance of the user interface object is based on the state of a process for transmitting the communication, doing so provides information to a user regarding the state of the process, and enables the user to interact with the process with fewer errors while the system user interface is displayed (e.g., aligning a computer system with a satellite, transmitting a message, and/or viewing a received message), provides improved visual feedback to the user, reduces the number of inputs required to perform an operation, and performs an operation when a set of conditions has been met without further user input. Displaying a system user interface and a user interface object corresponding to the communication, wherein the appearance of the user interface object is based on the state of a process for transmitting the communication, which allows the computer system to perform a process for transmitting the communication via an alternative communication network (e.g., generating a communication and/or connecting to an alternative communication network) while being used for other purposes, and optimizing the use of limited space on the display, which enables the user to operate the computer system more quickly and efficiently, reduces power usage, and extends battery life.
In some embodiments, a process for transmitting a communication to a respective recipient includes: displaying a set of one or more user interfaces (e.g., 602M, 602N, 602O, 602P, 602Q, 602R, 602S, 602T, 602U, 602V, and/or 602W) for generating the communication (e.g., generating content of the communication); while displaying the set of one or more user interfaces for generating the communication, detecting the set of one or more inputs (e.g., 2150b and/or 2150 c) corresponding to a request to display a system user interface; and the appearance of the user interface object corresponding to the communication indicates that the process for sending the communication to the respective recipient is in a state in which the set of one or more user interfaces for generating the communication is displayed (e.g., 2106 in fig. 21C). In some embodiments, the process for transmitting the communication to the respective recipient includes displaying a set of selectable communication content options corresponding to respective content of the communication. In some embodiments, the set of selectable communication content options is specific to a mode for communicating via the alternative communication network (e.g., a low bandwidth communication mode). In some embodiments, the set of one or more user interfaces for generating the communication includes the user interfaces, options, and/or operations described in fig. 6M-6Y and/or method 800. Displaying a user interface for generating the communication enables the computer system to provide the option of being optimal for the communication (e.g., requiring limited bandwidth), reducing the amount of input required to generate the communication (e.g., without using a keyboard), and guiding the user through the process for generating the communication, which provides the user with improved visual feedback, reducing the amount of input required to perform the operation, and providing additional control options without cluttering the user interface with additional display controls. Indicating that the process is in a state that displays a user interface for generating the communication allows the computer system to be used for other purposes while generating the communication and optimizes the use of the limited space on the display, which enables the user to operate the computer system more quickly and efficiently, reduces power usage, and extends battery life.
In some embodiments, the process for transmitting the communication to the respective recipient comprises: displaying a prompt (e.g., notification, banner, text, graphical element, audio, and/or instruction; and/or 908C, 908D, 908E, 908F, 908G, 908H, 908I, 908J, 908O1, 908P, 909, 926, and/or 931) that causes a user to take action to connect to (or in some embodiments remain connected to) an alternative communication network via which the communication is to be sent; the set of one or more inputs (e.g., 2150g and/or 2150 h) that detect a request corresponding to displaying a system user interface occur while displaying a prompt for a user to take an action to connect to an alternative communication network; and the appearance of the user interface object corresponding to the communication indicates that the process for sending the communication to the respective recipient is in a state that displays a prompt (e.g., 2106 in fig. 21G, 21H, 21I, 21J, or 21K) for the user to take an action to connect to the alternative communication network. In some embodiments, the user interface object corresponding to the communication includes graphical element 931 and/or the content of text elements 908C, 908D, 908E, 908F, 908G, 908H, 908I, 908J, 908O1, or 908P, depending on the alignment and/or the status of the connection between the computer system and the alternative communication network. In some embodiments, the user interface object corresponding to the communication is (or includes content of) banner 926 in fig. 9K, 9L, 9M, or 9M1, depending on the state of alignment and/or connection between the computer system and the alternative communication network. In some embodiments, the process for transmitting the communication to the respective recipient includes the user interfaces and/or features described in fig. 9C-9Q and method 1000. In some embodiments, the prompt to cause the user to take an action to connect to the alternative communication network includes instructions to move and/or position at least a portion of the computer system in a particular direction or location (e.g., turn left, point up, and/or move out). In some embodiments, the computer system displays a prompt for the user to take action to connect to the alternative communication network in accordance with a determination that the computer system is not connected to the alternative communication network (e.g., not properly aligned to communicate with one or more satellites of the alternative communication network). In some embodiments, the process for sending the communication to the respective recipient includes displaying an indication of a status of the connection (e.g., unconnected, poorly connected, attempting to connect, in-connection, and/or connected) between the computing system and the alternative communication network. Displaying cues that cause a user to take action to connect to an alternative communication network (e.g., providing a connection assistant) allows the user to quickly and efficiently solve problems (e.g., misalignment and/or obstruction) that prevent a computer system from connecting to an alternative communication network with less input, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform an operation. Displaying hints that enable a user to take action to connect to an alternative communication network (e.g., providing a connection assistant) allows the computer system to be used for other purposes while connecting to the alternative communication network and optimizes the use of limited space on the display, which enables the user to operate the computer system more quickly and efficiently, reduces power usage, and extends battery life.
In some embodiments, displaying the user interface object corresponding to the communication includes displaying the user interface object in an appearance based on the status of the communication (e.g., sending, sent, receiving, or waiting to receive) (e.g., 2106c in fig. 21H includes a partially filled message progress ring; 2106c in fig. 21I includes a fully filled message progress ring). In some embodiments, the first state is a first message state, and the first appearance indicates the first message state (e.g., "in transmission"); and the second state is a second message state, and the second appearance indicates the second message state (e.g., "in reception"). Displaying the user interface object in an appearance based on the status of the communication provides information to the user regarding the progress of the communication and enables the user to interact with the process with fewer errors while displaying the system user interface, which provides improved visual feedback to the user and reduces the amount of input required to perform the operation. Displaying the user interface object in an appearance based on the status of the communication allows the computer system to be used for other purposes while monitoring the status of the communication and optimizing the use of limited space on the display, which enables the user to operate the computer system more quickly and efficiently, reduces power usage, and extends battery life.
In some embodiments, the system user interface is a displayed user interface (e.g., 2108, 1304, 1506B, 1514A, user interface 400, home screen, and/or application diving board) that includes user interface objects corresponding to respective applications that, when activated, cause the computer system to display the respective applications corresponding to the activated user interface objects. Displaying user interface objects and user interfaces including user interface objects corresponding to respective applications provides a user with access to other applications, allows a computer system to be used for other purposes while monitoring the status of a process for sending the communication to respective recipients and optimizes use of limited space on a display, which enables a user to operate the computer system more quickly and efficiently, reduces power usage, and extends battery life.
In some embodiments, the system user interface is a wake screen user interface (e.g., 2102, 1110, 1344A, 1524B, wake screen, and/or lock screen) that the computer system displays upon exiting an inactive state (e.g., low power state, sleep state, and/or dimmed state). Displaying user interface objects and user interfaces that are displayed when the computer system leaves the inactive state, doing so immediately provides the user with the state of the process for sending the communication to the respective recipient when the computer system leaves the inactive state, and enables the user to interact with the process more efficiently (e.g., without manually requesting the state of the process) and/or with fewer errors, providing the user with improved visual feedback, reducing the number of inputs required to perform the operation, enabling the user to operate the computer system more quickly and efficiently, reducing power usage, and extending battery life.
In some embodiments, the process for sending the communication to the respective recipients includes a first sub-process for generating (e.g., composing) the communication (e.g., the first sub-process includes a user interface (such as 602M, 602N, 602O, 602P, 602Q, 602R, 602S, 602T, 602U, 602V, and/or 602W), options, and/or operations described in fig. 6M-6Y and method 800), and a second sub-process for connecting to the communication network (e.g., the second sub-process includes a user interface (such as 2110, 902C, 902D, 902E, 902F, 902G, 902H, 902I, 902J, 902O1, or 902P) and/or features described in fig. 9C-9Q and method 1000). Executing the first sub-process for generating the communication enables the computer system to provide the option of being optimal for the communication (e.g., requiring limited bandwidth), reduce the amount of input required to generate the communication (e.g., without using a keyboard), and guide the user through the process for generating the communication, which provides the user with improved visual feedback, reduces the amount of input required to perform the operation, and provides additional control options without cluttering the user interface with additional display controls. Performing the second sub-process for connecting to the communication network enables the computer system to provide a user interface that allows a user to quickly and efficiently solve problems (e.g., misalignment and/or obstruction) that prevent the computer system from connecting to the communication network with less input, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform the operation.
In some embodiments, displaying the system user interface and the user interface object corresponding to the communication includes simultaneously displaying the system user interface (e.g., 2102, 1110, 1344A, or 1524B) and the user interface object corresponding to the communication (e.g., the computer system displaying the user interface object corresponding to the communication in the system user interface (or overlaying the system user interface)), and: while simultaneously displaying the system user interface and the user interface object corresponding to the communication, the computer system detects a set of one or more inputs (e.g., 2150 d) corresponding to a request to display a second system user interface that is different from the system user interface; and in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs corresponding to the request to display the second system user interface, the computer system concurrently displays the second system user interface (e.g., 2108, 1304, 1506B or 1514A) and the user interface object corresponding to the communication (e.g., the computer system displays the user interface object corresponding to the communication in the second system user interface; and/or when the system user interface changes, the computer system maintains a display of the user interface object corresponding to the communication). In some embodiments, the system user interface and/or the second system user interface is a wake screen, a home screen, a lock screen, and/or a user interface that includes two or more notifications. Displaying user interface objects having multiple different system user interfaces allows the computer system to be used for other purposes and optimizes use of the limited space on the display, while enabling a user to monitor the status of a process for sending the communication to the respective recipient and to interact with the process more efficiently (e.g., with less user input) when navigating the different user interfaces, which reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation, enables the user to operate the computer system more quickly and efficiently, reduces power usage, and extends battery life.
In some embodiments, after displaying the user interface object corresponding to the communication in a third appearance (e.g., the first appearance or the second appearance) (e.g., in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs corresponding to the request to display the system user interface): in accordance with a determination that a process for sending the communication to the respective recipient has changed state (e.g., in response to detecting a change in state of the process for sending the communication to the respective recipient), the computer system displays a user interface object corresponding to the communication in a fourth appearance that is different from the third appearance, wherein the fourth appearance provides information regarding the changed state of the process for sending the communication to the respective recipient (e.g., when the state of the process for sending the communication to the respective recipient changes, the computer system changes and/or updates the appearance of the user interface object corresponding to the communication over time). For example, the appearance of the user interface object 2106 changes from fig. 21G to fig. 21H, from fig. 21H to fig. 21I, from fig. 21I to fig. 21J, and from fig. 21J to fig. 21K. Changing the appearance of the user interface object in response to determining that the process for sending the communication to the respective recipient has changed state allows the computer system to be used for other purposes while providing the user with up-to-date information about the state of the process, allows the user to more efficiently interact with the process (e.g., using less user input), and optimizes use of the limited space on the display, which provides improved visual feedback to the user, reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation, and performs the operation when a set of conditions has been met without further user input.
In some embodiments, determining that the process for sending the communication to the respective recipient has changed state includes determining that a connection state (e.g., unconnected, bad connection, in-connection, and/or connected) of the computer system with an alternative communication network (e.g., a non-terrestrial wireless communication network, such as a satellite communication network) via which the communication is to be sent (and/or in some embodiments, an aligned state) has changed from a first connection state to a second connection state (e.g., from unconnected in fig. 21G to connected in fig. 21H, from connected in fig. 21H to connected in fig. 21I, from connected in fig. 21I to unavailable service in fig. 21J, and from unavailable service in fig. 21J to connected in fig. 21K); displaying the user interface object corresponding to the communication in a third appearance includes: based on the first connection state, displaying in a user interface object corresponding to the communication a prompt (e.g., 2106b, 2106c, notification, banner, text, graphical element, audio, and/or instruction) for the user to take a first action to connect to (or, in some embodiments, remain connected to) the alternative communication network; and displaying the user interface object corresponding to the communication in a fourth appearance includes: based on the second connection state, a prompt (e.g., 2106b, 2106c, notification, banner, text, graphical element, audio, and/or instructions) is displayed in the user interface object corresponding to the communication that causes the user to take a second action different from the first action to connect to (or, in some embodiments, remain connected to) the alternative communication network (e.g., 2106b and/or 2106c changes in fig. 21G-21K based on the connection state of computer system 600). Displaying hints that enable a user to take action to connect to an alternative communication network based on the connection status of the computer system to the alternative communication network enables the user to quickly and efficiently solve the problem of preventing the computer system from connecting to the alternative communication network (e.g., misalignment and/or blockage) with less input, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation. Displaying hints that enable a user to take action to connect to an alternative communication network based on the connection status of the computer system to the alternative communication network allows the computer system to be used for other purposes while connected to the alternative communication network and optimizes the use of limited space on the display, which enables the user to operate the computer system more quickly and efficiently, reduces power usage, and extends battery life.
In some embodiments, upon displaying a user interface object corresponding to the communication, the computer system displays an indication (e.g., 2114, notification, graphical indication, icon, color, font, text, animation, symbol, thumbnail, image, and/or glyph) of the message received from the respective recipient. Displaying an indication of a message received from a respective recipient informs the user of the received message, optimizes use of the limited space on the display, and allows the user to monitor the status of the incoming message and the process and interact with the process more efficiently (e.g., with less user input) while displaying a system user interface, which provides improved visual feedback to the user, reduces the number of inputs required to perform an operation, enables the user to operate the computer system more quickly and efficiently, reduces power usage, and prolongs battery life.
In some embodiments, displaying the indication of the message received from the respective recipient includes displaying the indication of the message received from the respective recipient (e.g., the content of 2114 is based on (and/or includes) the content of 2116 c) in an appearance based on the content (e.g., text and/or image) of the message received from the respective recipient. In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the message from the respective recipient includes first content, the computer system displays the indication in a first appearance (e.g., the first content of the message); and in accordance with a determination that the message from the respective recipient includes second content different from the first content, the computer system displays the indication in a second appearance (e.g., the second content of the message) different from the first appearance of the indication. Displaying an indication of a message received from a respective recipient based on the appearance of the content of the message received from the respective recipient allows the computer system to provide information about the message content to the user while being used for other purposes, enabling the user to interact with the process more efficiently (e.g., with less user input), and optimizing the use of limited space on the display, which provides the user with improved visual feedback, reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation, enables the user to operate the computer system more quickly and efficiently, reduces power usage, and prolongs battery life.
In some embodiments, the computer system detects a selection of a user interface object corresponding to the communication (e.g., 2150e or 2150 f) (e.g., a tap or other touch input on the user interface object corresponding to the communication, a press of a button when the user interface object corresponding to the communication is specified and/or focused, and/or a voice command to select the user interface object corresponding to the communication); and in response to detecting a selection of a user interface object corresponding to the communication, the computer system displays a user interface (e.g., ,602M、602N、602O、602P、602Q、602R、602S、602T、602U、602V、602W、902C、902D、902E、902F、902G、902H、902I、902J、902K、902L、902M、902O、902O1 or 902P, based on a state of a process for transmitting the communication to a respective recipient via the alternative communication network) that provides more detailed information about the process for transmitting the communication to the respective recipient via the alternative communication network (e.g., information about the state of transmitting and/or receiving the communication, options for transmitting and/or receiving the communication, and/or controls for performing operations associated with transmitting and/or receiving the communication). For example, in response to a selection of 2106 in fig. 21G, 21H, 21I, 21J, or 21K, computer system 600 displays user interface 2110 in a state corresponding to state 2106 at the time of the selection. In response to detecting selection of a user interface object corresponding to the communication, displaying a user interface providing more detailed information about a process for transmitting the communication to a respective recipient via an alternative communication network, doing so provides a quick and efficient method for accessing and/or interacting with the process for transmitting the communication to the respective recipient, which reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation, provides additional control options without cluttering the user interface with additional display controls, enables a user to operate the computer system more quickly and efficiently, reduces power usage, and prolongs battery life.
It is noted that the details of the process described above with respect to method 2200 (e.g., fig. 22) also apply in a similar manner to the method described above. For example, methods 700, 800, 1000, 1200, 1400, 1600, 1800, and/or 2000 optionally include one or more of the features of the various methods described above with reference to method 2200. For example, methods 700, 800, 1000, 1200, 1400, 1600, 1800, and/or 2000 may be processes corresponding to user interface objects in method 2200. For the sake of brevity, these details are not repeated hereinafter.
The foregoing description, for purposes of explanation, has been described with reference to specific embodiments. However, the illustrative discussions above are not intended to be exhaustive or to limit the invention to the precise forms disclosed. Many modifications and variations are possible in light of the above teaching. The embodiments were chosen and described in order to best explain the principles of the techniques and their practical applications. Those skilled in the art will be able to best utilize the techniques and various embodiments with various modifications as are suited to the particular use contemplated.
While the present disclosure and examples have been fully described with reference to the accompanying drawings, it is to be noted that various changes and modifications will become apparent to those skilled in the art. It should be understood that such variations and modifications are considered to be included within the scope of the disclosure and examples as defined by the claims.
As described above, one aspect of the present technology is to collect and use data available from a variety of sources to provide an efficient method and interface for managing communications. The present disclosure contemplates that in some examples, such collected data may include personal information data that uniquely identifies or may be used to contact or locate a particular person. Such personal information data may include demographic data, location-based data, telephone numbers, email addresses, social network IDs, home addresses, data or records related to the user's health or fitness level (e.g., vital sign measurements, medication information, exercise information), date of birth, or any other identifying or personal information.
The present disclosure recognizes that the use of such personal information data in the present technology may be used to benefit users. For example, personal information data may be used to deliver advice content and emergency information that is of greater use to the user. Thus, the use of such personal information data enables a user to use a more efficient emergency user interface for recipients containing relevant emergency information and advice. In addition, the present disclosure contemplates other uses for personal information data that are beneficial to the user. For example, health and fitness data may be used to provide insight into the overall health of a user, or may be used as positive feedback to individuals using technology to pursue health goals.
The present disclosure contemplates that entities responsible for collecting, analyzing, disclosing, transmitting, storing, or otherwise using such personal information data will adhere to established privacy policies and/or privacy practices. In particular, such entities should exercise and adhere to privacy policies and practices that are recognized as meeting or exceeding industry or government requirements for maintaining the privacy and security of personal information data. Such policies should be readily accessible to the user and should be updated as the collection and/or use of the data changes. Personal information from users should be collected for legal and reasonable use by entities and not shared or sold outside of these legal uses. In addition, such collection/sharing should be performed after informed consent is received from the user. In addition, such entities should consider taking any necessary steps to defend and secure access to such personal information data and to ensure that others who have access to personal information data adhere to their privacy policies and procedures. In addition, such entities may subject themselves to third party evaluations to prove compliance with widely accepted privacy policies and practices. In addition, policies and practices should be adjusted to collect and/or access specific types of personal information data and to suit applicable laws and standards including specific considerations of jurisdiction. For example, in the united states, the collection or acquisition of certain health data may be governed by federal and/or state law, such as the health insurance flow and liability act (HIPAA); while health data in other countries may be subject to other regulations and policies and should be processed accordingly. Thus, different privacy practices should be maintained for different personal data types in each country.
In spite of the foregoing, the present disclosure also contemplates embodiments in which a user selectively prevents use or access to personal information data. That is, the present disclosure contemplates that hardware elements and/or software elements may be provided to prevent or block access to such personal information data. For example, in terms of managing communications, the present technology may be configured to allow a user to choose to "opt-in" or "opt-out" to participate in the collection of personal information data during or at any time after registration with a service. As another example, the user may choose not to provide urgent data for the targeted content delivery service. For another example, the user may choose to limit the length of time that data related to the emergency is maintained, or to completely prohibit the development of a baseline emergency profile. In addition to providing the "opt-in" and "opt-out" options, the present disclosure also contemplates providing notifications related to accessing or using personal information. For example, the user may be notified that his personal information data will be accessed when the application is downloaded, and then be reminded again just before the personal information data is accessed by the application.
Further, it is an object of the present disclosure that personal information data should be managed and processed to minimize the risk of inadvertent or unauthorized access or use. Once the data is no longer needed, risk can be minimized by limiting the data collection and deleting the data. In addition, and when applicable, included in certain health-related applications, the data de-identification may be used to protect the privacy of the user. De-identification may be facilitated by removing specific identifiers (e.g., date of birth, etc.), controlling the amount or specificity of stored data (e.g., collecting location data at a city level instead of at an address level), controlling how data is stored (e.g., aggregating data among users), and/or other methods, as appropriate.
Thus, while the present disclosure broadly covers the use of personal information data to implement one or more of the various disclosed embodiments, the present disclosure also contemplates that the various embodiments may be implemented without accessing such personal information data. That is, various embodiments of the present technology do not fail to function properly due to the lack of all or a portion of such personal information data. For example, the urgent information and suggested recipients may be selected and delivered to the user by inferring preferences based on non-personal information data or absolute minimum amount of personal information such as content requested by a device associated with the user, other non-personal information available for urgent services, or publicly available information.

Claims (306)

1. A method, comprising:
At a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices:
Detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to a request to initiate communication via the computer system; and
In response to detecting the user input, displaying a first user interface via the display generating component, comprising:
In accordance with a determination that the computer system is not reachable to the terrestrial wireless communication network, displaying respective selectable communication options that, when selected via the one or more input devices, initiate a process for communicating via the non-terrestrial wireless communication network; and
In accordance with a determination that the computer system is capable of reaching a respective terrestrial wireless communication network, a process for communicating via the respective terrestrial wireless communication network is initiated without displaying the respective selectable communication options.
2. The method of claim 1, further comprising:
upon displaying the respective selectable communication options:
attempting to initiate a procedure for communicating via the respective terrestrial wireless communication network; and
Detecting, via the one or more input devices, selection of the respective selectable communication options; and
Responsive to detecting the selection of the respective selectable communication option, an attempt to initiate a process for communicating via the terrestrial wireless communication network is stopped.
3. The method of any of claims 1-2, wherein displaying the first user interface includes displaying a cancel communication option in the first user interface that, when selected via the one or more input devices, initiates a process that stops attempting to initiate the communication.
4. A method according to any one of claims 1 to 3, further comprising:
upon display of the respective selectable communication options, an attempt is made to initiate a process for communicating via the respective terrestrial wireless communication network.
5. The method of any of claims 1-4, wherein displaying the respective selectable communication options occurs in accordance with a determination that a terrestrial wireless communication network is not reachable and the communication is an emergency communication.
6. The method of any of claims 1-5, wherein the determining that the computer system is not reachable to a terrestrial wireless communication network comprises determining that the computer system is not reachable to a first terrestrial wireless communication network that is unassociated with the computer system.
7. The method of any of claims 1-6, wherein the first user interface comprises a plurality of selectable telephone call options.
8. The method of any one of claims 1 to 7, wherein:
The user input corresponding to the request to initiate the communication includes one or more inputs directed to a second user interface; and
The request to initiate the communication is a request to initiate communication with an emergency service.
9. The method of any one of claims 1 to 8, further comprising:
detecting, via the one or more input devices, an input corresponding to a selection of the respective selectable communication option; and
In response to detecting the input corresponding to selection of the respective selectable communication option, a process for communicating via the non-terrestrial wireless communication network is initiated.
10. The method of any one of claims 1 to 9, further comprising:
in accordance with a determination that the terrestrial wireless communication network is not reachable and a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the input corresponding to the request to initiate communication was detected, a process for communicating via the non-terrestrial wireless communication network is initiated.
11. The method of claim 10, further comprising:
a visual indication of a countdown of the remaining time until expiration of the predetermined period of time is displayed.
12. The method of any of claims 1-11, wherein the process for communicating via the non-terrestrial wireless communication network comprises displaying a second user interface different from the first user interface.
13. The method of any of claims 1-12, wherein communicating via the non-terrestrial wireless communication network comprises communicating via a short message or an audio call.
14. The method of any of claims 1-13, wherein communicating via the non-terrestrial wireless communication network comprises initiating a communication session via the non-terrestrial wireless communication network, the method further comprising:
after initiating the communication session activity via the non-terrestrial wireless communication network:
Detecting a user input corresponding to a request to end the communication session; and
In response to detecting the user input corresponding to a request to end the communication session, a prompt is provided confirming the request to end the communication session.
15. The method of any one of claims 1 to 14, further comprising:
in accordance with a determination that the computer system is not reachable to the first respective terrestrial wireless communication network, displaying, via the display generating component, an indication of a communication capability of the computer system; and
In accordance with a determination that the computer system is capable of reaching the first respective terrestrial wireless communication network, the indication of the communication capability status of the computer system is relinquished from display.
16. The method of claim 15, wherein displaying the indication of the communication capabilities of the computer system comprises displaying a first communication status indicator indicating the capabilities of the computer system to communicate via a terrestrial wireless communication network different from the first respective terrestrial wireless communication network.
17. The method of claim 16, wherein displaying the first communication status indicator comprises:
In accordance with a determination that the computer system is capable of reaching a second corresponding terrestrial wireless communication network that is different from the first corresponding terrestrial wireless communication network, the first communication status indicator is displayed having a first appearance.
18. The method of claims 16 to 17, wherein displaying the first communication status indicator comprises:
in accordance with a determination that the computer system is not able to reach any terrestrial wireless communication network, the first communication status indicator is displayed having a second appearance that is different from the first appearance of the first communication status indicator.
19. The method of any of claims 15-18, wherein displaying the indication of the communication capability of the computer system comprises:
In accordance with a determination that the computer system is capable of reaching a non-terrestrial wireless communication network, a second communication status indicator, different from the first communication status indicator, is displayed.
20. The method of any of claims 15 to 19, further comprising:
The indication of the communication capability of the computer system is displayed concurrently with an indication of Wi-Fi connectivity.
21. The method of claim 20, wherein displaying the indication of Wi-Fi connectivity comprises displaying the indication of Wi-Fi connectivity without displaying an indication that the computer system is capable of reaching a non-terrestrial wireless communication network.
22. The method of any of claims 1-21, wherein displaying the first user interface comprises:
Displaying the first user interface without the respective selectable communication option prior to displaying the respective selectable communication option, and wherein displaying the respective communication option in accordance with a determination that the computer system is unable to reach a terrestrial wireless communication network is performed after an attempt to initiate communication via the respective terrestrial wireless communication network has failed.
23. The method of claim 22, wherein displaying the first user interface comprises displaying an end call button at a first location in the first user interface, wherein when selected, the end call button causes the computer system to cease attempting to initiate communication via the respective terrestrial wireless communication network, the method further comprising:
In accordance with the determination that the computer system is not capable of reaching a terrestrial wireless communication network, the end call button is displayed at a second location in the first user interface that is different from the first location in the first user interface.
24. The method of any of claims 22 to 23, further comprising:
In accordance with the determination that the computer system is not reachable to the terrestrial wireless communication network, a non-visual output is provided.
25. A non-transitory computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured for execution by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs comprising instructions for performing the method of any of claims 1-24.
26. A computer system configured to communicate with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising:
one or more processors; and
A memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs comprising instructions for performing the method of any of claims 1-24.
27. A computer system configured to communicate with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising:
apparatus for performing the method of any one of claims 1 to 24.
28. A computer program product comprising one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generating component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs comprising instructions for performing the method of any of claims 1-24.
29. A non-transitory computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured for execution by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs comprising instructions for:
Detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to a request to initiate communication via the computer system; and
In response to detecting the user input, displaying a first user interface via the display generating component, comprising:
In accordance with a determination that the computer system is not reachable to the terrestrial wireless communication network, displaying respective selectable communication options that, when selected via the one or more input devices, initiate a process for communicating via the non-terrestrial wireless communication network; and
In accordance with a determination that the computer system is capable of reaching a respective terrestrial wireless communication network, a process for communicating via the respective terrestrial wireless communication network is initiated without displaying the respective selectable communication options.
30. A computer system configured to communicate with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising:
one or more processors; and
A memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs comprising instructions for:
Detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to a request to initiate communication via the computer system; and
In response to detecting the user input, displaying a first user interface via the display generating component, comprising:
In accordance with a determination that the computer system is not reachable to the terrestrial wireless communication network, displaying respective selectable communication options that, when selected via the one or more input devices, initiate a process for communicating via the non-terrestrial wireless communication network; and
In accordance with a determination that the computer system is capable of reaching a respective terrestrial wireless communication network, a process for communicating via the respective terrestrial wireless communication network is initiated without displaying the respective selectable communication options.
31. A computer system configured to communicate with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising:
Apparatus for: detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to a request to initiate communication via the computer system; and
Apparatus for: in response to detecting the user input, displaying a first user interface via the display generating component, comprising:
In accordance with a determination that the computer system is not reachable to the terrestrial wireless communication network, displaying respective selectable communication options that, when selected via the one or more input devices, initiate a process for communicating via the non-terrestrial wireless communication network; and
In accordance with a determination that the computer system is capable of reaching a respective terrestrial wireless communication network, a process for communicating via the respective terrestrial wireless communication network is initiated without displaying the respective selectable communication options.
32. A computer program product comprising one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs comprising instructions for:
Detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to a request to initiate communication via the computer system; and
In response to detecting the user input, displaying a first user interface via the display generating component, comprising:
In accordance with a determination that the computer system is not reachable to the terrestrial wireless communication network, displaying respective selectable communication options that, when selected via the one or more input devices, initiate a process for communicating via the non-terrestrial wireless communication network; and
In accordance with a determination that the computer system is capable of reaching a respective terrestrial wireless communication network, a process for communicating via the respective terrestrial wireless communication network is initiated without displaying the respective selectable communication options.
33. A method, comprising:
At a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices:
when the computer system is in a low bandwidth communication mode:
Displaying, via the display generating component, a first set of selectable communication content options corresponding to respective content for communication, wherein the first set of selectable communication content options is specific to the low bandwidth communication mode;
Detecting, via the one or more input devices, a first set of one or more inputs corresponding to a selection of a first communication content option of the first set of selectable communication content options;
After detecting the first set of one or more inputs, displaying, via the display generating component, a second set of selectable communication content options corresponding to respective content for the communication, wherein the second set of selectable communication content options is specific to the low bandwidth communication mode;
Detecting, via the one or more input devices, a second set of one or more inputs corresponding to selection of a second communication content option of the second set of selectable communication content options;
Detecting an input corresponding to sending a request to include a communication of the content corresponding to the selection of the first communication content option and the second communication content option; and
In response to receiving the input corresponding to the request to send the communication, sending the communication including the content corresponding to the selection of the first communication content option and the second communication content option selected by the first set of one or more inputs and the second set of one or more inputs.
34. The method according to claim 33, wherein:
The first set of selectable communication content options includes three or more selectable communication content options specific to the low bandwidth communication mode; and
The second set of selectable communication content options includes three or more selectable communication content options specific to the low bandwidth communication mode.
35. The method of any of claims 33-34, wherein the second set of communication content options is based on the selection of the first communication content option.
36. The method of any of claims 33 to 35, wherein the first and second sets of communication content options are displayed without displaying a software keyboard.
37. The method of any one of claims 33 to 36, wherein:
The first set of communication content options occupies more than half of the display area; and
The second set of communication content options occupies more than half of the display area.
38. The method of any one of claims 33 to 37, wherein:
displaying the first set of selectable communication content options includes displaying the first set of selectable communication content options without displaying a messaging user interface; and
Displaying the second set of selectable communication content options includes displaying the first set of selectable communication content options without displaying the messaging user interface.
39. The method of any one of claims 33 to 38, further comprising:
The low bandwidth communication mode is entered in response to determining that the computer system is not capable of reaching a terrestrial wireless communication network.
40. The method of any of claims 33 to 39, wherein the first and/or second sets of communication content options include one or more options identifying an emergency type.
41. The method of any one of claims 33 to 40, wherein the first and/or second sets of communication content options include one or more options identifying a person.
42. The method of any one of claims 33 to 41, wherein the first and/or second sets of communication content options comprise one or more options indicating a status of a person.
43. The method of any of claims 33 to 42, wherein the first and/or second sets of communication content options comprise an option to alert emergency contacts.
44. The method of any one of claims 33 to 43, wherein displaying the first and/or second set of selectable communication content options comprises displaying selectable options for including text in the communication, which, when selected, display a keyboard.
45. The method of any one of claims 33 to 44, further comprising:
When the computer system is in the low bandwidth communication mode and prior to transmitting the communication including the content corresponding to the selection of the first communication content option and the second communication content option by the first set of one or more inputs and the second set of one or more inputs:
displaying a third set of selectable communication content options via the display generating means,
Wherein one or more selectable communication content options of the third set of selectable communication content options are required to be selected for sending the communication; and
Displaying a fourth set of selectable communication content options via the display generating means,
Wherein sending the communication occurs without selecting any of the selectable communication content options in the fourth set of selectable communication content options.
46. The method of any one of claims 33 to 45, wherein:
In accordance with a determination that the first set of selectable communication content options can be skipped, the first set of selectable communication content options includes a skip option;
In accordance with a determination that the first set of selectable communication content options cannot be skipped, displaying the first set of selectable communication content options without displaying a skip option;
in accordance with a determination that the second set of selectable communication content options can be skipped, the second set of selectable communication content options including a skip option; and
In accordance with a determination that the second set of selectable communication content options cannot be skipped, the second set of selectable communication content options is displayed without displaying a skip option.
47. The method of any one of claims 33 to 46, further comprising:
responsive to detecting the first set of one or more inputs corresponding to selection of the first communication content option:
In accordance with a determination that the first communication content option is a first type of communication content option, displaying a fifth set of selectable communication content options corresponding to respective content for the communication; and
In accordance with a determination that the first communication content option is a second type of communication content option different from the first type, the fifth set of selectable communication content options is forgone display.
48. The method of any one of claims 33 to 47, further comprising:
After detecting the second set of one or more inputs and before sending the communication comprising the content corresponding to the selection of the first and second communication content options selected by the first and second sets of one or more inputs, displaying, via the display generating means, a representation of at least a portion of the content corresponding to the selection of the first and second communication content options selected by the first and second sets of one or more inputs.
49. The method of any one of claims 33 to 48, further comprising:
After detecting the second set of one or more inputs:
displaying a transmission option via the display generating means;
detecting a selection of the transmission option; and
In response to detecting the selection of the send option, initiating includes sending a process including the communication including the content corresponding to the selection of the first communication content option and the second communication content option.
50. The method of claim 49, further comprising:
displaying a visual indication of a countdown of a predetermined period of time via the display generating component; and
In response to determining that the predetermined period of time has elapsed without detecting a selection of the transmission option, transmitting the communication including the content corresponding to the selection of the first communication content option and the second communication content option selected by the first set of one or more inputs and the second set of one or more inputs.
51. The method of any one of claims 33 to 50, further comprising:
In response to determining that a threshold period of time has elapsed after displaying the respective selectable communication content options without detecting a selection of the respective selectable communication content options via the one or more input devices, a communication is sent that includes content corresponding to the detected selection of the communication content options.
52. The method of claim 51, further comprising:
Before transmitting the communication including content corresponding to the detected selection of a communication content option, a visual indication of a countdown is displayed, the countdown indicating a remaining time until the communication including content corresponding to the detected selection of a communication content option is to be transmitted.
53. The method of any one of claims 51 to 52, further comprising:
Before sending the communication including content corresponding to the detected selection of a communication content option, a selectable cancel send option is displayed that, when selected, causes the computer system to forgo sending the communication including content corresponding to the detected selection of a communication content option.
54. The method of claim 51, wherein the display generating component is deactivated after displaying the selectable communication content options, the method further comprising:
in response to determining that the threshold period of time has elapsed without detecting the selection of the respective selectable communication content option, the display generating component is activated.
55. The method of any one of claims 33 to 54, wherein the communication includes emergency information and a location of the computer system.
56. The method of any one of claims 33 to 55, further comprising:
In response to receiving the input corresponding to the request to send the communication, a user interface of a messaging application is displayed.
57. The method of claim 56 wherein the user interface of the messaging application includes a message composition field.
58. The method of any one of claims 33 to 57, further comprising:
after transmitting the communication, displaying the alignment element in a first size; and
After displaying the alignment element in the first size, the display of the alignment element in the first size is stopped and the alignment element in a second size smaller than the first size is displayed.
59. The method of claim 58, further comprising:
a visual indication of a transmission status of the communication is displayed simultaneously with the alignment element.
60. The method of claim 59, further comprising:
A visual indication of a connection status of the computer system and a communication system for transmitting the communication via the low bandwidth communication mode is displayed simultaneously with the alignment element.
61. The method of any one of claims 33 to 60, further comprising:
before transmitting the communication:
In accordance with a determination that the computer system is not properly aligned for sending the communication via the low bandwidth communication mode, the alignment element is displayed.
62. The method of any one of claims 33 to 61, further comprising:
Displaying a visual indication of a connection status of the computer system with a communication system for transmitting the communication via the low bandwidth communication mode; and
In accordance with a determination that the computer system is not connected to the communication system for sending the communication via the low bandwidth communication mode, a visual indication of an error condition is displayed.
63. The method of claim 62, wherein the visual indication of the connection status of the computer system with the communication system for transmitting the communication via the low bandwidth communication mode comprises a selectable connection assistant option, the method further comprising:
Detecting a selection of the connection assistant option; and
In response to detecting the selection of the connection assistant option, instructions for connecting the computer system with the communication system for sending the communication via the low bandwidth communication mode are displayed.
64. The method of claim 62, wherein displaying the visual indication of an error condition includes displaying instructions for connecting the computer system with the communication system for transmitting the communication via the low bandwidth communication mode.
65. The method of claim 62, further comprising:
In response to detecting a change in the location of the computer system relative to the communication system for transmitting the communication via the low bandwidth communication mode, changing an appearance of an element indicating the location of the computer system relative to the communication system for transmitting the communication via the low bandwidth communication mode.
66. The method of claim 62, further comprising:
detecting a request to open an application while displaying the visual indication of the connection status of the computer system and the communication system for transmitting the communication via the low bandwidth communication mode; and
In response to detecting the request to open the application:
Ceasing to display at least a portion of the visual indication of the connection status of the computer system and the communication system for transmitting the communication via the low bandwidth communication mode; and
Displaying a selectable graphical element that, when selected, causes the computer system to display the visual indication of the connection status of the computer system with the communication system for transmitting the communication via the low bandwidth communication mode.
67. The method of any one of claims 33 to 66, further comprising:
in response to receiving the input corresponding to the request to send the communication, a send status element is displayed, wherein an appearance of the send status element is based on a progress of the sending of the communication.
68. The method of any one of claims 33 to 67, further comprising:
After transmitting the communication including the content corresponding to the selection of the first communication content option and the second communication content option selected by the first set of one or more inputs and the second set of one or more inputs, displaying a user interface for transmitting a second communication to one or more recipients of the communication including the content corresponding to the selection of the first communication content option and the second communication content option selected by the first set of one or more inputs and the second set of one or more inputs;
detecting a third set of one or more inputs corresponding to selection of content for the second communication and a request to send the second communication while the user interface for sending the second communication is displayed; and
In response to detecting the third set of one or more inputs, the second communication including the content selected by the third set of one or more inputs is transmitted.
69. The method of claim 68, wherein the user interface for transmitting the second communication includes a message composition field.
70. The method of any one of claims 33 to 69, further comprising:
The first set of communication content options and/or the second set of communication content options are displayed simultaneously with an end option that, when selected, causes the computer system to exit the low bandwidth communication mode.
71. The method of any one of claims 33 to 70, wherein:
the first set of communication content options and/or the second set of communication content options are displayed when the computer system is not connected to a system for transmitting the communication via the low bandwidth communication mode.
72. The method of any one of claims 33 to 71, wherein:
Transmitting the communication including the content corresponding to the selection of the first communication content option and the second communication content option selected by the first set of one or more inputs and the second set of one or more inputs includes:
Transmitting one or more additional communications;
transmitting the communication to a first receiver and a second receiver; and
The method further comprises the steps of:
Discarding communications received from the second receiver of the communication with the sender of the communication and the first receiver of the communication.
73. The method of any one of claims 33 to 72, further comprising:
When the computer system is in the low bandwidth communication mode:
An indication is displayed that communication performed via the low bandwidth communication mode is slower than communication not performed via the low bandwidth communication mode.
74. The method of any one of claims 33 to 73, wherein the first and/or second sets of selectable communication content options include options indicating that two or more persons need assistance.
75. The method of any one of claims 33 to 74, further comprising:
When the computer system is in the low bandwidth communication mode:
Before sending the communication, displaying a field for entering text to be included in the communication, including limiting an amount of text that can be included in the field.
76. The method of any one of claims 33 to 75, further comprising:
When the computer system is in the low bandwidth communication mode:
Displaying an end option when the first set of selectable communication content options is displayed, the end option initiating a process of exiting the low bandwidth communication mode when selected; and
The end option is displayed when the second set of selectable communication content options is displayed.
77. The method of any one of claims 33 to 76, further comprising:
When the computer system is in the low bandwidth communication mode:
responsive to detecting the second set of one or more inputs corresponding to selection of the second communication content option of the second set of selectable communication content options:
In accordance with a determination that the selected second communication content option is a first option of the second set of selectable communication content options, displaying an option to send the communication; and
In accordance with a determination that the selected second communication content option is a second option of the second set of selectable communication content options that is different from the first option of the second set of selectable communication content options, a third set of selectable communication content options corresponding to respective content for the communication is displayed via the display generating component without displaying the options for transmitting the communication, wherein the third set of selectable communication content options is specific to the low bandwidth communication mode.
78. A non-transitory computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured for execution by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs comprising instructions for performing the method of any of claims 33-77.
79. A computer system configured to communicate with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising:
one or more processors; and
A memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs comprising instructions for performing the method of any of claims 33-77.
80. A computer system configured to communicate with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising:
Means for performing the method of any one of claims 33 to 77.
81. A computer program product comprising one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs comprising instructions for performing the method of any of claims 33-77.
82. A non-transitory computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured for execution by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs comprising instructions for:
when the computer system is in a low bandwidth communication mode:
Displaying, via the display generating component, a first set of selectable communication content options corresponding to respective content for communication, wherein the first set of selectable communication content options is specific to the low bandwidth communication mode;
Detecting, via the one or more input devices, a first set of one or more inputs corresponding to a selection of a first communication content option of the first set of selectable communication content options;
After detecting the first set of one or more inputs, displaying, via the display generating component, a second set of selectable communication content options corresponding to respective content for the communication, wherein the second set of selectable communication content options is specific to the low bandwidth communication mode;
Detecting, via the one or more input devices, a second set of one or more inputs corresponding to selection of a second communication content option of the second set of selectable communication content options;
Detecting an input corresponding to sending a request to include a communication of the content corresponding to the selection of the first communication content option and the second communication content option; and
In response to receiving the input corresponding to the request to send the communication, sending the communication including the content corresponding to the selection of the first communication content option and the second communication content option selected by the first set of one or more inputs and the second set of one or more inputs.
83. A computer system configured to communicate with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising:
one or more processors; and
A memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs comprising instructions for:
when the computer system is in a low bandwidth communication mode:
Displaying, via the display generating component, a first set of selectable communication content options corresponding to respective content for communication, wherein the first set of selectable communication content options is specific to the low bandwidth communication mode;
Detecting, via the one or more input devices, a first set of one or more inputs corresponding to a selection of a first communication content option of the first set of selectable communication content options;
After detecting the first set of one or more inputs, displaying, via the display generating component, a second set of selectable communication content options corresponding to respective content for the communication, wherein the second set of selectable communication content options is specific to the low bandwidth communication mode;
Detecting, via the one or more input devices, a second set of one or more inputs corresponding to selection of a second communication content option of the second set of selectable communication content options;
Detecting an input corresponding to sending a request to include a communication of the content corresponding to the selection of the first communication content option and the second communication content option; and
In response to receiving the input corresponding to the request to send the communication, sending the communication including the content corresponding to the selection of the first communication content option and the second communication content option selected by the first set of one or more inputs and the second set of one or more inputs.
84. A computer system configured to communicate with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising:
Apparatus for: when the computer system is in a low bandwidth communication mode:
Displaying, via the display generating component, a first set of selectable communication content options corresponding to respective content for communication, wherein the first set of selectable communication content options is specific to the low bandwidth communication mode;
Detecting, via the one or more input devices, a first set of one or more inputs corresponding to a selection of a first communication content option of the first set of selectable communication content options;
After detecting the first set of one or more inputs, displaying, via the display generating component, a second set of selectable communication content options corresponding to respective content for the communication, wherein the second set of selectable communication content options is specific to the low bandwidth communication mode;
Detecting, via the one or more input devices, a second set of one or more inputs corresponding to selection of a second communication content option of the second set of selectable communication content options;
Detecting an input corresponding to sending a request to include a communication of the content corresponding to the selection of the first communication content option and the second communication content option; and
In response to receiving the input corresponding to the request to send the communication, sending the communication including the content corresponding to the selection of the first communication content option and the second communication content option selected by the first set of one or more inputs and the second set of one or more inputs.
85. A computer program product comprising one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs comprising instructions for:
when the computer system is in a low bandwidth communication mode:
Displaying, via the display generating component, a first set of selectable communication content options corresponding to respective content for communication, wherein the first set of selectable communication content options is specific to the low bandwidth communication mode;
Detecting, via the one or more input devices, a first set of one or more inputs corresponding to a selection of a first communication content option of the first set of selectable communication content options;
After detecting the first set of one or more inputs, displaying, via the display generating component, a second set of selectable communication content options corresponding to respective content for the communication, wherein the second set of selectable communication content options is specific to the low bandwidth communication mode;
Detecting, via the one or more input devices, a second set of one or more inputs corresponding to selection of a second communication content option of the second set of selectable communication content options;
Detecting an input corresponding to sending a request to include a communication of the content corresponding to the selection of the first communication content option and the second communication content option; and
In response to receiving the input corresponding to the request to send the communication, sending the communication including the content corresponding to the selection of the first communication content option and the second communication content option selected by the first set of one or more inputs and the second set of one or more inputs.
86. A method, comprising:
At a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices:
Detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to a request to communicate via satellite communications;
In response to detecting the user input:
Displaying, via the display generating component, an alignment element, comprising:
in accordance with a determination that the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with one or more satellites, displaying the alignment element in a first alignment appearance that indicates that the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites and that includes a graphical indication;
detecting a change in orientation of a predetermined portion of the computer system while displaying the alignment element in the first alignment appearance; and
In response to detecting the change in the orientation of the predetermined portion of the computer system, changing an appearance of the alignment element.
87. The method of claim 86, further comprising:
In response to detecting the user input:
Displaying satellite availability elements, comprising:
In accordance with a determination that the computer system is in a first availability state relative to the one or more satellites, displaying the satellite availability element with a first appearance indicative of the first availability state; and
In accordance with a determination that the computer system is in a second availability state relative to the one or more satellites, the satellite availability element is displayed with a second appearance indicating the second availability state, wherein the second availability appearance is different from the first availability appearance.
88. The method of claim 87, wherein the alignment element and the satellite availability element are displayed simultaneously.
89. The method of any one of claims 86 to 88, wherein changing the appearance of the alignment element comprises:
The alignment element is displayed with a second appearance that varies based on the orientation of the predetermined portion of the computer system, wherein the second appearance is different from the first alignment appearance.
90. The method of any of claims 86-89, wherein changing the appearance of the alignment element comprises changing the appearance of the alignment element based on a magnitude of the detected orientation change of the predetermined portion of the computer system.
91. The method of any of claims 86-90, wherein changing the appearance of the alignment element comprises changing the appearance of the alignment element based on a direction of the orientation change of the predetermined portion of the computer system.
92. The method of any one of claims 86 to 91, wherein changing the appearance of the alignment element comprises changing the appearance of the alignment element based on movement of the one or more satellites.
93. The method of any of claims 86-92, wherein the determining that the computer system is properly aligned for communicating with one or more satellites is based on a database of locations of the one or more satellites and a location of the computer system.
94. The method of any one of claims 86-93, wherein:
The determining that the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites includes determining that the computer system is not properly aligned in an azimuth direction for communication with the one or more satellites; and
The first alignment appearance of the alignment element includes instructions for adjusting the orientation of the computer system in the azimuthal direction.
95. The method of claim 94, wherein displaying the alignment element includes simultaneously displaying:
a graphical representation of the location of the one or more satellites; and
A graphical representation of a communication window.
96. The method of claim 95, wherein changing the appearance of the alignment element comprises:
in accordance with a determination that the computer system is in the communication window:
amplifying the graphical representation of the locations of the one or more satellites; and
The graphical representation of the communication window is enlarged.
97. The method of claim 94, wherein changing the appearance of the alignment element comprises:
In accordance with a determination that the computer system is properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites, a color of the graphical representation of the communication window is changed.
98. The method of claim 94, wherein the instructions for adjusting the orientation of the computer system in the azimuth direction comprise a text prompt.
99. The method of claim 94, wherein:
The alignment element includes a graphical representation of the one or more satellites; and
Changing the appearance of the alignment element includes moving the graphical representation of the one or more satellites.
100. The method of claim 94, wherein the alignment element includes a graphical indication of a direction of motion of the one or more satellites.
101. The method of any one of claims 86-100, wherein:
The determining that the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites includes determining that the computer system is not properly aligned in an elevation direction for communication with the one or more satellites; and
The first alignment appearance of the alignment element includes instructions for adjusting the orientation of the computer system in the elevation direction.
102. The method of claim 101, wherein the instructions for adjusting the orientation of the computer system in the elevation direction comprise a hint to move the computer system in the elevation direction.
103. The method of claim 101, wherein:
The change in orientation of the predetermined portion of the computer system includes a change in elevation of the predetermined portion of the computer system; and
Changing the appearance of the alignment element includes moving a graphical representation of the one or more satellites toward a graphical representation of the computer system.
104. The method of claim 101, wherein the instructions for adjusting the orientation of the computer system in the elevation direction are displayed in accordance with a determination that the computer system is properly aligned in an azimuth direction for communication with the one or more satellites.
105. The method of any one of claims 86 to 104, further comprising:
In response to detecting the user input:
In accordance with a determination that an obstacle exists that prevents the computer system from communicating with the one or more satellites, a prompt is displayed to avoid and/or remove the obstacle.
106. The method of claim 105, wherein the prompt to avoid and/or remove the obstacle comprises a text instruction to move the computer system outside.
107. The method of claim 105, wherein the cues to avoid and/or remove the obstacle comprise a graphical representation of the one or more satellites that is displayed at a brightness that is less than a brightness of other graphical elements displayed concurrently with the graphical representation of the one or more satellites.
108. The method of any one of claims 86-107, further comprising:
In response to detecting the user input and in accordance with a determination that the computer system is not currently properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites, a graphical indication is displayed that the computer system is not currently properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites.
109. The method of claim 108, further comprising:
In response to detecting the user input:
In accordance with a determination that the computer system is not currently properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites, the graphical representation of the one or more satellites is discarded from display.
110. The method of claim 108, further comprising:
In response to detecting the user input:
In accordance with a determination that the computer system is currently not properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites, an indication of when the computer system will be properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites is displayed.
111. The method of any one of claims 86 to 110, further comprising:
In accordance with a determination that the computer system will not be properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites within a threshold period of time, a graphical indication is displayed that the computer system will not be properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites.
112. The method of claim 111, wherein displaying the graphical indication that the computer system will not be properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites includes displaying that a graphical representation of the one or more satellites moves away from a graphical representation of the computer system.
113. The method of claim 111, wherein displaying the graphical indication that the computer system will not be properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites comprises displaying an indication of an amount of time until the computer system will be properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites.
114. The method of claim 111, further comprising:
after displaying the graphical indication that the computer system will not be properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites:
detecting an indication that the computer system is properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites; and
In response to detecting the indication that the computer system is properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites, displaying a graphical indication that the computer system is properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites.
115. The method of any one of claims 86 to 114, further comprising:
when the computer system is in a low bandwidth communication mode:
a visual indication of a connection status of the computer system to the one or more satellites is displayed via the display generating component.
116. The method of claim 115, wherein displaying the visual indication of the connection status of the computer system to the one or more satellites comprises:
In accordance with a determination that the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites, a visual indication of an error condition is displayed.
117. The method of any one of claims 86-116, further comprising:
Upon detecting the user input, in accordance with a determination that the computer system is properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites, a message is sent via the one or more satellites that includes content corresponding to the request for communication via satellite communication.
118. The method of any one of claims 86 to 117, further comprising:
Upon detecting the user input, in accordance with a determination that the computer system is properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites, a user interface of a messaging application is displayed.
119. The method of any one of claims 86-118, further comprising:
a selectable end satellite communication option is displayed that, when selected, causes the computer system to cease operating in satellite communication mode.
120. The method of any one of claims 86-119, further comprising:
In response to detecting the change in the orientation of the predetermined portion of the computer system:
in accordance with determining the change in orientation of the predetermined portion of the computer system, properly aligning the computer system for communication with the one or more satellites, providing a first haptic output at the computer system; and
Detecting a second change in orientation of the predetermined portion of the computer system when the computer system is properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites; and
In response to detecting the second orientation change of the predetermined portion of the computer system:
In accordance with a determination that the detected second orientation change of the predetermined portion of the computer system causes the computer system to be moved out of alignment from communicating with the one or more satellites, a second tactile output is provided at the computer system.
121. The method of any one of claims 86-120, further comprising:
Upon detecting a user input corresponding to a request for communication via satellite communication, displaying a selectable terrestrial communication option in response to detecting that terrestrial communication is available;
Detecting a selection of the terrestrial communication option; and
In response to detecting the selection of the terrestrial communication option, communication is initiated via the terrestrial communication.
122. The method of claim 121, wherein displaying the terrestrial communication option includes ceasing to display the alignment element.
123. The method of claim 121, further comprising:
When terrestrial communications are available, a set of selectable communication content options corresponding to respective content for the communications is displayed, wherein the set of selectable communication content options is specific to a low bandwidth communication mode.
124. The method of any one of claims 86 to 123, further comprising:
In accordance with a determination that an error condition is satisfied:
providing a hint including instructions for correcting the error condition; and
After providing the hint including instructions for correcting the error condition:
In accordance with a determination that the error condition has been met for at least a threshold amount of time, a status indication is provided that indicates that the computer system is not connected to the one or more satellites.
125. The method of any one of claims 86 to 124, further comprising:
transmitting the message via satellite communication; and
After sending the message via satellite communication and before receiving a reply to the message, a reply status element is displayed.
126. The method of any one of claims 86-125, further comprising:
after displaying the alignment element:
in accordance with a determination that terrestrial communications are available:
Stopping displaying the alignment element; and
A terrestrial communication element is displayed indicating that terrestrial communication is available.
127. The method of any one of claims 86-126, further comprising:
When the computer system is properly aligned for communication with one or more satellites:
In accordance with a determination that the computer system will not be properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites within a threshold period of time, a graphical indication of an amount of time until the computer system will not be properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites is displayed.
128. The method of any one of claims 86-127, further comprising
In accordance with a determination that the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites, a graphical indication of an amount of time until the computer system will be properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites is displayed.
129. The method of any one of claims 86 to 128, further comprising:
after detecting the user input corresponding to the request to communicate via satellite communications:
in response to determining that the predefined action has been successfully performed, a message is displayed indicating that the predefined action has been successfully performed.
130. The method of any one of claims 86-129, further comprising:
outputting a non-visual output while displaying the alignment element, comprising:
In accordance with a determination that the computer system is in a first satellite connection state, outputting a non-visual output having a first characteristic; and
In accordance with a determination that the computer system is in a second satellite connection state different from the first satellite connection state, a non-visual output having a second characteristic different from the first characteristic is output.
131. The method of claim 130, wherein outputting the non-visual output occurs when the computer system is properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites.
132. The method of any of claims 130-131, wherein outputting the non-visual output occurs when the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites.
133. The method of any one of claims 86-132, further comprising:
after detecting the user input corresponding to the request to communicate via satellite communications:
in accordance with a determination that the computer system is properly aligned for communication with one or more satellites, displaying an indication that the computer system is being connected to the one or more satellites; and
After displaying the indication that the computer system is being connected to the one or more satellites:
In accordance with a determination that the computer system is connected to the one or more satellites, an indication of the computer system being connected to the one or more satellites is displayed, wherein the indication that the computer system is connected to the one or more satellites is different from the indication that the computer system is being connected to the one or more satellites.
134. The method of any one of claims 86-133, further comprising:
after detecting the user input corresponding to a request to communicate via satellite communications and while the computer system is connected for communication with one or more satellites, a message is sent via the one or more satellites, wherein the message includes a graphical representation of at least a portion of the message.
135. The method of any one of claims 86-134, further comprising:
upon detecting the user input corresponding to a request to communicate via satellite communications, initiate transmission of a message via the one or more satellites;
after initiating the transmission of the message:
In accordance with a determination that the computer system is connected for communication with one or more satellites, displaying an indication that a messaging application is being opened; and
After displaying the indication that the messaging application is being opened, a user interface of the messaging application is displayed.
136. The method of any of claims 86-135, wherein displaying the alignment element includes displaying an animation that includes:
A graphical representation of the satellite;
a graphical representation of the computer system; and
A graphical representation of a signal traveling between the graphical representation of the satellite and the graphical representation of the computer system over time.
137. The method of claim 136, wherein displaying the alignment element comprises:
according to the determination that the alignment element is in a first display state, displaying the animation and simultaneously displaying a text indication of a satellite connection state of the computer system; and
In accordance with a determination that the alignment element is in a second display state different from the first display state, the animation is displayed without simultaneously displaying the text indication of the satellite connection state of the computer system.
138. The method of any one of claims 86 to 137, further comprising:
Upon displaying the alignment element:
In accordance with a determination that the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with one or more satellites, a non-visual output is output indicating that the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with one or more satellites.
139. The method of any one of claims 86-138, further comprising:
Upon displaying the alignment element:
In accordance with a determination that the computer system is not connected for communication with one or more satellites, a non-visual output is output indicating that the computer system is not connected for communication with one or more satellites.
140. The method of any one of claims 86 to 139, further comprising:
After detecting the user input:
in accordance with a determination that a satellite cannot be detected, a warning is provided that an obstacle has been detected.
141. The method of claim 140, wherein providing the alert that an obstacle has been detected includes outputting a non-visual output indicating that an obstacle has been detected.
142. The method of any one of claims 86-141, further comprising:
after detecting the user input and after determining that a satellite is not available for communication by the computer system:
in accordance with a determination that a satellite is available for communication by the computer system, a non-visual output is output indicating that the satellite is available.
143. The method of any one of claims 86-142, further comprising:
After detecting the user input, displaying a user interface element, wherein displaying the alignment element includes displaying the alignment element in the user interface element;
Detecting a request to dismiss the user interface element when the alignment element is displayed in the user interface element; and
In response to detecting the request to dismiss the user interface element:
In accordance with a determination that the computer system is connected for communication with one or more satellites, eliminating the user interface element that includes the alignment element; and
In accordance with a determination that the computer system is not connected for communication with a satellite, the user interface element remains displayed.
144. The method of any one of claims 86-143, further comprising:
stopping displaying the alignment element after displaying the alignment element; and
After ceasing to display the alignment element, in response to determining that the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with one or more satellites, displaying the alignment element.
145. A non-transitory computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured for execution by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs comprising instructions for performing the method of any of claims 86-144.
146. A computer system configured to communicate with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising:
one or more processors; and
A memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs comprising instructions for performing the method of any of claims 86-144.
147. A computer system configured to communicate with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising:
means for performing the method of any one of claims 86-144.
148. A computer program product comprising one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs comprising instructions for performing the method of any of claims 86-144.
149. A non-transitory computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured for execution by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs comprising instructions for:
Detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to a request to communicate via satellite communications;
In response to detecting the user input:
Displaying, via the display generating component, an alignment element, comprising:
in accordance with a determination that the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with one or more satellites, displaying the alignment element in a first alignment appearance that indicates that the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites and that includes a graphical indication;
detecting a change in orientation of a predetermined portion of the computer system while displaying the alignment element in the first alignment appearance; and
In response to detecting the change in the orientation of the predetermined portion of the computer system, changing an appearance of the alignment element.
150. A computer system configured to communicate with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising:
one or more processors; and
A memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs comprising instructions for:
Detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to a request to communicate via satellite communications;
In response to detecting the user input:
Displaying, via the display generating component, an alignment element, comprising:
in accordance with a determination that the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with one or more satellites, displaying the alignment element in a first alignment appearance that indicates that the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites and that includes a graphical indication;
detecting a change in orientation of a predetermined portion of the computer system while displaying the alignment element in the first alignment appearance; and
In response to detecting the change in the orientation of the predetermined portion of the computer system, changing an appearance of the alignment element.
151. A computer system configured to communicate with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising:
apparatus for: detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to a request to communicate via satellite communications;
Apparatus for: in response to detecting the user input:
Displaying, via the display generating component, an alignment element, comprising:
in accordance with a determination that the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with one or more satellites, displaying the alignment element in a first alignment appearance that indicates that the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites and that includes a graphical indication;
Apparatus for: detecting a change in orientation of a predetermined portion of the computer system while displaying the alignment element in the first alignment appearance; and
Apparatus for: in response to detecting the change in the orientation of the predetermined portion of the computer system, changing an appearance of the alignment element.
152. A computer program product comprising one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs comprising instructions for:
Detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to a request to communicate via satellite communications;
In response to detecting the user input:
Displaying, via the display generating component, an alignment element, comprising:
in accordance with a determination that the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with one or more satellites, displaying the alignment element in a first alignment appearance that indicates that the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites and that includes a graphical indication;
detecting a change in orientation of a predetermined portion of the computer system while displaying the alignment element in the first alignment appearance; and
In response to detecting the change in the orientation of the predetermined portion of the computer system, changing an appearance of the alignment element.
153. A method, comprising:
at a computer system in communication with one or more input devices:
When a communication with a first recipient is ready to be initiated, outputting a query as to whether a second recipient, different from the first recipient, is permitted to receive information corresponding to the communication, without adding the second recipient as a participant in a conversation of the communication;
After outputting the query as to whether to allow the second recipient to receive information corresponding to the communication, detecting a sequence of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to send a message to the first recipient; and
In response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs:
in accordance with a determination that the computer system detects one or more inputs corresponding to a request to allow the second recipient to receive information corresponding to the communication between a user and the first recipient, sending a message to the first recipient that includes respective information without enabling delivery of the message including at least a portion of the respective information to the second recipient; and
In accordance with a determination that the computer system does not detect one or more inputs corresponding to a request to allow the second recipient to receive information corresponding to the communication between the user and the first recipient, a message including respective information is sent to the first recipient without enabling delivery of the message including at least a portion of the respective information to the second recipient.
154. The method of claim 153, further comprising:
before the communication is initiated via the sequence of one or more inputs at the computer system:
A selection of an emergency recipient as an emergency contact is received, wherein the second recipient is the emergency recipient.
155. The method of any of claims 153-154, wherein the query as to whether to allow the second recipient to receive information corresponding to the communication without adding the second recipient as a participant in the conversation comprises:
whether a third recipient, different from the first recipient and the second recipient, is permitted to receive a query for information corresponding to the communication without adding the third recipient as a participant in the conversation of the communication.
156. The method of claim 155, wherein outputting the query as to whether to allow the second recipient to receive information corresponding to the communication without adding the second recipient as a participant in the conversation comprises:
a set of one or more user interaction graphical elements including a first user interaction graphical element that, when selected, initiates a process of modifying a set of recipients of the message when sent.
157. The method of claim 156, wherein the set of one or more user-interactive graphical elements comprises:
A second user interactive graphic element, when selected, that modifies a selection state of the second recipient for receiving the message without modifying the selection state of the third recipient for receiving the message; and
A third user interaction graphical element, when selected, that modifies a selection state of the third recipient for receiving the message without modifying the selection state of the second recipient for receiving the message.
158. The method of any of claims 153-157, wherein outputting the query as to whether to allow the second recipient to receive information corresponding to the communication without adding the second recipient as a participant in the conversation includes:
And (3) displaying:
the second recipient is currently selected to receive information corresponding to the communication without adding the second recipient as an indication of a participant in the conversation; and
A third user interaction graphical element that, when selected, deselects the second recipient to receive information corresponding to the communication without adding the second recipient as a participant in the conversation.
159. The method of claim 155, further comprising:
In response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs and in accordance with a determination that the computer system detected one or more inputs corresponding to a request to allow the second recipient and the third recipient to receive information corresponding to the communication between the user and the first recipient:
transmitting a message including corresponding information to the first receiver; and
Enabling delivery of the message including at least a portion of the respective information to the second recipient and the third recipient.
160. The method of any of claims 153-159, further comprising:
After enabling delivery of the message including at least a portion of the respective information to the second recipient and in accordance with a determination that the conversation of the communication has been updated with additional information, enabling delivery of a second message to the second recipient, wherein the second message includes at least a portion of the additional information.
161. The method of any of claims 153-160, further comprising:
After enabling delivery of the message including at least a portion of the respective information to the second recipient, enabling delivery of a third message including information corresponding to a location of the computer system to the second recipient.
162. The method of any of claims 153-161, wherein enabling delivery of the message including at least the portion of the respective information to the second recipient occurs if the second recipient is not enabled to engage in the conversation of the communication.
163. The method of any of claims 153-162, wherein enabling delivery of the message including at least a portion of the respective information to the second recipient includes:
Enabling an external computer system associated with the second recipient to display the message to the second recipient including at least the portion of the respective information in a messaging application.
164. The method of claim 163, wherein the messaging application of the external computer system associated with the second recipient displays the message to the second recipient including at least a portion of the respective information in a messaging conversation separate from a messaging conversation including one or more previous messages received from a user of the computer system.
165. The method of claim 163, wherein the messaging application of the external computer system associated with the second recipient displays the message including at least a portion of the respective information to the second recipient in a messaging conversation including one or more previous messages received from a user of the computer system.
166. The method of claim 164, wherein the messaging application of the external computer system associated with the second recipient displays a fourth selectable user-interactive graphical element when displaying the messaging conversation including one or more previous messages received from a user of the computer system, the fourth selectable user-interactive graphical element, when selected, initiating a process for displaying the message including at least a portion of the corresponding information to the second recipient in the messaging conversation separate from the messaging conversation including one or more previous messages.
167. The method of claim 163, wherein the messaging application of the external computer system associated with the second recipient displays the message to the second recipient including at least a portion of the corresponding information in a conversational user interface with a user interactive graphical element that does not include a response to compose the message to the second recipient including at least a portion of the corresponding information.
168. The method of claim 167, wherein the conversational user interface that does not include user interaction graphical elements for composing a response to the message to the second recipient including at least a portion of the corresponding information includes an indication that the message to the second recipient including at least a portion of the corresponding information is an urgent message.
169. The method of claim 163, wherein the external computer system generates one or more notifications regarding the message including at least a portion of the respective information to the second recipient based on a first set of notification criteria and generates one or more notifications regarding a respective message different from the message including at least a portion of the respective information to the second recipient based on a second set of notification criteria different from the first set of notification criteria.
170. The method of claim 163 wherein the messaging application of the external computer system associated with the second recipient displays the message including at least a portion of the corresponding information to the second recipient in a second conversational user interface including a fifth user-selectable graphical element that, when selected, initiates a separate communication session with the user of the computer system.
171. The method of claim 163, wherein the external computer system associated with the second recipient provides an option that, when enabled, prevents presentation at the external computer system of one or more update messages associated with the message to the second recipient that includes at least the portion of the respective information.
172. The method of any of claims 153-171, wherein the communication with the first recipient is a communication regarding an emergency, and preparing to initiate the communication with the first recipient includes:
a set of information including one or more details regarding the emergency situation is received via the one or more input devices.
173. The method of claim 172, wherein the portion of the respective information included in the message directed to the second recipient includes at least a portion of the one or more details regarding the emergency.
174. The method of any one of claims 153-173, wherein:
Preparing to initiate communication with the first recipient includes connecting to a non-terrestrial wireless communication network; and
The message including the corresponding information to the first recipient is sent via the non-terrestrial wireless communication network.
175. The method of any one of claims 153-174, further comprising:
Upon enabling delivery of the message including at least a portion of the respective information to the second recipient, an indication is displayed that the second recipient is receiving the message including at least a portion of the respective information to the second recipient.
176. The method of any of claims 153-175, further comprising:
after enabling delivery of the message including at least a portion of the respective information to the second recipient, a fifth user interaction graphical element is displayed that, when selected, configures the computer system to send one or more subsequent messages to the first recipient corresponding to the conversation with the first recipient without enabling delivery of the one or more subsequent messages to the second recipient.
177. A non-transitory computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured for execution by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with one or more input devices, the one or more programs comprising instructions for performing the method of any of claims 153-176.
178. A computer system configured to communicate with one or more input devices, the computer system comprising:
one or more processors; and
A memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs comprising instructions for performing the method of any of claims 153-176.
179. A computer system configured to communicate with one or more input devices, comprising:
apparatus for performing the method of any one of claims 153-176.
180. A computer program product comprising one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with one or more input devices, the one or more programs comprising instructions for performing the method of any of claims 153-176.
181. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured for execution by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with one or more input devices, the one or more programs comprising instructions for:
When a communication with a first recipient is ready to be initiated, outputting a query as to whether a second recipient, different from the first recipient, is permitted to receive information corresponding to the communication, without adding the second recipient as a participant in a conversation of the communication;
After outputting the query as to whether to allow the second recipient to receive information corresponding to the communication, detecting a sequence of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to send a message to the first recipient; and
In response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs:
in accordance with a determination that the computer system detects one or more inputs corresponding to a request to allow the second recipient to receive information corresponding to the communication between a user and the first recipient, sending a message to the first recipient that includes respective information without enabling delivery of the message including at least a portion of the respective information to the second recipient; and
In accordance with a determination that the computer system does not detect one or more inputs corresponding to a request to allow the second recipient to receive information corresponding to the communication between the user and the first recipient, a message including respective information is sent to the first recipient without enabling delivery of the message including at least a portion of the respective information to the second recipient.
182. A computer system configured to communicate with one or more input devices, comprising:
one or more processors; and
A memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs comprising instructions for:
When a communication with a first recipient is ready to be initiated, outputting a query as to whether a second recipient, different from the first recipient, is permitted to receive information corresponding to the communication, without adding the second recipient as a participant in a conversation of the communication;
After outputting the query as to whether to allow the second recipient to receive information corresponding to the communication, detecting a sequence of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to send a message to the first recipient; and
In response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs:
in accordance with a determination that the computer system detects one or more inputs corresponding to a request to allow the second recipient to receive information corresponding to the communication between a user and the first recipient, sending a message to the first recipient that includes respective information without enabling delivery of the message including at least a portion of the respective information to the second recipient; and
In accordance with a determination that the computer system does not detect one or more inputs corresponding to a request to allow the second recipient to receive information corresponding to the communication between the user and the first recipient, a message including respective information is sent to the first recipient without enabling delivery of the message including at least a portion of the respective information to the second recipient.
183. A computer system configured to communicate with one or more input devices, comprising:
Apparatus for: when a communication with a first recipient is ready to be initiated, outputting a query as to whether a second recipient, different from the first recipient, is permitted to receive information corresponding to the communication, without adding the second recipient as a participant in a conversation of the communication;
Apparatus for: after outputting the query as to whether to allow the second recipient to receive information corresponding to the communication, detecting a sequence of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to send a message to the first recipient; and
Apparatus for: in response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs:
in accordance with a determination that the computer system detects one or more inputs corresponding to a request to allow the second recipient to receive information corresponding to the communication between a user and the first recipient, sending a message to the first recipient that includes respective information without enabling delivery of the message including at least a portion of the respective information to the second recipient; and
In accordance with a determination that the computer system does not detect one or more inputs corresponding to a request to allow the second recipient to receive information corresponding to the communication between the user and the first recipient, a message including respective information is sent to the first recipient without enabling delivery of the message including at least a portion of the respective information to the second recipient.
184. A computer program product comprising one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with one or more input devices, the one or more programs comprising instructions for:
When a communication with a first recipient is ready to be initiated, outputting a query as to whether a second recipient, different from the first recipient, is permitted to receive information corresponding to the communication, without adding the second recipient as a participant in a conversation of the communication;
After outputting the query as to whether to allow the second recipient to receive information corresponding to the communication, detecting a sequence of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to send a message to the first recipient; and
In response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs:
in accordance with a determination that the computer system detects one or more inputs corresponding to a request to allow the second recipient to receive information corresponding to the communication between a user and the first recipient, sending a message to the first recipient that includes respective information without enabling delivery of the message including at least a portion of the respective information to the second recipient; and
In accordance with a determination that the computer system does not detect one or more inputs corresponding to a request to allow the second recipient to receive information corresponding to the communication between the user and the first recipient, a message including respective information is sent to the first recipient without enabling delivery of the message including at least a portion of the respective information to the second recipient.
185. A method, comprising:
at a computer system:
when the computer system is in communication with a first communication network:
determining that the respective criteria have been met; and
Responsive to determining that the respective criteria have been met, automatically sending updated location information indicative of an updated location of the computer system without user input, wherein the updated location information is accessible to devices other than the computer system;
detecting that the first communication network is unavailable after automatically sending updated location information one or more times when the respective criteria are met; and
When the first communication network is not available, the computer system is able to update location information via a second communication network and the respective criteria have been met, forgoing automatic transmission of updated location information.
186. The method of claim 185, further comprising:
when the first communication network is not available:
In accordance with a determination that a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first communication network was available, a notification is displayed that the computer system is capable of updating location information via the second communication network.
187. The method of claim 186, wherein the predetermined period of time is a period of time since the first communication network was available when the computer system was enabled to communicate via the first communication network.
188. The method of any of claims 186-187, wherein the predetermined period of time is a period of time since the first communication network was available when the computer system was enabled to make updated location information accessible to devices other than the computer system.
189. The method of any of claims 185 to 188, further comprising:
when the first communication network is not available:
Providing an option for sending updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network after a first predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first communication network was available; and
After a second predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first communication network was available, wherein the second predetermined period of time is greater than the first predetermined period of time, displaying a notification that the option for sending updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network is available.
190. The method of any of claims 185 to 189, further comprising:
when the first communication network is not available:
Detecting a request to send updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network; and
In response to detecting the request to send updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network, initiating a process for sending updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network, wherein the process for sending updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network includes displaying a prompt for a user to take an action to connect to the second communication network.
191. The method of any of claims 185 to 190, further comprising:
when the first communication network is not available:
Detecting a first request to send updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network; and
In response to detecting the first request to send updated location information for the computer system via the second communication network:
In accordance with a determination that a set of manual update criteria is met, sending updated location information for the computer system via the second communication network; and
In accordance with a determination that the set of manual update criteria is not met, the updated location information of the computer system is discarded from being sent via the second communication network.
192. The method of claim 191, further comprising:
when the first communication network is unavailable and after detecting the first request to send updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network:
Detecting a second request to send updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network; and
In response to detecting the second request to send updated location information for the computer system via the second communication network:
In accordance with a determination that an amount of time between the second request to send updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network and the first request to send updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network meets a time threshold, sending updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network; and
In accordance with a determination that the amount of time between the second request to send updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network and the first request to send updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network does not satisfy the time threshold, the updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network is relinquished.
193. The method of claim 191, further comprising:
when the first communication network is unavailable and after detecting the first request to send updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network:
Detecting a second request to send updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network; and
In response to detecting the second request to send updated location information for the computer system via the second communication network:
In accordance with a determination that an amount of time between the second request to send updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network and the first request to send updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network does not satisfy the time threshold, a notification is provided that updated location information of the computer system is not to be sent.
194. The method of any of claims 185 to 193, further comprising:
Displaying a location status indicator corresponding to the updated location information, comprising:
In accordance with a determination that the location status indicator corresponds to updated location information sent via the first communication network, displaying the location status indicator in a first visual appearance; and
In accordance with a determination that the location status indicator corresponds to updated location information sent via the second communication network, the location status indicator is displayed in a second visual appearance different from the first visual appearance.
195. The method of claim 194, wherein displaying the position status indicator in the second visual appearance includes displaying an image of a satellite.
196. The method of any one of claims 185 to 195, further comprising:
An update status indicator is displayed, the update status indicator indicating a time at which the updated location information was sent.
197. The method of any of claims 185 to 196, further comprising:
displaying a map when the computer system communicates with the first communication network; and
When the first communication network is not available to the computer system, the displaying of the map is abandoned.
198. The method of any of claims 185 to 197, further comprising:
Providing an option to send updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network when the first communication network is unavailable; and
When the computer system communicates with the first communication network, the option of sending updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network is relinquished.
199. The method of any of claims 185 to 198, further comprising:
Updated location information accessible to devices other than the computer system is sent via the second communication network when the first communication network is not available.
200. The method of claim 199, wherein sending updated location information accessible to devices other than the computer system via the second communication network is performed automatically without user input.
201. The method of claim 199, further comprising:
Displaying an option to send updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network; and
A set of one or more inputs including a selection of the option to send updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network is detected,
Wherein sending updated location information accessible to devices other than the computer system via the second communication network is performed in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs that includes a selection of the option to send updated location information for the computer system via the second communication network.
202. The method of any one of claims 185 to 201, further comprising:
in response to determining that the predefined action has been successfully performed, a message is displayed indicating that the predefined action has been successfully performed.
203. A non-transitory computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured for execution by one or more processors of a computer system, the one or more programs comprising instructions for performing the method of any of claims 185-202.
204. A computer system, comprising:
one or more processors; and
A memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs comprising instructions for performing the method of any of claims 185-202.
205. A computer system, comprising:
Means for performing the method of any one of claims 185-202.
206. A computer program product comprising one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system, the one or more programs comprising instructions for performing the method of any of claims 185-202.
207. A non-transitory computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured for execution by one or more processors of a computer system, the one or more programs comprising instructions for:
when the computer system is in communication with a first communication network:
determining that the respective criteria have been met; and
Responsive to determining that the respective criteria have been met, automatically sending updated location information indicative of an updated location of the computer system without user input, wherein the updated location information is accessible to devices other than the computer system;
detecting that the first communication network is unavailable after automatically transmitting the updated location information one or more times when the respective criteria are met; and
When the first communication network is not available, the computer system is able to update location information via a second communication network and the respective criteria have been met, forgoing automatic transmission of updated location information.
208. A computer system, comprising:
one or more processors; and
A memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs comprising instructions for:
when the computer system is in communication with a first communication network:
determining that the respective criteria have been met; and
Responsive to determining that the respective criteria have been met, automatically sending updated location information indicative of an updated location of the computer system without user input, wherein the updated location information is accessible to devices other than the computer system;
detecting that the first communication network is unavailable after automatically transmitting the updated location information one or more times when the respective criteria are met; and
When the first communication network is not available, the computer system is able to update location information via a second communication network and the respective criteria have been met, forgoing automatic transmission of updated location information.
209. A computer system, comprising:
apparatus for: when the computer system is in communication with a first communication network:
determining that the respective criteria have been met; and
Responsive to determining that the respective criteria have been met, automatically sending updated location information indicative of an updated location of the computer system without user input, wherein the updated location information is accessible to devices other than the computer system;
Apparatus for: detecting that the first communication network is unavailable after automatically sending updated location information one or more times when the respective criteria are met; and
Apparatus for: when the first communication network is not available, the computer system is able to update location information via a second communication network and the respective criteria have been met, forgoing automatic transmission of updated location information.
210. A computer program product comprising one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system, the one or more programs comprising instructions for:
when the computer system is in communication with a first communication network:
determining that the respective criteria have been met; and
Responsive to determining that the respective criteria have been met, automatically sending updated location information indicative of an updated location of the computer system without user input, wherein the updated location information is accessible to devices other than the computer system;
detecting that the first communication network is unavailable after automatically sending updated location information one or more times when the respective criteria are met; and
When the first communication network is not available, the computer system is able to update location information via a second communication network and the respective criteria have been met, forgoing automatic transmission of updated location information.
211. A method, comprising:
at a computer system in communication with an output generation component, one or more input devices, and an external computer system:
Receiving, via the one or more input devices, a request to initiate a communication; and
In response to receiving the request to initiate the communication:
In accordance with a determination that the external computer system is connected to a terrestrial wireless communication network, initiating a process for communicating via the terrestrial wireless communication network; and
In accordance with a determination that the external computer system is not connected to a terrestrial wireless communication network, a hint to use the external computer system to connect to a non-terrestrial network is provided via the output generating component.
212. The method of claim 211, wherein the prompt to connect to the non-terrestrial network using the external computer system comprises an indication that satellite communications are available.
213. The method of any one of claims 211-212, further comprising:
after receiving the request to initiate the communication:
In accordance with a determination that an attempt to communicate via the non-terrestrial network has been made, such that an attempted communication notification is output that an attempt to communicate via the non-terrestrial network has been made.
214. The method of any of claims 211-213, wherein the computer system is wearable.
215. The method of any of claims 211-214, wherein the computer system is included in a vehicle.
216. The method of any one of claims 211-215, further comprising:
In providing the prompt to connect to the non-terrestrial network using the external computer system, an attempt is made to communicate via the terrestrial wireless communication network.
217. The method of claim 216, further comprising:
After attempting to communicate via the terrestrial wireless communication network while providing a prompt to connect to the non-terrestrial network using the external computer system:
In accordance with a determination that an attempt to communicate via the terrestrial wireless communication network has ceased, a user interface is changed.
218. The method of any one of claims 216 to 217, further comprising:
Detecting user input corresponding to a request to cancel the prompt to connect to the non-terrestrial network using the external computer system while providing the prompt to connect to the non-terrestrial network using the external computer system and attempting to communicate via the terrestrial wireless communication network; and
In response to detecting the user input corresponding to a request to cancel the prompt to connect to the non-terrestrial network using the external computer system, a telephone user interface is displayed.
219. The method of any one of claims 216 to 218, wherein:
attempting to communicate via the terrestrial wireless communication network includes automatically attempting to initiate the communication via the terrestrial wireless communication network in response to receiving the request to initiate the communication, and
A telephone user interface is displayed by the external computer system after attempting to communicate via the terrestrial wireless communication network and while providing the prompt to connect to the non-terrestrial network using the external computer system.
220. The method of any one of claims 211-219, further comprising:
In response to receiving the request to initiate the communication, and in accordance with a determination that the external computer system is not connected to a terrestrial wireless communication network, an option to initiate a process for communicating via a non-terrestrial network when selected is displayed via the output generating component.
221. The method of any of claims 211-220, wherein the request to initiate the communication includes data indicating that a user of the computer system has fallen, the method further comprising:
in response to receiving the request to initiate the communication:
automatically attempting to communicate with a predetermined entity.
222. The method of claim 221, further comprising:
after automatically attempting to communicate with the predetermined entity:
In accordance with a determination that the message was automatically sent via the non-terrestrial network, an indication is displayed that the message was automatically sent via the non-terrestrial network.
223. The method of any one of claims 211-222, the method further comprising:
upon receiving the request to initiate the communication, a selectable sound option is displayed via the output generation component, which when selected causes the external computer system to output audio.
224. The method of any one of claims 211-223, further comprising:
attempting to communicate via the terrestrial wireless communication network after receiving the request to initiate the communication; and
After attempting to communicate via the terrestrial wireless communication network, displaying via the output generating component a selectable call option that, when selected, initiates the attempt to communicate via the terrestrial wireless communication network.
225. The method of any of claims 211-224, wherein providing the prompt to connect to a non-terrestrial network using the external computer system is performed in accordance with a determination that the request to initiate the communication includes a request to initiate communication with a predefined entity, the method further comprising:
in response to receiving the request to initiate the communication:
in accordance with a determination that the external computer system is not connected to a terrestrial wireless communication network and that the request to initiate the communication does not include a request to initiate communication with a predefined entity, the provision of the prompt to connect to a non-terrestrial network using the external computer system is relinquished.
226. The method of any of claims 211-225, wherein providing the prompt to connect to the non-terrestrial network using the external computer system is performed in accordance with a determination that the external computer system is capable of connecting to the non-terrestrial network.
227. A non-transitory computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured for execution by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with an output generation component, one or more input devices, and an external computer system, the one or more programs comprising instructions for performing the method of any of claims 211-226.
228. A computer system configured to communicate with an output generation component, one or more input devices, and an external computer system, the computer system comprising:
one or more processors; and
A memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs comprising instructions for performing the method of any of claims 211-226.
229. A computer system configured to communicate with an output generation component, one or more input devices, and an external computer system, comprising:
Means for performing the method of any one of claims 211-226.
230. A computer program product comprising one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with an output generation component, one or more input devices, and an external computer system, the one or more programs comprising instructions for performing the method of any of claims 211-226.
231. A non-transitory computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured for execution by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with an output generation component, one or more input devices, and an external computer system, the one or more programs comprising instructions for:
Receiving, via the one or more input devices, a request to initiate a communication; and
In response to receiving the request to initiate the communication:
In accordance with a determination that the external computer system is connected to a terrestrial wireless communication network, initiating a process for communicating via the terrestrial wireless communication network; and
In accordance with a determination that the external computer system is not connected to a terrestrial wireless communication network, a hint to use the external computer system to connect to a non-terrestrial network is provided via the output generating component.
232. A computer system configured to communicate with an output generation component, one or more input devices, and an external computer system, comprising:
one or more processors; and
A memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs comprising instructions for:
Receiving, via the one or more input devices, a request to initiate a communication; and
In response to receiving the request to initiate the communication:
In accordance with a determination that the external computer system is connected to a terrestrial wireless communication network, initiating a process for communicating via the terrestrial wireless communication network; and
In accordance with a determination that the external computer system is not connected to a terrestrial wireless communication network, a hint to use the external computer system to connect to a non-terrestrial network is provided via the output generating component.
233. A computer system configured to communicate with an output generation component, one or more input devices, and an external computer system, comprising:
means for receiving a request to initiate a communication via the one or more input devices; and
Apparatus for: in response to receiving the request to initiate the communication:
In accordance with a determination that the external computer system is connected to a terrestrial wireless communication network, initiating a process for communicating via the terrestrial wireless communication network; and
In accordance with a determination that the external computer system is not connected to a terrestrial wireless communication network, a hint to use the external computer system to connect to a non-terrestrial network is provided via the output generating component.
234. A computer program product comprising one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with an output generation component, one or more input devices, and an external computer system, the one or more programs comprising instructions for:
Receiving, via the one or more input devices, a request to initiate a communication; and
In response to receiving the request to initiate the communication:
In accordance with a determination that the external computer system is connected to a terrestrial wireless communication network, initiating a process for communicating via the terrestrial wireless communication network; and
In accordance with a determination that the external computer system is not connected to a terrestrial wireless communication network, a hint to use the external computer system to connect to a non-terrestrial network is provided via the output generating component.
235. A method, comprising:
At a computer system in communication with an output generation component and one or more input devices:
detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs including a selection of a respective number for text-based communications; and
In response to detecting the set of one or more inputs comprising a selection of the respective number for text-based communication:
in accordance with a determination that a set of alternative communication criteria is satisfied, wherein the set of alternative communication criteria includes a first criterion that is satisfied when the respective number is a respective type of number and a second criterion that is satisfied when the respective communication network is unavailable:
Outputting, via the output generating means, a hint comprising an indication that communication with the respective number may be performed via an alternative communication network different from the respective communication network.
236. The method of claim 235, further comprising:
In response to detecting the set of one or more inputs comprising a selection of the respective number for text-based communication:
And according to the determination that the corresponding number is not the corresponding type number, discarding the output of the prompt.
237. The method of any one of claims 235-236, wherein the respective communication network is a terrestrial wireless communication network.
238. The method of any one of claims 235-237, further comprising:
After outputting the prompt, detecting a set of one or more inputs comprising a request to communicate with a respective entity via the alternative communication network; and
In response to detecting the set of one or more inputs comprising the request to communicate with the respective entity via the alternative communication network, a set of selectable communication content options corresponding to respective content for communication is displayed.
239. The method of any one of claims 235-238, further comprising:
After outputting the prompt, detecting a set of one or more inputs comprising a request to communicate with a respective entity via the alternative communication network; and
In response to detecting the set of one or more inputs comprising the request to communicate with the respective entity via the alternative communication network, initiating a process for connecting to the alternative communication network, wherein the process for connecting to the alternative communication network comprises displaying a prompt for a user to take an action to connect the computer system to the alternative communication network.
240. The method of any one of claims 235-239, further comprising:
After outputting the hint, detecting a set of one or more inputs comprising a request to send a message via the alternative communication network; and
In response to detecting the set of one or more inputs comprising the request to send the message via the alternative communication network, the message is sent via the alternative communication network.
241. The method of any one of claims 235-240, further comprising:
In accordance with a determination that the respective communication network is not available, displaying, via the output generation component, an indication of a communication capability of the computer system; and
In accordance with a determination that the respective communication network is available, the indication of the communication capabilities of the computer system is relinquished from display.
242. The method of claim 241, wherein displaying the indication of the communication capabilities of the computer system includes displaying an indication of the computer system's ability to communicate via a satellite communication network.
243. The method of claim 241, wherein displaying the indication of the communication capabilities of the computer system comprises:
In accordance with a determination that the computer system is displaying a first type of user interface, displaying an indication of the ability of the computer system to communicate via a satellite communications network; and
In accordance with a determination that the computer system is displaying a second type of user interface, the indication of the ability of the computer system to communicate via a satellite communications network is relinquished from display.
244. The method of any of claims 235-243, wherein the respective type of number is an emergency number, the method further comprising:
In response to detecting the set of one or more inputs comprising a selection of the respective number for text-based communication:
In accordance with a determination that the set of alternative communication criteria is satisfied, an option to initiate a procedure for communicating with an emergency service is displayed.
245. The method of claim 244, further comprising:
In response to detecting the set of one or more inputs comprising a selection of the respective number for text-based communication:
In accordance with a determination that the respective communication network is available, an option to initiate a procedure for communicating with the emergency service via the respective communication network is displayed.
246. The method of any one of claims 235-245, further comprising:
Detecting a set of one or more inputs comprising a request to display a message conversation with the corresponding number;
in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs including the request to display the message conversation with the respective number, displaying the message conversation with the respective number; and
While displaying the message conversation with the corresponding number:
In accordance with a determination that a set of messaging criteria is satisfied, wherein the set of messaging criteria includes criteria that are satisfied when the respective communication network is unavailable, an option to connect to the alternate communication network is displayed.
247. The method of claim 246, wherein displaying the option to connect to the alternative communication network in accordance with the determination that the set of messaging criteria is met occurs in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs including a request to display a message conversation with the corresponding number.
248. The method of claim 246, wherein displaying the option to connect to the alternative communication network in accordance with the determination that the set of messaging criteria is satisfied occurs in response to detecting a set of one or more inputs that includes a request to send a message to the corresponding number.
249. The method of any one of claims 235-248, wherein outputting the hint includes displaying the hint in a user interface of a messaging application.
250. A non-transitory computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured for execution by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with an output generation component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs comprising instructions for performing the method of any of claims 235-249.
251. A computer system configured to communicate with an output generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising:
one or more processors; and
A memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs comprising instructions for performing the method of any of claims 235-249.
252. A computer system configured to communicate with an output generation component and one or more input devices, comprising:
apparatus for performing the method of any one of claims 235-249.
253. A computer program product comprising one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with an output generation component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs comprising instructions for performing the method of any of claims 235-249.
254. A non-transitory computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured for execution by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with an output generation component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs comprising instructions for:
detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs including a selection of a respective number for text-based communications; and
In response to detecting the set of one or more inputs comprising a selection of the respective number for text-based communication:
in accordance with a determination that a set of alternative communication criteria is satisfied, wherein the set of alternative communication criteria includes a first criterion that is satisfied when the respective number is a respective type of number and a second criterion that is satisfied when the respective communication network is unavailable:
Outputting, via the output generating means, a hint comprising an indication that communication with the respective number may be performed via an alternative communication network different from the respective communication network.
255. A computer system configured to communicate with an output generation component and one or more input devices, comprising:
one or more processors; and
A memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs comprising instructions for:
detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs including a selection of a respective number for text-based communications; and
In response to detecting the set of one or more inputs comprising a selection of the respective number for text-based communication:
in accordance with a determination that a set of alternative communication criteria is satisfied, wherein the set of alternative communication criteria includes a first criterion that is satisfied when the respective number is a respective type of number and a second criterion that is satisfied when the respective communication network is unavailable:
Outputting, via the output generating means, a hint comprising an indication that communication with the respective number may be performed via an alternative communication network different from the respective communication network.
256. A computer system configured to communicate with an output generation component and one or more input devices, comprising:
apparatus for: detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs including a selection of a respective number for text-based communications; and
Apparatus for: in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs comprising a selection of the respective number for text-based communication:
in accordance with a determination that a set of alternative communication criteria is satisfied, wherein the set of alternative communication criteria includes a first criterion that is satisfied when the respective number is a respective type of number and a second criterion that is satisfied when the respective communication network is unavailable:
Outputting, via the output generating means, a hint comprising an indication that communication with the respective number may be performed via an alternative communication network different from the respective communication network.
257. A computer program product comprising one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with an output generation component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs comprising instructions for:
detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs including a selection of a respective number for text-based communications; and
In response to detecting the set of one or more inputs comprising a selection of the respective number for text-based communication:
in accordance with a determination that a set of alternative communication criteria is satisfied, wherein the set of alternative communication criteria includes a first criterion that is satisfied when the respective number is a respective type of number and a second criterion that is satisfied when the respective communication network is unavailable:
Outputting, via the output generating means, a hint comprising an indication that communication with the respective number may be performed via an alternative communication network different from the respective communication network.
258. A method, comprising:
at a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, wherein the computer system is configured to communicate via an alternative communication network when the respective communication network is not available:
Detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to activate an alternative communication network test mode when the capability of the computer system to communicate via the respective communication network is enabled;
Activating the alternative communications network test mode in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to activate the alternative communications network test mode; and
When the alternative communication network test mode is activated, a set of user interfaces is displayed via the display generating component.
259. The method of claim 258, wherein activating the alternative communication network test mode includes disabling an ability of the computer system to communicate via the respective communication network.
260. The method of any of claims 258 to 259, wherein displaying the set of user interfaces includes displaying:
A user interface including an indication of a status of a connection with the alternative communication network and instructions for establishing a connection with the alternative communication network; and
A user interface for generating a communication capable of being sent via the alternative communication network when the alternative communication network test mode is activated.
261. The method of claim 260, further comprising:
detecting a set of one or more inputs directed to the user interface for generating the communication; and
Upon detecting the set of one or more inputs directed to the user interface for generating the communication, the communication is sent via the alternative communication network, wherein the communication includes content based on the set of one or more inputs directed to the user interface for generating the communication.
262. The method of any of claims 258 to 261, wherein activating the alternative communication network test mode simulates an emergency communication procedure.
263. The method of any of claims 258 to 262, wherein the alternative communications network is a non-terrestrial communications network.
264. The method of claim 263, wherein displaying the set of user interfaces comprises displaying an indication of an alignment of the computer system with one or more elements of the non-terrestrial communication network.
265. The method of any of claims 258 to 264, wherein displaying the set of user interfaces includes outputting an indication that the computer system's ability to communicate via the respective communication network is to be disabled when the alternative communication network test mode is activated.
266. The method of any of claims 258 to 265, further comprising:
When the alternative communication network test mode is activated, a communication is sent to a non-emergency entity via the alternative communication network.
267. The method of claim 266, further comprising:
When the alternative communication network test mode is activated and after sending the communication to the non-emergency entity via the alternative communication network, receiving a communication from the non-emergency entity via the alternative communication network.
268. The method of claim 267, wherein the communication from the non-emergency entity comprises predetermined content.
269. The method of any of claims 258 to 268, wherein when the alternative communications network test mode is activated, communications with the alternative communications network are restricted in a manner that restricts communications with the alternative communications network when the alternative communications network test mode is not activated.
270. The method of any of claims 258 to 269, further comprising:
Displaying a settings user interface including options for controlling one or more settings of the computer system and options for initiating activation of the alternative communications network test mode,
Wherein the set of one or more inputs corresponding to the request to activate the alternative communication network test mode includes an input selecting the option to initiate activation of the alternative communication network test mode.
271. The method of any one of claims 258 to 270, further comprising:
displaying a medical ID option;
Detecting a selection of the medical ID option; and
In response to detecting selection of the medical ID option, displaying information of a user associated with the computer system and an option for initiating activation of the alternative communication network test mode,
Wherein the set of one or more inputs corresponding to the request to activate the alternative communication network test mode includes an input selecting the option to initiate activation of the alternative communication network test mode.
272. The method of any of claims 258 to 271, further comprising:
Displaying a prompt comprising a suggestion relating to the alternative communication network test mode, wherein the prompt comprises an option for initiating activation of the alternative communication network test mode, wherein the set of one or more inputs corresponding to the request to activate the alternative communication network test mode comprises an input selecting the option for initiating activation of the alternative communication network test mode.
273. The method of any of claims 258 to 272, further comprising:
Before activating the alternative communications network test mode, displaying a guide including information about the alternative communications network test mode.
274. The method of any of claims 258 to 273, further comprising:
displaying an indication of activation of the alternative communications network test mode when the alternative communications network test mode is activated, the indication not being displayed during the course of communicating via the alternative communications network when the alternative communications network test mode is not activated.
275. The method of any of claims 258 to 274, further comprising:
Detecting a set of one or more inputs including a request to exit the alternative communications network test mode; and
In response to detecting the set of one or more inputs comprising the request to exit the alternative communication network test mode, exiting the alternative communication network test mode comprises enabling the computer system's ability to communicate via the respective communication network.
276. The method of claim 275, wherein the set of one or more inputs comprising the request to exit the alternative communication network test mode comprises a request to close an application providing the alternative communication network test mode.
277. The method of any of claims 275-276, wherein the set of one or more inputs that includes the request to exit the alternative communication network test mode includes a request to lock a user interface of the computer system.
278. A non-transitory computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured for execution by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, wherein the computer system is configured to communicate via an alternative communication network when the respective communication network is not available, the one or more programs comprising instructions for performing the method of any of claims 258-277.
279. A computer system configured to communicate with a display generation component and one or more input devices, wherein the computer system is configured to communicate via an alternative communication network when a respective communication network is not available, the computer system comprising:
one or more processors; and
A memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs comprising instructions for performing the method of any of claims 258-277.
280. A computer system configured to communicate with a display generation component and one or more input devices, wherein the computer system is configured to communicate via an alternative communication network when a respective communication network is not available, comprising:
apparatus for performing the method of any of claims 258 to 277.
281. A computer program product comprising one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, wherein the computer system is configured to communicate via an alternative communication network when a respective communication network is not available, the one or more programs comprising instructions for performing the method of any of claims 258-277.
282. A non-transitory computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured for execution by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, wherein the computer system is configured to communicate via an alternative communication network when a respective communication network is not available, the one or more programs comprising instructions for:
Detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to activate an alternative communication network test mode when the capability of the computer system to communicate via the respective communication network is enabled;
Activating the alternative communications network test mode in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to activate the alternative communications network test mode; and
When the alternative communication network test mode is activated, a set of user interfaces is displayed via the display generating component.
283. A computer system configured to communicate with a display generation component and one or more input devices, wherein the computer system is configured to communicate via an alternative communication network when a respective communication network is not available, comprising:
one or more processors; and
A memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs comprising instructions for:
Detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to activate an alternative communication network test mode when the capability of the computer system to communicate via the respective communication network is enabled;
Activating the alternative communications network test mode in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to activate the alternative communications network test mode; and
When the alternative communication network test mode is activated, a set of user interfaces is displayed via the display generating component.
284. A computer system configured to communicate with a display generation component and one or more input devices, wherein the computer system is configured to communicate via an alternative communication network when a respective communication network is not available, comprising:
Apparatus for: detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to activate an alternative communication network test mode when the capability of the computer system to communicate via the respective communication network is enabled;
Apparatus for: activating the alternative communications network test mode in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to activate the alternative communications network test mode; and
Apparatus for: when the alternative communication network test mode is activated, a set of user interfaces is displayed via the display generating component.
285. A computer program product comprising one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, wherein the computer system is configured to communicate via an alternative communication network when a respective communication network is not available, the one or more programs comprising instructions for:
Detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to activate an alternative communication network test mode when the capability of the computer system to communicate via the respective communication network is enabled;
Activating the alternative communications network test mode in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to activate the alternative communications network test mode; and
When the alternative communication network test mode is activated, a set of user interfaces is displayed via the display generating component.
286. A method, comprising:
At a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices:
detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to initiate a process for sending a communication to a respective recipient;
responsive to detecting the set of one or more inputs corresponding to the request to initiate a process for sending communications to the respective recipient, initiate a process for sending communications to the respective recipient;
During a process for sending the communication to the respective recipient, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to display a system user interface; and
In response to detecting the set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to display a system user interface, displaying the system user interface and user interface objects corresponding to the communication via the display generation component, comprising:
In accordance with a determination that a process for sending the communication to the respective recipient is in a first state, displaying the user interface object corresponding to the communication in a first appearance; and
In accordance with a determination that a process for sending the communication to the respective recipient is in a second state different from the first state, the user interface object corresponding to the communication is displayed in a second appearance different from the first appearance.
287. The method of claim 286, wherein:
the process for transmitting the communication to the respective recipient includes displaying a set of one or more user interfaces for generating the communication;
detecting, while displaying the set of one or more user interfaces for generating the communication, the set of one or more inputs corresponding to the request to display the system user interface; and
The appearance of the user interface object corresponding to the communication indicates that a process for sending the communication to the respective recipient is in a state that the set of one or more user interfaces for generating the communication is displayed.
288. The method of any one of claims 286-287, wherein:
The process for sending the communication to the respective recipient includes displaying a prompt for a user to take an action to connect to an alternative communication network via which the communication is to be sent;
Detecting the set of one or more inputs corresponding to the request to display the system user interface occurs upon display of the prompt causing a user to take an action to connect to the alternative communication network; and
The appearance indication of the user interface object corresponding to the communication is for transmitting the communication to the respective recipient in a state that displays the prompt for a user to take an action to connect to the alternative communication network.
289. The method of any of claims 286-288, wherein displaying the user interface object corresponding to the communication includes displaying the user interface object in an appearance based on a state of the communication.
290. The method of any of claims 286-289, wherein the system user interface is a displayed user interface including a user interface object corresponding to the respective application, which, when activated, causes the computer system to display the respective application corresponding to the activated user interface object.
291. The method of any of claims 286-290, wherein the system user interface is a wake screen user interface that the computer system displays upon exiting an inactive state.
292. The method of any one of claims 286-291, wherein the process for sending the communication to the respective recipient comprises a first sub-process for generating the communication and a second sub-process for connecting to a communication network.
293. The method of any of claims 286-292, wherein displaying the system user interface and the user interface object corresponding to the communication includes simultaneously displaying the system user interface and the user interface object corresponding to the communication, the method further comprising:
while simultaneously displaying the system user interface and the user interface object corresponding to the communication, detecting a set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to display a second system user interface different from the system user interface; and
In response to detecting the set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to display a second system user interface, simultaneously displaying the second system user interface and the user interface object corresponding to the communication.
294. The method of any one of claims 286-293, further comprising:
After displaying the user interface object corresponding to the communication in a third appearance:
In accordance with a determination that a process for sending the communication to the respective recipient has changed state, the user interface object corresponding to the communication is displayed in a fourth appearance different from the third appearance, wherein the fourth appearance provides information regarding the changed state of the process for sending the communication to the respective recipient.
295. The method of claim 294, wherein:
the determining that the process for sending the communication to the respective recipient has changed state includes determining that a connection state of the computer system with an alternative communication network via which the communication is to be sent has changed from a first connection state to a second connection state;
displaying the user interface object corresponding to the communication in the third appearance includes: displaying, in the user interface object corresponding to the communication, a prompt for a user to take a first action to connect to the alternative communication network based on the first connection state; and
Displaying the user interface object corresponding to the communication in the fourth appearance includes: based on the second connection state, a prompt is displayed in the user interface object corresponding to the communication for a user to take a second action different from the first action to connect to the alternative communication network.
296. The method of any one of claims 286-295, further comprising:
upon displaying the user interface object corresponding to the communication, an indication of a message received from the respective recipient is displayed.
297. The method of claim 296, wherein displaying the indication of the message received from the respective recipient includes displaying the indication of the message received from the respective recipient in an appearance based on content of the message received from the respective recipient.
298. The method of any one of claims 286-297, further comprising:
Detecting a selection of the user interface object corresponding to the communication; and
In response to detecting the selection of the user interface object corresponding to the communication, a user interface providing more detailed information about a process for sending the communication to the respective recipient via the alternative communication network is displayed.
299. A non-transitory computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured for execution by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs comprising instructions for performing the method of any of claims 286-298.
300. A computer system configured to communicate with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising:
one or more processors; and
A memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs comprising instructions for performing the method of any of claims 286-298.
301. A computer system configured to communicate with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising:
means for performing the method of any one of claims 286-298.
302. A computer program product comprising one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs comprising instructions for performing the method of any of claims 286-298.
303. A non-transitory computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured for execution by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs comprising instructions for:
detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to initiate a process for sending a communication to a respective recipient;
responsive to detecting the set of one or more inputs corresponding to the request to initiate a process for sending communications to the respective recipient, initiate a process for sending communications to the respective recipient;
During a process for sending the communication to the respective recipient, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to display a system user interface; and
In response to detecting the set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to display a system user interface, displaying the system user interface and user interface objects corresponding to the communication via the display generation component, comprising:
In accordance with a determination that a process for sending the communication to the respective recipient is in a first state, displaying the user interface object corresponding to the communication in a first appearance; and
In accordance with a determination that a process for sending the communication to the respective recipient is in a second state different from the first state, the user interface object corresponding to the communication is displayed in a second appearance different from the first appearance.
304. A computer system configured to communicate with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising:
one or more processors; and
A memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs comprising instructions for:
detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to initiate a process for sending a communication to a respective recipient;
responsive to detecting the set of one or more inputs corresponding to the request to initiate a process for sending communications to the respective recipient, initiate a process for sending communications to the respective recipient;
During a process for sending the communication to the respective recipient, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to display a system user interface; and
In response to detecting the set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to display a system user interface, displaying the system user interface and user interface objects corresponding to the communication via the display generation component, comprising:
In accordance with a determination that a process for sending the communication to the respective recipient is in a first state, displaying the user interface object corresponding to the communication in a first appearance; and
In accordance with a determination that a process for sending the communication to the respective recipient is in a second state different from the first state, the user interface object corresponding to the communication is displayed in a second appearance different from the first appearance.
305. A computer system configured to communicate with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising:
Apparatus for: detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to initiate a process for sending a communication to a respective recipient;
apparatus for: responsive to detecting the set of one or more inputs corresponding to the request to initiate a process for sending communications to the respective recipient, initiate a process for sending communications to the respective recipient;
apparatus for: during a process for sending the communication to the respective recipient, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to display a system user interface; and
Means for displaying, via the display generating component, the system user interface and a user interface object corresponding to the communication in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to display a system user interface, comprising:
In accordance with a determination that a process for sending the communication to the respective recipient is in a first state, displaying the user interface object corresponding to the communication in a first appearance; and
In accordance with a determination that a process for sending the communication to the respective recipient is in a second state different from the first state, the user interface object corresponding to the communication is displayed in a second appearance different from the first appearance.
306. A computer program product comprising one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs comprising instructions for:
detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to initiate a process for sending a communication to a respective recipient;
responsive to detecting the set of one or more inputs corresponding to the request to initiate a process for sending communications to the respective recipient, initiate a process for sending communications to the respective recipient;
During a process for sending the communication to the respective recipient, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to display a system user interface; and
In response to detecting the set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to display a system user interface, displaying the system user interface and user interface objects corresponding to the communication via the display generation component, comprising:
In accordance with a determination that a process for sending the communication to the respective recipient is in a first state, displaying the user interface object corresponding to the communication in a first appearance; and
In accordance with a determination that a process for sending the communication to the respective recipient is in a second state different from the first state, the user interface object corresponding to the communication is displayed in a second appearance different from the first appearance.
CN202280059109.5A 2021-08-31 2022-08-30 Method and interface for initiating communication Pending CN117940887A (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202410506853.6A CN118509519A (en) 2021-08-31 2022-08-30 Method and interface for initiating communication

Applications Claiming Priority (7)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US63/239,403 2021-08-31
US63/243,681 2021-09-13
US63/334,604 2022-04-25
US63/400,732 2022-08-24
US17/898,342 2022-08-29
US17/898,342 US12425511B2 (en) 2021-08-31 2022-08-29 Methods and systems of interfaces for initiating communications using terrestrial and non-terrestrial networks
PCT/US2022/042069 WO2023034323A1 (en) 2021-08-31 2022-08-30 Methods and interfaces for initiating communications

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
CN202410506853.6A Division CN118509519A (en) 2021-08-31 2022-08-30 Method and interface for initiating communication

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
CN117940887A true CN117940887A (en) 2024-04-26

Family

ID=90757969

Family Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
CN202280059109.5A Pending CN117940887A (en) 2021-08-31 2022-08-30 Method and interface for initiating communication
CN202410506853.6A Pending CN118509519A (en) 2021-08-31 2022-08-30 Method and interface for initiating communication

Family Applications After (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
CN202410506853.6A Pending CN118509519A (en) 2021-08-31 2022-08-30 Method and interface for initiating communication

Country Status (1)

Country Link
CN (2) CN117940887A (en)

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN118509519A (en) 2024-08-16

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
AU2023204622B2 (en) Methods and interfaces for initiating communications
US11893203B2 (en) Methods and interfaces for initiating communications
US12543028B2 (en) Low-bandwidth and emergency communication user interfaces
EP4141636B1 (en) Methods and user interfaces for initiating communications
US20240406700A1 (en) Communication via a non-terrestrial communication network
CN120956827A (en) User interface for managing communications
JP7814469B2 (en) Method and interface for initiating communication - Patent Application 20070122997
CN117940887A (en) Method and interface for initiating communication
WO2024253971A1 (en) Communication via a non-terrestrial communication network
CN121488448A (en) Technology used to manage connections between computer systems
CN121311877A (en) Technology for connecting to external devices
CN120019424A (en) Collision Detection User Interface

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
PB01 Publication
PB01 Publication
SE01 Entry into force of request for substantive examination
SE01 Entry into force of request for substantive examination